• UK Riots: The Agenda Becomes Clear…
  UK Riots: The Agenda Becomes Clear…

  Authored by Kit Knightly via Off-Guardian.org,

  Those outside the UK might not have heard, but it’s been a violent week in the UK. Here’s a quick rundown of the official story so far:

  Four days ago a 17-year-old allegedly walked into a children’s “Taylor Swift dance class” (whatever that might be)  in Southport and started stabbing little girls, wounding 10 and killing 3.

  It was initially reported the boy was a muslim immigrant.

  This story was, however, reversed within hours, the new story “revealing” that he was actually born in Cardiff, the son of Rwandan immigrants. He was named as “Axel Muganwa Rudakubana” late yesterday.

  His  religious affiliation, if any, seems not to have been firmly established.

  Another young man was, allegedly,  arrested later while in possession of a machete and balaclava at  a vigil for the victims. He was, again, reportedly Muslim.

  This, allegedly, resulted in what are described as protests and riots, the destruction of a brick wall outside a mosque and the burning of a police van.

  Further alleged riots subsequently sprang up in London and Hartlepool.

  

  This is the current narrative. None of the details has been substantiated as yet, so how much you decide to believe is your personal preference at this point.

  At OffG we reserve the right to be sceptical. Of everything.

  There are a lot of unanswered questions, and the current level of  “mourning” by government institutions and groups in no way directly affected  by the tragedy always has a taint of the performative that shouldn’t be too quickly conflated with  insincerity or worse.

  And, of course, all of this is coming hot on the heels of the Manchester Airport incident, where police officers and Muslim youths allegedly clashed violently in as yet obscure circumstances.

  Plus the violence in Whitechapel and Leeds a couple of weeks ago.

  Then, as now, both sides were provided with adequate rage-bait to get them worked up.

  Whatever the truth of this latest incident, and whatever long term aims it might be used to further, this “strategy of tension” has an immediate political agenda already becoming clear – and it’s as predictable as ever.

  1. Further limit social media/free speech

  2. Normalise constant surveillance

  Attacking free speech is the ever-present, eternal agenda that comes before everything else and it’s been a real pile-on the last few days.

  The Hill headlines “Misinformation floods social media in wake of breakneck news cycle”, Sky News went with “Southport attack misinformation fuels far-right discourse on social media”

  ABC News reports: “Online misinformation fueled tensions over the stabbing attack in Britain that killed 3 children”

  The Byline Times collectively scolds society’s negligence: “‘We All Need To Consider Our Role in the Wild West of Social Media Hypercriminality’”

  The Institute for Strategic Dialogue (an NGO funded by the usual suspects) has timelined it all for our convenience: From rumours to riots: How online misinformation fuelled violence in the aftermath of the Southport attack

  The BBC asks “Did social media fan the flames of riot in Southport?” and Telepgraph answers very much in the affirmative, cutting right to the heart of the matter [emphasis added]:

  Unregulated social media disinformation is wrecking Britain – Free speech must come with accountability

  The Times skips past establishing the problem right to apportioning blame: “Who is behind Southport social media storm — and can they be stopped?”

  The Guardian has decided the answer is TikTok (and AI): “How TikTok bots and AI have powered a resurgence in UK far-right violence”

  The New York Times demands to know what social media companies are going to do about it:

  The U.K. Riots Were Fomented Online. Will Social Media Companies Act?

  One particularly drunk uncle decided the whole thing is Putin’s fault, for some reason, but most of the fire is directed at Twitter/X.

  Writing in Prospect, former-Guardian editor Alan Rusbridger claims “Elon Musk’s misinformation machine made the horrors of Southport much worse”, while Forbes wails “Elon Musk Isn’t Stopping Misinformation, He’s Helped Spread It”.

  This is dual-purpose propaganda, it attacks the idea of free speech but also reinforces Musk/X’s totally false reputation as the savior of free expression.

  You cannot begin to fathom how irritating it is to the ruling class that ordinary people are allowed to just say whatever they want whenever they want – including having the audacity to fact check the media in real time, with no repercussions at all.

  That, more than anything else, has stalled the Great Reset in its tracks.

  So it has to go.

  Finally and forever.

  It’s why  almost everything in the news cycle – from disease to climate change – can  allegedly be “solved” with censorship.

  Because once free speech is abolished everything that comes afterward gets so much easier – including the second agenda being pushed right now: Mass surveillance and facial recognition technology.

  When it comes to this secondary goal the media are yet to reach the “call for action” phase. They are still locked into “fearmongering”, with widespread warnings about nineteen future “far-right” marches and calls to proscribe Tommy Robinson’s EDL as a “terrorist organization”

  Which, again, has the useful secondary effect of making this gentleman look more like a genuine force for opposition.

  Funnily enough, UK Home Secretary Yvette Cooper was already discussing giving police “new powers to crackdown on antisocial behaviour” just a day before the Southport attack occurred.

  But it fell to Prime Minister Sir Keir Starmer to formally lay it out in his address yesterday afternoon [transcript].

  Pledging to counter the “far-right” with a new police division, and increased use of surveillance and facial recognition technology to “limit their movements”:

  Wider deployment of facial recognition technology…And preventive action – criminal behaviour orders…To restrict their movements…

  And firing a warning shot across the bows of social media:

  And let me also say to large social media companies and those who run them…Violent disorder clearly whipped up online…That is also a crime. It’s happening on your premises. And the law must be upheld everywhere.

  He even pointedly made clear his response wasn’t just about now or about countering the “far-right”, rather it was about ALL civil disobedience, for any reason:

  A response both to the immediate challenge which is clearly driven by far-right hatred. But als “all violent disorder that flares up […] whatever the apparent cause or motivation – we make no distinction…Crime is crime.”

  That means everything.

  It means pro-free speech rallies, it means “bladerunners” cutting down ULEZ cameras. It means any potential anti-lockdown and/or anti-vaccine mandate protests during “the next pandemic”.

  This is the beginning of a new crackdown on digital free speech and real-world protest…

  and people are cheering him on, of course. Because they believe the State is our only shield from the nasty brick throwing baddies of the far-right.

  To sum up the last three days in British politics for those not well versed in reading past headlines  and propaganda:

  For the cost of one broken wall and a burnt out police van, the new “Labour” government have just won public approval  for new police powers and open season being called on  what remains of our free speech – and they get to distract from the now-inevitable tax raises too.

  Not a bad trade.

  Tyler Durden
  Mon, 08/05/2024 – 02:00

• PBoC's Gold Conduit Revealed: Chinese Central Bank Did Not Stop Buying Gold In May
  PBoC’s Gold Conduit Revealed: Chinese Central Bank Did Not Stop Buying Gold In May

  By Jan Nieuwenhuijs of Gainesville Coins

  This article is an analysis of how the Chinese central bank (PBoC) buys gold in London from Western bullion banks. Because the bullion banks take care of the gold transport for the PBoC, the shipments from London to Beijing are disclosed in UK customs data. The customs data reveals that the PBoC continued to buy gold in May — when it communicated to the market it discontinued buying — at a rate of 53 tonnes. The PBoC stated it stopped buying to dampen the gold price so it could acquire more gold.

  

  Several months ago, I discovered that supply in the Chinese gold market was outstripping demand. During my investigation of this anomaly, I found circumstantial evidence that led me to conclude the surplus is imported in 400-ounce bars from the United Kingdom, and surreptitiously procured by the PBoC.

  Let’s go through some of the mechanics of the global gold market before we can stitch it all together.

  PBoC Gold Buying Hidden in Plain Sight

  In global customs data — officially called International Merchandise Trade Statistics (IMTS) — all gold disclosed is “non-monetary,” meaning not owned by a monetary authority such as a central bank. In the United Nations IMTS rulebook it reads that customs data excludes monetary gold:

  Since monetary gold is treated as a financial asset rather than a good, transactions pertaining to it should be excluded from international merchandise trade statistics.

  Though, someone familiar with the matter but who prefers to stay anonymous, shared with me that gold import and export data can relate to monetary gold. Commonly, central banks will buy gold from Western bullion banks that arrange transportation and insurance of the metal. The moment these banks ship the gold from the UK it is thus non-monetary bullion, but when it arrives in China it is monetized (changes ownership) and brought to vaults of the central bank, supposedly in Beijing.

  Exports from the UK are mainly from the wholesale gold market in London where virtually all bars traded weigh 400 ounces. The retail market in Britain dealing in smaller bars pales in comparison, and the refining industry in the UK is relatively small.

  In turn, at the core of the Chinese domestic gold market, which excludes Free Trade Zones (FTZs), is the Shanghai Gold Exchange (SGE) where predominantly 1Kg gold bars are traded.

  

  The private sector in China trades 1Kg bars through SGE, while the central bank buys “large bars” (400-ounce bars) abroad. As all gold on the SGE is traded in yuan, the PBoC can only diversify its international reserves by buying gold overseas with dollars or other foreign exchange. Aside from logic, there are multiple sources that have made clear the PBoC doesn’t purchase gold on the SGE. For example, the World Gold Council (WGC, page 9), the SGE (page 4), and it was confirmed to me personally by an ex-gold trader from a Chinese state-owned bank.

  The SGE captures the lion share of all gold trading in the Chinese private market. There are rules and incentives that steer most supply—imports, domestic mine production, and recycled metal—towards the SGE, which for liquidity reasons attracts most demand. Hence, the gold withdrawn from the SGE vaults is often used as a proxy for Chinese wholesale demand. In a formula:

  SGE withdrawals = net import + domestic mine output + recycled metal

  

  Before 2022, gold supply and demand in the Chinese market matched. SGE withdrawals were always higher, to varying degrees, than net import plus domestic mine output, the difference being gold recycled through the central bourse.

  If it were true that bullion banks ship gold to China, as non-monetary gold visible in customs data, that doesn’t flow into the SGE system, we would see a discrepancy between apparent Chinese gold supply and SGE withdrawals. As more gold would be supplied to China than sold through the SGE. In a formula:

  SGE withdrawals < net import + domestic mine output + recycled metal

  

  Indeed, both in 2022 and 2023 China’s net import plus mine output transcended SGE withdrawals (let alone if we would add recycled gold).

  

  As we shall see, the surplus in the Chinese gold market—imports that are not sold through the SGE—is being absorbed by the PBoC.

  Readers with deep knowledge of the Chinese gold market might think: “what if the large bars are refined in FTZs and loaded into SGE vaults without being withdrawn?” I checked with a source that has connections to refineries in China, and according to this person the refineries don’t use any large bars as feedstock for producing 1kg bars for the SGE*. Another contact I have, close to the SGE, shared with me that SGE inventory in April 2024 accounted for about 300 tonnes. Inventory had gone up recently together with a rise in the price of gold, this person said. However, the increase in SGE inventory can’t make up for the surplus in the market, which is at least 400 tonnes according to my calculations.

  More Data Supporting the Thesis

  By comparing estimated central bank purchases by the WGC, based on field research, to official statistics regarding gold buying by central banks, we know that since the start of the Ukraine war, in February 2022, monetary authorities in aggregate are secretly buying much more than they report. I have written before that these covert purchases can be attributed for roughly eighty percent to the PBoC.

  

  “Unreported” PBoC gold purchases exploded when $300 billion in foreign exchange reserves from the Russian central bank were frozen by the West early 2022 due to the war. Notably, the UK began exporting 400-ounce bars to China in huge tonnages at the same time. Coincidence? I think not. Ever since, China has taken over gold price control from the West and broke the gold price’s correlation with “real rates” (10-year TIPS yield).

  

  

  The final clue is that there is a relationship between what the Chinese central bank officially reports to be accumulating, and gold exports from the UK to China. What frequently happens, exposed by comparing these numbers, is that the PBoC starts buying gold a few months before it tells the world about it, and severely underreports its additions. This was the case in 2015, 2019, and 2022.

  

  Conclusion

  It all fits and makes sense: the motive, the data, and the anecdotal evidence. Let’s summarize our key findings:

  • The Chinese central bank desperately needs to diversify its foreign exchange reserves since the beginning of 2022. Since then, the PBoC secretly buys large amounts of gold.
  • At the same time, export of large gold bars from the UK to China explodes.
  • A “surplus” in the Chinese market appears, while the bullion is not to be found in SGE vaults. As if it has gone up in smoke.
  • A source indicates that gold shipments for central banks are often included in customs data.
  • There is a correlation between PBoC official buying and UK exports to China, suggesting the Chinese central bank buys gold in England’s capital and lets banks supervise transport (maybe because the PBoC reaches the limits of its own capacity to ship gold when volumes are sizable).

  It all points towards UK gold exports to China are destined for the PBoC—although probably not every ounce of these flows is for the Chinese central bank. Clearly, the PBoC is accumulating more gold than it wants to disclose.

  When the PBoC stated it had stopped buying gold in May 2024, after continuous purchases for 18 months, I didn’t believe it. The PBoC has few reasons to cease growing its gold reserves in the current geo-political and monetary landscape with a plethora of challenges.

  Probably, the PBoC wants the most gold for its dollars, so when the price rises fast it will signal it stopped buying, trying to cool the market. In the meantime, the United Kingdom exported 53 tonnes to China in May, of which likely most found its way to Beijing.

  Note, the PBoC also buys in Switzerland and other countries, flows that can be included or excluded in customs reports, but it’s impossible, from where I stand now, to measure all these separately.

  Finally, some of my previous analyses have been skewed by the above. Private demand in China has been lower because some (“non-monetary”) imports were taken by the central bank.

  Tyler Durden
  Sun, 08/04/2024 – 23:20

• YouTuber WhistlinDiesel 'Full Sends' Cybertruck Through Durability Test, Including 'C-4' Denotation 
  YouTuber WhistlinDiesel ‘Full Sends’ Cybertruck Through Durability Test, Including ‘C-4’ Denotation 

  YouTuber Cody Detwiler, known as WhistlinDiesel, released a video on Friday in which he stress-tested a Tesla Cybertruck and a Ford F-150. Although Detwiler’s testing of the EV truck comes months after other social media users, his tests may be some of the most rigorous yet. 

  

  Before the series of durability tests started, the Cybertruck rolled off a rollback tow truck, surviving while the Ford F-150’s driveshaft instantly broke. Detwiler was infuriated that it took half the day to figure out how to charge the Cybertruck at a Supercharging station (full context: Detwiler did not have a Tesla account for charging). 

  While the Cybertruck outperformed the F-150 on the ‘speed bump test,’ ‘offroad test,’ and ‘pothole test,’ the EV truck suffered a rear frame separation of the tow hitch and bumper when pulling the stuck F-150.

  “Our whole frame just snapped!” Detwiler yelled, adding, “The hitch is hooked up to what? It just came off. You can’t even fix that.” 

  “The rear gigacasting… just fails! I mean, it just tears right off! You can see in the screenshot above that a bolt hole acts as a stress concentration,” car blog The Autopian noted after reviewing Detwiler’s YouTube video. 

  

  “Pulling an F150 will not break a Cybertruck’s rear frame,” one X user said, adding, “This video shows that prior to pulling the F150, the Cybertruck’s rear frame slammed onto a concrete block, which is what caused the actual damage.” 

  Pulling an F150 will not break a Cybertruck’s rear frame

  This video shows that prior to pulling the F150, the Cybertruck’s rear frame slammed onto a concrete block, which is what caused the actual damage: pic.twitter.com/45xrhji0lD

  — Adrian Dittmann (@AdrianDittmann) August 4, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  After that, Detwiler strapped explosives to the door panels of both trucks. The YouTuber claims ‘C-4’… It appears the Cybertruck withstood the blast. 

  

  The F-150, not so much.

  

  The Autopian summarized the rest of the video as follows: “The rest of the video shows the Cybertruck’s numerous build quality issues, its steer-by-wire failure making it hard to tow the thing onto a trailer, and other problems, though it does ultimately demonstrate the truck’s superior off-road capability and the toughness of its body panels.”

  The auto blog concluded, “The Cybertruck’s performance in the video is mixed, though the host ultimately crowns the F-150 the winner by one point.” 

  Tyler Durden
  Sun, 08/04/2024 – 22:45

• Nearly Half Of Dementia Cases Could Be Prevented Or Delayed: Lancet Commission
  Nearly Half Of Dementia Cases Could Be Prevented Or Delayed: Lancet Commission

  Authored by A.C. Daahnke via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

  An estimated 57 million people around the world are living with dementia, and that number is expected to increase to 153 million by 2050.

  

  But a new report published by the Lancet Commission on dementia estimates that almost half of the cases of the neurological disease can likely be avoided or delayed. Twenty-seven of the world’s leading dementia experts co-authored the report.

  These experts point to 12 existing risk factors and two new ones that could prevent or delay dementia.

  The two new risk factors included are vision loss and having high low-density lipoprotein or LDL cholesterol.

  The previous 12 risk factors include less education, hearing loss, depression, traumatic brain injury, physical inactivity, smoking, diabetes, hypertension, obesity, excessive alcohol consumption, social isolation, and air pollution.

  Some of these risk factors play a greater contributing role in early life rather than late life. For example, having less education is a more prominent risk factor in early life. Risk factors like social isolation, air pollution, and untreated vision loss are greater risk factors in late life, while the other risk factors pose a greater risk in midlife.

  “In short, these factors put a person at higher or lower risk of developing dementia,” Carol Brayne, professor of public health medicine at the University of Cambridge, and her doctoral student Seb Walsh told The Epoch Times over email.

  “That means that you cannot say to an individual person, if you stop smoking, or if you get your blood pressure under control, then you definitely won’t get dementia. But if we do this for many people across society then we expect some reduction in dementia prevalence across age groups, even though not ‘preventing’ it entirely.”

  14 Risk Factors

  The risk factors were determined from data from 37,000 participants aged 45 and older who participated in the Norwegian HUNT study. The Commission looked at evidence from the data and other reviews to decide what factors were most likely associated with dementia.

  Specifically, new evidence supports vision loss and high cholesterol as new modifiable risk factors for dementia, the report notes.

  The initial 12 risk factors were linked with 40 percent of cases, but the new report notes that addressing all 14 factors could prevent or delay 45 percent of dementia cases.

  The report did not assess the number of years dementia may be delayed if a person reduces their risk factors.

  “Dementia increases exponentially with age. So we are generally talking about a population where, if you delay its onset by a few years, some will die of other things in the meantime and dementia will effectively be ‘prevented’ for that person. For others, they will still develop dementia but later in their life and closer to death,” said Brayne and Walsh.

  In particular, the report found that high LDL cholesterol and hearing loss had the greatest weighting in their link to dementia. The two factors were attributed to around a third of preventable dementia cases.

  Less education in early life was associated with 11 percent of all preventable cases, leading to a call for good quality education and “cognitively stimulating activities in midlife to protect cognition” by the Commission.

  For those risk factors that occurred during midlife, depression and traumatic brain injury comprised 6 percent of preventable cases respectively, and physical inactivity, smoking, diabetes, hypertension, and obesity were all associated with 2 to 4 percent of preventable cases.

  Among all risk factors, depression in midlife had the lowest prevalence but made up a significant proportion of preventable dementia cases.

  “Depression is both risk and early symptom as well as often being present during dementia progression until moderate stages. So it’s a particularly challenging risk to examine and many studies look earlier in life to try and tease out the risk factor element specifically to make sure it is a risk not a prodrome,” Brayne and Walsh said.

  For cases affecting older individuals, social isolation was associated with around 10 percent of preventable cases, while air pollution was associated with 5 percent.

  The Commission noted that prevention should be “ambitious.” “Prevention involves both policy changes at national and international governmental levels and individually tailored interventions.”

  The Commission recommended specific actions to reduce dementia risk across one’s life. They include:

  • Having good quality education and engage in cognitively stimulating activities in mid-life
  • Using hearing aids and reducing harmful noise exposure, for those with hearing loss
  • Treating depression
  • Using helmets and head protection in contact sports and when riding
  • Exercising
  • Reducing smoking
  • Preventing or reducing hypertension
  • Detecting and treating high LDL cholesterol from midlife
  • Maintaining a healthy weight and treating obesity as early as possible; this can also help to prevent diabetes
  • Reducing high alcohol consumption
  • Prioritizing age-friendly and supportive community environments and housing
  • Reducing social isolation by facilitating participation in activities and living with others
  • Making screening and treatment for vision loss accessible

  Will tackling all risk factors completely ameliorate dementia cases?

  “Some people will still develop dementia,” Professor Gill Livington said in an interview with The Epoch Times. “We expect those that do to have a longer life span of which they are healthy and a shorter time with dementia at the end of their life.”

  Tyler Durden
  Sun, 08/04/2024 – 22:10

• Bronx ADA Resigns After Being Caught On Camera Allegedly Attempting To Meet 13 Year Old Boy
  Bronx ADA Resigns After Being Caught On Camera Allegedly Attempting To Meet 13 Year Old Boy

  A prosecutor for the Bronx has been forced to resign after being caught on camera allegedly trying to meet up with a 13 year old boy he met online, the New York Post reported last week. 

  30 year old William C.C. Kemp-Neal resigned from the Bronx District Attorney’s office after Dads Against Predators posted a video of him in a Target parking lot in Mount Vernon.

  In the July 8 footage, vigilantes confront Kemp-Neal, identifying him as “Marcus,” causing him to flee. According to the Post, Kemp-Neal, a Fordham Law graduate, earned $84,990 as an ADA, focusing on assault, harassment, and child endangerment cases.

  “Excuse me everybody, this man right here came to meet a 13-year-old boy,” the vigilantes can be heard yelling, while chasing Kemp-Neal. 

  

  “You wanna take him to get a milkshake, right Marcus?” another asks after they catch up to him. 

  The chase ended when a bystander intervened, putting Kemp-Neal in a chokehold, according to the footage. Kemp-Neal struggles to breathe and tries to escape while being interrogated by one of the men, before police broke up the scene, the report said. 

  A police statement said officers “encountered several individuals making allegations of wrongdoing,” and said they would undertake a “comprehensive investigation.”

  He has not been arrested or charged with a crime so far. Meanwhile, DA Darcel Clark’s office told The Post: “William Kemp-Neal worked here as an ADA from June 28, 2020, until July 17, 2024.”

  Video of the confrontation can be seen here. 

  Tyler Durden
  Sun, 08/04/2024 – 21:35

• Same Pig, Different Lipstick: COVID & The Green Revolution
  Same Pig, Different Lipstick: COVID & The Green Revolution

  Authored by Mark Oshinskie via The Brownstone Institute,

  f, as on Family Feud, you asked a hundred people who know me to identify one of my characteristics, most might say that I talk too much about the Scamdemic. But 53 months ago, the thing that—sadly—may have been at the top of the list is that I eat a lot of food, and that much of it is weird. 

  I won’t deny that I have a large appetite. But I don’t agree that Cheese Doodles and Dr. Pepper should be considered normal and collards and chia weird. 

  I’ve never watched more than ten seconds of a cooking show; “That looks delicious!” doesn’t work for me. Yet, for several reasons, I was inordinately interested in food long before Michael Pollan and Barefoot Contessa burst onto the scene and America became a foodie culture. First, growing up, we didn’t always have enough food in the house. Second, sensible eating helps people to stay healthy. Third, I like tasty stuff. 

  Therefore, I’ve often read, listened to, and thought about which foods are the most nutritious and how these might be sustainably produced. I’ve grown food for the past twelve years and have applied some of my acquired knowledge, or belief. 

  Historically, many people have had less to eat than they’ve needed to thrive, or simply survive. Hence, many have hailed the Green Revolution: a late 20th-century agricultural project encompassing plant genetic modification, modern irrigation systems, chemical fertilizers, and pesticides that increased food production, especially of wheat, rice, corn, and soybeans. 

  

  But the Green Revolution hasn’t been a cost-free, magic bullet. Neither mass nor energy is created nor destroyed; everything physical derives from something else physical. Newer crop varieties yield more because they use more water, synthetic fertilizers, pesticides, expensive farm equipment, and fuel. 

  Green Revolution practices have caused serious environmental harm. Aquifers are being depleted as irrigation water is pumped from the ground faster than rain recharges it. Unimaginable amounts of fertile soil have been washed or blown away. Fertilizers and pesticides pollute soil, air, and water beyond the agricultural lands themselves, including rivers and oceans. Converting forests, grasslands, and wetlands into farmland has destroyed much wildlife/game habitat and lessened atmospheric carbon uptake. Consequently, the natural resources needed to produce food have been degraded, portending eventual, widespread crop failure and food shortages. 

  Economic and social damage has also been done. Green Revolution inputs were too costly for small farmers. Therefore, they couldn’t compete against larger, well-capitalized, or debt-leveraged growers, whose higher yields glutted markets and depressed prices. Hence, smaller farmers lost their livelihoods and land. Rural communities have emptied, both in the United States and abroad. Many displaced farmers have killed themselves. Others moved to cities or emigrated, as have rural Mexicans to the United States.

  Additionally, eating too many Green Revolution staples can make people unhealthy. Carbohydrate-heavy diets and high-fructose corn syrup, developed to use surplus corn, have increased obesity and diabetes rates. Newer, dwarf wheat strains are harder to digest. Regular consumption of soy is said to disrupt endocrine function. Insecticides and herbicides have harmed farm workers and food consumers.  

  During 53 months of Coronamania, I’ve often thought that the Covid response resembled the Green Revolution. Fundamentally, both processes exalted “science,” “technology,” and “expert-driven” management.

  Despite much media hype, top-down interventions in both realms have caused much harm.

  To begin with, the “solutions” in both settings failed to eliminate the underlying problem. No matter how much food farmers grew using Green Revolution methods, hunger remains because many can’t afford the food produced via this input-intensive method. The WHO says that 828 million people are chronically hungry. 

  Similarly, regarding public health, although America continually spends more on medical care—over the past 60 years, medical costs have increased from 6% of GDP to 19%—life spans flattened and have recently diminished. Specifically, despite the Covid lockdowns, masks, tests, and vaccines, people—nearly all of them very old and/or very sick—nonetheless died. Many died sooner from lockdown effects, iatrogenic hospital treatments, and vax injuries than if lower tech, lower cost, less disruptive practices had been implemented, or if simpler, more effective treatments had been administered, not suppressed. But overall, there are 350 million more humans on the planet than in March 2020. 

  Both the Green Revolution and the Covid response are based on the unsound notion that it’s better to intervene aggressively and resource-intensively than it is to consider the secondary effects of any intervention and to show appropriate restraint. Why, e.g., lock down all people in response to a respiratory virus when only a clearly identifiable group was at risk? First, do no harm.

  In both the ag and medical/public health settings, judicious policy requires awareness that, ultimately, human life spans and ecosystems are bounded by nature. Ultimately, only so much food can be sustainably produced. And no matter what measures we take to extend human life, people get old and die. Hence, our attempts to manage both agriculture and human health must be tempered by reality and humility. 

  Nonetheless, the interventionist mindset/model prevails because it’s profitable. The Green Revolution expanded via the combined efforts of the US government, leading “philanthropies” and corporations to expand markets. These methods were strongly exported to the US Agency for International Development (“USAID”), which facilitated foreign investment, while the World Bank and organizations like the Ford Foundation and the oil-funded Rockefeller Foundation subsidized road building, mechanized farm equipment, and rural electrification projects to pump groundwater. The Green Revolution built lucrative markets for pesticides, seeds, petrochemical fertilizers, irrigation systems, tractors, and combines. 

  The Green Revolution’s public/private partnerships provided a template for Covid Era government/corporate/WHO vaccine campaigns, which have benefitted hospitals, Pharma, and their investors, like Gates, the latter-day Rockefeller. 

  During Coronamania, corporations and stockholders also made billions selling such items as harmful medications, ventilators, masks, plexiglass, and limitless, useless tests. Others, like Amazon, Zoom, and Netflix, cashed in on government edicts via online commerce and such products as educational software. Thus, as during the Green Revolution, the Covid response further enriched the rich. 

  But simultaneously, these interventions impoverished many. Just as small farmers lost markets during the Green Revolution, during Coronamania, small businesses closed and middle-class people lost wealth to large businesses and investors, respectively. Both the Green Revolution and Covid mitigation gained favor because they made money for investors. They didn’t benefit the public when the full range of effects were considered.

  The Green Revolution established the technological and institutional foundation for a subsequent era of genetically modified crops, globalization of agriculture, and even greater dominance of agribusiness giants. While grain and soy production has increased, so—as processed foods have replaced flesh foods, fresh vegetables, and fruits—has the number of people with diet-driven diseases. 

  Analogously, the Covid response has laid the groundwork for more intensive government-enforced social controls, including an ever-growing series of mandated injections, social credit scores, central bank digital currencies, implanted tracking chips, and censorship of purported, but not actual, “misinformation.” 

  Green Revolution food is, as noted above, nutritionally inferior. Similarly, the Covid “vaccines” seem to have damaged immune function and caused many deaths from cardiovascular damage, cancers, miscarriages, et al. Further, just as insects and weeds evolve to avoid control by pesticides, viruses evolve and elude the Covid “vaxxes.”

  The Green Revolution transformed not only farming systems, but local food markets and culture, as farmers swapped traditional seeds and growing practices for the new varieties of corn, wheat, and rice that accompanied this package of technologies. The seeds from these hybrids can’t be saved from one season to the next, as heirloom varieties typically had been. Thus, farmers must purchase costly new seeds each year. Over time, the loss of traditional crops and growing techniques have decreased food system resilience. 

  Similarly, instead of taking personal steps to build health, many Americans naively rely on Pharma products, with very mixed results. The Covid overreaction also isolated people and thus, caused social and psychological, as well as physical, harm. 

  Some advocate shifting away from resource-intensive Green Revolution agriculture and toward more sustainable, crop-diversified methods. 

  In the same manner, many without a pecuniary interest who seek to improve public health want to deemphasize Med/Pharma interventions and, instead, incentivize healthy eating and spending more on non-medical means, such as malaria nets and toilets, to improve health. 

  Some maintain that Green Revolution technologies have been essential; that we don’t have enough societal wealth to grow, in sustainable, labor-intensive ways, enough food for everyone. 

  Initially, it seems that food shortages are more about maldistribution than scarcity. Much food is wasted. And by the look of things, some people eat too much food, especially that which is derived from modern strains of wheat, rice, corn, and soy. 

  Agricultural and medical subsidies skew markets and adversely affect consumer decisions. Food could be grown more sustainably if government subsidies didn’t distort farmers’ markets and decisions, and if consumers were willing to spend a larger slice of their individual incomes on what they eat. 

  Similarly, in health care, we could reduce medical insurance mandates and government subsidies that support high-cost, low-yield medical testing and practices. Less can be more. If people used their own money, or that of charities, to fund medical care, they would make cost-effective decisions, limiting the tests, treatments, and drugs they demand and taking better care of themselves. Many assert that unlimited medical care is a right. But this doctrinaire stance is bankrupting societies and governments, and not delivering commensurate public health outcomes. 

  Ultimately, reality will settle questions regarding the Green Revolution’s role in feeding a growing population. We’ll learn, by doing, if it’s possible to continue to grow food this way on a mass, exponentially expanded scale. In the scheme of human history, agriculture is relatively new; it’s only been going on for 12,000 years. As the economist Herb Stein said, “That which is not sustainable will end.” 

  The same is true of medical and public health finance.

  Just as some maintained that Green Revolution crops were needed to end hunger, public health “experts” asserted that lockdowns were needed to prevent millions of Covid deaths.

  Yet, by inducing an economic coma, Covid lockdowns lowered the incomes of the poor and made food unaffordable to them. Though the media failed to report this, and while Americans gained weight during the lockdowns and closures, according to the WHO, the lockdowns’ economic slowdown caused 150 million additional people to go hungry in poorer nations. Thus, the virtue-signaling, “compassionate,” “kind” people who said they were saving grandma instead killed multitudes via their simple-minded, politically-motivated altruism.

  Many attribute the Green Revolution to Norman Borlaug, who died in 2009. Toward the end of his life, Borlaug wondered when “an ever-burgeoning humanity becomes too much for Mother Earth to bear.” I doubt that Birx, Fauci, Collins, or the lockdown politicians will ever show corresponding humility about their ham-handed Covid edicts and their posturing about the deaths of the old and unhealthy.

  On their deathbeds, the Covid operatives will tell themselves that they were geniuses and benefactors of humanity. They’ll also disregard the vast, lasting suffering and damage they caused. The media will eulogize these bureaucrats by echoing their falsehoods. Most people will continue to buy the bureaucratic and media lies.

  The Green Revolution was, at least in concept, a much worthier undertaking than was the Covid response. Hunger is a far more serious problem than Covid ever was. Malnutrition kills infinitely more potentially healthy, younger people than did this respiratory virus. Compared to the Covid mitigation, which was an out-and-out Scam, the Green Revolution practices seem well-intentioned. Despite what looks, in retrospect, like blind technological optimism and economic opportunism, at least the Green Revolution’s exponents did what they set out to do: feed more people. 

  In contrast, the world would have been far better off over the past 53 months if there had been no public health or biosecurity bureaucracies to incite irrational fear and to implement measures that intentionally, opportunistically caused tremendous harm and shortened, not extended, many lives. We’d also have been far better off consuming sitcoms, pop songs, and cat videos than TV, radio, or Internet news. 

  Ultimately, both the Covid response and the Green Revolution have caused much damage because they disregarded biology and sociology. These interventions diverted resources from lower-intensity approaches that would have benefitted far more and hurt many fewer, people. The cost/benefit analysis was much easier during the Covid response; so much plainly foreseeable harm has been so disingenuously done since March 2020 under the pretense of protecting public health. 

  In agriculture, public health, and medicine, we should stop envisioning and hyping magic technological bullets that empower governments and enrich investors more than they benefit their purported target populations. We should consider not only the ostensible short-term benefits of agricultural, public health, and medical interventions but also the broader, long-term social and human costs of these practices. 

  Or at least we should recognize the structural dysfunction and self-interest that taints other “expert-managed,” “science-driven” public/private partnerships.

  Republished from the author’s Substack

  Tyler Durden
  Sun, 08/04/2024 – 21:00

• Musk Responds To Don Lemon Lawsuit, Cites "Series Of Impressively Insane Demands"
  Musk Responds To Don Lemon Lawsuit, Cites “Series Of Impressively Insane Demands”

  Elon Musk has responded after fired CNN journalist Don Lemon sued Musk and his social media platform X for breach of contract, after Musk scrapped Lemon’s show on X prior to its debut.

  

  According to a new court filing late last week, Lemon is accusing Musk and X of “fraud, negligent misrepresentation, misappropriation of name and likeness,” along with “unjust enrichment.”

  Musk hit back, saying in a Friday post on X that Lemon “made a series of impressively insane demands. We declined. Therefore, there was no deal.”

  He made a series of impressively insane demands. We declined. Therefore, there was no deal.

  — Elon Musk (@elonmusk) August 2, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jsLemon wanted (among other things):

  • A free Tesla Cybertruck
  • A $5 million upfront payment on top of an $8 million salary
  • An equity stake in X, and the right to approve any changes in X policy as it relates to news content.

  As the Epoch Times notes, in January, the two entered a content agreement involving Lemon hosting his own show on the platform, court documents say. The deal was worth $1.5 million annually in addition to advertising revenue, full authority over his content, and financial incentives.

  According to the lawsuit, filed in San Francisco state court, Lemon claims Musk made “false representations and promises” about the exclusive partnership.

  Musk canceled the partnership in March, and the complaint alleges that Lemon had already invested hundreds of thousands of dollars into creating the show.

  The complaint says that while there was no signed agreement with X, Lemon had a phone conversation with Musk in June 2023 during which Musk asked him to enter the exclusive partnership despite having initial reservations.

  The show was set to be centered around politics, culture, sports, and entertainment divided into three 30-minute episodes a week.

  X would be given exclusive rights to the content 24 hours before it was shared to other platforms, and Lemon was promised 60 percent of gross advertising revenue generated from his content and performance threshold payments based on follower counts, the complaint says.

  On March 13, Lemon announced in a post on X that Musk had terminated the deal “hours after an interview” Lemon conducted with him on March 8 for the premiere episode of the new show, saying Musk’s “commitment to a global town square where all questions can be asked and all ideas can be shared seems not to include questions of him from people like me.”

  In a response on the same day, X said that the platform reserves the right to make decisions regarding its business partnerships, and that, “after careful consideration,” it decided not to enter into a commercial partnership with the Don Lemon Show.

  Under the same post, Musk replied that Lemon’s “approach was basically just ‘CNN, but on social media’.”

  Lemon alleges in the lawsuit that X enriched itself and reaped the benefits of using Lemon’s name, likeness, identity, and reputation in an effort to entice advertisers after a number of major companies suspended their ads from the platform in 2023.

  Musk purchased Twitter in 2022 for $44 billion before rebranding the platform as X. Since the axed deal, Lemon continues to post content on his X account.

  Lemon was fired from CNN last year after 17 years with the network following a slew of controversial on-air comments and personal scandals during that time.

  “Lemon was a top prospect for X, and thus, Defendants saw an opportunity and sought to reach an exclusive partnership deal with Lemon, following his termination at CNN, at a time when Lemon was vulnerable,” reads the suit.

  The Epoch Times has reached out to representatives of both parties for comment.

  Lemon is seeking an unspecified amount in monetary damages, including attorney fees and injunctive relief.

  Tyler Durden
  Sun, 08/04/2024 – 20:25

• Taliban Gets $239 Million In US Aid After State Dept. Fails To Vet Recipients
  Taliban Gets $239 Million In US Aid After State Dept. Fails To Vet Recipients

  By Judicial Watch

  Less than a year after Judicial Watch reported that the Taliban has established fake nonprofits to steal millions of dollars in U.S. aid to Afghanistan, a new investigation reveals that the terrorist group has also received hundreds of millions in development assistance from Uncle Sam because the State Department fails to properly vet award recipients. At least $239 million have likely filled the coffers of the extremists running the Islamic republic since the 2021 U.S. military withdrawal, according to a report published this month by the Special Inspector General for Afghanistan Reconstruction (SIGAR). The money was disbursed by State Department divisions known as Democracy, Human Rights, and Labor (DRL) and International Narcotics and Law Enforcement Affairs (INL) to implement development projects intended to help achieve American foreign policy and national security goals in Afghanistan.

  

  Investigators found that the State Department failed to comply with its own counterterrorism partner vetting requirements in Afghanistan before awarding at least 29 grants to various local entities. The agency has a system to identify whether prospective awardees have a record of ethical business practices and is supposed to conduct a risk assessment to determine if programming funds may benefit terrorists or terrorist-affiliates before distributing American taxpayer dollars. In the more than two dozen cases examined, the agency did not bother and failed to keep proper records.

  “Because DRL and INL could not demonstrate their compliance with State’s partner vetting requirements, there is an increased risk that terrorist and terrorist affiliated individuals and entities may have illegally benefited from State spending in Afghanistan,” the SIGAR report says.

  “As State continues to spend U.S. taxpayer funds on programs intended to benefit the Afghan people, it is critical that State knows who is actually benefiting from this assistance in order to prevent the aid from being diverted to the Taliban or other sanctioned parties, and to enable policymakers and other oversight authorities to better scrutinize the risks posed by State’s spending.”

  The watchdog found issues with 29 awards distributed by DRL and INL. For instance, DRL failed to properly screen the recipients of seven awards totaling about $12 million, investigators found. INL did not provide any supporting documentation for 19 of its 22 awards totaling about $295 million so there is no way to determine if they complied with the vetting requirements. The State Department acknowledged that not all its bureaus have complied with document retention requirements, which makes it conveniently impossible to fully assess the magnitude of its transgressions. The explanation offered for INL not retaining records is “employee turnover and the dissolution of the Afghanistan-Pakistan office,” according to the report. SIGAR points out that, given the Taliban’s takeover of Afghanistan in August 2021, it is critical that U.S. government activities adhere to the laws, regulations, and policies intended to prevent certain transactions with terrorists.

  Besides establishing fraudulent non-governmental organizations (NGO) to loot big chunks of the $3 billion in humanitarian aid that the U.S. has given Afghanistan since the Biden administration’s abrupt military withdraw, the Taliban has raked in millions more by charging taxes, permit fees and import duties. That money has flowed through the U.S. Agency for International Development (USAID), a famously corrupt State Department arm that got $63.1 billion for foreign assistance and diplomatic engagement this year, and the U.S. Agency for Global Media (USAGM), the government’s international broadcasting services that aims to inform, engage, and connect people around the world in support of freedom and democracy.

  The United Nations has also received $1.6 billion in U.S. funding for Afghanistan and a large percentage of that money most likely went to the Taliban as well, according to a federal audit, because the U.S. government does not require the leftist world body to report on taxes, fees or duties incurred on American funds for activities in Afghanistan.

  Tyler Durden
  Sun, 08/04/2024 – 19:50

• Buffett Calls The Top: Berkshire Quietly Dumps Half Its Apple Shares Amid Unprecedented Selling Spree
  Buffett Calls The Top: Berkshire Quietly Dumps Half Its Apple Shares Amid Unprecedented Selling Spree

  When yesterday we said, when discussing Buffett’s ongoing liquidation of his Bank of America stake, that “Berkshire’s rising cash stockpiles merely reflect the firm’s inability to find deals in today’s overvalued and weak economic environment”, little did we know just how accurate that would be, because fast-forwarding just one day later we find that far from only dumping Bank of America, the 93-year-old Omaha billionaire had been busy quietly dumping his most iconic holding in an unprecedented selling spree that sent Berkshire’s cash pile soaring by a record $88 billion to an all time high $277 billion at the end of Q2.

  

  As shown in the chart below, in the second quarter (which ended June 30, and thus just two weeks after the Apple’s Developer Conference which took place on June 10 and which was – at least on the day of – a total bust), Berkshire sold a net $75.5 billion worth of stock, the bulk of which we now know, came from Buffett’s liquidation of half his Apple shares.

  

  While there was no 13F filed yet to go with the Berkshire’s 10Q, the company did provide a snapshot of its top holdings, revealing that as of June 30 it held only $84.2 billion in Apple stock, down sharply from $135.4 billion as of March 31 and $174.3 billion as of Dec 31, 2023. This translates into just 400 million shares of AAPL held as of June 30, down almost 50% from 789.4 million as of March 31 and 905.6 million as the end of 2023.

  

  The rest of Berkshire’s top 5 holdings (Bank of America, American Express, Coca Cola and Chevron) was left untouched in Q2, meaning that Buffett clearly decided that it was time for Apple to go (we have since learned that subsequent to the end of Q2, Buffett also started to dump a large portion of his Bank of America shares where he is the single largest shareholder).

  While Berkshire’s cash balance rose by a record $88 billion – where proceeds from the sale of Apple were the bulk of the new cash – the company also generated substantial cash from its own operations, and in Q2 Berkshire reported operating earnings of $11.6 billion, up from $10 billion for the same period a year ago.

  Berkshire has for years struggled to find ways to deploy its mountain of cash in a sluggish deal environment, lamenting the lack of cheap opportunities. At the firm’s annual shareholder meeting in May, Buffett said he wasn’t in a rush to spend “unless we think we’re doing something that has very little risk and can make us a lot of money.” It now appears that not only was Buffett not in a rush to spend, but taking advantage of the AI bubble, he has been aggressively liquidating his biggest holding.

  What is perhaps most remarkable is when and how Buffett dumped half his Apple holdings: Berkshire managed to offload a stunning $84 billion, or some 390 million shares, in AAPL at a time when the stock was appreciating rapidly, and especially after the meltup following the WWDC24 developer conference. In other words, the smart money was furiously dumping to retail, because as we noted at the time, hedge funds were certainly not buying tech at this time, as we reported on July 1 in “Getting Out Of Dodge: Hedge Funds Are Selling And Shorting Stocks At The Fastest Pace In Two Years“, almost as if they had notice that Buffett was dumping…

  

  It also makes one wonder if Buffett may not have had something to do with Apple’s bizarre performance after the WWDC24 conference. As a reminder, the kneejerk response to Tim Cook’s “earthshattering” reveal of a chatGPT Siri was a huge dud, with the stock dumping on the day of WWDC24.

  *APPLE EXTENDS DECLINE AMID DEVELOPER CONFERENCE PRESENTATION

  — zerohedge (@zerohedge) June 10, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  It wasn’t until the next day when, thanks to a relentless barrage of bullish sellside reports and kickstarted by a furious buyback order from the company itself, the stock proceeded to surge and regain the world’s most valuable slot from Microsoft. Almost makes one wonder if Buffett didn’t call in a few favors from his banker friends on this one…

  Finally, it’s not just AAPL that Buffett believes is overvalued and is aggressively dumping: the billionaire clearly believes the entire market is way expensive, and Berkshire bought back only $345 million of its own shares during the quarter, the lowest amount since the company changed its buyback policy in 2018. It’s hardly a surprise why:  as we noted in “Berkshire’s Growing Cash Pile Has A Hidden Message On Stocks” the Buffett Indicator has rarely signaled a more expensive market.

  

  Bottom line: unlike October 2008, when Buffett led the clarion call to “Buy American“, this time he is selling American at a never before seen pace.

  

  Are you?

  One thing we know, Buffett is fearful.

  

  Tyler Durden
  Sun, 08/04/2024 – 18:50

• Secret Service Takes 'Full Responsibility' For Assassination Attempt On Trump
  Secret Service Takes ‘Full Responsibility’ For Assassination Attempt On Trump

  Authored by Caden Pearson via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

  Acting Secret Service Director Ronald Rowe said on Friday the agency takes full responsibility for the tragic events at former President Donald Trump’s rally last month, pledging changes such as flying drones.

  “This was a mission failure,” said Rowe at a press conference in Washington.

  

  Rowe replaced Kimberly Cheatle as director of the Secret Service amid intense scrutiny after she resigned in the wake of the attempted assassination of Trump, which saw one rallygoer killed and two more injured in Butler, Pennsylvania, last month.

  Trump, the Republican presidential nominee, was struck at the tip of his ear by a bullet fired by 20-year-old gunman Thomas Crooks while he spoke at a campaign rally. Crooks, who fired several bullets, was killed by a Secret Service counter-sniper.

  But agents should have had eyes on the roofs and other vantage points, Rowe said. And despite offers by local enforcement to fly drones, the Secret Service didn’t put one up.

  That will change, Rowe said.

  “We thought we might have had it covered with the human eye,” he said. “But clearly we are going to change our approach now, and we are going to leverage technology and put those unmanned aerial systems up.”

  “We did not have a drone on site. We did not put a drone up. Based on the information I have right now, I am aware that there was a request from a local agency to offer to fly a drone on that day. And that is also part of the mission assurance review that I’ve asked to get some better insight in,” Rowe added.

  Rowe said that the Secret Service also failed to communicate with local law enforcement over the radio at the rally. He said that the agency “fell short” of their responsibility to ensure Trump’s safety. “I’m working to make sure that this failure does not happen again,” he said.

  Local police had identified Crooks as a suspect over an hour before the incident, but the Secret Service failed to secure the warehouse he fired from, which local police couldn’t cover.

  Congress, the Department of Homeland Security’s Office of the Inspector General, and an independent review directed by President Joe Biden have been launched into the assassination attempt.

  The Secret Service’s own Office of Professional Responsibility is conducting a mission assurance review. Rowe said disciplinary action would be taken if necessary, and procedures would be changed.

  There should have been more of a physical law enforcement presence on site, Rowe said, given how close the building used by the shooter was to the stage where Trump spoke. If no law enforcement presence on the roof, there should have been “better security” preventing someone from getting up there, he said.

  “That building was very close to that outer perimeter and we should have had more of a presence,” he said.

  It’s hoped that a larger physical presence of law enforcement on site will deter future attempts.

  “We want to deter people from even thinking about doing something like this again,” Rowe said.

  Rowe also commended the bravery of the Secret Service agents who responded during the assassination attempt, noting their swift action to shield Trump’s body with their own “within three seconds of bullets ringing out in an unflinching act of bravery.”

  Tyler Durden
  Sun, 08/04/2024 – 18:40

• Kamala Harris & The Masque Of Magical Thinking
  Kamala Harris & The Masque Of Magical Thinking

  Authored by Roger Kimball via American Greatness,

  Although the last few weeks have had their alarming aspects – chief among which was the attempted assassination of Donald Trump on July 13, the odds-on favorite candidate for president – they have also had their amusing moments.

  In the latter category, I place the sudden queen-for-a-day-like coronation of Kamala Harris.

  

  True, that coronation was in the nature of an anti-democratic semi-soft-coup (or anti-democratic “inversion of a coup”). Biden and his handlers, right up until  the morning of July 21, were insisting that he was not dropping out, that he was “in it to win,” etc.  But someone made him an offer he couldn’t refuse and out he went.

  Here’s the amusing bit.  Until the moment Biden was chased out of the race, Kamala Harris functioned primarily as political life insurance.  “You might not like me,” Biden communicated, “but if I go, you’re stuck with her.”

  Biden’s polls were in the toilet and, following his catastrophic debate with Donald Trump, were circling the drain, poised for oblivion. But Kamala’s polls were even worse. She was cordially disliked by—well, by everyone. Her staff, her colleagues, but above all, by voters. In the 2020 race, she got no delegates: none, zero, zip.  She dropped out of the race for president but was then tapped to be VP only because this half Indian, half Jamaican woman was swarthy enough to pass as black and Biden had promised to select a black female as a running mate. Kamala truly is, as Biden himself acknowledged recently, a DEI vice president.

  And sure enough, Kamala was every bit the disaster people predicted she would be. As a matter of clinical interest, she proved that senility is not the only cause of supreme rhetorical incoherence. Some people, and she is one, come by it naturally.  Her tenure as vice president is littered with examples, and she provided another doozy just a couple of days ago when she attempted to comment on the prisoner exchange with Russia.

  It’s painful, as are all the many video clips of Harris angrily denouncing people who say “Merry Christmas,” of her presiding as “border czar” over the disaster of our non-existent southern border, of her outlining how she wants to give Medicare, as well as the franchise, to all illegal immigrants, and how she wants to develop a national data base of gun owners so that she can confiscate firearms by force.

  Can such a person win the presidency?  No.

  Then, how can we explain the sudden efflorescence of Harrismania? Democrats are wetting themselves with glee over their sudden fundraising windfalls ($200 million in a week, it is said) and sudden surge in the polls.  New York magazine just beclowned itself with a cover showing Kamala sitting on top of the world with Barack Obama, Chuck Schumer, Nancy Pelosi, and even Joe Biden dancing and whooping it up below.  “Welcome to Kamalot,” we read: “In a matter of days, the Democratic Party discovered its future was actually in the White House all along.”

  Was it? Again, the answer is no.  It is a temporary sugar high caused partly by the feeling of liberation following the sudden release from Joe Biden, partly by the slobbering media jumping all over the reinvention of Kamala like dogs vibrating over a bitch in estrus. The feeling of intoxication may linger through the Democratic convention, but there are already signs that it is fading.  I think James Piereson is correct. Kamala’s position now is akin to that of Michael Dukakis (remember him?) in 1988.

  Dukakis was way ahead of George Bush in the summer of 1988.  Then it all unraveled.  His helmet-moment in the tank sealed the deal. But it was his whole left-wing outlook that really did him in.  And Dukakis was Ronald Reagan compared to Kamala Harris.  “Once her views are made known to the public,” Piereson notes, “Harris’s support will begin to melt away. . . . [B]y mid-September, Trump will have opened up a six-point lead in the polls that will remain intact for the balance of the campaign.”

  Although I would hesitate to be quite so arithmetically precise, I think that Piereson is also by and large correct in his electoral prediction. “Notwithstanding the euphoria today,” he writes,

  Trump will win the election by six points—forty-nine to forty-three percent—winning 339 electoral votes, including all of the so-called swing states, plus the Democratic-leaning states of Virginia, Minnesota, and New Hampshire.  Republicans will pick up three or four seats in the Senate and perhaps twenty seats in the House, giving them safe majorities in both chambers. This will give Trump the margins he needs to implement a good piece of his agenda in 2025 and 2026.

  I think this is right—though, again, I hesitate to be quite so exact in attaching numbers to Trump’s victory.

  Back in 2020, I wrote a column on “The Democratic Art of Magical Thinking.” Magical thinking, I explained, “is the irrational belief, rampant among primitive peoples and those exposed to too many woke college seminars, that our thoughts influence or ‘constitute’ reality.”

  There can be a certain entertainment value to the phenomenon, which is why I added the word “masque” to the title of this piece.  A “masque” was a form of “courtly entertainment” that combined dance, music, fancy-dress, and architectural fantasy “to present a deferential allegory flattering to the patron.”  That’s essentially what we have here with Kamala Harris.  That New York magazine cover depicting her cackling astride the globe would be a suitable playbill for this intended deep state entertainment. But I doubt that the Democrats will be able to maintain their willing suspension of disbelief far beyond the convention when the masque ends and the players disperse.

  How did the magical thinking arise in the first place? One source is the habit of credulity that is a by-product of all utopian thought. The Democrats have mutated into the party of nowhere, so it is not surprising that they prefer pleasing fantasy to sobering reality.

  The other chief source is the attack on objective truth that, in various ways, has been the gospel proclaimed by fancy professors for the past several decades. Students everywhere are taught to be suspicious of truth, to proclaim the relativity of values. This is a brain-addling teaching, but one that you would have to look far and wide to find a place it hasn’t reached.

  As I noted in that earlier column on magical thinking, epistemic nihilism is the order of the day in all the best colleges and universities. But the result is not so much a failure as a promiscuity of belief. Hence the hyperventilating media shamans with their intoxicating potions. Some conservative pundits are fretting that Kamala Harris represents a credible challenge to the Trump juggernaut. Absent an assassin’s bullet, the successful rekindling of  Democratic lawfare, or some other praeternatural intervention,  I think the Democrats are setting themselves up not only for major disappointment but for staggering disillusionment. That’s the trouble with magical thinking. Sooner or later, reality intrudes and destroys the web of fantasy that the spurious magic has spun. Donald Trump is an avenging angel of reality. The Dems, as well as certain besotted anti-Trump conservatives, are dancing now.  They won’t be gyrating when the music stops and the hall empties.

  Tyler Durden
  Sun, 08/04/2024 – 17:30

• Suspected Houthi Missile Hits Container Ship; Rebel Forces Claim US MQ-9 Drone Downed Amid Regional War Risks
  Suspected Houthi Missile Hits Container Ship; Rebel Forces Claim US MQ-9 Drone Downed Amid Regional War Risks

  The assassination of Ismail Haniyeh, Hamas’ top leader, in Tehran last week has brought the Middle East closer than ever to the brink of all-out war ahead of the US presidential elections in November. After a two-week lull, Iran-backed Houthis targeted a Liberian-flagged container ship traveling through the Gulf of Aden, and rebel forces claimed to have downed a US military spy drone this weekend.

  Bloomberg reported a Houthi missile struck the container ship “Groton” just above the waterline, causing minor damage to the hull. 

  British maritime agency UKMTO said Groton was “hit by a missile,” adding, “No fires, water ingress or oil leaks have been observed.”

  

  Bloomberg maritime data shows Groton left Fujairah in the United Arab Emirates about a week ago, bound for Jeddah, Saudi Arabia. The incident occurred on Saturday. Following the incident, the ship’s transponder was turned off, and the vessel’s location only reappeared on Sunday—with Groton now moored in the East African country of Djibouti.

  

  Houthi military spokesman Brig. Gen. Yahya Saree claimed the attack on Groton on X on Sunday morning. He also said rebel forces “shot down an American MQ-9 aircraft.” 

  

  Possible footage of the downed MQ9 drone. 

  Images of the fragmented advanced MQ9 drone of the US Air Force, which was shot down by Yemen’s Ansarullah . pic.twitter.com/3vi1fENJO6

  — S p r i n t e r (@SprinterFamily) August 4, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Bloomberg Noted, “The rebels have targeted more than 70 vessels with missiles and drones in a campaign that has killed four sailors. They have seized one vessel and sunk two in the time since.” 

  Meanwhile, the USS Abraham Lincoln aircraft carrier strike group is set to replace the USS Theodore Roosevelt carrier strike group in the Middle East.

  Eight months after the Biden administration launched Operation Prosperity Guardian to ensure freedom of navigation in the southern Red Sea, the Houthi threats remain ongoing. The clogging of one of the world’s most important maritime chokepoints has resulted in a supply shock. 

  One of the biggest fears the Biden administration has is if Iran launches a retaliatory attack on Israel that sends Brent crude prices above $100/bbl. This threat was detailed in early March under the note “The Weaponization Of Crude Could Trigger The Next Financial Shock.”

  Tick. Tick. Tick.

  Tyler Durden
  Sun, 08/04/2024 – 16:55

• Transgender Or Intersex? Confusion Reigns Over The Gender Status Of Two Olympic Boxers
  Transgender Or Intersex? Confusion Reigns Over The Gender Status Of Two Olympic Boxers

  Authored by Jonathan Turley,

  On Saturday, the International Olympic Committee (IOC) issued a surprising correction after claiming for a week that Algerian boxer Imane Khelif and Taiwan’s Lin Yu-Ting were actually born women and have Differences in Sexual Development (DSD), a range of rare conditions in which a person’s genitalia do not necessarily match with their chromosomes or hormone levels. In this weekend’s column, I cited that IOC claim that Khelif is not a transgender athlete. Yet, there remains considerable confusion on how the IOC and the boxing governing body is framing this issue and the question of gender.

  

  IOC chief Thomas Bach said: “We have two boxers… who were born as women, raised as women, who have passports as women, who have competed for many years as women. And this is a clear definition of a woman.”

  Bach chastised critics and warned them not “confuse the two issues,” stressing that this was not “about the transgender issue.” However, he then confused many by saying “this is not a DSD case.”

  The IOC later issued a correction:

  In today’s IOC – Paris 2024 press briefing, IOC President Bach said: ‘But I repeat, here, this is not a DSD case, this is about a woman taking part in a women’s competition, and I think I have explained this many times.”

  What was intended was:

  ‘But I repeat, here, this is not a transgender case, this is about a woman taking part in a women’s competition, and I think I have explained this many times.’

  The key claim of the IOC is that both boxers were “born women.” Clearly, the identification on their passports (and how they were raised) can differ from country to country.

  In 2023, the International Boxing Association (IBA) President Umar Kremlev explained the IBA’s decision to disqualify Taiwan’s Lin Yu-ting and Algeria’s Imane Khelif from 2023 Women’s World Boxing Championships. While there remains confusion on the testing used by the IBA (or the reliability of those tests), it issued this statement:

  “Based on DNA tests, we identified a number of athletes who tried to trick their colleagues into posing as women. According to the results of the tests, it was proved that they have XY chromosomes. Such athletes were excluded from competition.”

  Various media also did their own “fact checks” with outlets like USA Today stating that the “outcries from anti-trans celebrities and politicians” were based on false claims and the boxers were born women.

  NBC also cited “attacks from anti-LGBTQ+ conservatives online who claim they’re transgender.”  It stressed that the IBA could not be trusted since the group was banned by the IOC. (IBA was banned for corruption and financial related issues).

  Notably, buried down in the CNN report on the controversy is a line that would seem significant that “Khelif… has not said she has DSD.”

  In the meantime, IOC spokesman Mark Adams has said that these determinations are left up to each sport’s international governing body because “they know their sport and their discipline the best,” Adams added that “I hope we all agree that we’re not calling for people to go back to the days of sex testing which was a terrible, terrible thing to do. This involves real people and we’re talking about real people’s lives here.”

  Yet, it seems odd that such major criteria of qualification would be left up to each governing body. There should be a consistent rule across the Olympics. Yet, the Human Rights Watch maintains that gender testing violates fundamental rights to privacy and dignity.

  My friend Marc Siegel, Fox medical analyst, argues that the testing side can be a simple as a hormone swab.

  Media is still insisting that these are not transgender athletes. Many articles cited GLAAD and InterACT. On Sunday, GLAAD was insisting that Khelif is not transgender, but is now referring to the DSD claim as something the IOC has maintained:

  Imane Khelif is a woman.

  Imane Khelif is not transgender and does not identify as intersex.

  Because Imane Khelif was disqualified from the 2023 International Boxing Association (IBA) championship due to an unspecified gender eligibility test, which has different eligibility criteria than the IOC, there have been unconfirmed reports that she may have a variation in her sex traits, also known as differences of sexual development (DSDs).

  DSDs are a group of conditions involving genes, hormones and reproductive organs. According to the NIH, some people with DSDs are raised as female but may have sex chromosomes other than XX, or elevated testosterone levels.

  Athletes with variations in their sex traits, or DSDs, are not the same as transgender athletes. Conflating the two is inaccurate.

  It is not verified that Imane Khelif has a variation in sex traits or DSDs.

  If you are confused, you are not alone.

  Legally, there continues to be a debate on the criteria used in these competitions. However, the GLADD statements seems to suggest that there is uncertainty on the underlying facts.

  Some of the confusion may be due to the use of transgender versus intersex.

  There is a difference between transgender athletes and intersex athletes.

  Transgender refers to someone who has a gender identity that is not in alignment with their sex.

  Intersex refers to someone who has reproductive anatomy or genes that align with conventional definitions of male or female, including different chromosomal profiles. ESPN explained that “an example is someone who is partially or completely insensitive to androgens, such as testosterone. They may be assigned female at birth but have XY chromosomes because of their body’s physiological insensitivity to androgens.”

  The athletes defending these two boxers have supported the claim that they are intersex athletes who were born female but have chromosomal differences.

  What is most striking about the boxing controversy is that there appears little agreement on the underlying facts and testing. It is not even clear what Khelif has claimed in the past on these issues. That seems curiously undefined and irregular for a classification criteria. That was brought home by the confusion of Bach himself in warning against confusion on the issues.

  On Saturday, Khelif defeated another female contestant, Hungary’s Anna Luca Hamori and Taiwan fighter Lin Yu-Ting also won the day before to advance to the semi-finals.

  Tyler Durden
  Sun, 08/04/2024 – 16:20

• Guess Who Kamala Harris Blames For Disastrous Jobs Report?
  Guess Who Kamala Harris Blames For Disastrous Jobs Report?

  Following last week’s horrendous jobs report, the Kamala Harris campaign issued a statement blaming – you guessed it – Donald Trump!

  

  “Donald Trump failed Americans as president, costing our economy millions of jobs, and bringing us to the brink of recession,” said Harris for President spokesperson James Singer in a statement.

  “Now, he’s promising even more damage with a Project 2025 agenda that will decimate the middle class and increase taxes on working families, while ripping away health care, raising prescription drug costs, and cutting Social Security and Medicare — all while making his billionaire donors richer.”

  According to Singer, “We’ve made significant progress, but Vice President Harris knows there’s more work to do to lower costs for families,” and “will make building up the middle class the defining goal of her presidency, taking on greedy corporations that are price gouging consumers, banning hidden fees, and capping unfair rent increases and drug costs.”

  So – robotic talking points centered around blaming the guy who’s been out of office for 3.5 years.

  On Friday the Labor Department revealed that US job growth cooled sharply in July, while the unemployment rate unexpectedly rose to the highest level in nearly three years. According to the report, the US added just 114K payrolls, a huge miss to expectations of 175K and also a huge drop from the downward revised June print of 206K, now (as always ) revised to just 179K. This was the lowest print since December 2020 (at least prior to even more revisions)…

  

  As we wrote in response, these being numbers published by the corrupt Biden, pardon Kamala Department of Goalseeked bullshit, the previous months were revised lower as usual, with May revised down by 2,000, from +218,000 to +216,000, and the change for June was revised down by 27,000, from +206,000 to +179,000. With these revisions, employment in May and June combined is 29,000 lower than previously reported. It gets better because as shown in the next chart shows, 5 of the past 6 months have now been revised lower.

  

  But while we have long known that the real payrolls number is far worse than reported, what was the true shock in Friday’s “data” is the long overdue admission that the US is effectively in a recession because as the rule named for pro-Biden/Kamala socialist Cluadia Sahm indicates, a recession has now been triggered. The rule, for those who don’t remember is that a recession is effectively already underway if the unemployment rate (based on a three-month moving average) rises by half a percentage point from its low of the past year. And that’s what just happened, with the unemployment rate surging 0.6% from the year’s low.

  Tyler Durden
  Sun, 08/04/2024 – 15:45

• Jittery Israel Braces For 'Five Front' War As Officials Predict Iran To Attack Monday
  Jittery Israel Braces For ‘Five Front’ War As Officials Predict Iran To Attack Monday

  This weekend has continue to see limited exchanges of fire involving Hezbollah along Israel’s northern border, but the jittery wait persists with Israelis heading into a new work week with the expected big Iranian retaliation immediately on the horizon for the killing of Hamas chief Ismail Haniyeh in Tehran last Wednesday.

  Many international airlines have already suspended flights to Tel Aviv and Beirut in anticipation for a wider conflict. In a fresh weekend speech, Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu has presented a scenario of Israel already finding itself in a multi-front war. “We are striking every one of its arms with great force. We are prepared for any scenario — both offensively and defensively,” he told his weekly cabinet meeting. He said in the Sunday remarks that Israel is “in a multi-front war against Iran’s evil axis.”

  

  “I reiterate and tell our enemies: We will respond and we will exact a heavy price for any act of aggression against us, from whatever quarter,” he added.

  This time it’s expected that Hezbollah could play a bigger role in any Iranian retaliation (compared to the first ballistic missile and drone attack of April 13). Israeli officials have also expressed concern for the many citizens traveling and working abroad – as they too could be targets of an Iranian reprisal attack or terrorist act.

  The NY Times observed, “For Israel, the travel disruptions added to the sense that it was no longer in control of its own fate and had no clear plan for quieting its many conflicts.”

  Several Israeli and US defense officials have told Axios that they expect a major Iranian retaliation to come as early as Monday. Not only has the Pentagon moved extra naval assets into the Eastern Mediterranean area, but the head of Central Command (CENTCOM), Gen. Michael Kurilla has traveled to the region for a pre-planned trip.

  Israeli media and officials have warned that a ‘five front’ war could open up, and they are seeking the support of an international coalition of allies that once again includes America and Britain:

  The Israeli security establishment is on “peak alert” and members of a US-led international coalition — including Britain and allied Arab states — aimed at thwarting potential Iranian attacks on “several fronts” are braced to try to deter and intercept them, Channel 12 reported.

  Among the precautions taken are patrols by combat aircraft and warships of allied countries in the area, the report said, without citing sources or providing further details.

  Israel’s leadership has been holding discussions on how the country would respond to such attacks, including what the network described as “a readiness for an entry into all-out war in this context.”

  The five fronts would involve attacks from Hezbollah in Lebanon, the Houthis in Yemen, Iranian assets in Syria, Iraqi paramilitary units, and direct missile launches from Iran itself.

  UPDATE
  • Iran attack seen as early as Monday
  • US 🚢, forces arriving in region
  • CENTCOM chief ✈️ Israel tom.: @BarakRavid
  • Israel says plans in place
  • Foreign nationals leaving Lebanon
  • Hezbollah +allies coordinate response
  • Strikes in Gaza,🇱🇧, Houthis target ships

  — Joyce Karam (@Joyce_Karam) August 4, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Whatever happens is expected to be bigger that the April 13 attack which saw many dozens of drones and ballistic missiles rain down on Israel, but most of which were intercepted, also with the help of US fighter jets. A new Wall Street Journal report says that Tehran has responded to urgings from regional diplomatic channels that it temper its response by saying ‘it didn’t care’:

  Iranian leaders have vowed to retaliate. On Saturday, Iran told Arab diplomats it didn’t care if the response triggered a war, according to people familiar with the conversations.

  Italy announced Sunday that G7 ministers expressed “strong concern about the recent events that could lead to a wider regional spread of the crisis, starting with Lebanon.” The statement calls on “the parties concerned to desist from any initiative that could hinder the path of dialogue and moderation and encourage a new escalation.” Many Israeli citizens and opposition leaders have accused Netanyahu of leading the country to the brink of bigger war for the sake of his political survival and furtherance as a war time prime prime minister.

  Tyler Durden
  Sun, 08/04/2024 – 15:10

• Bitcoin Is Crashing Ahead Of The Japan Open
  Bitcoin Is Crashing Ahead Of The Japan Open

  Bitcoin, and the entire crypto universe, is crashing after yet another huge sell order was unleashed by a time-triggered algo, the same algo that has activated selling momentum on each of the past 7 trading days at 10am ET, just after the US cash open (a move meant to cripple any dip-buying intentions in early market trading), yet which algo was left on for the weekend, arguably to spark an HFT-driven pile up of selling and shorting, and to force levered longs to capitulate, ahead of the Japanese open where a bloodbath is expected to take place (see below). One can see the algo in action in the red boxes below: exact same time every day, exact same sell-momentum ignition.

  

  We have previously discussed how Sam Bankman-Fried’s alma mother, HFT trading shop Jane Street, has frequently been involved in such attempts to force-liquidate the market by activating selling momentum, and it appears that this weekend Jane Street’s crypto “market-making” peer, Jump Trading, joined the fray and sparked a market rout by dumping and shorting billions in various coins during the most illiquid of markets while assuring the worst execution possible by repeatedly taking out the bid stack over and over, in what is an attempt to aggressively reprice cryptos.

  Jump Crypto, one of the biggest crypto shops is unwinding its crypto operations following CFTC probe (and SEC case? idk), Kanav was its President

  They had hundreds of millions of ETH and SOL

  They’ve been sending dozens of millions hourly to exchanges on an illiquid weekend pic.twitter.com/x1Ou3xGPBV

  — Wazz (@WazzCrypto) August 4, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  The liquidation panic has been boosted by three factors:

  i) Friday’s crash in US stocks

  ii) the rout expected in Japan when stocks there open for trading on Monday as they catch down to Friday’s plunge in the USDJPY, where a rough estimate suggests about 6-8% of additional downside after the Topix lost 10% in the past 2 days, effectively putting Japanese stocks in a bear market just days after the biggest policy error by the BOJ in recent history (just as we expected)…

  BOJ preview: whatever is the dumbest possible thing that can happen, is what will happen. 100% guaranteed

  — zerohedge (@zerohedge) July 30, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  … and forcing the Bank of Japan to resume easing and rate cuts just days after it hiked ever so slightly, from 0.10% to 0.25% while Japan’s economy is shrinking again.

  iii) fears of an imminent (re)start of the (theatrical) war between Iran and Israel. As readers may recall, back in April when the first quote-unquote war between Iran and Israel took place, a highly choreographed, skilfully produced event, bitcoin would tumble every single time a red flashing Bloomberg headline of some new missile attack hit the tape. Expect nothing less tonight when the next scripted “war” is expected to take place.

  Meanwhile, keep an eye on what Larry Fink and the rest of the ETF complex is doing. As we have observed on countless occasions, it has been Blackrock’s favorite pastime to buy the dip created by the aggressive selling of futures by various HFT shops (and CZ hands) in hopes of increasingly cornering the crypto market, and the past week has been no different.

  >BTC down 10%
  >Grayscale dumping $2B ETH
  >Middle East on the brink

  but Blackrock is STILL buying. pic.twitter.com/IlNBapzaCR

  — Arkham (@ArkhamIntel) August 1, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Tyler Durden
  Sun, 08/04/2024 – 14:35

• "Suddenly Recession Is On The Tip Of Everyone's Tongue… Wow, Did That Happen Fast!"
  “Suddenly Recession Is On The Tip Of Everyone’s Tongue… Wow, Did That Happen Fast!”

  By Peter Tchir of Academy Securities

  The Fed Dot Plod

  Suddenly everyone is raising the number of Fed cuts this year and early next year. Without a doubt Friday’s job report was Weak with Few Redeeming Qualities. While we argued that the Fed SHOULD have cut at the July meeting, there are several reasons why the market may be getting ahead of itself in terms of rate cuts and bond yields.

  In any case, while last weekend’s title of Baby Pool Closed for “Maintenance” may be even more appropriate this weekend (clearly something is going on that markets don’t like), we are going with the Fed Dot Plod, because the Fed is now likely going to plod along slower than what the market priced in by the end of the week.

  It is somewhat awkward to be bearish on the economy, while expecting the Fed to now disappoint, but we think there is evidence to support it.

  Jobs and the Fed

  According to Google trends, the “Sahm Rule” suddenly attracted a lot of attention. Powell even had to answer a question about it during the press conference. It makes sense that it would attract attention, but let’s remember that it is a “rule” only in the world of economics. Anywhere else it would be conjecture, based on logic, which has been useful in the past. However, I’m old enough to remember when inverted curves were a good rule of thumb to predict recessions.

  In any case, while Friday’s job report was not good, it is questionable how much any one data point will change the Fed’s view.

  • ADP, which came out Wednesday ahead of the FOMC announcement and press conference, came in at 122k jobs. Headline NFP came in at 114k jobs (even with 97k for the private sector). Since ADP changed its methodology to more accurately predict NFP we should assume that the Fed at least had an inkling that the report would be weak. As a side note, I wish ADP kept their old methodology of trying to track how many jobs were created or lost based on their unique data set because I think that it better served market participants.

  • We sent out a quick note post JOLTs that the Quit Rate was at 2.1, tied with last month for the lowest since Covid and worse than the 2.2 average that we had in 2019. The Hires Rate was only 3.4, the worst since Covid, and below the 3.9 average in 2019. JOLTs was not strong. The “job openings” seemed okay, but we have concerns that it doesn’t do a good job of catching “ghost” jobs, “fishing” expeditions, or even those jobs that used to exist, but no one has bothered to remove them from the job sites. The payment plan for many sites/companies doesn’t create the incentive to remove job postings the way it used to with traditional/old fashioned approaches.

  • While ISM employment was abysmal, what happened to all of the people who as recently as last month were quick to point out manufacturing is only a small part of the economy?

  The case that the Fed should have expected weakness, even with relatively little “new” information since Chair Powell told the world that the labor market was in good shape, seems at least somewhat convincing.

  Let’s not forget that he repeatedly told us that the Fed will not react to a single piece of data.

  Now, let’s move to the more interesting, curious, and weird part of this report – the willingness to believe in bad data.

  The Willingness to Believe in Bad Data

  The theme of “garbage in, garbage out” is a recurring topic in T-Reports. What is incredibly concerning, from my perspective, is the willingness to take data that might be questionable and use it to make policy (or longer-term decisions). For trading, whatever the number is, it will move markets. However, and this hurts my head, this is in part because we know policy makers look at the data as is, which lets algos loose to trade on it. It is only over time that reality hits and decisions made based on bad (or questionable) data become apparent.

  

  Here we examine private payrolls versus the number of jobs purportedly created (the birth/death model). From January 2011 until February 2020 (just before Covid hit), we see relatively few instances where the number of jobs created by the model was greater than the number of jobs reported (appears as negative numbers in this chart).

  It occurred 19 times out of 111 data points (17%). The average for this period was 124k. Though you can see that since 2016 the frequency has increased, which we continue to associate with the rise of the “gig” economy creating many more “self-employed” people.

  Something seems to have happened since February 2022. Yes the data is cherry-picked, but it is quite striking, and very different than anything we have seen in the past decade during “normal” times (the Covid shocks make a mess of a lot of the data).

  

  Since February 2023, 33% of the reports would be negative for private jobs if it wasn’t for the birth/death model. The average number of private sector jobs (taking out the birth/death adjustment) dropped from 124k to 44k.

  57% of all YTD jobs are statistical fakes, thanks only to the Birth/Death adjustment pic.twitter.com/utYosI0k7S

  — zerohedge (@zerohedge) August 2, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  I’m not arguing that the birth/death model makes sense, but what I am arguing is that it has become a disproportionately large contributor to the total number of private sector jobs.

  Maybe it makes sense, or maybe the model hasn’t been properly calibrated to deal with work from home, the GIG economy, or the shift from being employees to setting up LLCs, etc.

  While the Fed (and especially the media) seems happy to take the NFP reports on full faith and credit, color me skeptical.

  Just a quick note on “revisions.”

  “2-month total revisions” should have the most updated information as it provides more time for survey responses to arrive. According to the BLS Survey Response Rates, the response rates remain low (I was focused on employment, though CPI housing also caught my eye). Again, what is the “fudge factor” and how good is the BLS at it?

  When looking at 2-month net revisions (a bit overstated, I think due to double counting), we’ve had 14 of the last 18 months revised downward. That seems statistically unlikely. It also shows a rather significant number of total downward revisions.
  Where I am coming out on the jobs data:

  • Initial, headline numbers – American Exceptionalism.

  • Looking into details, examining trends on revisions, data “plugs,” and estimations – American “meh-ism.”

  In the U.S. you don’t convict someone of a crime if there is a “reasonable doubt” so why would we make policy on data that, at least for me, also creates a “reasonable doubt”?

  

  Speaking of crimes, which data set do you believe? The CPI Owners’ Equivalent Rent or Zillow’s?

  This chart seems to highlight a few things:

  • The Fed was slow to hike because they were using data that was not capturing the move in rents! It is almost impossible to believe that anyone reading this report didn’t face this issue directly, or with family or friends! Rents were skyrocketing in 2021 while we were still embarked on QE.
  • The “pain” the average person felt around inflation, which seems to show up in sentiment surveys, seems to reflect the Zillow pattern better than the OER pattern. Across the board, people seemed to experience a much higher level of inflation compared to what actually made it into the official data.
  • Now, the OER is “catching up,” and we seem (at least to some extent) to be letting what is likely a number higher than reality affect CPI – and in turn policy.

  Why we talk about CPI, where shelter has a relative importance of 36%, with such obvious flaws, is beyond me! Supposedly, OER, at one time made sense, and was the best we could do (we also used to have to lace up sneakers), but does it make any sense today?

  At Academy, we often discuss the risk of fighting the last war, and not only does the Fed seem to be fighting the last war, but they are also fighting it with bad intel!

  Should Versus Will

  Clearly, we are in the camp of they should cut! That they should have cut! That they are behind the curve! So why are we hesitant to join the crowd expecting the Fed to suddenly accelerate their cuts?

  • The Fed, the media, and many others have been comfortable with taking data at face value. So, why would they start digging into this in more detail now?

  • The Fed has told us, in no uncertain terms, that no single data point will define policy. They weren’t willing to cut on Wednesday and there really hasn’t been that much “new” data.

  • The Fed (or at least enough influential members) has been so scared of a resurgence in inflation that it seems difficult to believe that they will do an about face or even panic any time soon.

    • At this point, I do agree that enacting the Fed “Put” would trigger inflation. While I think we are seeing inflation come under control, and some areas are even experiencing deflation, if the Fed does anything that looks or smells like they are eager to embrace the Fed Put, we would likely see inflation – starting with risk assets. They are caught between a rock and a hard place in terms of being able to be aggressive.

  • No one wants to admit they were wrong (clearly, I have to revise my target on 10-year yields, as what looked good 6 trading days ago, makes no sense now). That applies to the Fed as well. They just had their biggest stage. Fed speakers are now on the circuit after the 2-day meeting, followed by a 45-minute press conference. How do you back off those decisions and words, when, for all intents and purposes, nothing much has changed?

  • I am quite literally scared about how politicized any decision they make might become. It won’t be a political decision on their part, but I think a 50-bps cut in September would fuel rage on social media which could spill into the real world. Maybe I am overestimating how strongly some segments of the population can be made to feel about a rate cut in terms of helping or harming their candidate, but I have moved to trepidation (if not fear) on this risk.

  Maybe we will get more cuts (sooner), but the market got ahead of itself.

  Liquidity, De-Risking, Vol Selling, and More

  I’m getting tired of writing, and you are probably getting tired of reading, and we’ve covered these before, so we will be brief:

  • Liquidity. The world of algo-driven “faux” liquidity is being tested almost daily (in both directions) and it is not going to get better. Lack of liquidity works in both directions – just look at Wednesday’s stock surge.

  • De-Risking. The ETFs I’m tracking most closely showed mixed results early in the week, but moved towards “buying the dip” as the week went on. XLK, QQQ, TQQQ, SQQQ, NVDL, and ARKK pointed to some risk taking and certainly didn’t scream “capitulation.” That may lead to a bounce, but I remain convinced that the worst is not behind us.

  • Picking up nickels in front of a steam roller. That is a polite way of saying one of my favorite Wall Street phrases – “Eat like a mouse, poop like an elephant.” Vol selling has become “de riguer“ in this market. Any self-respecting RIA has their clients selling vol – directly, via funds/ETFs that specialize in those trades, or even, perhaps unwittingly, in leveraged ETFs. Many write puts because “if the stock gets there, you want to own it anyways.” My view remains that what they really mean is “if the stock gets there, for no good reason, you want to own it” as more often than not price drops are associated with negative news that make what was at one time a good and obvious price a little more dangerous. Also, it helps if you weren’t fully invested and didn’t write too many puts, otherwise you might need to sell rather than buy.

  • The Japanese Yen. The strength there is sparking a lot of chatter about the “unwind of carry trades” where investors borrowed cheaply in depreciating yen to buy other assets. I’m never too sure how big or real that risk is, but with the JPY appreciating almost 10% in less than a month it is something to watch.

  • Fake passive. When indices, from narrow to broad, become heavily concentrated in a handful of stocks, your intuition on “passive” is likely to be incorrect. Selling pressure (which we’ve seen less of than I would have expected given the moves) will hit the big leaders. Since momentum has been the best factor, that leaves us open for more selling. Just like inflows went disproportionately to a handful of companies enhancing their narrative, outflows will also hit them, through no fault of their own, other than the success of their stocks. Hopefully, stock pickers will win here! Since June 30th, the S&P 500 equal weight index is up 1.5% while the regular (market cap weight) index is down 2%.

  Bottom Line

  The Fed will be more “plodding” than what the market has priced in.

  U.S. 2s vs 10s is the least inverted since June 2022. Continue to look for “normalization” as the Fed can control the front end, but not much on the back end.

  While we had been looking for weaker economic data, I was shocked (painfully) by how quickly 10s moved and got below 3.8% to finish the week. I’m incredibly bearish, at least for a trade here, as I cannot find a reason (in anything I look at) to bring my range below 4% – 4.2%. I will have to adjust to the case that while we’ve been comfortable thinking about a slowing economy and lower inflation, it was not as widely held as we thought.

  Stocks. We continue to think that we have not seen the bottom and that we will be lower at some point in August than we are today (cannot discount a possible bounce again from here, but am waiting for lower levels to buy this market). On the Nasdaq 100 the current target is 17,500. Just below the 200-day moving average, where we would expect support, though that is still above the April 19th low of 17,000. If anything, the risk of breaching that remains high. The S&P 500 is a bit trickier as it is still above the 100-day moving average, but 5,000 seems like a good target (the 200-day moving average and the April lows).

  Buy energy here on the recent weakness. Yes, the economy is slowing. There are more and more questions about whether AI, Data Centers, etc., and everything associated with it (power for example) got ahead of itself, but geopolitical risk is extremely high and anything we see on that front will lead to supply shocks for energy.

  Credit. Should outperform, but it will start moving much more in line with equities as the equity move is starting to reflect more than just valuation concerns. Credit spreads were well protected against valuation concerns but will not be as protected as we move into “bumpy” landing concerns. Lower Treasury yields won’t help spreads, and we should see a much larger than expected August calendar develop to take advantage of the move in all-in yields.

  Holy recession, Batman! We’ve been on the side more concerned about the economy for some time now. It felt like we were swimming upstream at times, and Wednesday’s stock surge felt like we were swimming in a baby pool “closed for maintenance.” Then suddenly recession is on the tip of everyone’s tongue! Deservedly so, but wow, did that happen fast!

  Good luck, as this summer is turning more turbulent rather than less turbulent!

  Tyler Durden
  Sun, 08/04/2024 – 14:00

• Anti-Immigration Protests In UK Spreads As Elon Musk Warns "Civil War Is Inevitable" 
  Anti-Immigration Protests In UK Spreads As Elon Musk Warns “Civil War Is Inevitable” 

  European countries on the front lines, such as Greece and Italy, have been overwhelmed with migrants over the years due to failed open-border policies facilitated by radical leftist politicians. These unaccountable leaders (elected & unelected) have created the perfect storm of migrant crime and chaos across the continent. 

  Just a fraction of the Brits murdered by foreigners recently.

  And they expect zero pushback from that? pic.twitter.com/rP9uj292AA

  — iamyesyouareno (@iamyesyouareno) August 3, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  For readers, who are not caught up with the news cycle, anti-immigration demonstrations have erupted across the UK following the horrific stabbing of three children in Southport by the 17-year-old son of Rwandan immigrants. 

  Here’s the latest reporting: 

  • Riots Erupt In England After Teenage Child Of Migrants Goes On Stabbing Spree

  • UK Prime Minister Calls For Crackdown On Angry Brits – Violent Migrants Get A Pass

  Now weekend anti-immigration demonstrations were seen in Liverpool, Bristol, Manchester, Hull, Belfast, Stoke, and other cities. Some turned violent while others did not. 

  Citizens are enraged with progressive officials who have promoted open borders, leading to an influx of migrants. This has resulted in increased crime and chaos and has adversely affected working-class families by pushing down wages for low-skilled jobs. 

  The Guardian quoted protesters on Saturday as chanting, “Get them out” and “Yorkshire.” 

  In the southwest city of Bristol, folks shouted, “We want our country back,” while others yelled, “England ’til I die.” There were small pockets of counter-protesters who called called anti-immigration protesters ‘racist’. 

  It seems that the working-class people in the West are beginning to speak up. After all, Christianity played a major role in the development of Western civilization. 

  “F*ck Islam”, shouted British patriots in London. UK one step away from civil war? pic.twitter.com/IF1D1gQPkw

  — RadioGenoa (@RadioGenoa) July 28, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  On Sunday, Policing and Crime Minister Diana Johnson told Sky News that unrest is viewed as “criminal disorder” and that people participating were “thugs.” She said some protesters may face “imprisonment.” 

  Folks are not happy about the two-tier judicial system. Where have we seen this before? 

  Britain has officially gone. pic.twitter.com/M5MX8qDCc5

  — Queen Natalie (@TheNorfolkLion) July 28, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Prime Minister Keir Starmer told the nation that the government will do “whatever it takes” to quell the violence. 

  🇬🇧 Riots in the UK are quickly getting out of control. pic.twitter.com/ZbPHY514Ak

  — DD Geopolitics (@DD_Geopolitics) August 3, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  On Saturday evening, Musk weighed in on the unrest, warning: “Civil war is inevitable.”

  Civil war is inevitable

  — Elon Musk (@elonmusk) August 4, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Musk’s assumption might not be too far off from what could be coming to Europe. In fact, far-left EU elites who have pushed years of open borders, flooding countries across the bloc with hundreds of thousands of migrants, if not millions, have intentionally or unintentionally stoked incredibly high divisions among the population over migration. Meanwhile, failed open-border policies have supercharged nationalist movements. 

  One interesting note: leftist corporate media are pushing that X has been the epicenter of fueling misinformation and disinformation, as it’s likely EU leftist officials are going to attempt to clamp down some more (remember the Olympics censorship) on Musk’s free speech efforts. 

  Mark my words – Britain’s leftist government will use this outbreak of violence to launch a crackdown on free speech, specifically against Elon Musk’s X platform.

  — Ben Kew (@ben_kew) August 4, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Here comes the censorship. 

  Anti-immigration activist Martin Sellner gave a lecture yesterday on censorship.

  The police showed up to shut it down. pic.twitter.com/WYuYhrHr5g

  — End Wokeness (@EndWokeness) August 4, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Europe’s slow-motion crisis has undoubtedly gained momentum as social unrest ignites. This couldn’t have come at the worst possible timing as Russia and Ukraine are locked in a multi-year war in Eastern Europe with elevated risks of broadening conflict. Furthermore, risks of broadening conflict are also seen in the Middle East between Iran and Israel. 

  The West is in chaos, thanks to far-left lawmakers from the US to Europe who have promoted failed open-border policies – destroyed meritocracy – and still can’t describe what a woman is.

  Tyler Durden
  Sun, 08/04/2024 – 13:25

• The Usual Stimulus Tricks Won't Work This Time Around
  The Usual Stimulus Tricks Won’t Work This Time Around

  Authored by Charles Hugh Smith via substack,

  The global economy is slowing, and central banks and governments are deploying the usual stimulus tricks: 1) lowering interest rates to encourage more borrowing and spending, and 2) running large fiscal deficits so government spending fills the gap left by sagging private-sector spending.

  But these usual stimulus tricks won’t work this time around, and the reason why is very simple: all the conditions that allowed these tricks to work were one-offs that are now done and gone. These one-offs weren’t policies that can be tweaked or reinvented; they were real-world conditions that are no longer present. They cannot be brought back with any amount of money or will.

  

  Let’s start with China.

  China bailed the world out of the last three recessions triggered by credit-asset bubbles popping: the Asian Contagion of 1997-98, the dot-com bubble and pop of 2000-02, and the Global Financial Crisis of 2008-09. In each case, China’s high growth and massive issuance of stimulus and credit (a.k.a. China’s Credit Impulse) acted as catalysts to restart global expansion.

  The context of this is China’s unprecedentedly rapid industrialization added a new (initially low-cost) very productive workforce of 450 million to the global economy, roughly equivalent to the entire workforces of the U.S. and the European Union. This was a one-off on multiple layers: an enormous workforce, ample reserves of cheap coal and aggressively mercantilist government policies fueled a boom unlike any other in history. (I first visited China in 2000, shortly before its entry into the World Trade organization, so the boom is not an academic abstraction for me; I was there, witnessing it on the ground.)

  This boom generated enormous capital flows into China (a.k.a. FDI, foreign direct investment), soaring corporate profits as developed-nations’ corporations slashed production costs by offshoring industries to China, and spurred domestic consumption in China as a nation of 1.4 billion people who had been held back for decades rushed to replace hundreds of millions of bicycles with hundreds of millions of autos and old brick houses with millions of high-rise apartments.

  This one-off is now spent.  Even in 2000, there were signs of overproduction / demand saturation: TV production in China in 2000 had overwhelmed global and domestic demand: everyone in China already had a TV, so what to do with the millions of TVs still being churned out?

  Daily life in China is high-tech, orderly, busy and prosperous–what visiting Westerners see and praise–but the narrative of China’s ascent to global dominance via endless expansion of its economy has been punctured, again for a very simple reason:  China’s model of economic development that worked so brilliantly in the “boost phase” of the S-Curve, when all the low-hanging fruit could be so easily picked, no longer works at the top of the S-Curve.

  

  China’s model of economic development from 1985 to the present was classic mercantilism–government policies encouraged industrialization to ship low-cost exports to the world–and classic expansion of home ownership: though the state owns all land in China, government  policy shifted from public housing to issuing long-term leases to residents and to developers to build new housing that would be sold to households.

  These policies have now reached the saturation-decline phase of the S-Curve, on multiple levels. Housing is now in surplus–millions of middle-class households already own investment apartments as a form of savings / household wealth–and half the populace is too poor to buy expensive flats: 600 million people get by on $150 or less per month.

  These policies have led to an extreme concentration of household wealth in real estate, and those who invested in China’s stock market have suffered major losses.

  

  There is little demand for existing flats outside the inner rings of Tier One cities, and so the resale value of millions of empty investment flats is a looming question mark. Small banks have folded or are limiting cash withdrawals, sparking protests, and an estimated 20 million flats that homeowners have paid for are unfinished as the developers ran out of money.

  This is the problem with overproduction as a model of endless growth: it eventually overwhelms demand and the income needed to pay for it.

  On the export front, China’s heavy-handed policies (Wolf Warrior diplomacy) have alienated both the developing-nations who took on huge loans from China for Belt-and-Road Initiative projects–many of which are empty white elephants or plagued with quality issues–and the developed-world economies facing a tsunami of Chinese exports that are now viewed as mortal threats to domestic industries and national security.

  Simply put, housing and mercantilist exports are no longer engines of growth, and China has no replacement. The current strategy of moving up the value chain to dominate electric vehicles and semiconductors is triggering pushback in the form of tariffs and restrictions that will only increase as the global economy slips into recession.

  Whatever reflects poorly on the leadership is suppressed–statistics are simply no longer reported or are dismissed as PR–and so it takes on-the-ground reporting to learn that youth unemployment is likely around 40%, civil servants such as police have had their salaries cut 30%, and that the citizenry now view the present as “the Garbage Time of History.”: Deals like the “Poor Guy’s Package” and “Blind Box of Leftovers” point to significant changes in the Chinese economy affecting the lives of ordinary people.

  China’s credit stimulus–breathlessly anticipated as the savior of the global economy–generated nothing more than a shrug. China has burned through the boost phase and has no answers to the decay phase of the S-Curve.

  Constructive demographics were another one-off–for China and for the world.

   

  Where China’s workforce was growing during the boost phase, now the demographic picture has darkened: China’s workforce is shrinking, the population of elderly retirees is soaring, and China has no national universal pension / healthcare programs like Social Security and Medicare, so the cost burdens of supporting a burgeoning cohort of retirees will have to be funded by a shrinking workforce.

  This is a global phenomenon, and there are no quick and easy solutions. Skilled labor will become increasingly scarce and able to demand higher wages regardless of any other factors, and that will be a long-term source of inflation. Governments will have to borrow more–and probably raise taxes as well–to fund soaring pension and healthcare costs for elderly retirees. This will bleed off other social spending and investment.

  The era of zero-interest rates and unlimited government borrowing has ended.  As Japan has shown, even at ludicrously low rates of 1%, interest payments on skyrocketing government debt eventually consume virtually all tax revenues. Higher rates will accelerate this dynamic, pushing government finances to the wall as interest on sovereign debt crowds out all other spending.  As taxes rise, households have less disposable income to spend on consumption, leading to stagnation.

  At the start of the cycle–either 1985 or 1994, take your pick–global debt levels, both government and private-sector–were low. Now they are high.  The boost phase of debt expansion and debt-funded spending is over, and we’re in the stagnation-decline phase where adding debt generates diminishing or negative returns.

  The era of low inflation has also ended for multiple reasons. Exporting nations’ wages have risen sharply, pushing their costs higher, and as noted, skilled labor in developed economies can demand higher wages as this labor cannot be automated or offshored–and offshoring is reversing to onshoring, raising production costs and diverting investment from asset bubbles to the real world.

  The techno-optimist fantasy is that technology will extract all the minerals and resources we need to completely remake the global energy sector and every device that consumes energy at current low prices. This has yet to proven correct at scale, and common sense suggests it will be proven false as we’ve already consumed all the easy-to-extract resources in locales that aren’t extreme. OK, so there’s oil under the Arctic Sea. Nice, but it won’t be cheap and easy to get like the oil that’s already been extracted and consumed.

  Higher costs of extraction will push inflation higher.  So will rampant money-printing to “boost consumption.”

  The tech boom was also a one-off.  Economists were puzzled in the early 1990s by the stagnation of productivity despite the tremendous investments made in personal and corporate computers, a boom launched in the mid-1980s with Apple’s Macintosh and desktop publishing, and Microsoft’s WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) Windows operating system.

  By the mid-1990s, productivity was finally rising and the emergence of the Internet as “the vital 4%” triggered the adoption of the 20% which then led to 80% getting online combined with the computing revolution to generate a true revolution in sharing, connectivity and economic potential.

  The buzz around AI holds that an equivalent boom is now starting that will generate a glorious “Roaring 20s” of trillions booked in new profits and skyrocketing productivity as white-collar work and jobs are automated into oblivion.

  There are two problems with this story:

  1) The projections are based more on wishful thinking than real-world dynamics

  2) If the projections come true and tens of millions of white-collar jobs disappear forever, there is no replacement sector to employ the tens of millions of unemployed workers.

  In the previous cycles of industrialization and post-industrialization, agricultural workers shifted to factory work, and then factory workers shifted to retail, services and office work. There is no equivalent place to shift tens of millions of unemployed workers, as AI is a dragon that eats its own tail: AI can perform many programming tasks so it won’t need millions of human coders.

  As for profits, as I explained in Musings #1 (AI Boosts Productivity: Hype, Reality or Mirage?), Musings #26  (The Simple Reason Nothing Is Fixable: Addiction Capitalism) and #27 (Will Hollywood and the Music Industry Survive the Super-Abundance of Original AI Content?), everyone will have the same AI tools and so whatever those tools generate will be overproduced and therefore of little value: there is no pricing power when the world is awash in AI-generated content, bots, etc., other than the pricing power offered by addiction and fraud–both extreme negatives for humanity and the global economy.

  Either way it goes–AI is a money-pit of grandiose expectations that will generate marginal returns, or it wipes out much of the middle class while generating little profit–AI will not be the miraculous source of millions of new high-paying jobs and astounding profits.

  To recap: here are the one-offs that drove growth and pulled the global economy out of bubble busts / recessions for the past 30 years:

  1)  China’s industrialization.
  2)  Growth-positive demographics.
  3)  Low interest rates.
  4)  Low debt levels.
  5)  Low inflation.
  6)  Tech boom.

  These one-offs no longer exist. They’re gone or have reversed.  What we now have is a hyper-centralized, hyper-connected (i.e. tightly bound), hyper-globalized and hyper-financialized global economy of extreme fragility.

  For all these reasons, the usual stimulus tricks won’t work this time around.

  Tyler Durden
  Sun, 08/04/2024 – 12:50

Digest powered by RSS Digest

• As Ukrainian Defenses Collapse, What Can US Patriots Learn From The Conflict?
  As Ukrainian Defenses Collapse, What Can US Patriots Learn From The Conflict?

  Authored by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.us

  In my article ‘Russia Is About To Overrun Ukraine’s Defenses – Why Are There No Peace Negotiations’, published in May, I outlined my reasons for predicting a near term collapse of Ukrainian front line defenses and a sweeping territory grab by Russian forces. Since the early months of the war my primary argument has been that Ukraine is trying to hide steep losses in manpower and that this ruse would eventually be exposed. Bottom line? Wars are won by men, not by DARPA technology and suitcases full of fiat cash.

  A year ago mainstream analysts said Ukrainians troops (with NATO’s help) would soon destroy the Russian military and party on the beaches of Crimea. Today, the establishment admits manpower shortages are a reality and they admit Russia is overrunning Ukraine’s defensive positions all over the front. Soon, Russia will control the entirety of the Donbas region and beyond using attrition warfare.

  The “experts” have no idea what they’re talking about, or, they’re lying to the public on purpose. Either way their opinions are not to be trusted.

  As a student of history (and of military tactics) I can only relate to you what I see with an objective eye. I’m not in Ukraine and not on the front lines looking from both sides (and neither are the experts). I’m not privy to special intel and I don’t have access to the war rooms in Kyiv or the Kremlin (and neither are the experts). My goal here is NOT to break down a play-by-play of the war, I only hope to point out the greater truths being uncovered as the situation unfolds.

  The kind of war we are seeing in Ukraine has not been fought by a western military since Korea. When it comes to industrial scale attrition warfare there are NO REAL EXPERTS in NATO still working at the Department of Defense. They don’t exist. 

  It is here that I want to begin because there are many patriots in the US preparing for what we believe will be widespread internal and external conflagration – Regional wars in multiple nations as well as rebellions here at home. What do the events in Ukraine teach us about the future of war? What classic assumptions have been debunked and what are the odds of success in the new strategic world? Let’s get started…

  Maneuver Warfare Is Dying

  The core emphasis of maneuver warfare is the use of initiative and surprise; the fast coordination of units to envelop the enemy before he realizes what is happening. It relies on shock and awe to demoralize, the idea being that the enemy can be defeated by chasing him down and using superior technology to render his defensive positions useless (the doctrine of the Vietnam War). It’s hard to say if these tactics ever really worked, but what we know now is that they will not work in future wars.

  NATO doctrine in particular is proving to be quite useless. It relies too heavily on minimizing losses to highly trained officers. All maneuver warfare requires finely tuned tactics combined with technological know-how. Once experienced officers are shot down replacing them is difficult. Where Russia might be able to sustain hundreds-of-thousands of casualties, western armies are often broken by a fraction of those losses.

  US patriots would do well to remember this. An enemy using maneuver doctrine loses when his best trained soldiers and officers are dead and he cannot coordinate fast attacks. An enemy using attrition doctrine loses when he is required to rush into an attack. Losing resources will force him to rush.

  Drones Have Changed Everything

  A big game changer is drones: Small cheap air surveillance with 4K cameras that are difficult to counter. Both Russia and NATO are quickly learning the threat these devices represent on the battlefields of Ukraine, and no, I’m not talking about the exploding FPV drones that chase down soldiers. I suspect most of those videos are fake anyway.

  The real danger is in constant air based surveillance, 24/7, around the clock, always watching. Maneuver warfare requires the swift relocation of larger units without the enemy being aware; with cheap drones this is no longer possible. All large scale troop movements can be predicted and countered using nothing more than a handful of $3000 toys.

  This is why Russia shifted quickly into attrition tactics. Now, they push their front line forward a few hundred yards at a time instead of trying to gain miles of territory in wild offensives. The DoD thinks maneuver tactics are still viable, but in order to successfully maneuver without the enemy’s knowledge you must fully control the skies. With drones, no one controls the skies anymore. It’s a free-for-all.

  Infrastructure And Resource Devastation Is More Important Than Killing The Enemy

  In 2022 during the Russian pull back many pro-Ukraine pundits cheered, proclaiming the war would soon be over. I warned in multiple articles that Russia was not retreating from the battle, only establishing a more solid front. I also predicted that Russia would immediately begin systematic bombardment of Ukraine’s utility grids. This is exactly what happened less than a month later.

  I don’t think many in the west are aware of the level of destruction that has been dealt to Ukraine’s infrastructure. The majority of the country is without power for large parts of the day and the situation is only getting worse. Their water resources are limited at best. Only the grids serving major cities like Kyiv are afforded repair, and these repairs are a band-aid.

  Patriots already plan for grid own scenarios, but they should also recognize the value of infrastructure attacks on an enemy that relies heavily on conventional logistics. Ukraine might be brought down, not by invading troops but by failing electricity and lack of clean water.

  Smaller, Faster And More Discreet – The Future Of Combat

  Interestingly, commanders in Ukraine on both sides are beginning to rely more and more on small units with a limited footprint. The name of the game in war today is “small signature” deployments. This is the use of squads to reduce visual and thermal signature and prevent targeting by drones or artillery. In other words, massive conventional armies are turning to guerrilla tactics as a way to survive and achieve successful strikes on defensive positions.

  I could actually foresee an era when wars are ONLY fought using small teams of soldiers, supported by a host of drones and long range ordnance. Tanks are mostly useless now. Traditional air power is being slowly negated. Battalion sized movements are impossible without being quickly countered and even platoon sized elements are identified before they ever reach their destination.

  Instead of moving in big groups that are easily targeted the Russians in particular are relying on a flurry of small unit attacks over a wide area using fast transportation (like motorcycles). They hit multiple targets along hundreds of miles of the front, forcing the Ukrainians to stretch out their defenses and resources. Then, they hit a vital area with a larger force once a weakness is identified. This is usually the way in which guerrillas fight; now everyone is doing it.

  The Time Of The Guerrilla Is At Hand

  The events in Ukraine showcase the many weaknesses of conventional armies.  American patriots have been told for decades that any attempt to defend ourselves against an authoritarian government backed by a technologically advanced military machine is pointless. Our “AR15s can’t do anything against an F-16,” right?

  We are now discovering the opposite is true. F-16’s are useless to Ukraine. What their soldiers want more than anything right now is more training for recruits, more thermal and night vision devices, more drones, better optics for their rifles and better gear for front line fighters. Jets and tanks are a novelty.

  With the proliferation of cheap drones, for the first time ever civilian defense groups now have the ability to put eyes (and advanced weapons) in the sky. They can track larger enemy elements and prevent surprise attacks that anti-insurgent forces rely on. That is to say, guerrillas will still have the element of surprise but traditional forces will not.

  Going Underground – The Return Of The Tunnel Rats

  Americans first encountered intricate underground defenses in the Pacific Theater during WWII (Okinawa being the most impressive example). We saw them again in North Korea and yet again in Vietnam. In Ukraine the method is starting to become more common.

  I would argue that future wars will be launched mainly from underground installations and tunnel systems. Drones rely on exploiting three-dimensional movement and are useless in enclosed spaces. This is a method that patriots need to adopt. Tunnel building will be a mainstay for decades to come.

  Every Aspect Of War Will Now Be Televised

  As long as the internet is a functional part of everyday life wars will now be recorded on an intimate scale never seen before. Every battle, every tiny movement or firefight, every win and every loss and every casualty will be documented. This means that web-based propaganda will become integral to any war effort.

  In other words, governments will seek to implant fake news and fake video footage everywhere. The goal will be to make the fantasy indiscernible from fact and confuse the public on what is actually happening. This condition is brutally apparent in the Ukraine war where at least half the population of the west still thinks Ukraine is “winning.” The more duped the population, the easier it will be to convince them to support ongoing operations and even conscription.

  The information war will become more important than the actual war. Patriots will have to understand how to deconstruct propaganda as much as they will have to know how to shoot.

  Tyler Durden
  Sat, 08/03/2024 – 23:20

• Mapping The Number Of US Billionaires In Each State
  Mapping The Number Of US Billionaires In Each State

  The U.S. has the most billionaires in the world by a wide margin, more than twice the number of the next-highest country in the world – China. But where do they all live?

  Visual Capitalist’s Pallavi Rao maps the number of billionaires in each state, as of 2023, with data sourced from Forbes, accessed via World Population Review.

  

  Ranked: U.S. States By Billionaire Residents

  There are 760 billionaires in the U.S., of which 472 (62%) live in just four states: California, New York, Florida, and Texas.

  California and New York are the only states with 100+ billionaires. In fact, they also have more billionaires than every other country in the world, except for China.

  Rank	State	Billionaires
  1	California	186
  2	New York	135
  3	Florida	78
  4	Texas	73
  5	Illinois	23
  6	Massachusetts	22
  7	Georgia	18
  8	Pennsylvania	18
  9	Nevada	17
  10	Connecticut	13
  11	Washington	13
  12	Colorado	12
  13	Washington D.C.*	11
  14	Maryland	11
  15	Tennessee	11
  16	Arizona	11
  17	Michigan	11
  18	Oklahoma	8
  19	Wisconsin	7
  20	Missouri	7
  21	Virginia	7
  22	Ohio	7
  23	Wyoming	6
  24	Arkansas	6
  25	Utah	6
  26	North Carolina	6
  27	New Jersey	5
  28	Montana	4
  29	Minnesota	4
  30	Nebraska	3
  31	Oregon	3
  32	Indiana	3
  33	Hawaii	2
  34	Mississippi	2
  35	Kansas	2
  36	South Dakota	1
  37	Rhode Island	1
  38	Maine	1
  39	Idaho	1
  40	Iowa	1
  41	Kentucky	1
  42	Louisiana	1
  43	South Carolina	1
  44	Alabama	1
  N/A	Total	760

  Fourteen states, led by the aforementioned Florida and Texas, have double-digit billionaire populations. Washington D.C.’s billionaire population is also in the double-digits (11) and because of its size, has the most billionaires per capita.

  As of 2023, seven states (Alaska, Delaware, New Hampshire, New Mexico, North Dakota, Vermont, and West Virginia) have zero billionaires.

  Alabama didn’t have a billionaire until last year when Great Southern Wood founder and CEO James Rane became one. The company is one of the largest in the world for manufacturing pressure-treated wood.

  Billionaires are also on the move recently. America’s richest person, Elon Musk (worth $260 billion) lives in Texas, after bidding goodbye to the California in 2020. This year, Jeff Bezos moved to Miami after three decades in Washington, a relocation that could save him $600 million in taxes.

  Tyler Durden
  Sat, 08/03/2024 – 22:45

• The Civil War Didn't 'Settle' The Question Of State Secession
  The Civil War Didn’t ‘Settle’ The Question Of State Secession

  By Brian McGlinchey at Stark Realities

  Secessionist inclinations are on the rise in the United States, and are sure to intensify after Nov. 5 regardless of which party prevails. When that happens, you can expect the accompanying discourse will be peppered with assertions that states have no right to secede, with many declaring the question was “settled” by the Civil War.

  The embedded contention that legal and moral questions are rightly and permanently settled by the outcome of a mass-murder contest is absurd on its face. However, the notion is so widely and casually embraced that it invites an emphatic response. It also serves as a starting point to address other flawed forms of secession skepticism.

  Written by a socialist in 1892, the Pledge of Allegiance attempts to program Americans into internalizing a falsehood: that the United States is “one nation, indivisible.” On that score at least, the deeply-flawed pledge isn’t working on a large number of citizens.

  A YouGov poll taken earlier this year found substantial slices of both major parties would support their state’s departure from the union: 29% of Republicans and 21% of Democrats. Similarly, the five states in which secessionist yearning is highest represent a mixed bag of red and blue: Alaska (36%), Texas (31%), California (29%), New York (28%) and Oklahoma (28%). While 23% of all Americans want their state to secede, 28% would be content if other states did so.

  

  For now, the Lone Star State seemingly has the strongest separatist momentum. In a June victory for the Texas Nationalist Movement, the Republican Party of Texas adopted platform planks proclaiming the state’s right to secede, and urging the legislature to arrange a state referendum question on the issue in the next general election. Many other states have secession movements of their own, and this July alone saw the launch of Free Louisiana and NHEXIT Now, the latter representing a rebranded drive for an independent New Hampshire.

  It’s only natural that secession interest is highest in some of the reddest and bluest states, where citizens have the most to lose via the imposition of centralized federal dictates that emphatically clash with local preferences. Those anxieties over which party governs Washington, and the animosity between the two principal opposing camps, will only grow as Election Day nears and could skyrocket after the votes are counted.

  It shouldn’t be that way: As I wrote in January here at Stark Realities, “the intensity of our division springs from a federal government operating far beyond the limits of the Constitution — fueling a fight for control over powers that were never supposed to exist at the national level.” Sadly, that dynamic isn’t going to change anytime soon, which means secessionist impulses are sure to ratchet up when the returns pour in on Nov. 5. The only question is whether that ratcheting will be strongest in blue or red states.

  

  Either way, you’re sure to hear plenty of social media users, TV pundits and purported experts proclaiming that the question of whether states have the right to leave the union was “solved by the Civil War” — meaning that, since the seceding states’ armies were defeated, the answer is a firm “no.”

  As the Mises Institute’s Ryan McMaken wrote in Breaking Away: The Case for Secession, Radical Decentralization and Smaller Polities, “Those who invoke this phrase…are signaling that they believe any attempt at secession justifies military invasion and occupation of separatist territories.” No reasonable person would apply that blanket proscription on foreign peoples, so it’s all the more strange to see Americans apply it to their fellow citizens — particularly when you consider that America is itself the product of secession.

  As stated in the Declaration of Independence, “Governments are instituted among men, deriving their just powers from the consent of the governed…whenever any form of government becomes destructive of [inalienable rights], it is the right of the people to alter or to abolish it and to institute new government.” The idea that the federal government’s conquest of seceding states in the mid-1800s would somehow obliterate that right is as un-American as it is illogical.

  

  Though the Civil War has conditioned many Americans to associate secession with war — and to reflexively recoil from it on that basis — secession is not an inherently violent proposition. Secessionists don’t seek to destroy a government, only to remove themselves from its domain, consistent with their right of self-determination.

  As showcased in dozens of separations around the world since 1776, peaceful secession is a gentle remedy for political incompatibility. The determination of whether a secession is peaceful or not is ultimately in the hands of the incumbent central government, and not those who seek to leave its control.

  Some Americans struggle to approach the secession question with intellectual honesty because their thinking is fogged by feelings of vindication associated with the Civil War — feelings compounded by the widespread myth that the war was entirely about slavery and was therefore nothing less than a battle between good and evil.

  To many, the very idea of secession is associated with sinister motives, even though the United States and many other countries came into being via secession, with no malicious intent.

  Looking back to the run-up to the Civil War, slavery-abolitionists themselves championed secession, pushing for northern states to abandon the union. They sought not only to distance their states from slavery, but to undermine the institution by negating northern states’ legal obligation to send runaway slaves back to their masters.

  

  Not that long before launching his war of choice that killed upwards of 850,000 soldiers and civilians for the paramount purpose of preserving the union, Abraham Lincoln himself vigorously endorsed the universal right of secession in an 1848 speech:

  “Any people anywhere…have the right to rise up and shake off the existing government, and form a new one that suits them better…Nor is this right confined to cases in which the whole people of an existing government, may choose to exercise it. Any portion of such people that can, may revolutionize, and make their own, of so much of the territory as they inhabit.”

  Venturing beyond the paper-thin “might makes right” Civil War argument, secession skeptics also point to the Supreme Court’s 1869 ruling in Texas v White. Though that case centered on a dry financial issue, it hinged on whether Texas was still part of the United States even after it declared its secession.

  In a 5-3 decision, the court asserted that Texas had never really left the union because neither it nor any other state has the power to do so. In his majority opinion, Chief Justice Salmon Chase — a Lincoln appointee who may have been inclined to affirm the justness of the astoundingly bloody Civil War four years after it ended — wrote:

  “The union between Texas and the other States was as complete, as perpetual, and as indissoluble as the union between the original States. There was no place for reconsideration or revocation, except through revolution or through consent of the States.”

  To justify that conclusion, Chase embraced the fiction that the United States is a monolithic entity, one that vaguely “began among the colonies, and grew out of common origin, mutual sympathies, kindred principles, similar interests, and geographical relations.”

  Chase’s opinion places great weight on the Constitution-preceding Articles of Confederation’s statement that “the union shall be perpetual.” His argument also relies heavily on the Constitution’s preamble, which refers to the states’ desire to form a “more perfect union.”

  Through mere juxtaposition of the two phrases, Chase would have you believe that a supposedly indestructible, one-nation monolith created under the Articles of Confederation (it wasn’t) was merely given a polish by the Constitution, rather than a complete reformation that required each state to affirmatively accede to the new arrangement. The Texas Nationalist Movement has concisely skewered Chase’s short-circuiting rationale:

  To reinforce his belief that the United States was a “perpetual union,” he had to assert the ludicrous argument that the United States Constitution was merely an amending document to the previous Articles of Confederation, citing the Preamble to the Constitution. He then had to ignore that it only took 9 States of the original 13 to ratify the Constitution of 1787 and that, had less than 13 States ratified, it would have destroyed the “perpetual union” allegedly created by the Articles of Confederation.

  As with so many other cases in the high court’s history, Texas v White was wrongly decided. However, even those who credit the decision must acknowledge that it left the secession door cracked ajar: In the passage quoted above, Chase offered an avenue of Supreme Court-sanctioned secession via “consent of the states,” though it’s unclear how that would be put into practice.

  Others who attempt to deny states’ right of secession point to the Constitution’s lack of a provision for a parting of ways. For example, while campaigning for the 2024 GOP presidential nomination, former South Carolina Governor Nicky Haley said, “Texas has talked about seceding for a long time. The Constitution doesn’t allow for that.”

  

  While the Constitution doesn’t address secession, it does have a provision that implicitly grants that power to the states. According to the 10th Amendment, “the powers not delegated to the United States by the Constitution, nor prohibited by it to the States, are reserved to the States respectively, or to the people.” Since the Constitution does not expressly deny the states of that power (nor delegate it to the central government), secession is reserved to the states.

  Even by itself, the word “delegated” further substantiates states’ right to secede, by underscoring that the United States was formed as a compact of independent states — with “states” used in a sense that puts Pennsylvania on par with Mexico or France. Those sovereign states created the federal government to serve them, only granting the new entity powers that James Madison described as “few and defined,” while the states retained powers that were “numerous and indefinite.”

  “Delegated” validates that the states are rightly the masters of the federal government they created, and should therefore be free to voluntarily exit the compact just as they voluntarily entered it. As historian Brion McClanahan argued in a 2015 speech, “Sovereignty can be delegated, but a delegation assumes the ability to rescind that power.”

  Speaking on the Constitution’s 50th anniversary, former president and statesman John Quincy Adams said:

  “If the day should ever come, (may Heaven avert it,) when the affections of the people of these states shall be alienated from each other; when the fraternal spirit shall give away to cold indifference, or collisions of interest shall fester into hatred…far better will it be for the people of the disunited states to part in friendship from each other, than to be held together by constraint.”

  One can debate whether the conditions Adams dreaded have fully descended or are merely imminent. Either way, when one also considers that the federal government is not only operating far beyond the bounds of the Constitution, but is also $35 trillion in debt and on an autopilot course for insolvency, the case for peaceful American secessions has never been stronger.

  * * *

  Stark Realities undermines official narratives, demolishes conventional wisdom and exposes fundamental myths across the political spectrum. Read more and subscribe at starkrealities.substack.com  

  

  Views expressed in this article are opinions of the author and do not necessarily reflect the views of ZeroHedge.

  Tyler Durden
  Sat, 08/03/2024 – 22:10

• These Are The World's Largest Silver-Producing Companies
  These Are The World’s Largest Silver-Producing Companies

  Silver is one of the world’s most precious metals, holding an important position as a tradeable commodity and an essential part of many industrial processes and necessary technologies such as the next-generation photovoltaics helping power the transition to clean energy.

  So, for this graphic, Visual Capitalist’s Alan Kennedy used data from the Silver Institute’s World Silver Survey 2024 to rank the top silver-producing companies of 2023.

  

  Who Produces the Most Silver in 2023? 

  In 2023, silver mining companies collectively produced 831 million ounces of silver with the top 20 companies contributing 43% of that total—371 million ounces.

  Here’s how this breaks down on a per-company basis:

  

  *Polymetal Intl. changed its name to Solidcore Resources following an acquisition in June 2024

  North America is home to 11 of the world’s top 20 silver mining companies, including Mexican company Fresnillo, which produced the most silver last year, at 54 million ounces.

  Silver Industry Trends

  Global production of silver dropped by 1% between 2022 and 2023, mainly driven by industry events that disrupted production, impacting several key silver-producing nations.

  For example, between Q2 and Q3 of 2023, industrial action saw the suspension of the Newmont Peñasquito mine, and Argentina, as a whole, produced a lower grade of silver than expected in 2023.

  However, many companies in smaller silver producers, such as Chile, have partially offset this loss through increased production.  

  Silver in 2024 

  Despite the challenges, there is hope for a potential production recovery from Mexican and U.S. mines in 2024. However, The Silver Institute expects total output from silver mining companies to fall by less than 1% again in 2024, with forecasts predicting an output of approximately 824 million ounces. 

  This expected production fall can be attributed to a drop in local production in Peru, where many productive mines have been temporarily closed.

  Tyler Durden
  Sat, 08/03/2024 – 21:35

• Hotez Calls For Police Deployment Against "Anti-Vaxxers"
  Hotez Calls For Police Deployment Against “Anti-Vaxxers”

  Authored by Paul Thacker via The Brownstone Institute,

  Social media went a little bonkers last week when an interview of Texas Children’s Hospital’s Dr. Peter Hotez began circulating with the Big Pharma insider calling for the United Nations and NATO to deploy security forces against “anti-vaxxers” in the United States. Dr. Hotez’s statements first appeared on the YouTube channel of an international pediatric conference that took place in Colombia, but the interview then jumped onto X.

  

  The Simposio Internacional de Actualización en Pediatría (International Symposium of Pediatric Updates) later removed the interview from YouTube although photos can still be found on Facebook.

  In clips of Hotez’s interview that continue to circulate on X, he claims “anti-vaxxers” caused hundreds of thousands of deaths in the United States. I uploaded one clip to my YouTube channel which you can watch here:

  What I’ve said to the Biden administration is, the health sector can’t solve this on its own. We’re going to have to bring in Homeland Security, the Commerce Department, Justice Department to help us understand how to do this.

  I’ve said the same with…I met with [WHO general director] Dr. Tedros last month…to say, I don’t know that the World Health Organization can solve this on our own. We need the other United Nations agencies—NATO. This is a security problem, because it’s no longer a theoretical construct or some arcane academic exercise. Two hundred thousand Americans died because of anti-vaccine aggression, anti-science aggression.

  And so, this is now a lethal force…and now I feel as a pediatric vaccine scientist…it’s important, just as important for me to make new vaccines, to save lives. The other side of saving lives is countering this anti-vaccine aggression.

  Hotez has long been noted for promoting controversial and sometimes false statements about the Covid pandemic and then accusing his critics of “anti-science.”

  

  But this is not the first time Hotez has called for police to deploy against those who disagree with his views on science. Last October, Scientific American platformed Hotez as an expert on “anti-science” and didn’t bat an eyelid when he said support for scientists would require intervention by the Department of Homeland Security and the creation of a federal interagency task force.

  

  Dr. Hotez again called for deploying federal police to support science during a grand rounds lecture he gave in August 2021. A whistleblower at Texas Children’s Hospital sent me the lecture where Hotez said the “disinformation empire” threatened America and would need to be dealt with by the Department of Homeland Security:

  The problem is the disinformation empire is so vast and pervasive that until we do something more definitive to get to the source of the disinformation and stop it, it’s not going to have that much of an impact. And that’s where everybody moves away from me.

  And I tend to be out on a…out on my own here.

  Earlier this year, Time Magazine named Hotez a “Science Warrior” and one of the 100 most influential people in global health.

  Republished from the author’s Substack

  Tyler Durden
  Sat, 08/03/2024 – 21:00

• Skies Are Lit Up Over Northern Israel As Hezbollah Fires Dozens Of Rockets
  Skies Are Lit Up Over Northern Israel As Hezbollah Fires Dozens Of Rockets

  2045ET: Hezbollah in the overnight hours has launched dozens of rockets toward Beit Hillel settlement in northern Israel, possibly over 50, triggering Israel’s Iron Dome anti-air defense system.

  The sky has been lighting up over northern Galilee Sunday morning with the intercepts, as several social media videos show.

  The Iron Dome is truly a Technological Marvel. pic.twitter.com/egMH5GY4IF

  — OSINTdefender (@sentdefender) August 3, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Despite many intercepts, Israeli media is reporting that there were several impacts as a result, and any potential casualties are as yet unknown, but multiple fires reportedly broke out in northern Israel.

  Steady cross-border rocket fire has been going since Friday, as Reuters reported: “Hezbollah said it had fired a surface-to-air missile at an Israeli warplane flying in Lebanese airspace overnight and forced it to turn back. Its forces also carried out two artillery attacks and two rocket strikes at military positions in northern Israel, it said.”

  

  But so far all of this is looking limited and contained, amid continued fears that things could slide into all-out war in the region involving Iran.

  Meanwhile, speculation has abounded as to potential increased Russian defense support to Iran amid the standoff with Israel in the wake of Hamas leader Ismail Haniyeh’s assassination this week…

  BREAKING:

  🇷🇺🇮🇷 Mass transport of weapons from Russia to Iran

  Non-stop flights of IL-96 cargo planes from Russia to Iran, presumably carrying heavy military hardware pic.twitter.com/p8NMqv8Vw8

  — Megatron (@Megatron_ron) August 3, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  * * *

  The US embassy in Lebanon has issued an alert warning American citizens to exit Lebanon on “any ticket available” as the likelihood of a major war between Israel and Hezbollah as well as Iran grows.

  A series of international and Western airlines have suspended service to the region as a the specter of all-out war looms. The embassy said that though there have been service stoppages and cancellations, “commercial transportation options to leave Lebanon remain available.”

  

  “We encourage those who wish to depart Lebanon to book any ticket available to them, even if that flight does not depart immediately or does not follow their first-choice route,” the embassy stated.

  Starting in late June, Biden’s special envoy Amos Hochstein warned the Lebanese government, “The US won’t be able to hold Israel back if the situation on the border continues to escalate and that Hezbollah needs to indirectly negotiate with Israel instead of ratcheting up tensions.”

  Hezbollah Secretary General Hasan Nasrallah has warned of a “new phase” in the war following an Israeli airstrike targeting and killing his top military chief Fuad Shukr this week.

  Iran has already signaled what this will look like, with its Permanent Mission to the United Nations on Saturday saying in a statement to CBS that the group is expected to strike deeper inside Israel and that it will no longer confine itself to military targets.

  The Iranian statement outlined that so far Hezbollah has limited itself according to an “unwritten understanding” or status quo engagement with Israel “confining their actions to border areas and shallow zones, targeting primarily military objectives.”

  “However, the [Israeli] regime’s attack on the Dahieh [neighborhood] in Beirut and the targeting of a residential building marked a deviation from these boundaries,” the statement added. 

  “We anticipate that, in its response, Hezbollah will choose both broader and deeper targets, and will not restrict itself solely to military targets and means,” the spokesperson emphasized.

  The Department of State has raised its Lebanon Travel Advisory from Level 3: Reconsider Travel to Level 4: Do Not Travel. We recommend that U.S. citizens enroll in the Smart Traveler Enrollment Program (STEP) to receive alerts. https://t.co/vE02vvquJg pic.twitter.com/7baXCRN5oV

  — U.S. Embassy Beirut (@usembassybeirut) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  If the situation begins to spiral, it is likely the US military will use its significant naval assets in the Mediterranean to begin evacuating American nationals from Lebanon. Often the first place Israel bombs is Beirut’s lone international airport.

  On Friday night US Defense Secretary Lloyd Austin ordered additional navy cruisers, destroyers and a fighter squadron to deploy to the Middle East.

  Tyler Durden
  Sat, 08/03/2024 – 20:45

• Goldman Says Mid-Atlantic Power Prices "Finally Caught Up To AI Data Center Load Growth Story" 
  Goldman Says Mid-Atlantic Power Prices “Finally Caught Up To AI Data Center Load Growth Story” 

  Marylanders and residents in surrounding states should brace for rising power bills due to capacity constraints on the regional power grid and the increasing peak load from new AI data centers (read: here). This combination creates a perfect storm of continued utility bill inflation, which will only pressure cash-strapped households in the years ahead. 

  On Friday, Goldman published a note about Tuesday’s PJM Interconnection power capacity auction for the 2025-26 planning year (June 1st, 2025, to May 31st, 2026). The note revealed a massive surge in capacity prices: 

  “The price across the RTO (see map below) was $269.92/MW- day. This is more than an 800 percent increase from the most recent auction (which cleared at $28.92/MW-day), and also a new record (the previous high was $174.11/MW-day for the 2010- 2011 planning year).”

  “In addition to procuring the required capacity across the PJM RTO region, PJM’s auction also sets targets for specific zones or LDAs (Locational Deliverability Areas) based on transmission limitations. The auction failed to procure the required level of capacity in two zones (Dominion or “DOM” and Baltimore Gas and Electric or “BGE “) which cleared at the applicable caps of $444.26/MW-day (DOM) and $466.35/MW-day (BGE). PJM has not yet published the extent of the shortfall in the two zones.”

  The critical point from the report:

  “After a series of auction delays and relatively low clears (see chart below), PJM capacity prices appear to have finally caught up with the generative AI data center load growth story that has been central to parts of PJM.”

  

  Goldman warned that more power capacity would be needed for grid stability. However, any new capacity could take years to come online, which essentially means, as the analysts point out, “higher prices are here to stay.” 

  “All else equal, the market expects the next few auctions to all clear at more robust prices, especially since the signal is clear – PJM needs more reliable capacity to manage the potential demand growth. Given the lead time for new-build capacity (4-5 years given current market dynamics and supply chain issues) the expectation is that generally higher capacity prices are here to stay.” 

  Goldman noted:

  “The higher prices are expected to delay retirements, potentially spur more focus on coal-to-gas conversion for units that were at risk of retirement due to carbon related costs, and to also incentivize new construction.” 

  Meanwhile, as we’ve previously noted, “Maryland “Can’t Import Itself Out Of Energy Crisis” Amid Urgent Need To Boost In-State Power Generation …”

  Let’s remember Maryland’s power crisis stems from ‘green’ policies pushed by progressive lawmakers in Annapolis who have banned any new fossil fuel power generation in the state. With AI data centers coming online, the result in the next 3-5 years will be crushing power bill costs to everyday voters. 

  Maryland voters need to make leftist lawmakers in Annapolis accountable for failed green policies that sends power costs higher.

  Tyler Durden
  Sat, 08/03/2024 – 20:25

• DHS Puts Migrant Parole Program On Hold Amid Alleged Fraud In Application Process
  DHS Puts Migrant Parole Program On Hold Amid Alleged Fraud In Application Process

  Authored by Aldgra Fredly via The Epoch Times,

  The Biden administration’s parole program allowing tens of thousands of migrants from four countries into the United States has been put on hold after an internal report found “massive fraud” in its application process.

  

  The Department of Homeland Security (DHS) said Friday that it has temporarily stopped granting new travel authorizations “out of an abundance of caution,” while it reviews sponsor applications.

  The pause was initiated after an internal report by U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services (USCIS) found the use of fraudulent information in thousands of application forms filed by sponsors. The report was obtained by the Federation for American Immigration Reform (FAIR).

  A DHS spokesperson said in a statement to news outlets that the department takes any abuse of the program’s application processes “very seriously.”

  “DHS has review mechanisms in place to detect and prevent fraud and abuse in our immigration processes,” the spokesperson said.

  “Where fraud is identified, U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE) will investigate and litigate applicable cases in immigration court and make criminal referrals to the Department of Justice,” it added.

  The CHNV parole program was set in motion for Venezuelans by President Joe Biden in October 2022 and was intended to help ease the number of illegal border crossings by flying people from certain countries directly to the United States. It was expanded in January 2023 to include Cuba, Haiti, and Nicaragua.

  The program allows up to 30,000 migrants from the four countries into the United States each month, provided they meet certain conditions, including having a sponsor in the United States who will provide them financial support.

  DHS promised to resume application processing “as quickly as possible, with appropriate safeguards,” noting that it had not identified “issues of concern” relating to the screening and vetting of beneficiaries.

  “The multi-layered screening and vetting for advanced travel authorizations is separate from the screening of U.S.-based supporters,” the DHS spokesperson said.

  Internal Report Finds Fraudulent Information

  An internal report by USCIS found the use of fake social security numbers (SSNs) and false phone numbers in application forms. It found that some phone numbers were not standardized U.S. phone numbers and some had 11 digits.

  In one instance, a sponsor’s phone number appeared in more than 2,000 forms submitted by 200 sponsors. The report found that 100 physical addresses were used in more than 19,000 application forms.

  The report stated that 100,948 forms were filed by 3,218 serial sponsors, indicating the repeated use of the same sponsors in multiple forms. It also found that 24 out of 1,000 most used SSNs belonged to a deceased person.

  FAIR said the report was based on a review conducted by USCIS of more than 2.6 million sponsor application forms received by the agency as of April 17.

  These applications were submitted electronically and reviewed by personnel “who simply deem the application sufficient.” Out of the total applications received, nearly 529,000 applications were approved and 118,000 were rejected.

  Rep. Mark Greene (R-Tenn.), chair of the House Homeland Security Committee, called on the Biden administration to terminate the parole program immediately.

  Greene said DHS’s pause on the program “vindicates every warning” the committee had issued about the program.

  “This is exactly what happens when you create an unlawful mass-parole program,” he said in a statement.

  House Speaker Mike Johnson (R-La.) criticized the Biden administration’s move to implement the program and urged it be “shut it down permanently.”

  “This program should have never existed in the first place. It’s just another way the Biden-Harris Administration has welcomed hundreds of thousands of aliens into our country, unchecked,” he stated on X.

  At least 494,799 migrants from Cuba, Haiti, Nicaragua, and Venezuela have been allowed entry into the country under the administration’s CHNV parole program through June 2024, according to U.S. Customs and Border Protection.

  Florida and Texas have received the most parole participants.

  Tyler Durden
  Sat, 08/03/2024 – 19:50

• Waves Of Ukraine Civilians Flee As Russia Makes Steady Gains In East
  Waves Of Ukraine Civilians Flee As Russia Makes Steady Gains In East

  Regional and international sources, including Reuters, continue to report on Russian forces making steady gains in Ukraine’s east. But now these gains are coming so rapidly that Ukrainian civilians are having to hastily flee their homes amid the onslaught. 

  Reuters for example speaks of a “wave of people fleeing Russian advances on several fronts in the eastern region of Donetsk, as Moscow batters” steadily across Ukraine’s defensive front lines.

  

  “Pressing home their advantages in manpower and weapons, Russian forces have fought their way towards major towns and supply routes in pursuit of their goal of full control of Ukraine’s industrialized and mineral-rich Donbas,” the report continues.

  Ukrainian officials have of late admitted that Russia has almost captured and solidified its hold over all of Donetsk Oblast. President Zelensky on Friday acknowledged Pokrovsk sector to be scene of the “most severe battles” and now a prime target for Moscow. According to the latest gains:

  One recent advance has allowed Russia to open a salient only 20 km (12 miles) from Pokrovsk, an important logistical hub and still home to about 60,000 people. Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelenskiy said on Thursday that Pokrovsk was now Russia’s main target.

  Moscow has claimed control of four villages east of Pokrovsk in the last week. Ukraine did not comment on those claims.

  Russian soldiers have reached the edge of Toretsk, where the regional governor said a week ago that only 3,500 people were left, just over 10% of the prewar population. More have since been evacuated by authorities and humanitarian organizations.

  Russian Telegram channels report a drone attack on the Slavyansk-EKO refinery, Ilsky oil refinery, and a bitumen plant in Russia’s Krasnodar region last night.

  Locals report multiple explosions and fires. According to eyewitnesses, the explosions did not stop for more than 30… pic.twitter.com/oyXBVg9eW3

  — Anton Gerashchenko (@Gerashchenko_en) April 27, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  As for offensive actions, Kiev as appeared somewhat helpless on key front lines in the east, and so instead has chosen to continue escalating its highly provocative cross-border operations. 

  On Saturday Russian officials said that some 55 drones were launched against the Rostov region, with at least 36 of them being intercepted.

  But reportedly a number of targets still suffered damage. Ukraine says it successfully degraded Russian military capabilities across three regions, including strikes on an airfield and fuel depots.

  In addition to making Russia’s Morozovsk Airbase completely uninhabitable last night, at least 6 Ukrainian attack drones successfully struck a large Russian fuel storage depot in Rostov Oblast, setting several storage tanks ablaze. pic.twitter.com/r6q6QGuNm8

  — OSINTtechnical (@Osinttechnical) August 3, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Local Russian officials confirmed fires at tanks at a fuel storage depot in the Kamensky district of Rostov on Saturday. Belgorod also saw oil storage depots on fire, but the blaze was quickly extinguished.

  Rostov oblast governor said some civilian infrastructure was damaged, announcing on Telegram, “At the moment we have recorded damage to the windows in several social facilities, including schools and kindergartens, as well as in residential houses and industrial premises.” 

  At this point is has become clear that no matter how many weapons the West pours into Ukraine’s military, it is Russia’s ability to overwhelm the front with more manpower and artillery ammo that is making all the difference.

  Tyler Durden
  Sat, 08/03/2024 – 19:15

• San Francisco Proposes Student Loan Forgiveness Fund For First Responders
  San Francisco Proposes Student Loan Forgiveness Fund For First Responders

  Authored by Summer Lane via The Epoch Times,

  The San Francisco Board of Supervisors this week approved an ordinance establishing a student loan forgiveness program for first responders in the city, if voters approve the measure during the November election.

  

  The ordinance, sponsored by Supervisors Ahsha Safaí, Matt Dorsey, and Shamann Walton, will allow voters to decide if the city’s administrative code should be amended for the purpose.

  The fund would pay outstanding student loans and job-related educational training expenses for first responders employed by the city, according to the proposal.

  It would apply to members of the police, fire, and sheriff’s departments. Paramedics, registered nurses, 911 dispatchers, and emergency supervisors and coordinators would also qualify, per the ordinance.

  During a rules committee meeting July 22, Safaí, who is running for mayor this year, said staffing shortages among first responders in the city had become a “dire situation.” He also described the public safety and healthcare system in San Francisco as “severely strained.”

  “We need creative incentives to prevent a catastrophic breaking point and ensure that we can attract and retain excellent, qualified candidates to serve our city’s public safety ecosystem,” he said.

  Safaí said the ordinance, if passed, would go into effect Jan. 1, 2025.

  To qualify, candidates would also have to be employed for at least three years, he said.

  “These are all the people we count on every single day, and we must prioritize proper staffing levels,” he said.

  According to a letter from the city controller’s office in July, funding for the program would be appropriated by the mayor and the board of supervisors or private donations.

  According to Safaí, the ordinance’s goal is to build the loan forgiveness and job training fund to $25 million and provide up to $25,000 in loan forgiveness and job training for each qualifying employee.

  The ordinance needs more than 50 percent approval from voters to pass.

  Tyler Durden
  Sat, 08/03/2024 – 18:40

• Kamala Harris's Husband Admits To Cheating On 1st Wife With Homewrecker Nanny, Knocking Her Up
  Kamala Harris’s Husband Admits To Cheating On 1st Wife With Homewrecker Nanny, Knocking Her Up

  Less than a week after people were snickering over Kamala Harris’ husband Doug Emhoff taking a SoulCycle class with “a gay couple friend” in West Hollywood when he learned of President Biden’s decision to step out of the 2024 race – the Daily Mail wants us to know that Emhoff cheated on his first wife Kerstin with their blonde nanny, Najen Naylor, who also taught at their children’s private school.

  

  Emhoff’s cheating ‘scandal’ is said to be causing “panic in Harris’s campaign.”

  

  According to the report:

  Emhoff, 59, and movie producer ex-wife Kerstin, 57, ended their 16-year marriage in 2009 when she discovered the affair, the sources said. Their daughter Ella was 10 and son Cole was 15 at the time.

  Sources claimed that after the affair, Naylor had to leave her job as a teacher at The Willows, an elite private elementary school in Culver City, California, where she had been teaching the Emhoff children and moonlighting as a nanny for the couple.

  Employment records obtained by DailyMail.com show Naylor worked at The Willows in 2009. She is friends on Facebook with current staff. -Daily Mail

  A close friend with knowledge of the affair and pregnancy told the Mail that Naylor didn’t keep the child – however a mysterious baby girl named Brook appeared on her social media feed in 2009, the year the baby would have been born.

  

  Emhoff admitted to the affair, telling CNN‘s Edward-Isaac Dovere, “During my 1st marriage, Kerstin and I went through some tough times on account of my actions. I took responsibility, and in the years since, we worked through things as a family and have come out stronger on the other side.”

  NEWS: @DouglasEmhoff to me:

  “During my 1st marriage, Kerstin and I went through some tough times on account of my actions. I took responsibility, and in the years since, we worked through things as a family and have come out stronger on the other side.” https://t.co/tTkiGEq6bY

  — Edward-Isaac Dovere (@IsaacDovere) August 3, 2024

  Democrats on one of their own cheating:

  

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Tyler Durden
  Sat, 08/03/2024 – 18:05

• Judge Chutkan Denies Trump's Motion To Dismiss Election Case, Sets Status Conference
  Judge Chutkan Denies Trump’s Motion To Dismiss Election Case, Sets Status Conference

  Authored by Tom Ozimek via The Epoch Times,

  U.S. District Judge Tanya Chutkan has scheduled a mid-August status conference in the classified documents case against former President Donald Trump, while denying his legal team’s motion to dismiss the indictment.

  

  The status conference, set for Aug. 13 in a Washington, D.C., federal courthouse, will address procedural matters and help determine the next steps in the proceeding, reads an order signed by Chutkan on Aug. 3.

  Chutkan ordered both the prosecution and the defense to submit a joint status report by Aug. 9, which will update the court on the progress of the case and can include such information as any agreements or disputes between the parties, as well as completed tasks and upcoming deadlines.

  In the same order, Chutkan granted a brief stay on the briefing deadlines for special counsel Jack Smith’s motion seeking to limit the evidence and arguments that Trump’s legal team can introduce during the trial, particularly those that prosecutors argue are irrelevant or prejudicial.

  Specifically, the government’s motion seeks to exclude evidence related to Trump’s claims of selective prosecution, alleged investigative misconduct, and speculative theories about foreign influence or undercover agents during the Jan. 6, 2021 breach of the U.S. Capitol. Smith has also asked the judge to disallow arguments meant to sway the jury with political rhetoric or potential consequences of a conviction, and to impose limits on cross-examination by the defense, including potential testimony on Trump’s state of mind or belief that the 2020 election was stolen.

  Chutkan’s order also denied without prejudice Trump’s motion to dismiss the indictment, which was filed on statutory grounds. Trump attorneys claim in their motion that Smith’s indictment improperly applied legal statutes, while arguing that the charges filed failed to demonstrate any acts of deceit or trickery necessary to establish conspiracy to defraud the United States, a key charge leveled against the former president in the case.

  Smith’s team charged Trump with four counts, including conspiracy to defraud the United States and to obstruct an official proceeding, in a case that centers on the former president’s actions after the 2020 election. Trump has pleaded not guilty, arguing that the case is motivated by political animus against him and is designed to thwart his 2024 presidential campaign.

  Trump counsel also argued in the motion to dismiss that Trump’s public comments and actions to contest the results of the 2020 election were lawful exercises of his First Amendment rights and do not amount to obstruction of a government function. They also claimed that the indictment lacked the specificity required to support claims of corrupt intent, while arguing that the legal statutes cited by Smith’s team in the indictment should be interpreted more narrowly to avoid criminalizing legitimate political activity.

  A request for comment sent to Trump counsel regarding Chutkan’s rejection of the motion to dismiss was not immediately returned.

  The renewed activity in the case, which had been put on hold pending Trump’s appeal to the U.S. Supreme Court on arguments he was immune from prosecution, occurred after the case was returned to Chutkan on Aug. 2, paving the way for further motions and hearings.

  The Supreme Court ruled on July 1 that Trump is entitled to some immunity, based on the high court’s finding that presidents have absolute immunity for actions within their “conclusive and preclusive constitutional authority,” presumptive immunity for official acts, and no immunity for unofficial acts.

  The Supreme Court justices sent the case back to district court, leaving it up to Chutkan to decide how to apply the ruling to the case.

  Tyler Durden
  Sat, 08/03/2024 – 17:30

• Central Banks Purchase Gold To Offset Their Own Monetary Destruction
  Central Banks Purchase Gold To Offset Their Own Monetary Destruction

  Authored by Daniel Lacalle via The Mises Institute,

  Why is the price of gold rising if the global economy is not in recession and inflation is allegedly under control? This is a question often heard in investment circles, and I will try to answer it.

  

  We must begin by clarifying the question. It is true that inflation is slowly decreasing, but we cannot say that it is under control. Let us remember that the latest CPI data in the United States was 3% annualized and that in the eurozone it is 2.6%, with eight countries publishing data above 3%, including Spain.

  This is why central banks need to give the impression of hawkishness and maintain rates or lower them very cautiously. However, monetary policy is far from being restrictive. Money supply growth is picking up, the ECB maintains its “anti-fragmentation mechanism,” and the Federal Reserve continues to inject money through the liquidity window. We can say, without a doubt, that monetary policy is beyond accommodative.

  At the end of this article, the price of gold is above $2,400 an ounce, up 16.5% between January and July 19, 2024. In the same period, gold has performed better than the S&P 500, the Stoxx 600 in Europe, and the MSCI Global. In fact, over the past five years, gold has outperformed not only the European and global stock markets, but also the S&P 500, with only the Nasdaq surpassing the precious metal. This is a period of alleged recovery and strong expansion of the stock markets. On the one hand, the market is discounting the central banks’ continued accommodative and expansionary policies, even possible high debt monetization, given the unsustainable deficits in the United States and developed countries. That is, the market assumes that the Federal Reserve and the ECB will not be able to maintain the reduction of their balance sheets in the face of rising debt and public spending in many economies. As a result, gold protects many investors against the erosion of the currency’s purchasing power, i.e., inflation, without the extreme volatility of Bitcoin. If the market discounts further monetary expansion to cover the accumulated deficits, it is normal for the investor to seek protection with gold, which has centuries of history as an alternative to fiduciary money and offers a low-volatility hedge against currency debasement.

  Another important factor is the central bank’s purchase of gold. JP Morgan is credited with the phrase “gold is money and everything else is credit.” All the world’s central banks include treasury bonds from countries that serve as global reserve currencies in their asset base. This allows central banks around the world to try to stabilize their currencies. When we read that a central bank buys or sells dollars or euros, it is not making transactions with physical currency but with government bonds. Hence, as the market price of government bonds has fallen 7% between 2019 and 2024, many of these central banks are facing latent losses from a slump in the value of their assets. What is the best way to strengthen a central bank’s balance sheet, thereby diversifying and reducing exposure to fiat currencies? Purchase gold.

  The rising purchases of gold by central banks are an essential factor justifying the recent increase in demand for the precious metal. Central banks, especially in China and India, are trying to reduce their dependence on the dollar or the euro to diversify their reserves. However, this does not mean full de-dollarization. Far from it.

  According to the World Gold Council, central banks have accelerated their gold purchases to more than 1,000 tonnes per year in 2022 and 2023. This means that monetary authorities account for almost a quarter of the annual demand for gold during a period when supply and production have not grown significantly. The ratio of output to demand stands at 0.9 in June 2024, according to Morgan Stanley.

  Global official gold reserves have increased by 290 net tonnes in the first quarter of 2024, the highest since 2000, according to the World Gold Council, 69% higher than the five-year quarterly average (171 metric tonnes).

  The People’s Bank of China and the Central Bank of India are the biggest buyers as they aim to balance their reserves, adding more gold to reduce loss-making exposure to government securities. According to Metals Focus, Refinitiv GFMS, and the World Gold Council, China has been increasing its gold purchases for seventeen months, and since 2022, it has shot up its reserves by 16%, coinciding with the increase in global polarization and the trade wars.

  That does not mean full de-dollarization, as the People’s Bank of China has 4.6% of its total reserves in gold. US Treasury bonds are the most important asset, accounting for more than 50% of the Chinese central bank’s assets. However, its goal is to raise gold reserves to at least 14%, according to local media. Thus, it would imply a significant annual purchase of gold for years.

  India’s central bank increased its gold reserves by 19 metric tonnes during the first quarter. Other central banks that are diversifying and buying more gold than ever are the National Bank of Kazakhstan, the Monetary Authority of Singapore, the Central Bank of Qatar, the Central Bank of Turkey, and the Central Bank of Oman, according to the sources cited above. During this period, both the Czech National Bank and the National Bank of Poland increased their gold reserves in Europe, reaching the highest level since 2021. In these cases, the aim is to balance the exposure in the asset base with more gold and less eurozone government bonds.

  The goal of this central bank trend is to increase the weight of an asset that does not fluctuate with the price of government bonds. It is not about de-dollarization but about balancing the balance sheet from the volatility created by their own misguided expansionary policies. For years, the policy of central banks has been to reduce their gold holdings, and now they must come back to logic and rebalance after suffering years of latent losses on their government bond holdings. In fact, one could say that the world’s central banks anticipate their own widespread erosion of the purchasing power of reserve currencies due to the saturation of fiscal and monetary policies, and for that reason, they need more gold.

  After years of thinking that money can be printed without limits and without creating inflation, monetary authorities are trying to return to logic and have more gold on their balance sheets. At the same time, many expected that the trade war between China and the United States and global polarisation would be reversed in the Biden years, and the opposite has happened. It has accelerated. Now, the latent losses in the sovereign bond asset portfolio are leading all these central banks to buy more gold and try to protect themselves from new bursts of inflationary pressures.

  In an era of high correlation between assets and perpetual monetary destruction, gold serves as a low volatility, low correlation, and strong long-term return addition to any prudent portfolio.

  Tyler Durden
  Sat, 08/03/2024 – 16:20

• Trump Says Mark Zuckerberg Called Him And Said He Won't Support Democrats
  Trump Says Mark Zuckerberg Called Him And Said He Won’t Support Democrats

  Authored by Steve Watson via modernity.news,

  Donald Trump has claimed that Meta owner Mark Zuckerberg reached out to him to let him know that he admires Trump’s reaction to the attempt on his life and that he won’t be supporting the Democrats in the upcoming election.

  

  Trump made the comments in a Fox News interview, noting “I was called by Mark Zuckerberg, yesterday, the day before… He actually announced that he can’t support a Democrat, because he can’t because he respected me for what I did that day.”

  Trump added that Zuckerberg told him that he thought the reaction of standing up after being shot was “brave,” even though Trump considers it just “a normal response.”

  Donald Trump has claimed that Meta owner Mark Zuckerberg reached out to him to let him know that he admires Trump’s “brave” reaction to the attempt on his life and that he won’t be supporting the Democrats in the upcoming election. Report here: https://t.co/lOR6OsFpBX pic.twitter.com/vSsKNXZ0x2

  — m o d e r n i t y (@ModernityNews) August 3, 2024

  Trump also claimed that Zuckerberg “actually apologized, he said he made a mistake,” for Facebook initially censoring the iconic image of Trump fist pumping the air.

  The ‘mistake’ apparently stemmed from the fact that someone altered the original image.

  “I believe Mark Zuckerberg,” Trump further declared, explaining “he called me a lot, they are working on it, and I think they fixed it, and he’s not doing what he did four years ago with the $500 million,” referring to huge grants Zuckerberg gave to Democrat supporting non profit organisations four years ago.

  Trump added that “no one called from Google” after it emerged that search results on the assassination attempt had been repressed.

  “Google has been very bad,” Trump continued, adding “they’ve been very irresponsible. And I have a feeling that Google’s going to be close to shut down, because I don’t think Congress is going to take it. I really don’t think so. Google has to be careful.”

  As we previously highlighted, Zuckerberg admitted that he believes Trump’s reaction after the failed assassination attempt was the one of the most “badass” things he’s ever witnessed.

  Your support is crucial in helping us defeat mass censorship. Please consider donating via Locals or check out our unique merch. Follow us on X @ModernityNews.

  Tyler Durden
  Sat, 08/03/2024 – 15:10

• Buffett Calls The Top: Berkshire Quietly Dumps Half Its Apple Shares Amid Unprecedented Selling Spree
  Buffett Calls The Top: Berkshire Quietly Dumps Half Its Apple Shares Amid Unprecedented Selling Spree

  When yesterday we said, when discussing Buffett’s ongoing liquidation of his Bank of America stake, that “Berkshire’s rising cash stockpiles merely reflect the firm’s inability to find deals in today’s overvalued and weak economic environment”, little did we know just how accurate that would be, because fast-forwarding just one day later we find that far from only dumping Bank of America, the 93-year-old Omaha billionaire had been busy quietly dumping his most iconic holding in an unprecedented selling spree that sent Berkshire’s cash pile soaring by a record $88 billion to an all time high $277 billion at the end of Q2.

  

  As shown in the chart below, in the second quarter (which ended June 30, and thus just two weeks after the Apple’s Developer Conference which took place on June 10 and which was – at least on the day of – a total bust), Berkshire sold a net $75.5 billion worth of stock, the bulk of which we now know, came from Buffett’s liquidation of half his Apple shares.

  

  While there was no 13F filed yet to go with the Berkshire’s 10Q, the company did provide a snapshot of its top holdings, revealing that as of June 30 it held only $84.2 billion in Apple stock, down sharply from $135.4 billion as of March 31 and $174.3 billion as of Dec 31, 2023. This translates into just 400 million shares of AAPL held as of June 30, down almost 50% from 789.4 million as of March 31 and 905.6 million as the end of 2023.

  

  The rest of Berkshire’s top 5 holdings (Bank of America, American Express, Coca Cola and Chevron) was left untouched in Q2, meaning that Buffett clearly decided that it was time for Apple to go (we have since learned that subsequent to the end of Q2, Buffett also started to dump a large portion of his Bank of America shares where he is the single largest shareholder).

  While Berkshire’s cash balance rose by a record $88 billion – where proceeds from the sale of Apple were the bulk of the new cash – the company also generated substantial cash from its own operations, and in Q2 Berkshire reported operating earnings of $11.6 billion, up from $10 billion for the same period a year ago.

  Berkshire has for years struggled to find ways to deploy its mountain of cash in a sluggish deal environment, lamenting the lack of cheap opportunities. At the firm’s annual shareholder meeting in May, Buffett said he wasn’t in a rush to spend “unless we think we’re doing something that has very little risk and can make us a lot of money.” It now appears that not only was Buffett not in a rush to spend, but taking advantage of the AI bubble, he has been aggressively liquidating his biggest holding.

  What is perhaps most remarkable is when and how Buffett dumped half his Apple holdings: Berkshire managed to offload a stunning $84 billion, or some 390 million shares, in AAPL at a time when the stock was appreciating rapidly, and especially after the meltup following the WWDC24 developer conference. In other words, the smart money was furiously dumping to retail, because as we noted at the time, hedge funds were certainly not buying tech at this time, as we reported on July 1 in “Getting Out Of Dodge: Hedge Funds Are Selling And Shorting Stocks At The Fastest Pace In Two Years“, almost as if they had notice that Buffett was dumping…

  

  It also makes one wonder if Buffett may not have had something to do with Apple’s bizarre performance after the WWDC24 conference. As a reminder, the kneejerk response to Tim Cook’s “earthshattering” reveal of a chatGPT Siri was a huge dud, with the stock dumping on the day of WWDC24.

  *APPLE EXTENDS DECLINE AMID DEVELOPER CONFERENCE PRESENTATION

  — zerohedge (@zerohedge) June 10, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  It wasn’t until the next day when, thanks to a relentless barrage of bullish sellside reports and kickstarted by a furious buyback order from the company itself, the stock proceeded to surge and regain the world’s most valuable slot from Microsoft. Almost makes one wonder if Buffett didn’t call in a few favors from his banker friends on this one…

  Finally, it’s not just AAPL that Buffett believes is overvalued and is aggressively dumping: the billionaire clearly believes the entire market is way expensive, and Berkshire bought back only $345 million of its own shares during the quarter, the lowest amount since the company changed its buyback policy in 2018. It’s hardly a surprise why:  as we noted in “Berkshire’s Growing Cash Pile Has A Hidden Message On Stocks” the Buffett Indicator has rarely signaled a more expensive market.

  

  Bottom line: unlike October 2008, when Buffett led the clarion call to “Buy American“, this time he is selling American at a never before seen pace.

  

  Are you?

  One thing we know, Buffett is fearful.

  

  Tyler Durden
  Sat, 08/03/2024 – 14:35

• New York State Supreme Court Blocks NYC Mayor Adams' Attempt To Pause Migrant Arrivals
  New York State Supreme Court Blocks NYC Mayor Adams’ Attempt To Pause Migrant Arrivals

  Authored by Michael Washburn via The Epoch Times,

  The New York State Supreme Court has denied New York City Mayor Eric Adams’s request for a preliminary injunction against busing illegal immigrants from Texas to the city.

  

  Adams, who faces challenges from New York City Comptroller Brad Lander and others in his reelection bid next year, filed a lawsuit against 17 charter bus companies in January.

  His goal was to stop the companies from busing migrants, many of them undocumented, from communities in Texas to New York. The mayor cited Social Services Law 149, which stipulates that any person “who knowingly brings, or causes to be brought, a needy person from out of state into this state for the purpose of making him a public charge” has an obligation “to convey such person out of state or support him at his own expense.”

  But in her nine-page July 29 ruling, Judge Mary V. Rosado found that the lawsuit was “unconstitutional.”

  The judge found that the matter was similar to a 1941 Supreme Court case, Edwards v. California, in which the Supreme Court found that an “essentially identical” law in California was unconstitutional for violating the Interstate Commerce Clause.

  She cited the ruling, saying, “The Court finds that it cannot grant the … request for injunctive relief as the merits of [the] claim are dubious at best given myriad constitutional concerns.”

  The state supreme court’s ruling is a setback for the Adams administration, whose legal moves had succeeded in getting one bus company, Roadrunner Charters Inc., to enter into an agreement to pause busing migrants to the city until the court reached a decision. Now, Roadrunner Charters and other bus services are free to continue transporting migrants to New York.

  Texas Gov. Greg Abbott quickly responded to the ruling on X,  formerly Twitter, writing, “Another WIN! … Until the Biden-Harris Administration secures the border, Texas will continue to send migrants to sanctuary cities.”

  Adams’s position was that dropping thousands of people in New York strained social services and the amount of available shelter space past the limit, costing more than $700 million. In a similar spirit to the busing lawsuit, the mayor has sought to enforce a 60-day limit on shelter space for asylum seekers in the city.

  In the past two years alone, a reported 205,000 migrants have arrived in the city, straining existing social services and prompting the Adams administration to set up more than 200 emergency shelter sites.

  The New York Civil Liberties Union (NYCLU), which filed an amicus brief in the case, argued that people have a right to come to New York regardless of their immigration status or whether they are self-sufficient and that the injunction Mayor Adams sought was unconstitutional.

  “The court has rightly rejected the city’s cruel attempt to limit newly arrived immigrants from traveling to and making a home here in New York City. Everyone, whether or not they are a citizen and no matter their resources, has the right to travel and reside anywhere within the United States—including Texas and New York,” Beth Haroules, a senior staff attorney at the NYCLU, said in a statement.

  “New Yorkers deserve better than xenophobia and discrimination masquerading as policy,” she continued, adding that the NYCLU looks forward to the court’s full dismissal of the mayor’s case.

  Challenge

  The mayor’s stance on migration has put him at odds with not only the NYCLU but also other figures in city government, including Lander.

  In recent months, the mayor’s rival in the coming primary election has made efforts to publicize what the comptroller believes are unduly harsh policies toward migrants.

  On May 9, Lander released the findings of an investigation into the mayor’s 60-day shelter limit for families seeking asylum. The comptroller’s office criticized the “haphazard” enforcement of the limit.

  The investigation found that, as of April 28, the Adams administration had issued 60-day notices to a total of 10,229 families with children. Altogether, it affected 19,497 adults and 18,149 children.

  The investigation found that the city did not provide clear and consistent guidelines and written notices to the people affected. In theory, families with newborns and pregnant women in their final trimester before giving birth were exempt from the limit, but the comptroller’s office charged that staff and contractors never received written instructions to this effect.

  Moreover, the investigation said that the city “specifically discriminated” against families with elementary-school-age children in making shelter placements. It added that the city subjected 37,000 people to repetitive screenings for alternatives to shelters, the investigation found.

  But Adams, whose administration has struggled to find accommodations for the massive influx, has said the city is faced with a serious crisis.

  During a town hall-style meeting in Manhattan in September 2023, the mayor described a crisis that surpassed anything he had seen in his career in public service.

  “Let me tell you something, New Yorkers, never in my life have I had a problem that I did not see an ending to—I don’t see an ending to this,” the mayor said.

  “This issue will destroy New York City,” he added.

  Neither the mayor’s office nor the NYCLU responded by publication time to a request for comment.

  Tyler Durden
  Sat, 08/03/2024 – 14:00

• Make Small Gov't Great Again? Musk Talks With Trump About "Gov't Efficiency Commission"
  Make Small Gov’t Great Again? Musk Talks With Trump About “Gov’t Efficiency Commission”

  The Biden-Harris Administration recently awarded $3.1 billion to the failed California High-Speed Rail project, which has already wasted $95 billion in taxpayer funds and is decades behind completion.

  Another federal government mega failure is the now stalled rollout of high-speed internet across rural America, which cost taxpayers tens of billions. Meanwhile, Elon Musk’s space internet company Starlink could’ve supplied internet via low-Earth-orbit satellites to millions of Americans in rural America for a fraction of the cost. But with the Biden admin at war with Musk over free speech platform X, the admin overlooked Starlink. 

  These examples result from a bloated, inefficient government plagued by rampant mismanagement and corruption, stifling the nation’s progress. The root cause is the absence of accountability and meritocracy among government workers on the managerial level. 

  If America intends to maintain its superpower status (and the ‘woke’ religion wants to destroy that), uphold the dollar’s dominance, and counter China’s expanding global dominance, then a swift and radical overhaul of the federal government is desperately needed.

  Musk has demonstrated through SpaceX, the global leader in reusable rocket launches, that private industry drives America’s dominance in space. NASA has since taken a back seat with SpaceX dominating rocket launches, while competing rocket companies, such as Jeff Bezos’ Blue Origin, recently unleashed lawfare against SpaceX to slow launches.

  Here’s a snapshot of rocket launches (using data from BryceTech) that shows Musk’s rocket company launched 525 spacecraft into orbit in the first quarter, far outpacing China and Russia. The data shows that SpaceX is beating entire nation-states. 

  

  The context above is crucial here, as Musk appeared on the Lex Fridman Podcast on Friday. During the conversation, they discussed government waste and the extent of its inefficiency. 

  

  Fridman told Musk, “I wish you could go into Washington for a week and be the head of the committee for making government smaller.” 

  Musk responded, “I have discussed with Trump the idea of a government efficiency commission … and I would be willing to be apart of that commission.” 

  The billionaire continued by saying that when you remove all the waste in government, well, “You’re attacking the Matrix at that point … Matrix will fight back.” 

  Additionally, Musk revealed 7 reasons why he’s voting for Donald Trump

  1. Elon Musk was astounded when Trump fist-pumped and shouted, “Fight!” shortly after getting shot in the face. “You can’t feign bravery in a situation like that,” he said.

  2. Musk seeks a leader “who is strong and courageous to represent the country.”

  3. He wants someone tough to deal with world leaders who are pretty tough themselves. “Poor guy [Biden] has trouble climbing a flight of stairs, and the other one’s first pumping after getting shot. This is no comparison.”

  4. Musk wants “a secure border. We don’t have a secure border.”

  5. He wants someone who can deliver “safe and clean cities.”

  6. Musk Thinks Trump is the better candidate to reduce spending. He’s concerned about this issue because “we’re currently spending at a rate that is bankrupting the country.”

  7. Musk aligns with Trump’s vision to cut bureaucratic bloat. He wants someone who will “reduce the size of government.”

  Pretty convincing list, wouldn’t you agree?

  Elon Musk Reveals 7 Reasons Why He’s Voting for Donald Trump

  1. @ElonMusk was astounded when Trump fist-pumped and shouted, “Fight!” shortly after getting shot in the face. “You can’t feign bravery in a situation like that,” he said.

  2. Musk seeks a leader “who is… pic.twitter.com/x63hBAmJx7

  — The Vigilant Fox 🦊 (@VigilantFox) August 3, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Watch the full interview below:

  Earlier this year, President Javier Milei of Argentina slashed tens of thousands of jobs in a “chainsaw-style” approach to reducing the state’s size.

  If Trump wins in November, Musk will help drain the swamp.

  Tyler Durden
  Sat, 08/03/2024 – 13:25

• Psychology Has Shifted And Confidence Has Broken
  Psychology Has Shifted And Confidence Has Broken

  Submitted by QTR’s Fringe Finance

  Just about two weeks after I wrote an article called “We Are On The Edge”, discussing how, if I had to pick only one trade to put on at the time, it would have been getting long volatility, we saw a massive spike in the VIX to end the week on Friday. Here’s how things looked early afternoon on Friday.

  

  In my opinion, Friday’s trading session marks the beginning of a scenario that I have been predicting would unfold for the better part of the last two years. Here’s what I think is playing out.

  Friday, we finally saw serious signs of an economy deep in recession emerge in the macroeconomic data, as hiring slowed significantly and the unemployment rate jumped to 4.3%.

  

  Normally over the last two years, this would have been shrugged off by the market.

  However, the tech and AI bubble had already started to burst about three weeks ago, and momentum into the numbers today was bearish instead of bullish.

  

  The news also came after a horrific overnight session in Japan, where stocks plummeted 6% on the back of the BOJ raising rates. Ken Cheung, director of foreign exchange strategy at Mizuho Securities, told CNN:

  “The BOJ made a hawkish shift after its surprising 15 (basis point) rate hike. Importantly, the BOJ flagged the inflation upside risks … and left the door open for further rate hikes. ”

  And both the jobs number and Japan’s market taking a shit came after a week of escalating tensions in the Middle East, with a direct conflict between Israel and Iran looking more likely.

  

  Source: AP

  And now we’re waiting on promised action from Iran and they don’t work during market hours. Which means the 72 hour “break” from trading over the weekend sure seems like a long time.

  But the biggest deal about Friday’s trading wasn’t the volatility in stocks; it was that, for the first time in the last two years, it feels like psychology has shifted and confidence has broken. Hell, Friday morning, Elizabeth Warren even took to X and, in a move that does far more harm than good, begged Jerome Powell to cut interest rates.

  

  You don’t need to take Game Theory or Human Psychology 101 at Wharton to know that pleading publicly for rate cuts isn’t a tactical solution; instead, it is taking a megaphone and telling the entire world that you are starting to panic.

  And panic, as Japan taught us overnight, is contagious.

  Think of all the weeks that have gone by with proclamations of a soft landing and a miraculous defeat of inflation while sparing the economy. They look like this:

  

  On this blog, we have long thought these proclamations were nonsense, but now we’re seeing proof. As I have been saying for two years, 5.5% rates on top of the largest debt bubble in history is nothing more than a ticking time bomb making its way through the economy’s plumbing.

  And now, at the worst possible time, that bomb is about to blow.

  It isn’t just Friday’s move in the market that is making me say this. Macro data related to housing, loan delinquencies, commercial real estate, and personal savings that I have been pointing out all year has continued to support the argument that the American consumer is broke and liquidity has run dry.

  And, as I have written in numerous articles over the last year, by the time the Fed moves to cut now, it isn’t going to matter. I’ve said that as we get closer and closer to the first rate cut, I continue to believe that this could be the ultimate “sell the news” event and could mark the beginning of a large correction in equity markets, depending on the Fed’s appetite for massive QE.

  ---

  🔥 70% OFF, THIS WEEKEND ONLY: Using the coupon entitles you to 70% off an annual subscription to Fringe Finance for as long as you wish to remain a subscriber: Get 70% off forever

  ---

  Moving rates from 5.5% to 4.5% in the middle of a market crash — as JP Morgan hurriedly publicly declared would now happen in the middle of the trading day on Friday — when everybody was already expecting those moves to begin with, does nothing. A good way to think about it is this: the market is crashing today with the expectations of rate cuts already baked into the cake.

  Now we have officially realized the rock and hard place we have been stuck between for the last two years. In one direction, the Fed has to make massive, decisive, easing moves that will see things like gold and Bitcoin move higher exponentially and will reopen the door to all of the inflationary forces we’ve been fighting over the last two years, like when Walter Peck shut down the power grid in Ghostbusters and released all the spirits back into New York City.

  

  On the other hand, the Fed can clench its teeth and go with the “planned” cut or leave rates where they are, and we can continue to watch Japan’s deflationary shockwave make its way through the U.S. and eventually into our bond market, where something exceptionally large will break — as James Lavish detailed recently on my podcast — potentially creating systemic risk or currency risk.

  Either way, there is no going back to the soft landing narrative now. With unemployment at 4.3% and the market in turmoil, the grim reality of needing to pay the piper is starting to rear its ugly head.

  As far as my portfolio allocation, nothing really changes too much because this is the scenario that I’ve expected for a while, right down to the fact that gold was rising Friday morning, ostensibly as a hedge against the volatility, and then quickly crashed as it became clear over-leveraged investors needed to raise cash. This sell-off that I predicted would come represents a buying opportunity in gold and miners because, as I have stated repeatedly, the next step from here is likely the Fed trying to jawbone and overshoot the mark with quantitative easing.

  The likely scenario short-term, in my opinion, is that the Fed will reiterate its already expected cuts and perhaps move them up timewise. In my opinion, this will not be enough to appease the market since cuts are already expected, and we will see this scenario of a further market drawdown into the Fed rate cut that I’ve been expecting and writing about for a year.

  Naturally, as stocks start to sell off, I look for “boring” names to continue to add: namely, defense stocks, consumer staples, utilities, commodities, and things of that nature.

  I’ve been saying for two years that you simply can’t raise rates the most in recent history at the fastest pace in recent history on the most debt outstanding in history and not face consequences. With Friday’s action in markets, it has become clear we have started to walk down the path of finding out what those consequences are going to be.

  It’s weekends like these that I’m glad my economic education comes from the Austrian school, and I’m not an intern working at Goldman Sachs or doing wealth management for AXA Equitable Advisors. Sometimes it feels like you’re pushing a rock up a hill, but every once in a blue moon, things make a little sense.

  Now read:

  • Fearless: Trump Survives 🔥 43,000 views

  • Gold Allocations Still “Very Low”, Silver A “Very Special Metal” 🔥 22,500 reads

  • Market Moves Like These “Have Not Ended Well” 🔥 22,300 reads

  • The Next Worst Thing 🔥 25,200 views

  • 3 Trump Trades

  

  QTR’s Disclaimer: Please read my full legal disclaimer on my About page here. This post represents my opinions only. In addition, please understand I am an idiot and often get things wrong and lose money. I may own or transact in any names mentioned in this piece at any time without warning. Contributor posts and aggregated posts have been hand selected by me, have not been fact checked and are the opinions of their authors. They are either submitted to QTR by their author, reprinted under a Creative Commons license with my best effort to uphold what the license asks, or with the permission of the author. This is not a recommendation to buy or sell any stocks or securities, just my opinions. I often lose money on positions I trade/invest in. I may add any name mentioned in this article and sell any name mentioned in this piece at any time, without further warning. None of this is a solicitation to buy or sell securities. These positions can change immediately as soon as I publish this, with or without notice and at any point I can be long, short or neutral on any position. You are on your own. Do not make decisions based on my blog. I exist on the fringe. The publisher does not guarantee the accuracy or completeness of the information provided in this page. These are not the opinions of any of my employers, partners, or associates. I did my best to be honest about my disclosures but can’t guarantee I am right; I write these posts after a couple beers sometimes. I edit after my posts are published because I’m impatient and lazy, so if you see a typo, check back in a half hour. Also, I just straight up get shit wrong a lot. I mention it twice because it’s that important.

  Tyler Durden
  Sat, 08/03/2024 – 12:50

• Trump Agrees To Debate Kamala Harris On Fox News With "Full Arena Audience"
  Trump Agrees To Debate Kamala Harris On Fox News With “Full Arena Audience”

  Let’s get ready to rumble.

  US Republican presidential nominee Donald Trump announced late Friday that he will debate Democratic US Vice President Kamala Harris in early September, with Fox News set to host the debate event in Pennsylvania. 

  “I have agreed with FoxNews to debate Kamala Harris on Wednesday, Sept. 4. The Debate was previously scheduled against Sleepy Joe Biden on ABC, but has been terminated in that Biden will no longer be a participant, and I am in litigation against ABC Network and George Slopadopoulos, thereby creating a conflict of interest,” Trump wrote on social media platform Truth Social. 

  Trump noted, “The FoxNews Debate will be held in the Great Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, at a site in an area to be determined. The Moderators of the Debate will be Bret Baier and Martha MacCallum, and the Rules will be similar to the Rules of my Debate with Sleepy Joe, who has been treated horribly by his Party – BUT WITH A FULL ARENA AUDIENCE!….”

  

  Trump continued, “….As everyone knows, the Democrats have Unconstitutionally taken a Candidate, who was acknowledged to be defeated, and unceremoniously replaced him with a new Candidate. This has never been done before, and is a Threat to Democracy, but I am totally prepared to accept the results of this “coup,” and replace Joe on the Debate stage with Crazy Kamala Harris.” 

  “I spent Hundreds of Millions of Dollars, Time, and Effort fighting Joe, and when I won the Debate, they threw a new Candidate into the ring. Not fair, but it is what it is! Nevertheless, different Candidate or not, their bad Policies are the same, and this will be strongly revealed at the September 4th Debate,” the former president said. 

  He ended, “I look forward to meeting and debating Kamala Harris on Sept. 4. This date is convenient and appropriate in that it is just prior to the September 6th start of Early Voting in the 2024 Presidential Election. I look forward to seeing everyone on Sept. 4, in the Great Commonwealth of Pennsylvania!”

  

  AP News quoted VP Harris a little more than a week ago. She said she was “ready” to debate Trump and accused him of backpedaling from a previous debate agreement with ABC for Sept. 10. 

  The problem with VP Harris, as David Sacks and Elon Musk describe on X, is that when she gets off script – well – it’s disastrous.

  The fact that first Joe Biden and now Kamala Harris cannot speak coherently without a teleprompter is not a bug but a feature for the staffers who run the presidency. The Party is more comfortable vesting authority in a politburo than a chief executive.pic.twitter.com/uRvZrTylLR

  — David Sacks (@DavidSacks) August 2, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Tyler Durden
  Sat, 08/03/2024 – 12:15

Digest powered by RSS Digest

• Trump's China Tariffs: Extraordinarily Good For America
  Trump’s China Tariffs: Extraordinarily Good For America

  Authored by Gordon Chang via The Gatestone Institute,

  “I can’t believe how many people are negative on tariffs that are actually smart people,” President Donald Trump told Bloomberg in a June 25 interview.

  “Economically, they’re phenomenal.”

  Since then, a lot of smart people have rushed to the American media to say that, on the contrary, high tariffs are horrible.

  

  Trump is right. Although these levies would increase costs to American consumers, the costs would not be nearly as great as experts say. Moreover, there are other considerations, both economic and national security, favoring raising tariffs now.

  “As president, Trump shattered the long-standing Republican orthodoxy of favoring free trade,” Bloomberg noted in commentary accompanying the interview, released on July 16th: “He says he’ll go further if reelected.” Trump talked about increasing tariffs on, among others, China.

  Trump happens to be right about China. In February, speaking to Maria Bartiromo on Fox News’ Sunday Morning Futures, he suggested he might impose tariffs greater than 60% on Chinese imports.

  Critics from the American elite howl. “This is going to add price inflation across the board, all in the name of ‘tough guy’ election-year politics,” said Yael Ossowski of the Consumer Choice Center, in comments carried by Bloomberg.

  “The long historical record demonstrates these are borne not by other countries, as Mr. Trump keeps insisting, but by American consumers and industries,” writes Steven R. Weisman of the Washington, D.C.-based Peterson Institute for International Economics, about tariffs.

  The long historical record might show that, but not the immediate one. In 2018, Trump imposed additional tariffs on China and analysts warned that prices in America would rise. Smart people in America, however, forgot that China had an incentive to effectively pay the tariffs: The Chinese government and exporters absorbed 75% to 81% of the cost of the additional levies. They did so primarily through the government increasing export and other subsidies and factories accepting lower profit margins.

  “The Trump tariffs were barely noticed by U.S. businesses or consumers,” long-time trade expert Alan Tonelson told Gatestone. “They certainly did not raise inflation, and they certainly did not cut growth.”

  Trump’s additional tariffs topped out at 25%. Now, he is proposing even higher levies. The hit to the American consumer will undoubtedly be greater this time. “The higher tariffs are raised from current levels, the more likely disruptions will occur,” says Tonelson, also the founder of public policy blog RealityChek.

  At the same time, however, the Chinese have even greater reason to shield consumers from increased costs. The problem for Xi Jinping is that China’s growth model is exhausted, and after rejecting stimulating domestic consumption, he is entirely dependent on increasing exports.

  Chinese factories, from all indications, are struggling and need to keep customers. For instance, China’s Producer Price Index, which measures factory-gate prices, declined for the 21st consecutive month in June. The Wall Street Journal reports low prices have pushed many factories in China “to the brink.” With prices declining in China, American consumers will not feel the pinch of new tariffs.

  Furthermore, there is one more reason why U.S. consumers will not suffer. High American tariffs will encourage factories to move out of China. When they do, any pressure on consumer prices will disappear.

  This is a contest that the United States cannot lose.

  In short, trade-surplus countries, such as China, cannot prevail over trade-deficit ones, such as America.

  Last year, America’s merchandise trade deficit with China was $279.4 billion.

  That is why, ultimately, China will have to pay the cost of tariffs that Trump — or any other American leader — may impose. Clearly, China’s regime knows this. People’s Daily, the Communist Party’s self-described mouthpiece and therefore the most authoritative publication in China, this month is arguing that America should not raise tariffs.

  Yet even if American consumers were to pay more because of the tariffs, let us remember why they were imposed in the first place. Trump in 2018 invoked Section 301 of the Trade Act of 1974 and raised tariffs as a remedy for Chinese theft of U.S. intellectual property. China steals each year somewhere in the neighborhood of a half trillion dollars of American intellectual property. Critics of tariffs, whether they make valid points or not about increased costs, have an obligation to say how they would eliminate or reduce this criminal practice through other means.

  On a broader point, Americans, after more than four decades of misguided policy, have to realize that they cannot fix their lopsided trade relations with China without bearing pain. Unless they agree to become subservient to the militant Chinese state, they will have to accept the costs of remaining sovereign.

  Trump’s 60% tariffs would “drastically slow” the Chinese economy, as Fortune reported this month. The hit to China would be far greater than any collateral effects in America. Experience with the 2018 tariffs is a guide. “Overall, the damage to China’s gross domestic product from the trade war was three times as high as the hit to the U.S., according to some Chinese economists,” the Wall Street Journal reported in May.

  Why should Americans want to decimate the Chinese factory sector? The Communist Party of China sees the U.S. as an enemy and seeks the destruction of the American republic. The struggle, in short, is existential. China’s regime cannot wage the fight against America without American money.

  So why should Americans supply the cash to their enemy?

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 23:45

• Cattle Market Rattled By Recession Risks As Cash-Strapped Consumers Pull Back
  Cattle Market Rattled By Recession Risks As Cash-Strapped Consumers Pull Back

  Is a meat recession coming?

  The dismal US jobs report has ignited recession fears, with some major Wall Street banks forecasting at least three 25bps interest rate cuts this year, with the first one starting in September. Recessions typically reduce household incomes and alter diets. 

  One major issue with this consumer downturn is that households have already been financially crushed by elevated inflation and high interest rates over the last few years. A weakening labor market and a downshifting economy are just icing on the cake as the consumer has depleted personal savings and maxed out credit cards. 

  As previously noted, the United States Department of Agriculture recently reported beef prices at the supermarket reached a record high of $5.472 a pound in June. This one-way ticket up in prices has been primarily based on a shrinking US cattle herd to the smallest size in 73 years. 

  

  Besides the US main equity indexes getting blasted on Friday by recession fears, cattle futures in Chicago were rattled by the slowdown, sending contracts down as much as 4% – but still trading near record highs.

  

  Fears over a “meat recession” are growing as traders see high prices and a consumer downturn as a perfect recipe for stoking demand destruction. 

  Here’s more from Bloomberg: 

  Cattle futures are dropping as a falling stock market prompts worries that consumers will pull back from high-priced beef. Sales of steak typically increase when equity markets rise and with stocks selling off after a weak US jobs report, prices for cattle are tracking the downturn.

  Commodity research firm Hightower Report wrote in a note Friday, “There is no question the cattle market is sensitive to economic fears,” adding, “Consumer beef demand is in question.”

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 23:20

• What Type Of Society Will We Become?
  What Type Of Society Will We Become?

  Authored by Ken Williams via The Epoch Times,

  “Each teacher shall endeavor to impress upon the minds of the pupils the principles of morality, truth, justice, patriotism, and a true comprehension of the rights, duties, and dignity of American citizenship, and the meaning of equality and human dignity, including the promotion of harmonious relations … to teach them to avoid idleness, profanity, and falsehood, and to instruct them in manners and morals and the principles of a free government,” according to California Education Code 233.5.

  California’s Education Codes were adopted in 1943. Over the last half century, they have varied in content and meaning as the laws of the United States, cultural attitudes, and our western civilization’s ethos have changed. As historical events direct and influence our future, however, each generation examines quintessential questions that defines our common purpose as Americans, and how we should live according to the laws created by our constitutional republic.

  

  In March 2024, Sacramento politicians originally introduced a sensible legislative bill to help students with mental health related issues. This bill in its original language authorized the California Department of Education to support school districts to increase mental health screenings and support school districts to boost mental health programs for children in public K-12 schools.

  On May 22, the bill’s language was converted to a new bill with an entirely different purpose and consequences. The new legislation was entitled the Support Academic Futures and Educators for Today’s Youth (SAFETY) Act and signed into law on July 15.

  This new law, AB 1955, will have a widespread impact on families, children, and public education. It overrides parental notification policies enacted by local schools boards that require school employees to inform parents about the wellbeing and emotional and mental health of their students.

  In practice, this law prohibits all public schools from disclosing to a student’s parents’ critical gender and mental health related information. It forbids school officials in public and charter schools from disclosing information to a student’s mother and father that is related to a child’s perception of their gender identity, gender expression, or related mental health issues.

  The original intent of parental notification policies were to strengthen family interpersonal dynamics and support the rights of parents. With an observed increase in child and adolescent mental illnesses, including gender dysphoria and its new subcategory Rapid Onset Gender Dysphoria, our society is in a mental health watershed moment, and parents need support and help. Not surprisingly, many researchers have connected these epidemiological observations to the impact of social media and social contagion. This acute mental health crisis adversely impacts family dynamics and strains interpersonal relationships in the family unit.

  Unfortunately, with the new law, parental notification policies are now illegal, with school staff, teachers, administrators, and principals required to exclude from parents knowledge of their child’s serious mental health condition.

  Undermining parents even more, a narrative has emerged that children with gender dysphoria are under attack by their parents and school boards. Allowing parents to be involved in their child’s gender identification, gender incongruence, and mental health concerns has been said to put these students’ lives at risk.

  Californians and parents on both sides of the political spectrum disagree with this assessment. They argue that AB 1955 undermines and removes the right of parents to direct the upbringing of their children and is in violation of the U.S. Constitution and federal laws.

  In 2000, in the Troxel v. Granville case, one of many cases involving the U.S. Supreme Court that guarantees parental rights, the court pronounced, “the custodial parent has a constitutional right to determine, without undue interference by the state, how best to raise, nurture, and educate the child. The parental right stems from the liberty protected by the Due Process Clause of the Fourteenth Amendment.”

  In 1979, the U.S. Supreme court decision in Parham v. J.R., concluded “jurisprudence historically has reflected Western civilization concepts of the family as a unit with broad parental authority over minor children.” Numerous other United States Supreme Court opinions consistently support the inalienable rights to parents and the parental-rights doctrine.

  In a more recent 2023 legal case (Mirabelli v. Olson) filed in the U.S. Federal District Court by two public school teachers, the court opined against a school district’s policy that restricted school staff and teachers from contacting parents about information believed to be critical to the welfare of students. The court issued a preliminary injunction and stated, “The United States Supreme Court has historically and repeatedly declared that parents have a right, grounded in the Constitution, to direct the education, health, and upbringing, and to maintain the well-being of their children.”

  Thus, AB 1955 is in violation of California’s own Education Code 233.5, and historical legal precedence. Western culture and civilizations since the earliest societies have recognized that parents and not government are the final arbitrators and ultimate authorities of their children’s lives. Children require their parents’ presence in their interpersonal struggles and family challenges.

  On July 16, one day after this controversial bill became law, litigation was filed, and a battle line was drawn in the Golden State over the question of who has the ultimate authority over children: parents or government agents?

  The courts will decide the legal status, but I pray the American people will support and defend time-proven truths that make families strong and define our family values.

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 22:55

• "Open War" On Police: NYC DA Lets Two Migrants Who Attacked, Bit Cops Free Without Bail
  “Open War” On Police: NYC DA Lets Two Migrants Who Attacked, Bit Cops Free Without Bail

  Two migrants who bit and attacked two New York City Police officers are…wait for it…back on the street, according to the New York Post. 

  Manhattan prosecutors reportedly agreed to set them loose back on the streets without bail after both were arrested on Sunday for fighting with traffic cops on Eighth Avenue. 

  Police confronted suspects outside the Row NYC Hotel at 700 Eighth Ave. after allegedly spotting one of them recklessly riding a moped without ID.

  One migrant allegedly bit an officer while another “hurled a moped” at another officer, the report says. 

  The Post report says that when they were brought into court on Monday morning, prosecutors let them walk without bail. 

  

  The DA’s office said it “would be consenting to the defendant’s release on his own recognizance.”

  One NYPD cop furiously told The Post: “What kind of message is this sending to the public? They are basically saying anyone in a blue uniform is a human piñata.”

  Another officer called it “open war” on police, stating: “Today they bite and kick a cop and tomorrow they take a shot at cops. If there are no consequences they are only encouraging people to attack cops.”

  A spokesman for the state Office of Court Administration said: “We don’t comment on bail decisions except to say that in cases like these in New York, Judges have discretion in making bail decisions in accordance with the law and based solely on an individualized assessment of a defendant’s risk of flight.” 

  Police Benevolent Association President Patrick Hendry responded: “We’ve seen dozens of significant assaults on police officers in Manhattan this year, and there’s a clear pattern in those cases — prosecutors and judges are only doing their job when they’re in the spotlight. We will keep turning out in court to show the entire justice system that their actions are getting cops hurt and putting all New Yorkers at risk.”

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 22:30

• California Drivers Lead US In Road Rage, Study Finds
  California Drivers Lead US In Road Rage, Study Finds

  Authored by Jill McLaughlin via The Epoch Times,

  California drivers have the worst road rage, according to a new study by Forbes.

  

  The study surveyed 10,000 licensed drivers and compared all 50 states in nine categories. Some of the categories included drivers who force other cars off the road, drivers who exit their cars to fight with others, tailgating, and honking—each weighted on a percentage basis to equal a total score of 100.

  California received 100 percent, Forbes reported.

  “California drivers ranked as the most confrontational drivers across all 50 states, with a high percentage of drivers experiencing some type of road rage, including being cut off, cursed at, and tailgating,” Forbes said in a report published July 22.

  The Golden State had the third-highest percentage of drivers—47.5 percent—who said another driver had cut them off on purpose, and the fourth-highest percentage—32 percent—of drivers who had been yelled at, insulted, cursed, and threatened.

  The state also ranked among the top 10 for tailgating, and drivers who reported people exiting their cars to fight with them.

  Arizona took the top spot last year, but dropped to 14th place in 2024, while California rose from 13th place to first.

  Missouri ranked second in the United States with 99.44 percent, reporting a high percentage of drivers who had been yelled at, insulted, or threatened by another driver. The state was also second-highest for the percentage of drivers who reported being cut off by another driver.

  Utah and Oklahoma came in third and fourth place.

  Hawaii is home to the most polite drivers in the United States.

  Driving in the United States is getting more dangerous as drivers become more confrontational. The number of violent road rage shootings across the country has surged since 2014, according to analysis of data from the nonprofit Gun Violence Archive.

  Between 2014 and 2023, road aggression that involved shootings increased from 92 to 481—an increase of more than 400 percent, according to the archive.

  The Forbes 2024 study also reported 41 percent of drivers witnessed an act of road rage in the past 12 months, and 32 percent experienced road rage from another driver.

  “Aggressive driving and road rage are not only dangerous, but they can also lead to an increase in car insurance rates if they result in a serious crash or injury,” Forbes reported.

  The average cost of car insurance is $2,150 a year, according to a Forbes Advisor analysis.

  The survey considered 10,000 licensed U.S. drivers—at least 200 in each state—who were at least 18 years old and owned or leased at least one vehicle.

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 22:05

• Graham Pushes Senators To Commit To War On Iran If Israel Attacked
  Graham Pushes Senators To Commit To War On Iran If Israel Attacked

  South Carolina Republican Senator and well-known hawk Lindsey Graham is salivating over the prospect of war with Iran at a moment regional tensions are boiling in the wake of Israel assassinating Hamas’ political leader in Tehran and Hezbollah’s senior military commander in Beirut.

  Graham on Wednesday introduced a bill that if passed would authorize military action against Iran if Hezbollah attacks Israel. The resolution says that the Senate “asserts that efforts to deter Hezbollah and the Islamic Republic of Iran are most credible when the President keeps all options on the table, including military force.”

  

  It would consider an all-out assault by Hezbollah to have the direct backing of Iran, and would thus authorize direct US counterattack on the Islamic Republic.

  The bill further authorizes military action against Iran if the country is deemed on the cusp of achieving a nuclear bomb. Iranian officials have lately signaled a major boost in its nuclear program at key sites. Though Iran’s leaders have yet to change the country’s official nuclear doctrine of seeing the bomb as ‘unIslamic’ (while long claiming the program is only for peaceful nuclear energy purposes), Tehran’s rhetoric has shifted of late to issuing warnings that it could produce a nuke if it wanted to.

  The resolution further underscores that Iran and Hezbollah shall be held responsible for “any adverse impacts on the people of Lebanon that result from an attack on the State of Israel by Hezbollah” while also urging the US governemnt to use “all diplomatic tools and power projection capabilities” to punish Israel’s fiercest regional enemies.

  As for the nuclear aspect, Graham has sought to invoke an Authorization for Use of Military Force which would greenlight a Washington military response if Iran’s nuke program is developed to the point of becoming a direct national security threat to the United States.

  “Iran will keep going until somebody tells them to stop,” Graham said in a press briefing this week. “It is time to put red lines on their nuclear program.”

  He asserted that it is “a certainty” that if the US doesn’t quickly get tougher on Iran, it will only be a matter of weeks or months more the country achieves nuclear weapons status. “Their ability to enrich to weapons grade is now a matter of weeks, not months,” Graham said. “Their ability to weaponize the material has advanced, and it is now time for Congress to lend their voice to the proper response.”

  Call me if there is ever a day when Lindsey Graham wakes up and does not want to bomb Iran. https://t.co/5Vj5Ry0K51

  — Olivia Nuzzi (@Olivianuzzi) August 1, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  “If Hezbollah attacks Israel, my hope is that they will have one less refinery than they do today,” he continued. “It is time to hit the Ayatollah in the pocketbook. Oil refineries are the lifeblood of his regime. Without those refineries, they would not be able to fund terrorism.”

  Revealingly, nothing of what Graham said urged immediate and robust peace or diplomatic efforts in the region. Congressional hawks and neocons have long had Iran in their crosshairs, in a policy effort that goes back to at least the 1990s.

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 21:40

• Certain Dark Chocolates Contain High-Level Heavy Metals, Study Finds
  Certain Dark Chocolates Contain High-Level Heavy Metals, Study Finds

  Authroed by Sina McCullough via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

  Is your favorite dark chocolate bar harboring a hidden health risk? A new study published on July 31 in Frontiers in Nutrition suggests that some popular dark chocolate products may contain concerning levels of heavy metals, particularly lead and cadmium.

  The study, conducted by researchers from The George Washington University School of Medicine and Health Sciences and ConsumerLab.com, analyzed 72 dark chocolate and cocoa products sold in the United States from 2014 to 2022. Their findings shed light on a potential health concern that has been bubbling beneath the surface of the chocolate industry for years.

  

  Why Study Heavy Metals in Chocolate?

  Dark chocolate, long touted for its potential health benefits due to its high antioxidant content, has faced scrutiny in recent years due to reports of heavy metal contamination. Consumer media outlets and independent testing agencies, including Consumer Reports and As You Sow, have previously highlighted this issue.

  Consumer Reports found heavy metals in popular chocolate brands including Hershey’s, Theo, Trader Joe’s, Godiva, Hu, and Equal Exchange, according to their 2022 report. A report by As You Sow also revealed elevated heavy metals in various chocolate products tested between 2014 and 2017. These earlier reports raised concerns about the safety of dark chocolate consumption, particularly for vulnerable populations such as children and pregnant women.

  Given these concerns, Leigh Frame, director of integrative medicine at George Washington University and co-lead of the study, aimed to explore the significance of this contamination.

  “We know chocolate is a plant that is particularly good at absorbing heavy metals from the soil and is grown in areas where there are heavy metals in the soil. So, it seemed like a logical area of concern. Also, often people think of chocolate as a supplement—like I’m getting my daily dose of chocolate because it’s good for me, right?  We were interested to see if people consuming chocolate for health benefits really do get those benefits because there is also potentially heavy metal exposure,” Frame told The Epoch Times in an interview.

  Study Design

  The researchers analyzed popular cocoa-containing products from 2014 to 2022, including Ghirardelli, Hu, Lily’s, 365 Whole Foods Market, Nestle, Now Real Food, Baker’s, and Good & Gather.

  All products were produced in the United States or Europe but sold only in the United States. The products were divided into four cohorts based on the year of purchase: 2014, 2016, 2019, and 2022. All products were tested for lead, cadmium, and arsenic content. Two primary standards were used to assess the levels of contamination:

  1. The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) established interim reference levels (IRLs) with the following allowable intake levels:

  • Lead: 2.2 micrograms (mcg) per day for children under 7 years old
  • Lead: 8.8 mcg per day for women of childbearing age

  While the FDA has established IRLs for lead, it has not set official limits for cadmium or arsenic in food products.

  2. California Proposition 65 (Prop 65) is a more stringent state-level regulation that established the following maximum allowable dose levels (MADLs):

  • Lead: 0.5 mcg per day
  • Cadmium: 4.1 mcg per day
  • Arsenic: 10 mcg per day

  Study Findings

  The new study’s findings paint a complex picture of heavy metal contamination in dark chocolate:

  • Lead: 43 percent of products tested exceeded Prop 65 limits, but 97.2 percent of the products fell below FDA IRL limits.
  • Cadmium: 35 percent of products exceeded Prop 65 limits.
  • Arsenic: No products exceeded Prop 65 limits.

  For all products tested, mean concentrations of both lead (0.615 micrograms/serving) and cadmium (4.358 mcg per serving) exceeded Prop 65 standards. However, median concentrations of lead (0.375 mcg per day) and cadmium (3.03 mcg per day were below Prop 65 standards, suggesting that a few highly contaminated products may have skewed the overall results. 97.2 percent of all products tested fell below the FDA IRLs for lead.

  Trade certifications (such as Fairtrade or Non-GMO) did not significantly affect heavy metal levels. Organic-labeled products showed significantly higher concentrations of cadmium and lead. They were 280 percent more likely to exceed Prop 65’s cadmium limit and 14 percent more likely to exceed its lead limit.

  “Our hypothesis was that organic products would be lower in heavy metals because they were not going to have fertilizers or pesticides used on them that were contaminated with heavy metals. But it’s exactly the opposite,” Frame said.

  Why organic products had higher levels of heavy metals is unclear. Frame questioned if fertilizers and pesticides may not be adding as many heavy metals to food as previously thought.

  “Also, someone that is growing an organic product is likely to treat it more carefully and gently. Perhaps the more gentle processing is allowing more residual heavy metals, compared to being extracted through some of the harsher processing methods that other companies are using. But that is purely a hypothesis” Frame added.

  Health Concerns: Lead and Cadmium

  There is no known safe level of lead in the blood since even low levels can produce toxic effects, according to a 2021 article in Toxics. The central nervous system is particularly vulnerable to lead, potentially resulting in cognitive decline, fine motor control impairment, and attention-related issues in both children and adults, according to the article.

  IQ test scores were lower among children exposed to lead, according to a 2022 review in Systematic Reviews. The authors stated that lead exposure “can have irreversible effects on children’s mental performance.”

  While less notorious than lead, cadmium exposure can also pose significant health risks. Cadmium exposure is a “cardiovascular risk factor” that may initiate and promote the progression of atherosclerosis, according to a review in Current Atherosclerosis Reports. Cadmium may also increase blood pressure and risk of kidney damage, according to the review. Increase risk of fracture may also increase following cadmium exposure, according to a 2016 review in Medicine.

  Frame and her research team question whether the proposed benefits of cocoa outweigh the possible risk of heavy metal exposure. “It’s hard to say whether these benefits are really truly beneficial for the average human,” she said.

  According to Frame, while dark chocolate has been associated with improved cardiovascular health, cognitive performance, and reduced chronic inflammation, these potential health benefits have been modest.

  For example, a 2021 review in Nutrients concluded that cocoa products improved triglycerides, however, there was no effect on blood pressure, blood glucose, cognitive function, skin, anthropometry, or quality of life regardless of form, dose, or duration when consumed among healthy people.

  “As with anything, it has to do with what is the background diet. So, you have someone that has a very low polyphenol, low flavonoid diet, and chocolate is one of their predominant sources. Then in terms of the flavonoids, it may be very beneficial. That’s why coffee is so beneficial for the average American because their diet is very low in polyphenols. And coffee is very rich in polyphenols and so it’s a really important source,” Frame said.

  Frame suggests that potential benefits from cocoa may be similar. “If you have someone who already has a rich source of polyphenols in the diet, the contribution of chocolate is going to be pretty minimal. And then that person is exposing themselves to more heavy metals from the chocolate without getting the health benefits.”

  Moreover, the potential risks associated with heavy metal exposure have not been fully accounted for in previous studies promoting the health benefits of dark chocolate, according to Frame. She suggests a better approach is to look at the individual and ask if they are meeting their flavonoid levels and then use chocolate to increase those levels.

  For those concerned their love of dark chocolate could be at risk, it is also worth nothing that any risk is a matter of moderation. The GWU study concludes that “ if contaminated products as a whole are consumed in small amounts and infrequently by most, these contaminants may not be a public health concern (though, perhaps still an individual concern); in contrast, if many such products are consumed fairly regularly by the average consumer, the additive exposure may be a public health concern.”

  The Epoch Times reached out to Lily’s, 365 Whole Foods Market, Nestle, Now Real Food, Baker’s, and Good & Gather, but they did not respond by publication time. Responses from Ghirardelli and Hu can be found in an update at the bottom of this article.

  Christopher Gindlesperger, senior vice president of public affairs and communications for the National Confectioners Association, told The Epoch Times that “Chocolate and cocoa are safe to eat and can be enjoyed as treats as they have been for centuries. Food safety and product quality remain our highest priorities and we remain dedicated to being transparent and socially responsible.”

  Where Are the Heavy Metals Coming From?

  Cocoa trees can absorb heavy metals that naturally occur in the soil, as well as heavy metals from environmental contamination. The main sources of heavy metal contamination in the soil are livestock manure, irrigation with wastewater or polluted water, application of sewage sludge, use of metallo-pesticides or herbicides, phosphate-based fertilizers, and atmospheric deposition, according to a 2019 review in Environment International.

  “We undervalue the soil as a source of heavy metals, particularly in certain regions. There is a huge variation in regions. But, right now, when you buy a chocolate bar, you have no way of knowing where those beans came from because it’s not labeled,” Frame told The Epoch Times.

  The presence of heavy metals in chocolate is partly attributed to post-harvesting contamination as well. For example, after fermentation, the cocoa beans are typically spread out to dry in the sun for several days. During this time, they are exposed to environmental contaminants, including lead-laden dust and dirt, according to Consumer Reports. This lead can come from industrial pollution in nearby areas, residual lead in soil from past use of leaded gasoline, or airborne particles containing lead.

  As the beans dry, this lead-containing dust can settle on and adhere to their surface. Unlike cadmium, which is thought to be absorbed into the beans through the plant’s root system, lead contamination may be largely a surface-level issue that occurs after the beans have been harvested, according to Consumer Reports.

  Frame and her team are advocating for enhanced surveillance of heavy metal contamination in cocoa products and suggest that better quality control practices during harvesting and manufacturing could help mitigate the problem. “Ideally they would test every batch.”

  For consumers, Frame envisions a voluntary labeling system that is simple to understand. “The average person needs a stoplight type label that says, this is a moderate risk chocolate versus this is a high-risk or low-risk product. What I hope would happen is the companies that start putting it on there will see that people are more likely to buy their products, and then maybe other companies will follow suit.”

  Implications and Takeaways

  For most people, eating a single serving (one ounce) of dark chocolate is unlikely to pose a significant health risk, according to Frame.

  “The reason we recommend one ounce is because that quantity is often studied for health benefits and you have to imagine that the heavy metals in one ounce are not reaching a level that’s becoming problematic,” she said.

  However, consuming multiple servings could lead to excessive exposure.

  “It’s very easy to over-consume chocolate. It’s something that can easily go from one to five or six servings. If people are having one ounce a day, maybe it’s okay. But if they’re having five servings a day and are getting astronomical levels of heavy metals, that’s a concern.”

  Another potential concern is combining chocolate consumption with other food sources of heavy metals, such as teas and spices, Frame added.

  The Bigger Picture: Cumulative Exposure

  Dark chocolate is just one potential source of heavy metal exposure in our diets. According to a 2019 review in Environmental International, a growing body of research has identified concerning levels of heavy metals in various food crops, including:

  • Fruits
  • Leafy vegetables—green cabbage, spinach, cauliflower, lettuce, kale
  • Root vegetables—radish, turnip, carrot
  • Wheat
  • Rice
  • Soybean
  • Corn
  • Garlic

  Heavy metals are also potentially problematic in some marine fish, seafood, herbal medicines, herbal teas, spices, fruit juice, as well as drinking water, particularly in areas with aging infrastructure or natural geological sources of contamination.

  “Additional research into cumulative heavy metal exposure from the whole diet is needed. It’s not about excluding any of these foods. There is no zero exposure to heavy metals. You cannot completely exclude them from your diet. What you want to do is make sure your exposure is not too high,” said Frame.

  What Can Consumers Do?

  This new study serves as a reminder that even seemingly healthy foods can harbor possible hidden dangers. While dark chocolate has been associated with potential health benefits, it faces scrutiny for its heavy metal content. As consumers, we can balance the potential benefits against these risks. According to Frame, chocolate enthusiasts can still savor their favorite treat while reducing heavy metal exposure by considering these strategies:

  1. Be aware that “organic” or other certifications do not necessarily mean lower heavy metal content. In fact, organic products may have higher concentrations, according to the study.
  2. Enjoy dark chocolate in moderation as part of a balanced diet. Frame’s suggested serving size is no more than one ounce per day.
  3. Vary sources of dark chocolate and cocoa products.
  4. Alternate between dark and milk chocolate if you can tolerate lactose. While dark chocolate offers more antioxidants and less sugar, it may contain higher levels of heavy metals due to its higher content of cocoa solids (where heavy metals tend to accumulate). White chocolate has no cocoa solids, making it another good option.
  5. Locate specific cacao brands that regularly test for heavy metals using third-party laboratories and have shown lower contamination levels. Organizations like Consumer Reports and As You Sow provide test results from common chocolate products. Although these results are snapshots in time, they may help identify which products might be safer choices.
  6. Diversify your diet to help minimize the risk of excessive exposure to heavy metals from any single source.
  7. Be particularly cautious with cocoa products if you are pregnant, breastfeeding, or feeding young children.

  UPDATE

  The Epoch Times received statements from two companies mentioned in the report.

  Ghirardelli provided the following statement:

  “Food safety and high quality are paramount for Ghirardelli and the entire Lindt & Sprüngli Group. For more information on the issue, you’re inquiring about, please see the statement issued by The National Confectioners Association and additional background the organization has shared here.”

  Hu also responded with a statement:

  “In regard to both media articles that have been published, we confirm that we comply (by a very large margin) with all applicable standards, including those in the California State Consent judgment, which are far-stricter than both the FDA and European Regulations. In addition, we have testing protocols in place to monitor the naturally-occurring trace amounts of heavy metals found in chocolate to ensure we are only bringing product to the market that is well below any applicable standard’s limit and is safe to consume. We have a more detailed response that is available to read on our website. Here is the link – https://hukitchen.com/pages/response.”

  The 2022 statement issued by The National Confectioners Association notes efforts chocolate makers take to ensure the quality and safety of their products:

  “An expert investigation conducted through our prior California Proposition 65 settlement concluded that cadmium and lead are present in cocoa and chocolate due to soil and that bean cleaning during processing cocoa beans reduces lead and cadmium in chocolate products,” noted that statement.

  This story has also been updated to include comments from The National Confectioners Association.

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 21:15

• Beijing Helicopter Taking Off: China Central Banker Calls For Direct Money Transfers To Households
  Beijing Helicopter Taking Off: China Central Banker Calls For Direct Money Transfers To Households

  When the US economy crashed in a deflationary vortex during the global financial crisis (and just after the time giant yen carry trade imploded), it seemed to many that another great Depression was assured. However, after a brief period of pain, both the US and the world economy staged a remarkable rebound which, we learned after the fact, was thanks to a unprecedented releveraging undertaken by China, which issued trillions in new debt and used the proceeds to not only build countless ghost cities, but to spark an inflationary tsunami around the world which helped the world economy recover from its depression on very short notice.

  Fast forward 17 years when, with another massive yen carry trade collapsing, the world on the verge of a deflationary tsunami, central banks are either cutting rates or preparing to do so, and global growth starting at another recession (if not depression) in the face. “Deja “vu some would say (it would have been even more symmetric if the bank failures from last March been delayed until now) , but there is one major difference: unlike 2008, this time China is not coming to save the world. The reason why is the same reason why China’s economy and markets have been in a downward spiral for the past 5 years: the world’s second largest economy (soon to be overtaken by India’s economy just as it recently lost the crown for most populous nation) simply has too much debt, and unlike 2008, Beijing has no more capacity to taken on the unlimited debt need to bootstrap the global economy (as discussed last year in “China’s 300% Debt And Dilemmas“).

  

  Or maybe we – and consensus – are dead wrong: maybe despite pessimism that China simply has too much debt to do stimulate with even more new debt, this time Beijing will do what the Fed did in 2009 and launch helicopter money.

  We bring this up not because this is some “hare-brained” conspiracy theory, but because an influential Chinese central bank adviser delivered a rare critique of his nation’s economic policy, urging the government to set a compulsory target for inflation, step up spending to address weak consumption and even start helicopter money

  In an article published this week, which cited his earlier speech in May, Huang Yiping – a prominent member of the People’s Bank of China’s monetary policy committee – said that authorities should change their strategy of “focusing on investment and neglecting consumption,” shift policy preference from investment to consumption, set a hard CPI target of 2-3%, adopt fiscal measures to support consumption (such as allowing migrant workers to settle in cities, something which would spark a new Chinese housing bubble overnight) and last but not least, directly send money to households!

  Huang Yiping, a member of the PBoC’s monetary policy committee, just made a bold statement. Although this committee is an advisory and not a decision-making body, his comment was still significant:

  “If the Chinese economy falls into the trap of low inflation, the consequences… pic.twitter.com/Xhru04uyjV

  — Shanghai Macro Strategist (@ShanghaiMacro) August 1, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  “The economy has entered a new stage and the total demand — including consumption, exports and even investment — is no longer as strong as before,” said Huang. “This actually poses new challenges to macroeconomic policies.” Meanwhile an excessive focus on fiscal health – such as maintaining the budget deficit below 3% of gross domestic product even when growth is weak – is now hindering China’s economy and eroding room for future policy action, he said.

  The reason for the sudden scramble: Huang believes that if the Chinese economy falls into the trap of low inflation (like Japan) “the consequences will be severe”, and here we agree wholeheartedly. In fact, we are surprised that amid growing social discontent, record youth unemployment and a tendency for China’s middle class to revolt, Beijing hasn’t done this already. Maybe it will – soon – and in doing so would spark an inflationary shockwave around the globe.

  Rebalancing China’s two-speed economy has been a challenge as authorities lean on manufacturing to propel growth while risking a backlash by creating a global glut of exports.

  The transcript of Huang’s speech was only released in the wake of the Communist Party’s twice-a-decade meeting on reforms that left investors disappointed and pushed Chinese stocks sharply lower. The Third Plenum proposed few solutions to the economy’s most pressing problems, as top leaders reaffirmed manufacturing as the centerpiece of the economy, despite rising trade tensions, while pushing the same worn out policies that have failed to kickstart China’s sinking economy.

  

  Huang’s frank assessment comes as public critiques of Chinese government measures have become increasingly fraught as policymakers struggle to arrest a slowdown. Analysts have been advised to avoid discussing sensitive terms such as “deflation” or expressing views deemed overly negative for the economy.

  Hu Xijin, the former editor-in-chief of China’s state-backed Global Times, was banned from posting on social media after he wrote controversial comments about the economy, Bloomberg reported on Thursday, citing a person familiar with the matter.

  Having learned how not to trigger his overlords, Huang highlighted falling prices – without using the word “deflation ”- as the key issue requiring greater attention, and advocated for setting a hard target for China’s consumer price index to increase by 2%-3%. Policymakers have consistently aimed for inflation at 3% in the past, but it’s regarded as a celling, not necessarily something that must be achieved. In light of recent CPI prints that have stuck around 0% for much of the past year, Beijing will be delighted to recover 3% CPI. Or even 2%.

  “The economy is now easy to cool but difficult to heat up,” said Huang, who’s also dean of the National School of Development at Peking University. “If it really falls into the low inflation trap, the consequences will be serious” said the central banker having learned from Japan’s catastrophic experience.

  After China extended its longest deflationary streak since 1999 last quarter, Huang raised the question of whether the world’s No. 2 economy could fall into the same cycle as Japan, which suffered decades of deflation and was referenced more than a dozen times in his remarks.

  Huang was careful to strike a constructive tone in his lengthy speech, with the government’s policies only characterized as being “mild” and “new conditions emerging in the economy” blamed for measures having a weaker effect than desired. China’s home sales slumped again in July, despite Beijing unveiling this year its most forceful efforts yet to support the property market that’s suffering a prolonged crisis.

  

  According to Huang, two popular but flawed views were hindering policies. One was the belief that only structural reform can lift productivity, and the second was an aversion to adopting the more aggressive policies taken by Western countries.

  Massive stimulus unleashed by the US and Europe in recent years had effectively supported those markets, without triggering significant negative consequences, added Huang, who has worked at investment banks including Citigroup and Barclays, and who clearly has someone do his shopping for him with a corporate card. Yes, his assessment is idiotic – the massive stimulus has unleashed even more massive inflation – but for China and its 1.3 billion citizens, deflation is even more dangerous than inflation.

  Huang returned as a PBOC adviser this year after serving in that role between 2015 and 2018. He’s previously called for the PBOC to cut interest rates even as the US Federal Reserve began to hike, and flagged the risk of overseas push-back on China’s industrial policies, something which will be in full force once Donald Trump returns to the White House.

  Huang said both the central bank and the Finance Ministry were trying to preserve future policy space, but what are they waiting for when the country desperately needs to reboot its economy here and now, and waiting too long threatens the very stability of the social fabric. Too conservative measures could threaten longer-term economic stability, he added.

  Pressure on the balance sheets of households, businesses and local governments is feeding the economy’s weakness, according to Huang. This means the central government needs to shoulder more responsibility and stabilize confidence, he said.

  “If the deteriorating trend is not stopped, it can lead to very serious consequences.”

  While it is unclear of Huang speaks for others beside himself (it is no secret that lately Chinese social media has seen a tidal wave of censorship seeking to counter angry complaints about the slowing economy), one thing is certain: if the US slides into a recession, which now seems inevitable, China will have no choice but to do what the PBOC advisor suggests, as the only remaining pillar propping up China’s economy – US imports – slowly fades away. Should that happen, and should Trump implement the reflationary tariffs (up to 100%) he hopes to put in place once elected, the inflationary tsunami that awaits in 2025 will make the galloping inflation from the early 1980s seem like a very gentle rise in prices by comparison.

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 20:50

• Why The Future Of Work Is Hybrid
  Why The Future Of Work Is Hybrid

  Authored by Samantha Flom via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

  Many aspects of everyday life were transformed during the COVID-19 pandemic and the government’s response to it.

  

  Lockdowns quickly created a remote working environment that hasn’t fully reversed.

  Despite some employers’ efforts to cajole their employees back into the office, a majority (52 percent) of U.S. workers still say they prefer working remotely at least some of the time, according to an April survey from Morning Consult.

  And while attitudes are still changing in the evolving post-COVID era, many workers and businesses are beginning to realize that the future of the workforce may not be fully in-person or remote, but somewhere in between.

  Allie Clough of Columbus, Ohio, has worked remotely for most of her full-time career.

  Having earned her graduate degree at the height of the pandemic, Clough only worked briefly in an office environment before shifting into her current role as a freelance writer. And although she hasn’t started a family yet, she said she believes the flexibility of working from home will be invaluable to her when she does.

  “As a woman in my 20s, one of the biggest benefits that I see to remote work is the fact that it seems like it’ll be much friendlier to family life,” she told The Epoch Times.

  Clough recently made the move from Washington to Columbus to be closer to her partner. While she works remotely full-time, he works a hybrid schedule—a combination that she said has strengthened their relationship.

  “I don’t think we would have been able to really date at all if we didn’t both work remote to some degree,” she said. “It has really afforded us the ability to not have to miss a beat with our jobs while still being able to be near one another. And when the workday is over, we can be together.”

  Before the pandemic, Clough said she found the idea of juggling motherhood and a career to be “intimidating.” But now, with the rise of remote work, she no longer fears that she will have to give one up for the sake of the other.

  “It makes me much more bullish on the idea of starting a family and having children when I see that the women that I work with, even if they take time off when their kids are little, there is a lot more flexibility for them to roll back into the workplace and even be in management or leadership roles,” she said.

  That’s a benefit that Katie Bridge of College Station, Texas, has also realized in the wake of the pandemic.

  Bridge was a stay-at-home mother of two before COVID-19 transformed the workforce and the world. Now a communications strategist at Lockheed Martin, she works from home four days a week, 10 hours a day.

  

  “I love it,” she said of her working conditions. “The kids know that I don’t work Fridays, so that’s the day that they get to plan what they want to do with me.”

  Bridge, a U.S. Army veteran, put her career on hold for six years so she could raise her children at a time when working from home wasn’t as common.

  Before, she noted, remote options were typically only available for call center representatives—a job that typically requires a quiet work setting.

  “As someone with two babies, there’s no such thing as a quiet place for eight hours a day,” she said.

  But amid the global shift toward remote work during and after the pandemic, Bridge found the courage to reenter the workforce through a job that began as a hybrid role but has since evolved into a fully remote position.

  “One of the things that was on my resume was my time as a stay-at-home mom. Because there is no job that requires as much as a stay-at-home mom,” she said.

  “The amount of logistical hula hooping you do as a parent is leaps and bounds beyond what I’ve ever experienced, either in the Army or here at Lockheed.”

  Varying Perspectives

  Remote work’s family-friendly reputation could be the reason women are still pursuing such opportunities at higher rates than men.

  An Indeed Job Search survey conducted between July 2021 and December 2023 found that women were nearly 25 percent more likely than men to cite a desire for remote work as a motivation for their job search.

  That finding tracks with the results of a 2021 LinkedIn study, which found that women were 26 percent more likely than men to seek out remote jobs.

  And to Ryan Niddel, CEO of wellness company MIT45, that all makes perfect sense.

  “I believe that men still have something inside of them that is that hunter-gatherer protector somewhere inside,” he said. “And I believe that women still have a sense of, you know, creating family and nesting.”

  

  From that perspective, Niddel said it only stands to reason that women would feel more productive in a home environment. But in his case, he said he is more productive in an office setting—about 20 percent more productive, to be exact.

  “I just quantified it using a series of time management platforms on my computer to see where my focus and attention was going,” he said.

  While working from home proved “a distraction” for Niddel, at the office, he was able to focus on the tasks at hand. Meanwhile, he found that keeping his work and personal lives separate allowed for stronger relationships and productivity in both spheres.

  Describing the pursuit of work-life balance as “a fool’s errand,” the executive said his goal is not to strike a balance between the two but rather to be fully attentive to each at the appropriate times.

  “It’s to be 100 percent committed to where I’m at in the time and place that I’m there. And that requires an inherent lack of balance,” he said.

  Read more here…

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 20:25

• Biden Pledges New Military Deployments To Defend Israel In Netanyahu Call
  Biden Pledges New Military Deployments To Defend Israel In Netanyahu Call

  President Biden in a Thursday phone call with Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu pledged that the United States would help defend Israel in the event of reprisal attacks from Iran in the wake of Hamas leader Ismail Haniyeh’s assassination in Tehran.

  “The President reaffirmed his commitment to Israel’s security against all threats from Iran, including its proxy terrorist groups Hamas, Hezbollah, and the Houthis,” the White House call readout stated.

  Alarmingly, Biden also informed the Israeli prime minister that he is readying new deployments to the Middle East. This even as the US Commander-in-Chief was essentially forced to bow out his campaign for reelection due to health and mental acuity concerns, including speculation over dementia.

  

  And all of this is happening with basically zero Congressional input, meaning a somewhat senile and elderly President Biden could be taking the nation into yet another war and Middle East quagmire with no additional oversight or Constitutional checks and balances whatsoever (of course, this is the entire legacy of the GWOT as well). 

  “The President discussed efforts to support Israel’s defense against threats, including against ballistic missiles and drones, to include new defensive US military deployments,” the readout continued.

  The White House confirmed that Vice President and presumed Democratic nominee Kamala Harris was on the call. Previously the administration and the Dems touted here supposed foreign policy experience and credentials.

  On Wednesday, within hours after the Haniyeh assassination, Biden’s Defense Secretary Lloyd Austin was the first to announced that the Pentagon would play an active role in any potential Iranian attack on Israel:

  “If Israel is attacked, we certainly will help defend Israel,” U.S. Defense Secretary, Lloyd Austin, told the media aboard the USNS Millinocket during a visit to the Philippines. “You saw us do that in April; you can expect to see us do that again,” he said.

  The U.S., along with other Israeli allies like the U.K. and France, were involved in intercepting an unprecedented Iranian drone and missile barrage fired at Israel from Iran, Iraq, Syria and Yemen in mid-April. “We helped Israel take down nearly all of the incoming drones and missiles,” U.S. President Joe Biden said at the time.

  Already according to The Washington Post the US has assembled 12 warships in Middle East regional waters prepared to respond to any attack on Israel. Currently the USS Theodore Roosevelt and six US Navy destroyers are in the Persian Gulf. An additional five Navy ships are already patrolling the Eastern Mediterranean, including two destroyers.

  The Israel Defense Forces (IDF) have said the military is on “high alert”, also as it monitors threats from Iranian-linked group Hezbollah in Lebanon.

  Biden is weighing deploying more troops to the Middle East to fight a war on Israel’s behalf

  He just can’t help himself, can he pic.twitter.com/wIkqXgHU9B

  — Stephen Semler (@stephensemler) August 2, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  This week also saw the assassination of Hezbollah’s military chief in Beirut, for which the group’s leader Hassan Nasrallah is vowing a severe response. However, neither side appears to have the appetite for a bigger all-out war at this point which would plunge all of Lebanon into greater suffering.

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 20:00

• The DEI Trap
  The DEI Trap

  Authored by Richard Porter via RealClearPolitics,

  Kamala Harris’s sudden ascendancy within the Democrat Party, with nary a peep from other ambitious Democrats, spotlights the uncomfortable contradictions of identity politics and the diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) movement. 

  

  Americans universally believe that everyone should have a fair shot at opportunities regardless of sex or race, which is why the kind of racism and sexism that was once so prevalent is so rare today.

  Americans in 2024 embrace multiculturalism and diversity. This is the reason diversity and inclusion programs became ubiquitous. There’s virtue and no harm in gentle reminders to be sensitive and inclusive in light of our diversity. After all, our national motto is e pluribus unum.

  Today’s Democratic Party, however, rejects this positive view of American progress. Democrats claim that America remains institutionally racist and paternalistic – a credo that provides the intellectual justification for identity politics and the grievance-based race-conscious demand for equity that animates the DEI movement. 

  Employers sensitive to the left’s narrative on race and sex and leery of claims made in litigation seek to prove and protect their own virtue by hiring on the basis of race or sex. But doing so not only disadvantages whites or males wholly blameless for the sins of the past, it also diminishes the minority hire whose qualifications are doubted by some of their peers – even when they are the best person for the job. 

  The disconnect between the DEI narrative and the modern cultural reality regarding racism and sexism creates the DEI trap: DEI injects racism and sexism into a culture that rejects racism and sexism, making things worse and hurting those it purports to help. 

  Joe Biden’s 2020 selection of Kamala Harris as his running mate and his appointment of Ketanji Brown Jackson to the U.S. Supreme Court only highlighted the DEI trap. 

  “I commit that if I’m elected president and I have an opportunity to appoint someone to the courts, I’ll appoint the first black woman to the court,” Biden vowed. “If I’m elected president, my cabinet and my administration will look like the country, and I commit that I will in fact pick a woman to be vice president. There are a number of women who are qualified to be president tomorrow. I would pick a woman to be my vice president.”

  He didn’t say he would pick the best person – he said he would pick a woman and that there are a number of women who are “qualified” to be president. 

  Biden burnished his own “antiracist” credentials at the expense of his choice. He implicitly diminished her, whoever she might have been, in order to prove that he’s neither a racist nor a sexist. 

  Then, after securing the nomination, Biden chose Sen. Kamala Harris, whose own campaign for president was a surprising disappointment and unambiguous failure. A star in her home state of California, she turned out to be a bust as a national candidate.

  Choosing her over Elizabeth Warren or Amy Klobuchar, both of whom performed better in the 2020 primaries, had the perverse effect of highlighting the importance of race and sex in Biden’s selection, further bolstering his image with those in his party who value DEI, at the expense of further diminishing Harris. 

  Now, the liberal legacy media would have us all make believe that none of this happened – and make believe that Kamala Harris is the next great Democratic Party leader, despite a lackluster record as vice president and without competing against other rising stars in her party. 

  Now, Harris further diminishes herself as she conducts her own search for a running mate: Democrats have quietly made it known that only white males are under consideration.  Really? Kamala, who should not be called a DEI candidate, needs a white guy by her side to win? Is this really where Democrats want to be?

  This is the reductio ad absurdum of DEI: Kamala Harris recreating the “glass ceiling” she “broke,” taking a bow to “white privilege” and “the patriarchy.” For what reason? Why isn’t Klobuchar under consideration? Or Michigan  Gov. Gretchen Whitmer? Don’t hold your breath in hope that the Democrat-friendly media will ask these obvious questions of their new darling. There are two ways out of the DEI Trap: Make believe it’s necessary because we are all irredeemably racist and sexist, or embrace the reality that we are not. 

  Democrats and their friends in the media are deep into make believe, seeking to make any criticism of DEI akin to cross-burning. On the other hand, all of us could embrace the reality of what America is today and consign racism and sexism to the dustbins of history. Everyone is different; we each bring different strengths and weaknesses to the table. 

  Joe Biden labeled Kamala on the basis of race and sex to make himself look good. But you can’t promote DEI without living with the implications of DEI in an open culture. So, Democrats, step out of the trap and march into the sunshine by ditching DEI.

  This article was originally published by RealClearPolitics and made available via RealClearWire.

  Richard Porter is a lawyer in Chicago and National Committeeman to the RNC from Illinois.

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 19:40

• Cocoa Prices Slide To Five-Month Low On Demand Destruction Fears From Hershey
  Cocoa Prices Slide To Five-Month Low On Demand Destruction Fears From Hershey

  US chocolate maker Hershey slashed its sales and earnings outlook on Thursday, citing higher cocoa prices that have resulted in demand destruction among cash-strapped consumers. This development spooked cocoa futures, sliding to a five-month low at the end of the week. 

  Cocoa futures in New York fell as much as 6% to $6,574 a ton, hitting their lowest level since early March following the dismal earnings report from Hershey. Prices, which peaked at $12,000 a ton in mid-April, have nearly halved and have been oscillating within a triangle formation ever since. 

  Bloomberg noted, “Market watchers are closely monitoring company earnings for signs that consumers are buying less as costs rise.” It added, “Many expect volatility to continue as uncertainty also lingers on the supply side.” 

  

  On Thursday, Hershey CEO Michele Buck told investors that current cocoa prices are not sustainable. She noted, “We believe that the future prices will be higher levels than we’ve seen before this kind of recent historic pricing cycle.” 

  Bloomberg cited a weather forecast from Maxar that shows improved crop conditions across West Africa over the weekend, especially for the Ivory Coast and Cameroon. This area is the mecca of cocoa farming. Despite improving crop conditions, many analysts are still concerned about dwindling global supplies. 

  “Even though the futures are down, wide swings are the norm these days because nobody in the market is sure about the future output,” said Michael McDougall, managing director at Paragon Global Markets.

  McDougall said, “The market appears undecided as to which direction it wants to take.” And hence, for the triangle formation – and usually out of technical patterns – comes direction. 

  Buck also warned investors that “consumers are pulling back on discretionary spending.” 

  Demand destruction by consumers weighed on Hershey’s second-quarter financial results and outlook.

  

  Despite these price swings, oil trader Pierre Andurand remains bullish on the view that the stocks-to-grinding ratio for the world at the end of the year will be at its lowest ever “and potentially run out of inventories late in the year.” 

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 19:20

• Judge Overturns $4.7 Billion Verdict In NFL Sunday Ticket Antitrust Lawsuit
  Judge Overturns $4.7 Billion Verdict In NFL Sunday Ticket Antitrust Lawsuit

  Authored by Katabella Roberts via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

  A California judge has thrown out the $4.7 billion verdict against the National Football League (NFL), which resulted from a lawsuit alleging antitrust violations in its “Sunday Ticket” programming.

  

  In June, a Los Angeles federal jury ordered over $4.7 billion in damages be awarded to residential and commercial “Sunday Ticket” subscribers, which included restaurants and bars.

  That verdict came after the jury found the NFL had violated antitrust laws by restricting the availability of “Sunday Ticket,” which allows viewers to watch out-of-market games but requires them to purchase access to a bundle of games to do so.

  However, in an Aug. 1 ruling, Los Angeles-based U.S. District Judge Philip Gutierrez pointed to testimonies from two key witnesses for the subscribers in the June trial, noting they contained flawed methodologies that should have been excluded.

  The jury’s damages verdict was otherwise unsupported by the evidence, he said.

  “The Court agrees that Dr. Rascher’s and Dr. Zona’s testimonies based on their flawed methodologies should be excluded,” the judge wrote. “And because there was no other support for the class-wide injury and damages elements of Plaintiffs […] claims, judgment as a matter of law for the Defendants is appropriate.”

  The jury’s damages awards “were not based on the ‘evidence and reasonable inferences’ but instead were more akin to ’guesswork or speculation’” he said.

  “For the forgoing [sic] reasons, the Court GRANTS Defendants’ judgment as a matter of law as, without the testimonies of Dr. Rascher and Dr. Zona, no reasonable jury could have found class-wide injury or damages,” the judge concluded.

  The NFL welcomed the ruling in a statement on X, saying it was “grateful” for the judge’s decision in the class action lawsuit.

  “We believe that the NFL’s media distribution model provides our fans with an array of options to follow the game they love, including local broadcasts of every single game on free over-the-air television,” the statement said. “We thank Judge Gutierrez for his time and attention to this case and look forward to an exciting 2024 NFL season.”

  Package Violates Antitrust Laws, Lawsuit Alleged

  Restricting availability allowed DirecTV to charge artificially higher prices as its former sole distributor, a jury found in June.

  The ruling stemmed from a class action lawsuit filed in 2015 by the Mucky Duck sports bar in San Francisco alleging the league “conspired” with distributor DirecTV to raise prices for the “Sunday Ticket” package.

  The lawsuit covered 2.4 million residential subscribers and 48,000 businesses who paid for the “Sunday Ticket” package from DirecTV, or its subsidiaries, at any time between 2011 and 2022.

  DirecTV was not on trial on the matter.

  Plaintiffs argued the package violated antitrust laws because it effectively “results in the blackout or unavailability of out-of-market games” unless consumers bought the “Sunday Ticket” package at inflated prices.

  They further argued that the deal “results in substantial injury to competition.”

  Defending their actions in the lawsuit, attorneys for the NFL had argued the “Sunday Ticket” program was exempt from antitrust scrutiny under the Sports Broadcasting Act of 1961.

  That act allowed the NFL to sell its TV rights as a group, despite the league consisting of 32 team owners who collectively own all the big TV rights, attorneys said.

  Following the June verdict, the league said it planned to appeal.

  The Epoch Times has contacted attorneys for the plaintiffs for comment.

  The Associated Press contributed to this report. 

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 19:00

• Biden Angry Over Being Kept In The Dark On Israel's Operation To Kill Hamas Chief
  Biden Angry Over Being Kept In The Dark On Israel’s Operation To Kill Hamas Chief

  Fresh reporting by Barak Ravid of Axios has revealed that President Biden held a “tough” phone call with Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu Thursdsay wherein the Israeli leader was urged to stop stoking tensions in the region which puts any potential hostage deal in extreme jeopardy. 

  Israel’s Wednesday assassination of Hamas political leader Ismail Haniyeh has put the whole region on a war footing. But Netanyahu and his government without doubt sees this as justified and necessary revenge for the Oct.7 terror attacks on southern Israel. Biden officials are said to be deeply frustrated at the ripple effects from both the Haniyeh killing and the assassination of Hezbollah’s top military commander in Beirut this week.

  

  The White House, through Secretary Antony Blinken, has insisted that it was kept in the dark concerning the Israeli Mossad operation to kill Haniyeh. This after Iran issued a formal condemnation alleging Washington’s involvement in the plot.

  The whole Axios report paints a picture of Biden being played by America’s closest Mideast ally, even after Washington has injected billions into Israel’s defense.

  Biden and his officials “feel that Netanyahu kept Biden in the dark over his plans to carry out the assassinations, after leaving the impression last week that he was attentive to the president’s request to focus on getting a Gaza deal.”

  Or to translate: the White House is belatedly catching up to what most of the world including the Israeli domestic opposition already understood very well – that Netanyahu has prioritized the military fight to eradicate Hamas over the return of the hostages.

  According to Ravid’s reporting, “One U.S. official said Biden complained to Netanyahu that the two had just spoken last week in the Oval Office about securing the hostage deal, but instead Netanyahu went ahead with the assassination in Tehran.”

  And apparently Biden got angry: “At the end of the meeting with Netanyahu in the Oval office last Thursday, Biden became emotional, raised his voice and told Netanyahu he needs to reach a Gaza deal as soon as possible, three Israeli officials with knowledge of the meeting told Axios,” per the report.

  Yet once again this is a US administration pursuing two contradictory polices at once, allowing the US to get bogged down in escalation messes of Israel’s own making. On the one hand Biden is angrily demanding that Tel Aviv get serious about a ceasefire and hostage exchange, but on the other is vowing to defend Israel if it gets attacked by Iran.

  Biden “raised his voice”! Really means business this time. https://t.co/npejpcHjgY

  — Glenn Greenwald (@ggreenwald) August 2, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  In addition to a potential Iran conflict, it remains to be seen if and when PM Netanyahu orders an attack on Hezbollah in Lebanon amid the ratcheting daily tit-for-tat:

  Israeli ministers authorized Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu and his defense chief Sunday to decide on the “manner and timing” of a response to a rocket strike in the Golan Heights that killed 12 children and teens, and which Israel and the United States blamed on Lebanese terror group Hezbollah.

  According to The Washington Post the US has already assembled 12 warships in Middle East regional waters prepared to respond to any attack on Israel. Currently the USS Theodore Roosevelt and six US Navy destroyers are in the Persian Gulf. An additional five Navy ships are currently patrolling the Eastern Mediterranean, including two destroyers.

  “shouldn’t count on the US to bail him out…”

  “@POTUS told @IsraeliPM the US will help defeat an Iranian attack, but that he expects no more escalation from Israel & immed movement toward a hostage deal…and that if Netanyahu escalates again, he shouldn’t count on the US to bail him out.” @BarakRavid https://t.co/Luf2xbXDOu

  — Shalom Lipner (@ShalomLipner) August 2, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  The Israel Defense Forces (IDF) have said the military is on “high alert”, also as it monitors threats from Iranian-linked group Hezbollah in Lebanon. The US ships are on standby also in case there needs to be an emergency evacuation of US nationals from Lebanon, which has yet to be initiated at this point.

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 18:40

• Biden-Harris DHS Accused Of Covering Up Crucial January 6th Report
  Biden-Harris DHS Accused Of Covering Up Crucial January 6th Report

  Authored by Eric Lendrum via American Greatness, (emphasis ours),

  An inspector general’s report has accused the Biden-Harris Administration’s Department of Homeland Security (DHS) of covering up a significant report regarding the Secret Service’s response to the protest at the U.S. Capitol on January 6th.

  

  As reported by the Daily Caller, Inspector General Joseph Cuffari, who was originally appointed by former President Donald Trump, has launched two investigations into the Secret Service’s role during the peaceful protests on January 6th, 2021. As the Secret Service is under the jurisdiction of DHS, it is that agency which makes the final determination on which reports to release or withhold.

  Jonathan Meyer, the current head lawyer for DHS, issued a statement denying Inspector General Cuffari’s claims, saying that DHS will only redact “security sensitive” information, but otherwise will not prevent Congress from seeing any report they want to see.

  Speaking to Politico, an anonymous source from within DHS said ​​claimed that it is the inspector general who “has exclusive authority to determine when to release a report to Congress.”

  The report in question is titled “USSS Preparation for and Response to the Events of January 6, 2021.” Sources from within Congress told Real Clear Investigations that the report has been in Secretary Alejandro Mayorkas’ possession “since at least April.”

  NEW: DHS IG confirms in report that the Biden/Mayorkas DHS significantly stonewalled his J6 investigation.

  Texts deleted, cell phones of top officials presumably including Kim Cheatle were wiped.

  Data never recovered pic.twitter.com/AzCaiTRgeg

  — Julie Kelly 🇺🇸 (@julie_kelly2) August 2, 2024

  Similarly to the security failures that led to the assassination attempt against President Trump on July 13th, it has been reported that people with weapons were spotted outside the White House on January 6th. In another security failure, the car in which then-Senator Kamala Harris (D-Calif.) was traveling drove right by the alleged pipe bomb that was found outside the Democratic National Committee (DNC) headquarters.

  In July of 2022, the Office of Inspector General (OIG) sent a letter to the House and Senate Homeland Security Committees revealing that “many [Secret Service] text messages, from January 5 and 6, 2021, were erased as part of a device-replacement program.” Cuffari’s office had previously requested that those exact messages be handed over, only for them to be deleted.

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Rep. Massie suggests the deletions–made between Feb and April 2021 under Sec Mayorkas–represented criminal obstruction of Congress since Democrats had sent preservation notices to all agencies prior to the alleged “device migration” process.

  Thompson again seems unconcerned pic.twitter.com/mum2187mJj

  — Julie Kelly 🇺🇸 (@julie_kelly2) August 2, 2024

  These revelations add to a growing sense of strong dissatisfaction with the Secret Service in the wake of the July 13th assassination attempt, with numerous security failures, lack of preparedness, and overall incompetence being blamed for the incident which cost one rallygoer his life and injured two others, with President Trump narrowly dodging a bullet himself. Director Kimberly Cheatle ultimately resigned after receiving bipartisan backlash for her role in the decline in the quality of the Secret Service. 

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 18:20

• Tonight? Iran State TV Suggests Attack On Israel Is Just 'Hours' Away
  Tonight? Iran State TV Suggests Attack On Israel Is Just ‘Hours’ Away

  It is well after midnight in the Iranian capital of Tehran and there are two significant developments that suggest an Iranian and Hezbollah major strike against Israel could come at any moment.

  First, Iranian state TV is strongly signaling that an attack could come in the overnight and early morning hours of Friday/Saturday – which we should note also marks Jewish shabbat in Israel.

  A News Anchor with Iranian Channel 3: “In coming hours, the World will witness Extraordinary Scenes and Very Important Developments.” pic.twitter.com/r5vQsxcGo1

  — OSINTdefender (@sentdefender) August 2, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  “In coming hours, the world will witness extraordinary scenes and very important developments,” an Iranian state news anchor reported said. Iran International and other regional publications have highlighted the alarming clip as well.

  While it is unlikely that a news anchor would be directly privy to such state secrets concerning the timing of a major strike on Israel from Iran, it does point to growing anticipation and belief among the Iranian population that retaliation is near.

  It is also the case that following memorials and funerals in Tehran and Doha for slain Hamas leader Ismail Haniyeh, he has finally been laid to rest, and Tehran might now be readying its response given that foreign dignitaries have now safely exited the country.

  At the same time Israeli media has reported on another big development related to Iran-backed Hezbollah in Lebanon. “Hezbollah is evacuating its senior personnel from the terror group’s strongholds in the southern suburbs of Beirut, in anticipation of potential Israeli strikes, Arabic media sources reported Friday,” writes Times of Israel.

  “The Iran-backed group has also reportedly moved the military equipment it stored to areas further away from the Lebanese capital,” the report adds.

  An anonymous US official has also been cited as saying, “Tehran will take time to decide on the type of response it launches, and it will take time to prepare the response.”

  

  The prior April 13 ballistic missile and drone attack from Iran on Israel took several days to happen after Iran leaders first said they would hit back. But that was highly telegraphed to be limited in nature, to ensure a broader regional war would be avoided. Any new attack in revenge for killing Haniyeh on Iranian soil is likely to come quicker, and be less predictable – given Iran feels pressure to up the escalation in order to establish greater deterrence.

  Iran has continued putting Israel on notice, even crafting messages concerning Lebanon, warning against “full-scale military aggression” against Hezbollah, saying it will lead to “obliterating war” – according to a fresh statement the Islamic republic’s United Nations mission. “All options, [including] the full involvement of all Resistance Fronts, are on the table,” the mission wrote in a post on X late in the day Friday.

  Finally, there is another breaking development: US Defense Secretary orders navy cruisers, destroyers and an additional fighter squadron to the Middle East, Pentagon says according to Reuters. This includes the following new readiness posture:

  • USS Abraham Lincoln carrier strike group to replace the USS Theodore Roosevelt, currently in the Gulf of Oman
  • An additional fighter squadron to the Middle East
  • Additional ballistic missile defense-capable cruisers and destroyers to the Mediterranean and Gulf regions
  • Steps to ready deployment of additional land-based ballistic missile defenses

  Will it be bombs away by morning?

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 18:00

• Texas Rancher Sues Biden, DHS Over Damage To Property Allegedly Caused By Illegal Immigrants
  Texas Rancher Sues Biden, DHS Over Damage To Property Allegedly Caused By Illegal Immigrants

  Authored by Katabella Roberts via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

  A Texas rancher has filed a lawsuit against President Joe Biden and the Department of Homeland Security (DHS) accusing them of adopting policies that have resulted in “the biggest influx of illegal aliens into America in our history.”

  

  The lawsuit was filed in the U.S. District Court for the Southern District of Texas on July 31 by the Immigration Reform Law Institute on behalf of the rancher, identified in the filing as Michael Vickers, along with Kinney County Sheriff Brad Coe and Atascosa County, Texas.

  It also lists DHS Secretary Alejandro Mayorkas, U.S. Customs and Border Protection Acting Commissioner Troy Miller, U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement Acting Director Patrick J. Lechleitner, and U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services Director Ur M. Jaddou as defendants.

  “With full awareness of the likely consequences, Defendants have adopted unlawful policies that, working in concert, have frustrated Congress’s purposes in the immigration laws,” the lawsuit states.

  According to the legal filing, Vickers—who is also a veterinarian—lives with his wife on a 1000-acre ranch in Brooks County, Texas.

  The ranch is located about 70 miles north of the international border with Mexico, according to the lawsuit.

  “Because of Defendants’ policies, tens of thousands of illegal aliens have been released into the interior who thereafter travel cross country across the grasslands of Plaintiff’s ranch,” the filing reads.

  Ranch Suffered ‘Thousands of Dollars in Damage’

  In so doing, the illegal immigrants “routinely cause thousands of dollars in damage to fences or gates as they pass through the ranch,” and leave “tons of trash and litter,” the lawsuit states.

  In some cases, Vickers has found plastic bags and trash inside the stomachs of his cows, according to the lawsuit.

  At other times, his cattle have escaped through cut fences and gates torn down by illegal immigrants, the filing alleges.

  As a result, since early 2021, Vickers has incurred “more than $50,000 in fence and gate damages alone” and has been forced to spend thousands of dollars to mitigate environmental damage, according to the lawsuit.

  The legal filing also notes that Vickers and his wife have to keep dogs on their ranch for security.

  The dogs have caught “hundreds of criminal trespasses,” many of whom are members of various gangs including the notoriously violent MS13, Tangoblast, Pistoleros, and the Mexican Mafia, among others, the lawsuit states.

  Because of the presence of criminal groups facilitating illegal immigration, Vickers must always carry a pistol to feel safe, according to the lawsuit.

  The lawsuit argues that the defendants’ actions amount to a violation of the take care clause of the U.S. Constitution that is “conceptually clear, historically unique, and actionable by those it especially harms,” the lawsuit states.

  The take care clause requires the president to “take Care that the Laws be faithfully executed.”

  

  Illegal Border Crossings Decline

  “Congress has passed numerous laws aimed at achieving operational control of the border, defined as zero illegal entries. But Defendants’ policies, issued under the authority of these laws, are calculated to result in, and have resulted in, the current, massive flood of illegal entries by foreign nationals from around the world,” the lawsuit states.

  The lawsuit asks the court to declare the federal government’s various border policies unconstitutional, including parole programs for Cubans, Haitians, Nicaraguans, and Venezuelans; family reunification parole processes; and the memorandum terminating Migrant Protection Protocols, also referred to as the “Remain in Mexico” program.

  The plaintiffs are also seeking unspecified costs and attorney’s fees.

  Since taking office, Biden has sought to expand lawful pathways into the United States as part of efforts to slash illegal crossings while trying to address the root cause of what he says is a “broken” immigration system.

  In June, his administration enacted restrictions on asylum claims at the southern border, which led to a drop in illegal border crossings.

  In a July 31 statement, the Immigration Reform Law Institute (IRLI) said the government’s policies have resulted in the “biggest influx of illegal aliens into America in our history.”

  “This is no mere policy failure, or just a violation of statutes, but flagrant disobedience to the Constitution,” Dale L. Wilcox, IRLI’s executive director and general counsel, said. “We hope the court sees Biden’s war on the laws he is supposed to be enforcing as the constitutional offense it is, ends these policies, and grants an injunction.”

  The Epoch Times contacted the White House for comment but didn’t receive a reply by publication time.

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 17:40

• 'Accidentally Posted' Campaign Ad Suggests Harris To Pick Shapiro For VP
  ‘Accidentally Posted’ Campaign Ad Suggests Harris To Pick Shapiro For VP

  A staffer for Philadelphia Mayor Cherelle Parker ‘accidentally posted’ a video meant to be released next week which reveals Pennsylvania Governor Josh Shapiro as Kamala Harris’ running mate.

  

  Lmfao there is a 100% they were supposed to schedule this post for next week but some dumb staffer for the Mayor of Philadelphia accidentally just revealed that Kamala Harris is picking Shapiro as her VP https://t.co/vTyFHuUUnK

  — Greg Price (@greg_price11) August 2, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  “Philly political sources have told me that a staffer connected with Mayor Cherelle Parker’s team accidentally posted the video today,” posted journalist Ernest Owens on X.

  “The video was scheduled for Monday…after VP Kamala Harris was expected to announce her pick.”

  “It’s Josh Shapiro, y’all,” Owens continued.

  I’m hearing there’s a “firestorm” right now.

  I guess that’s an understatement.

  — Ernest Owens (@MrErnestOwens) August 2, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jsOr, as Owens also suggested – this could be an ‘accident’ which serves as a trial balloon, and Harris could go in a different direction.

  THINKING OUT LOUD: With all of these odd moves coming from Pennsylvania and Philly Democrats right now in pushing Kamala Harris to pick Josh Shapiro as her VP, I wonder if all this backfires and she goes in a completely different direction altogether.

  The pressure is on.

  — Ernest Owens (@MrErnestOwens) August 2, 2024

  Shapiro notably canceled fundraising events in New York this weekend and “is likely to meet with Vice President Kamala Harris as she works to pick a running mate,” reported WHTM earlier in the day.

  Meanwhile, Shapiro has come under fire from women’s groups after his administration settled a sexual harassment claim against one of his longtime aides for $300,000.

  In a statement headlined “Gov. Shapiro’s Failures Enabled Sexual Harassment,” the National Women’s Defense League said that the Harris vetting team should “consider the handling of past complaints of sexual harassment inside the Pennsylvania Governor’s office.” The group claims to be a nonpartisan organization dedicated to preventing sexual harassment. -Daily Beast

  We’re guessing said women’s groups will promptly fade into the bushes.

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 17:20

• Illinois' Stupidest Bill Of The Year Signed Into Law: the Falsely Labeled, Unconstitutional "Worker Freedom Of Speech Act"
  Illinois’ Stupidest Bill Of The Year Signed Into Law: the Falsely Labeled, Unconstitutional “Worker Freedom Of Speech Act”

  By Mark Glennon of Wirepoints

  Illinois progressives are all over the media congratulating themselves on passage of The Illinois Worker Freedom of Speech Act, signed into law by Gov. JB Pritzker on Wednesday. It passed both houses in the General Assembly along strict party lines, with Republicans opposed.

  

  It has nothing to do with worker freedom of speech, creates a nightmare for employers and is yet another measure by the state that flagrantly ignores the First Amendment’s right to free speech.

  Under the Act, most every employer in the state faces mandatory fines of $1,000 per employee plus civil lawsuits if they discuss “religious or political matters” at meetings where worker attendance is mandatory.

  Think about that – no discussions allowed on political matters.

  So, say you work for a company that makes a renewable energy product of some kind. Your employer would be fined for  a meeting discussing the importance of government subsidies for your product and your job . Likewise, a company making conventional gasoline powered vehicles could not tell its employees about the impact of government efforts to replace them with electric vehicle makers.

  The list of similar examples is endless. Most every company today has matters pending in government that could impact the company, its capacity to hire people, how much it can afford to pay them and even matters outside of the company’s business that may be important to workers. Employers obviously should have the right to communicate their views on that and hope their workers will support them, and they do under the First Amendment.

  Some companies are particularly political. Take a look, for example, at some of Google’s leaked “all hands meetings.” Many brim with discussion of political matters. Here’s a clip from one where Google execs melted down, some choking up, while discussing Donald Trump’s election and how they should counteract it.

  I don’t know whether attendance was required at those meetings, but if it was and such a meeting was in Illinois, the company would be fined a thousand bucks under the Act for every Illinois employee there. That’s wrong. Giggle if you want but they should be free to discuss those things as they choose.

  The list of exemptions from the Act is very narrow. Even nonprofit 501(c)(3) companies are covered. Most think tanks and many political policy operations on the left and right are 501(c)(3)s, including Wirepoints. We and others like us now can’t discuss government matters at our internal meetings?

  Good luck trying to force us to comply. The Act is as brazen a First Amendment violation as you will find. At least six other states have passed or are considering similar legislation, called “captive audience bans,” and they are already being challenged in court on First Amendment grounds.

  The main purpose of the Act was to ban meetings where management discourages union activity. The Act does that, but to say it’s overbroad would be a monumental understatement. Even that purpose is legally questionable. Other captive audience bans are being challenged on the grounds that the field is preempted by the National Labor Relations Act, making the state laws impermissible.

  Illinois has now firmly established itself as the state most hostile to freedom of speech. A list of examples is below.

  In one case last year, the state’s First Amendment violation was so extreme that a federal judge ridiculed it as “stupid” as well as unconstitutional. That forced Illinois Attorney General Kwame Raoul to give up trying to defend the law at issue.

  Let’s hope this new law gets taken to court fast. It, too, is stupid as well as unconstitutional.

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 17:00

Digest powered by RSS Digest

• Orbán: The West Sees Immigration As A "Way Of Getting Rid Of The Ethnic Homogeneity That Is The Basis Of The Nation-State"
  Orbán: The West Sees Immigration As A “Way Of Getting Rid Of The Ethnic Homogeneity That Is The Basis Of The Nation-State”

  By Remix News

  In Hungarian Prime Minister Viktor Orbán’s speech at Tusványos in Romania, he focuses on the intractable differences developing between the East and West of Europe, with immigration one of the key divisions. He not only rejects the Western view on immigration, but sees it as an agenda with a very specific ideology behind it, which is designed to erode the nation-state entirely.

  “But Westerners, quite differently, believe that nation-states no longer exist. They therefore deny that there is a common culture and a public morality based on (the nation-state). There is no public morality, if you watched the Olympic opening yesterday, you saw it. So, they also think differently about migration. They believe that migration is not a threat or a problem, but in fact a way of getting rid of the ethnic homogeneity that is the basis of a nation. This is the essence of the progressive liberal international concept. That is why the absurdity does not occur to them, or they do not see it as absurd,” he said.

  He said that this contrast between East and West is playing out through war and the movement of peoples, saying that while hundreds of thousands of Christian people are killing each other in the East, “in the West of Europe, we are letting hundreds of thousands of people into a foreign civilization, which is absurd from our Central European point of view.”

  🔥🇭🇺🇪🇺 Migration is “uprooting European societies from their European soil.” – Hungarian PM Viktor Orbán pic.twitter.com/8R9tPR83wC

  — Remix News & Views (@RMXnews) February 26, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  This dramatic ideological cleavage is not a “secret,” according to Orbán. He said that the documents and policy papers coming out of the EU shpw that the “clear aim is to transcend the nation.”

  “But the point is that the powers, the sovereignty, should be transferred from the nation-states to Brussels. This is the logic behind all major measures. In their minds, the nation is a historical, or transitional, formation of the 18th and 19th centuries — as it came, so it may go. They are already in a post-national state in the Western half of Europe. It’s not just a politically different situation, but what I’m trying to talk about here is that it’s a new mental space.”

  Orbán says that the Hungarian perspective is different, which is why the government is taking measures now to ensure it has a resilient social structure, and the first step is to combat Hungary’s demographic decline. He noted that progress in this area had been made in the preceding years but acknowledged that there has been a standstill and new measures must be taken.

  “By 2035, Hungary should be demographically self-sustaining. There is no question of a population being replaced by migration. The Western experience is that if there are more guests than owners, the home is no longer a home. This risk should not be taken here.”

  Orbán notes that not everyone in the West is happy about the demographic transformation taking place in their countries, and in many cases, there are strong majorities against continued mass immigration. This, in turn, has led to a sharp increase in repression against dissenting voices and increasingly undemocratic trends in Western countries.

  Hungary’s PM Orbán says open borders equal terrorism and crime, which is why he’s against the EU’s new migration plan. pic.twitter.com/BJxUovwHkL

  — Remix News & Views (@RMXnews) June 30, 2023

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  And finally, the last element of reality is that this post-national situation that we see in the West has a serious, I would say dramatic, political consequence that is shaking democracy. Societies are increasingly resistant to migration, gender, war and globalism. And this creates the political problem of elites and the people, elitism and populism. This is a dominant phenomenon in Western politics today…This means that the elites condemn the people for drifting to the right. The feelings and ideas of the people are labeled xenophobia, homophobia and nationalism. The people, meanwhile, in response, accuse the elite of not caring about what is important to them, but of sinking into some kind of mindless globalism.

  Consequently, the elites and the people cannot agree with each other on cooperation. I could mention many countries. But if the people and elites cannot agree to cooperate, how can it become a representative democracy? Because here we have an elite that does not want to represent the people, and is proud of not wanting to represent them, and here we have the people who are not represented.”

  Continue reading at rmx.news

  Tyler Durden
  Fri, 08/02/2024 – 02:00

• The Propaganda Model Has Limits
  The Propaganda Model Has Limits

  Authored by Mattias Desmet via The Brownstone Institute,

  Normally, I let my pen rest during the summer months, but for some things, you set aside your habits. What has been happening in the context of the US presidential elections over the past few weeks is, to say the least, remarkable. We are witnessing a social system that – to use a term from complex dynamic systems theory – is heading toward a catastrophe. And the essence of the tipping point we are approaching is this: the propaganda model is beginning to fail.

  

  It started a few weeks ago like this: Trump, the presidential candidate who must not win, is up against Biden, the presidential candidate who must win.

  After the first debate, it was immediately clear: Trump will win against Biden. The big problem: Biden and Jill are about the only ones who don’t realize this.

  The media then turned against Biden. That, in itself, is a revolution. They had praised President Biden to the skies for four years, turning a blind eye to the fact that the man either seemed hardly aware of what he was saying or was giving speeches that could only be described as having the characteristics of a fascist’s discourse.

  I’m thinking, among other things, of the 2022 midterm speech in which he, against a bombastic-dramatic backdrop and flanked by two soldiers with machine guns, more or less directly called for violence against the Maga followers. Not to mention the shameless prosecution and imprisonment of political opponents and the intimidation and excommunication of hundreds of journalists (carefully kept out of the media by journalists who sided with the regime).

  Huxley would not be surprised that Biden claims in almost every speech that he had to save democracy, including his most recent speech. I’ve shared the quote of Huxley below before, but it doesn’t hurt to read it a second time:

  By means of ever more effective methods of mind-manipulation, the democracies will change their nature; the quaint old forms — elections, parliaments, Supreme Courts and all the rest — will remain. The underlying substance will be a new kind of non-violent totalitarianism. All the traditional names, all the hallowed slogans will remain exactly what they were in the good old days. Democracy and freedom will be the theme of every broadcast and editorial — but democracy and freedom in a strictly Pickwickian sense. Meanwhile the ruling oligarchy and its highly trained elite of soldiers, policemen, thought-manufacturers and mind-manipulators will quietly run the show as they see fit.

  – Huxley, Brave New World Revisited

  In any case, the media’s love for Biden was suddenly over when it became clear that he could not possibly win the election, even not with a little help from the media. If you want to know how that ‘little help’ worked in 2020, look at one of the most important interviews of the past year, where Mike Benz – former director of the cyber portfolio of the US government – explains to Tucker Carlson in detail how information flows on the internet were manipulated during the 2020 elections (and the Covid crisis). The guy eventually got disgusted with what he was doing and now runs a project striving for online freedom of speech.  I would recommend everyone to spend an hour watching that interview. Such an explanation is what we need: calm, expert, nuanced, and extraordinarily revealing.

  After the first debate, the media realized that even they could not help Biden win the election. They changed their approach. Biden was quickly stripped of his saintly status. The Veil of Appearances was pulled away, and he suddenly stood naked and vulnerable in the eye of the mainstream – a man in the autumn of his life, mentally confused, addicted to power, and arrogant. Some journalists even started attributing traits of the Great Narcissistic Monster Trump to him.

  But even media pressure couldn’t make Biden change his mind. He was so far gone that he did not see the hopelessness of his situation. That did not change when the Democratic elite turned their backs on him. Barack, Hillary, Nancy – it didn’t matter, the presidential candidate who couldn’t win kept stumbling in a lost race.

  Then things took another turn, a turn so predictable that one is astonished that it actually happened. An overaged teenager calmly climbed onto a roof with a sniper rifle, under the watchful eyes of the security services, and nearly shot Trump in the head. The security services, which initially did not respond for minutes when people tried to draw attention to the overaged teenager with an assault rifle, suddenly reacted decisively: they shot the overaged teenager dead seconds after the assassination attempt.

  What happened there? There are many reasons to have reservations about Trump, but one thing we cannot help but say: if Trump becomes president, the war in Ukraine will be over. Anyone who does not attribute any weight to that should subject themselves to a conscience examination. And no, Trump will not have to give half of Europe to Putin for that. My cautious estimate, for what it’s worth: It will suffice for NATO to stop and partially reverse its eastward expansion, for Russia to retain access to the Black Sea via Crimea (something everyone with historical awareness knows that denying would mean the death blow to Russia as a great power and thus a direct declaration of war), and for the population of the Russian-speaking part of Ukraine to choose in a referendum whether to belong to Russia or Ukraine.

  One of the biggest and most dangerous media lies of this time is that Putin started an ‘unprovoked war’ in Ukraine. I recommend a second interview by Tucker Carlson here (undoubtedly one of the most important contemporary journalists, one of the few who still fulfill the original societal function of journalism). The interview with professor and former top diplomat Jeffrey Sachs also has everything a good interview should have: given with great expertise, calm, and nuanced. Anyone who still believes that the war in Ukraine was ‘unprovoked’ after listening to it is kindly invited to explain themselves in the comments section of this article.

  So, I repeat my point: with Trump, the provocation of Russia stops, and the war in Ukraine ends. Presidents who threaten to end wars are sometimes shot at by lone gunmen. And those lone gunmen are, in turn, shot dead. And the archives about that remarkable act of lone gunmen sometimes remain sealed for a remarkably long time, much longer than they usually do.

  The media ultimately covered this historical event of the Trump assassination attempt surprisingly lightly. No journalist to be found pointed a finger at Biden because he had more or less literally called to ‘target’ Trump a few months earlier. Let alone the media admitting that they created the unspoken support in the population for this political violence. Neither did I find journalists who were greatly concerned that the overaged teenager was linked to Antifa – nothing wrong with Antifa according to them. I can imagine that the moral appreciation would have been different if an overaged teenager linked to the Maga movement had nearly taken down President Biden.

  Anyway, we are not surprised. That reaction was predictable. We are used to the media. Some journalists even suggested that Trump had been shot with a paintball, others thought the most accurate way to report was that someone ‘wounded Trump on the ear.’

  In any case, after the assassination attempt, the situation became even more dire for the mainstream: the presidential candidate who must not win is now even more popular, and his victory in a race with Biden is almost inevitable.

  Then the next chapter begins. Biden suddenly changes his mind: he has come to his senses and drops out of the race. He announces this – of all things – in a letter with a signature that, even for his shaky condition, looked quite clumsy. Then he stayed out of the public eye for a few days. We are curious about what exactly happened there.

  But the media are compliant again. Biden has now been sanctified again. Just like Kamala Harris, of course. They are already mentioning polls showing she will beat Trump. With a little help from the media, of course. Curious how this will continue, but I would be surprised if the rest of the campaign will be a walk in the park. Trump is not safe after the first attempt, that’s for sure. And to Kamala Harris, I say this: when totalitarian systems go into a chaotic phase, they become monsters that devour their own children.

  It is hard to ignore: the indoctrination and propaganda model is creaking and groaning at all its seams. The Veil of Appearances that is meant to hide all dirty laundry from the public eye is tearing left and right. And that’s why the step toward terror is increasingly being taken. One can see something frightening in it, but it also heralds the beginning of the end of the propaganda model. No one knows exactly how long the endgame will last, but it is certain that the system is in deep crisis. From the fact that the Democrats ran with someone like Biden and then had to force him out in this amateurish and transparent manner, we can only conclude one thing with certainty: the desperation must be enormous.

  What we are witnessing is nothing less than the failure of the greatest propaganda apparatus in history. And at that point, we also see a fact that people absorbed by conspiracy thinking make: they overestimate the perceived enemy not only as too evil but also (much) too powerful. In this way, one can only feel smaller and feel more and more powerlessness, anger, and hate, exactly the sentiments that will prove deadly in the coming years.

  The general reduction of everything that happens to a conspiracy, not seeing a Reality behind the manipulation and illusions created, is itself a symptom of this time. Conspiracies exist. No one needs to convince me of that. And one problem of this time is that most people who identify with the mainstream discourse have a remarkable ability to deny that. And they have an equally great ability to ignore that they themselves eagerly produce conspiracy theories when it comes to Putin or Saddam Hussein or ‘extreme right.’

  Conspiracy theories sometimes correctly relate to facts, and sometimes incorrectly. However, they do not provide a comprehensive explanation for global events. They do not touch the essence of the problem. The essence of the problem lies in rationalism and the associated human arrogance. And this hubris is certainly not the privilege of ‘the elite.’ It is even typical of conspiracy thinking itself, which ultimately attempts to capture the essence of social dynamics through a rationalistic construction. And precisely because of this, conspiracy thinking, just like the dominant discourse, falls prey to Babylonian confusion. Like the dominant discourse, they fail to bring true peace regarding the Real that increasingly imposes itself from behind the Veil of Appearances in this historical era.

  In times when America is dangerously heading towards a civil war, the golden advice is: do not be tempted by the possibility of violence. Stay calm and composed. And continue to speak. Totalitarianism dehumanizes; the only remedy against totalitarianism is to always recognize a human being in the Other. Also in the Totalitarian Other. What is happening is historical. Stand on the right side of history. This is not the side of the Democrats or the side of the Republicans, it is not the side of Trump or the side of Harris; it is the side of humanity, it is the side of those who are not so convinced of their own words that they can no longer find any space for the words of the Other to exist.

  Republished from the author’s Substack

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 23:25

• Where To Get The Best Return On An MBA Degree, According To A New "ROI Calculator"
  Where To Get The Best Return On An MBA Degree, According To A New “ROI Calculator”

  Bloomberg Businessweek has published an ROI calculator that is supposed to help students assess if pursuing an advanced degree is worth the investment.

  Using data from MBA graduates in the annual Best B-Schools Rankings, it considers factors like loan interest and lost income during enrollment to try and determine whether a degree from a certain institution is worthwhile. 

  Highlighting one example, Bloomberg writes that the median cost of a degree from the Wharton School at the University of Pennsylvania is $266,000, the highest among 77 US schools in the 2023 rankings.

  Despite this, Wharton ranks eighth in the 10-year post-MBA compensation increase and 19th in signing bonuses. According to Bloomberg estimates, a typical Wharton graduate can expect a 10-year net ROI of about $678,000, with an average annual compounded rate of 9%.

  Stanford Graduate School of Business, however, had the third highest expenses, about $250 less than Wharton. But, it led in the 10-year post-MBA compensation difference, at $295,000 compared to Wharton’s $220,000, despite a 32nd place median signing bonus. This results in an ROI of over $1 million and an annual rate of 11.9%.

  

  Bloomberg did their own ROI analysis and found the University of Kentucky’s Gatton College of Business and Economics offers the best ROI among the schools listed, with an impressive annualized ROI of 23.8%. This is largely due to its relatively low cost of $46,500 and its accelerated 11-month program, which allows students to re-enter the workforce more quickly. Located in Lexington, KY, Gatton provides an exceptional return on investment, making it a standout choice for prospective MBA students looking to maximize their financial outcomes.

  Following closely is Syracuse University’s Whitman School of Management, with a 22.0% ROI and a cost of $73,300. While more expensive than Gatton, it still offers a substantial return due to its strong post-MBA earning potential. The University of Mississippi also performs well, with a 20.7% ROI and the lowest cost in the list at $39,500. These schools exemplify how selecting a program with a high ROI can significantly impact one’s financial future, offering excellent returns compared to their costs.

  The tool lets users put in their own data (or use median estimates) for any of 77 US schools or the combined median estimates. It provides a 10-year net ROI in dollars and an annualized ROI percentage. You can compare top-ranked schools with more affordable ones like the University of Kentucky’s Gatton College, which has median expenses under $50,000 and the highest annual ROI at nearly 24% due to its shorter 11-month program. 

  While ROI is important, choosing a school or deciding to pursue an MBA also involves other factors like career goals, networking opportunities, location, and personal considerations.

  Gale Nichols, executive director of the MBA program at Indiana University’s Kelley School of Business commented: “It’s important for a student to enter any education program with a whole heart, and feeling that this is the right decision for them. They have to be prepared to put in the effort that’s needed to succeed.”

  You can use Bloomberg’s new ROI tool here. 

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 23:00

• Senators Introduce Bill To Blacklist Chinese Drones In The US
  Senators Introduce Bill To Blacklist Chinese Drones In The US

  Authored by Frank Fang via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

  Two senators have introduced bipartisan legislation to prevent Chinese drone technologies from operating on U.S. communications infrastructure.

  

  Sen. Rick Scott (R-Fla.), who sits on the Senate Homeland Security Committee, and Sen. Mark Warner (D-Va.), chairman of the Senate Select Committee on Intelligence, introduced the Countering CCP Drones and Supporting Drones for Law Enforcement Act (S.4792), according to a statement. The measure was introduced as an amendment to the fiscal year 2025 National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA).

  The lawmakers explained that Chinese drones pose a risk because the Chinese Communist Party (CCP) wields considerable influence over Chinese companies.

  “Drones made in communist China pose a significant threat to our freedoms and security and cannot be allowed to continue operating in American skies. Companies based in Communist China are at the will of Xi’s evil regime, meaning one of the United States’ greatest adversaries has total access to every bit of data collected by devices,” Scott said in a statement.

  “It should terrify every single American that the Chinese Communist Party, known for spying, stealing, and espionage, could have access to footage of Americans, their land, their businesses, and their families without their knowledge.”

  The legislation would prohibit Da-Jiang Innovations (DJI) Technologies, Autel Robotics, and other CCP-linked drone industry participants from operating on U.S. communications infrastructure by adding them to the Federal Communication Commission’s covered list.

  The legislation would also set up a short-term grant program under the Department of Transportation to allow first respondents to replace existing Chinese drones and purchase U.S.-made alternatives.

  According to the language of the bill, the program would be called the First Responder Secure Drone Program, with an appropriated fund of $15 million for fiscal year 2025.

  Chinese Drones

  DJI and Autel control about 90 percent of the global drone market; the two Chinese firms have commercial relationships with thousands of state, local, tribal, and territorial law enforcement agencies in the United States, according to Rep. Mark Green (R-Tenn.) and Rep. Cathy McMorris Rodgers (R-Wash.).

  In June, the two House lawmakers sent a letter asking the Departments of Homeland Security and Energy to declassify threats posed by Chinese drones.

  “Drones have tremendous potential to support agriculture, make our communities safer, and grow our economy. Yet without further intervention, the drone industry could be susceptible to massive intervention from the Communist Party of China, directly threatening our national security and economy,” Warner said in a statement.

  “I’m proud to introduce bipartisan legislation to restore American leadership in the drone industry and ensure that the CCP can’t wreak havoc by spying on Americans or otherwise disrupting key functions of drone technology.”

  To tackle the threats posed by Chinese drones, Scott and Warner introduced the American Security Drone Act of 2023, which President Joe Biden signed into law as part of the fiscal year 2024 NDAA. The law prohibits federal agencies from purchasing and operating drones made by Chinese companies.

  “Now, we must pass the Countering CCP Drones and Supporting Drones for Law Enforcement Act as a necessary next step to eliminate the threats we face from Communist China and further protect the security of the United States and every American family,” Mr. Scott said.

  In January, the FBI and Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency (CISA) issued a memo on cybersecurity vulnerabilities related to China-manufactured drones. The memo points out that different Chinese laws, including the nation’s National Intelligence Law that took effect in 2017, compel Chinese companies to hand over data collected within China and elsewhere to Beijing’s intelligence agencies.

  Michael Robbins, chief advocacy officer for the Association for Uncrewed Vehicle Systems International, a U.S.-based nonprofit, issued a statement sharing the concerns addressed in the memo.

  “In the interest of national security, organizations collecting sensitive information, including critical infrastructure owners and operators, must shift away from unsecure PRC drones and reliance on foreign supply chains,” he said, referring to China’s official name, the People’s Republic of China.

  In 2022, the Pentagon added DJI to its list of “Chinese military companies” operating directly or indirectly in the United States.

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 22:35

• Wildfire Smoke May Be Linked To Higher Risk Of Dementia, New Study Finds
  Wildfire Smoke May Be Linked To Higher Risk Of Dementia, New Study Finds

  Authored by Summer Lane via The Epoch Times,

  Exposure to wildfire smoke may be linked to a higher risk of being diagnosed with dementia, according to a new study from the Alzheimer’s Association.

  

  The study was conducted over 10 years and surveyed more than 1.2 million Southern California residents, according to a press release from the association.

  “With the rising global incidence of wildfires, including in California and the western U.S., exposure to this type of air pollution is an increasing threat to brain health,” Alzheimer’s Association Senior Director of Scientific Programs and Research Claire Sexton, said in the statement.

  California has been plagued over the years by wildfires, with the most recent inferno, the Park fire, scorching Northern California in Tehama and Butte counties north of Sacramento, consuming over 600 square miles on July 29.

  Such wildfires expose Californians to a type of air pollution that includes fine particulate matter, or PM2.5, according to the association.

  Their findings indicated that the risk of dementia was higher with exposure to wildfire smoke more than any other type of pollution, such as that from motor vehicles or factories.

  “These findings underscore the importance of enacting policies to prevent wildfires and investigating better methods to address them,” Ms. Sexton said.

  According to the Alzheimer’s association, researchers working on the study noted a 21 percent increase in the odds of a dementia diagnosis over a three-year exposure to PM2.5.

  They analyzed over 1 million health records from Kaiser Permanente’s southern California members who were at least 60 years old between 2009 and 2019, they said.

  Researchers additionally utilized satellite imagery and air quality monitoring data for the study.

  Study author and neurology resident at the Hospital of the University of Pennsylvania, Dr. Holly Elser, said in the statement that air pollution produced by wildfires accounts for over 70 percent of PM2.5 exposure in California.

  There are three reasons why the particulates produced by California wildfires are acutely dangerous, she said, including that they are produced at hotter temperatures, are smaller than other similar particles, and have a higher concentration of toxic chemicals.

  To combat the health risks associated with wildfire pollution exposure, the Alzheimer’s association highlighted experts’ advice to update home air filtration systems and to stay inside if possible during smoky days.

  They also recommended wearing an N95 protective mask when outside.

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 21:45

• Crowdstrike Says Delta Rejected "Repeated Efforts To Assist" During IT Meltdown
  Crowdstrike Says Delta Rejected “Repeated Efforts To Assist” During IT Meltdown

  Earlier this week, Delta Air Lines’ CEO criticized cybersecurity firm CrowdStrike and software provider Microsoft for triggering the ‘blue screen of death‘ across its network after a defective update. The IT outage, which went global, disrupted thousands of Delta flights and sparked travel chaos across the US for five days last month, resulting in an estimated $500 million loss.  

  “We have expressed our regret and apologies to all our customers for this incident and the disruption that resulted,” CrowdStrike spokesperson Jake Schuster told Bloomberg on Thursday. 

  Schuster said, “While its major competitors rapidly recovered from the incident, Delta rejected our repeated efforts to assist it in a speedy recovery.”

  

  Delta Air Lines CEO Ed Bastian told CNBC’s “Squawk Box” on Wednesday that the outage cost the airline $500 million. He said the carrier would seek damages from the disruptions, adding, “We have no choice.”

  “If you’re going to be having access, priority access to the Delta ecosystem in terms of technology, you’ve got to test the stuff you got. You can’t come into a mission critical 24/7 operation and tell us we have a bug,” Bastian said, referring to CrowdStrike’s defective software update that parazlyed its backend network. 

  Bastian added, “We have to protect our shareholders. We have to protect our customers, our employees, for the damage, not just to the cost of it, but to the brand, the reputational damage and the physical channel.”

  On Monday, CNBC’s Phil Lebeau reported that Delta hired top attorney David Boies to sue CrowdStrike and Microsoft for damages.

  Given Delta’s move to lawyer up, it appears the airline will be filing a lawsuit in the near term. We suspect other companies will, too.

  However, Joseph Gallo, senior vice president at Jefferies, told clients on Wednesday, “We don’t believe CRWD will be held liable” in court by Delta.

  “We expect other companies impacted by the IT outage could potentially follow suit (helps with an image to customers of impacted companies), creating further headline risk in the near-term,” he said. 

  Gallo continued, “We don’t expect CRWD to have to reimburse customers for the outage, but the litigation cost & distraction (CEO appearing before Congress) will certainly weigh.” 

  Shares have nearly been halved since peaking around $400 in mid-July.

  

  At this stage, and as CNBC’s Jim Cramer would agree, trying to call the bottom in price is akin to catching a falling knife… 

  Cramer strikes CrowdStrike. 

  

  Gallo is right. In the short term, a wave of lawsuits and hearings on Capitol Hill will weigh on shares. 

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 21:20

• Muscle Over Medicine: Why Ozempic Alone Won’t Cut It For Weight Loss
  Muscle Over Medicine: Why Ozempic Alone Won’t Cut It For Weight Loss

  Authored by Sheramy Tsai via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

  Numbers indicate that America has an obesity problem. According to a 2023 JAMA article, “U.S. obesity prevalence has surged over the last decade,” with 22 states reporting adult obesity rates at or above 35 percent.

  Dr. Gabrielle Lyon, a physician specializing in muscle-centric medicine, offers a different perspective.

  “We don’t have an obesity epidemic—what we really have is a midlife muscle crisis,” she said in a recent TED Talk.

  This shift highlights a crucial yet often overlooked factor in weight management: muscle mass.

  

  The Ozempic Issue

  The issue of muscle mass versus fat becomes particularly critical as the world turns to a new class of drugs to aid in weight loss.

  Medications such as Ozempic, known for their appetite-suppressing effects, promise significant weight loss and are gaining popularity. According to a May KFF health tracking poll, 12 percent of Americans have used the drug. A 2023 study in The Lancet confirms its efficacy, showing that adults lose about 15 percent of their body weight on average with GLP-1 agonists.

  Dr. Peter Attia, a physician specializing in longevity, wrote on his website, “Not all weight loss is healthy.”

  A 2021 clinical trial in the New England Journal of Medicine highlights a concerning downside: With GLP-1 agonists such as Ozempic, about 40 percent of the weight lost is lean mass, including muscle.

  “GLP-1 agonists have been celebrated for their potency in reducing body mass, but lean mass accounts for an alarming proportion of this weight loss,” Dr. Attia wrote.

  Dr. Attia also said that while GLP-1 agonists such as Ozempic can offer health benefits for obese individuals, they come with risks, especially for those with minimal weight to lose. He added that even obese patients can’t always afford significant lean mass loss, particularly those with sarcopenic obesity—a condition marked by excess fat and low skeletal muscle, common in older adults.

  “Further reductions in lean mass among those with too little to begin with could pose a greater threat to health and longevity than the presence of excess fat,” Dr. Attia warned.

  Lean mass loss is not exclusive to weight loss drugs. When individuals lose weight, they typically shed a combination of fat and fat-free mass, including muscle. Dr. Abud Bakri, an internal medicine doctor, wrote on social media platform X, “ALL caloric restriction causes lean tissue loss, whether that’s through GLP-1, surgery, or aggressive dieting.”

  The amount of muscle lost during a caloric deficit depends on factors such as protein intake, resistance training, hormonal status, sleep quality, and many other variables, Dr. Bakri told The Epoch Times in an email.

  “Muscle loss is the Achilles’s heel of most conventional weight loss efforts, including GLP-1 agonists, that virtually guarantees that weight is regained as fat,” Dr. William Davis, cardiologist and author of the book “Super Gut,” told The Epoch Times.

  “Obesity, at its core, is a disease of the muscle,” Dr. Lyon said in her Ted Talk. “We don’t have a battle of the belly. What we have is a battle of the bicep.”

  3 Ways Muscle Aids Weight Management

  Muscle plays a key role in managing our weight because it enhances our metabolism, using calories more effectively; regulates glucose, so we are less likely to store calories as fat; and balances hormones, to keep us in better overall metabolic health.

  Muscles Enhance Metabolism

  We all know someone who seems to be able to eat anything without gaining weight, often attributed to having a “great metabolism.” But what does that really mean?

  Metabolism encompasses all the biochemical processes that convert food into energy for essential functions such as cell growth, repair, and maintenance. The total energy used for these functions is known as the metabolic rate.

  Lean muscle mass affects the body’s basal metabolic rate (BMR)—the calories burned at rest. Muscle tissue is metabolically active and requires more energy to maintain than fat tissue. Thus, more muscle means more calories burned at rest.

  However, the effects of BMR might not be as significant as believed. A 2019 study in Frontiers in Nutrition found that each kilogram of added muscle raises the BMR by only 13 calories per day. Researchers concluded that this change is “non-significant and non-meaningful,” challenging the belief that muscle hypertrophy—an increase in muscle size and strength—substantially boosts daily energy needs.

  In her book, “Forever Strong,” Dr. Gabrielle Lyon expands on this idea. “You might have heard that muscle plays the biggest role in using calories and elevating our metabolism while we’re at rest. But don’t be fooled,” she wrote.

  While muscle does contribute to calorie burning, Dr. Lyon clarifies that “each pound of muscle burns only about ten calories at rest.”

  “The metabolic power is this: Well-trained muscle tissue is more efficient and effective at utilizing calories,” she said.

  Well-trained muscle refers to muscle tissue that has been conditioned and strengthened through regular exercise. It enhances metabolism by using energy for protein turnover, aiding the body in maintaining homeostasis.

  This insight shifts the focus from the simplistic “calories in versus calories out” model to a more nuanced understanding of how muscle health influences overall energy expenditure and metabolic balance. While muscle itself may not dramatically increase the number of calories burned at rest, well-trained muscles improve the body’s ability to use calories more efficiently, supporting a healthier metabolism and better energy balance.

  Muscles Regulate Glucose

  Muscles are crucial in regulating glucose levels. During exercise, muscles use glucose for energy, lowering blood sugar levels. Excess glucose can convert to fat, leading to weight gain. Thus, muscles help prevent weight gain by effectively regulating glucose, aiding in weight loss. This is especially important for those with insulin resistance or diabetes, as it helps improve glucose control without relying solely on insulin.

  A key benefit of resistance training is the production of myokines, hormones released during muscle contractions. A 2022 study in the International Journal of Molecular Sciences explained that myokines act as chemical signals, promoting glucose uptake in muscle cells and enhancing insulin sensitivity. This helps maintain stable blood sugar levels, reduces the risk of Type 2 diabetes, and supports overall metabolic health.

  “Actively working and taxing your muscle tissue will not only help regulate your hormones but will also make you better able to regulate your blood sugar and improve your body composition,” Dr. Lyon wrote in her book.

  Muscles Balance Hormones

  Muscles aren’t just for movement—they also play a significant role in balancing hormones.

  “During the past couple of decades, it has been apparent that skeletal muscle works as an endocrine organ,” a 2020 article in Endocrine Reviews reads.

  Muscles produce and secrete hundreds of hormone-like substances that influence various physiological processes, including hormone regulation. These myokines help regulate the release of hormones such as insulin, aiding in metabolic stability.

  Muscles also produce hormones such as irisin, which converts white fat to brown fat, enhancing energy expenditure.

  “Irisin is secreted from muscles in response to exercise and may mediate some beneficial effects of exercise in humans, such as weight loss,” the “Handbook of Hormones” reads.

  Interleukin-6 (IL-6) is another hormone-like substance released by muscles during exercise. Research in Biological Sciences found that IL-6 boosts fat burning and improves insulin sensitivity, making it easier to lose weight and maintain metabolic health.​

  Muscle As Medicine

  “We need to change the paradigm of medicine and think about muscle as medicine,” Dr. Lyon said in her Ted Talk.

  In her book, she recommends resistance training and a “protein-forward” diet to combat muscle loss. Resistance training promotes muscle growth and maintenance, while protein supplies the building blocks for muscle repair and growth.

  According to board-certified nutrition expert JJ Virgin, maintaining and building muscle benefits those using weight loss medications such as GLP-1 agonists. In a podcast, she said that combining these medications with resistance training and a high-protein diet can mitigate muscle loss, leading to more sustainable and healthier weight loss.

  Dr. Lyon’s advocacy for muscle as medicine urges a rethinking of traditional weight management strategies. Preserving and building muscle supports better health and enhances weight loss interventions. As people turn to weight loss drugs, surgery, and other methods, addressing muscle loss is crucial for maintaining overall health and achieving long-term success.

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 20:55

• Uranium Mining Stocks Sink After World's Largest Producer Boosts Production Guidance
  Uranium Mining Stocks Sink After World’s Largest Producer Boosts Production Guidance

  Uranium mining stocks plunged on Thursday after the world’s largest uranium producer raised its full-year 2024 uranium production guidance.

  

  Kazakhstan’s state-owned miner Kazatomprom released an update on operations and trading on Thursday, indicating it now expects to produce between 22.5mln and 23.5mln metric tons of uranium this year, while it previously stated the range of 21mln and 22.5mln tons.

  “The Company is increasing its 2024 full-year production guidance on both a 100% and attributable basis as the half-year results show that the production rates with which the mining entities are now progressing will result in higher than initially expected volumes. As was previously disclosed, the Company was able to secure necessary volumes of sulphuric acid required for its 2024 production at minus 20% level relative to Subsoil Use Agreements,” Kazatomprom said. 

  The upward revision comes after a 5% and 6% rise in second-quarter and half-year output, respectively, the miner noted in the update. It added that sales volumes soared 48% in the second quarter, mainly due to the timing of customer-scheduled deliveries.

  

  Here’s a snapshot of the full-year forecast (courtesy of Bloomberg):

  • Sees uranium production 22,500 to 23,500 tonnes

  • Sees revenue 1.70 trillion tenge to 1.80 trillion tenge

  • Sees capital expenditure 250 billion tenge to 270 billion tenge

  In response to the guidance boost by the world’s largest uranium miner, shares of the Global X Uranium ETF (URA) dropped 7%. The URA’s YTD gains stand around 2%, but it is still up 17% on three-year returns.

  

  Bloomberg Intelligence analyst Mohsen Crofts noted that Kazatomprom’s “new project pipeline is currently constrained by sulfuric-acid shortages and construction delays.” 

  In early February, uranium prices jumped to 16-year highs at $106 a pound on dwindling global supplies and rising demand, as the Biden administration kicked off nuclear revitalization trends in the US. Prices have since fallen to about $84.5 a pound. 

  

  As a reminder, nuclear power has been a central ZH theme since early December 2020. Read the note titled “Buy Uranium: Is This The Beginning Of The Next ESG Craze.” 

  

  Coupled with the latest powering up America theme, “The Next AI Trade,” we again reaffirm nuclear power will be critical for supplying clean, on-demand power to AI data centers, etc… 

  The Next AI Trade https://t.co/3WxL99gq3L

  — zerohedge (@zerohedge) April 2, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Goldman is still a bull on Cameco Corporation. 

  

   *  *  *

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 20:30

• Google Slammed Over "Soul Crushing" AI Olympics Ad
  Google Slammed Over “Soul Crushing” AI Olympics Ad

  Authored by Steve Watson via Modernity.news,

  Google has been blasted for a commercial touting its Gemini AI tool, with viewers describing the ad as completely “soul crushing.”

  

  The minute-long video was aired over coverage of the Olympics and features a young girl who is a big fan of American Olympic hurdler Sydney McLaughlin-Levrone.

  The girl’s father is seen in the commercial saying “She might even be the world’s number one Sydney fan.”

  Then comes the kicker.

  The ad shows the girl turning to Google’s Gemini AI to help understand running and hurdling techniques.

  OK, that’s not so inherently bad, but the father might have done his own research and at least put on a show of interacting with his daughter.

  But then it gets worse.

  The father notes that his daughter “wants to show Sydney some love, and I’m pretty good with words, but this has to be just right,” before again turning to the AI, this time to write a letter to the Olympian for the girl.

  The backlash was immediate, even from leftists.

  This commercial showing somebody having a child use AI to write a fan letter to her hero SUCKS. Obviously there are special circumstances and people who need help, but as a general “look how cool, she didn’t even have to write anything herself!” story, it SUCKS. Who wants an AI-written fan letter??

  — Linda Holmes (@lindaholmes.bsky.social) Jul 27, 2024 at 5:48 AM

  Professor Shelly Palmer of Syracuse University’s Newhouse School of Public Communications noted “This is exactly what we do not want anyone to do with AI. Ever.”

  Have you seen Google’s “Dear Sydney” Olympic ad featuring a father using Gemini AI to help his young daughter write a fan letter to Sydney McLaughlin-Levrone? It is one of the most disturbing commercials I’ve ever seen. To be clear, I love the idea of a young aspiring athlete… pic.twitter.com/FFohdVBbut

  — Shelly Palmer (@shellypalmer) July 29, 2024

  The globalist technocrat mindset is that children shouldn’t have to think for themselves and the human authenticity factor of a child’s imagination wasn’t even a consideration.

  I think we can all agree that the big loser of the #Olympics is the Google Gemini AI ad where they think an AI-written letter is better than a sweet note from a young girl to her favorite athlete.

  — Kaitlyn Arford — Freelance Writer (@kaitarford) July 28, 2024

  The Google Gemini letter writing commercial is one of the worst possible use cases for AI I can imagine.

  Way to teach your kid they don’t need to have an original thought or a genuine interaction with another human.

  — Sidney Pegula (@sidneypegula) July 28, 2024

  The ad reminded some of Apple’s iPad app from earlier this year, which saw musical instruments, art materials, cameras and basically anything creative being literally crushed in a giant mechanical press and replaced with the tablet.

  They’e seemingly proud to be destroying human imagination, creativity and talent.

  It was so bad, Apple had to apologise and scrap plans to broadcast it.

  Google’s Gemini also has a raft of other problems going on with it.

  *  *  *

  Your support is crucial in helping us defeat mass censorship. Please consider donating via Locals or check out our unique merch. Follow us on X @ModernityNews.

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 20:05

• Models Show Growing Threats In Tropics Could Impact West Coast Of Florida 
  Models Show Growing Threats In Tropics Could Impact West Coast Of Florida 

  Forecasters at the National Hurricane Center (NHC) are tracking a tropical wave that could soon form over the eastern Gulf of Mexico or near the Florida peninsula by late weekend or early next week. New spaghetti models show the storm’s potential landfall impacts are across the west coast of Florida. 

  A Thursday morning advisory note from NHC forecasters indicated that Invest 97L has a 30% chance of developing into a tropical system within the next 48 hours. Over the next seven days, those odds increase to about 70%.

  

  Matthew Cappucci, a meteorologist for Capital Weather Gang, posted a short video on X explaining how the next tropical system is likely to form in the Gulf of Mexico. He said multiple weather models agree that “Debby is likely to form in the Gulf of Mexico and likely to bring direct impacts.” 

  🌀 A tropical wave currently located near Hispaniola has an increasing chance of becoming a named storm, and potentially entering the Gulf of Mexico.

  The risk of land impacts is increasing.

  MyRadar meteorologist @MatthewCappucci has a tropical weather update. pic.twitter.com/lwxFX42TKG

  — MyRadar Weather (@MyRadarWX) August 1, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Here’s one of the first spaghetti models for Invest 97L released earlier today that shows potential landfall impacts on the west coast of Florida. 

  

  “Even though its still disorganized, the thunderstorms are much more numerous and intense today,” meteorologist Jim Cantore wrote on X. 

  Perhaps its a good thing #invest97l is spending some of its time over Hispaniola and Cuba in the near term. Even though its still disorganized, the thunderstorms are much more numerous and intense today. NHC at 30/70% at 2pm pic.twitter.com/pE6IZ7rVTI

  — Jim Cantore (@JimCantore) August 1, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Keep an eye on Invest 97L’s developments into the weekend. 

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 19:45

• Hackers Attack US Blood Bank, More Than 250 Hospitals Asked To Activate Blood Shortage Protocols
  Hackers Attack US Blood Bank, More Than 250 Hospitals Asked To Activate Blood Shortage Protocols

  Authored by Naveen Athrappully via The Epoch Times,

  Nonprofit blood bank OneBlood, which serves hundreds of American hospitals based in the Southeast region, has been affected by a ransomware attack that has disrupted its software systems.

  

  While the organization remains operational and is continuing to collect, test, and distribute blood, it is running at a “significantly reduced capacity” following the ransomware attack, the group said in a July 31 statement. As part of mitigating disruptions, the blood bank has implemented “manual processes and procedures to remain operational,” said Susan Forbes, OneBlood senior vice president of corporate communications and public relations. However, “manual processes take significantly longer to perform and impacts inventory availability,” she said.

  “In an effort to further manage the blood supply, we have asked the more than 250 hospitals we serve to activate their critical blood shortage protocols and to remain in that status for the time being,” she said.

  The firm is analyzing the scope of the event and any impact on data. OneBlood said it currently does not have adequate information as to whether customers’ personal information such as test results, medical history, and blood type have been compromised. No further details about the attack were revealed.

  Blood centers nationwide are sending blood and platelets to OneBlood to help augment supply, the group said. The organization said there was an “urgent need” for O Negative, O Positive, and Platelet donations.

  OneBlood serves 355 hospitals across Alabama, Florida, North Carolina, South Carolina, and Virginia.

  “The blood supply cannot be taken for granted. The situation we are dealing with is ongoing. If you are eligible to donate, we urge you to please make an appointment to donate as soon as possible,” Forbes said.

  The ransomware attack on OneBlood is the latest in a series of hacking attempts targeting U.S. health care facilities.

  In February, threat actors targeted health insurance company UnitedHealth Group’s Change Healthcare unit. The company determined the attack may have compromised certain personal identifiable information and protected health details.

  During a House hearing in May, the company’s CEO said an estimated one-third of Americans could have had their sensitive health information leaked to the dark web. He said the company paid the hackers $22 million in bitcoin as ransom.

  A data breach of health care service provider Kaiser Permanente in April is estimated to have affected roughly 13.4 million individuals.

  Health Care Sector Cyber Risk

  A June report by data security company SecurityScorecard pointed out that 35 percent of third-party data breaches in the United States last year affected health care organizations, “outpacing every other sector.”

  “The supplier ecosystem is a highly desirable target for ransomware groups. Attackers can infiltrate hundreds of organizations through a single vulnerability without being detected,” it said.

  The company scored the U.S. health care industry “B+” for cybersecurity capabilities for the first half of 2024. While ratings were “better than expected,” the firm noted there was still room for improvement.

  Organizations that have a rating of B are 2.9 times more likely to be victims of data breaches than entities with an A rating.

  SecurityScorecard found that app security flaws were one of the biggest vulnerabilities among health care organizations. With the Change Healthcare hack costing some companies $1 million a day, executives are placing more stress on cybersecurity measures, the company noted.

  On June 10, the Biden administration announced that it had implemented measures to bolster the protection of the country’s health care ecosystem.

  The White House convened a meeting of top executives from the health care sectors in May to boost cybersecurity solutions. The same month, the Advanced Research Projects Agency for Health launched a program that will invest more than $50 million to create tools that can be used by IT teams to better defend hospital networks.

  Cyberattacks against the U.S. health care system jumped by 128 percent between 2022 and 2023, according to the White House. These incidents can be especially disruptive to hospitals in the rural regions that service 60 million Americans.

  “Most rural hospitals are critical access hospitals, meaning they are located more than 35 miles from another hospital, which makes diversions of patients and staffing-intensive manual workarounds in response to attacks more difficult,” The White House said, adding that it has “received commitments from leading U.S. technology providers to provide free and low-cost resources for all 1,800–2,100 rural hospitals across the nation.”

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 19:25

• Haniyeh Killed By Bomb Placed In Tehran Guesthouse 2 Months Ago In Astounding Mossad Penetration Of IRGC Security
  Haniyeh Killed By Bomb Placed In Tehran Guesthouse 2 Months Ago In Astounding Mossad Penetration Of IRGC Security

  New details have emerged in the Israeli covert assassination of Hamas leader Ismail Haniyeh while he was staying in Tehran to attend the country’s presidential inauguration events.

  Iran and Hamas’ backers considered Haniyeh to be essentially akin to a top foreign diplomat or even head of state, and so at times Haniyeh was known to travel openly in places like Qatar, Iran, or other Gulf states. And yet the bombing that took is life is being widely viewed in Iran as an utterly humiliating security failure for the elite Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC), which was hosting the Hamas leader.

  The NY Times is reporting Thursday of events the day prior that he was assassinated by “an explosive device covertly smuggled into the Tehran guesthouse where he was staying, according to seven Middle Eastern officials, including two Iranians, and an American official.”

  

  “The bomb had been hidden approximately two months ago in the guesthouse, according to five of the Middle Eastern officials,” the report continues. “The guesthouse is run and protected by the Islamic Revolutionary Guards Corps and is part of a large compound, known as Neshat, in an upscale neighborhood of northern Tehran.”

  Likely among the “seven Middle Eastern officials” cited as sources for the report include some Israeli intel officials themselves, given the level of specified details. No doubt they are ‘spiking the football’ and want the Iranians and the world to know the astounding level of success they had in penetrating IRGC security and protocol.

  For an Israeli asset to be able to access an Iranian diplomatic house in Neshat – the upscale neighborhood of northern Tehran where the bombing took place – and then be able to pinpoint down to the moment the target be in a specific room is almost unbelievable and the stuff of a James Bond spy thriller.

  “The bomb was detonated remotely, the five officials said, once it was confirmed that he was inside his room at the guesthouse,” NYT continues, nothing that the blast also took out Haniyeh’s bodyguard but left alive Palestinian Islamic Jihad (PIJ) leader Ziyad al-Nakhalah, who was literally staying in the next room over.

  “The explosion shook the building, shattered some windows and caused the partial collapse of an exterior wall, according to the two Iranian officials, members of the Revolutionary Guards briefed on the incident,” the report continues. A widely circulating photograph also appears to confirm this description of events.

  

  The Times mentioned that there are alternative theories, however, such as the possibility of a small missile having struck Haniyeh’s room, which is what Hamas’ initial official statement late in the day Wednesday indicated. Neither Hamas nor the Iranians are likely to confirm these specific aspects of the alleged Mossad intel op, which could go down as the most daring in history.

  Axios has meanwhile issued a follow-up report which has the following additional details via Israeli security sources:

  • They added that the bomb was a high-tech device that used artificial intelligence.
  • It was detonated remotely by Mossad operatives who were on Iranian soil after receiving intelligence that Haniyeh was indeed in the room.
  • The IRGC said it has opened an investigation around the incident.

  The Islamic Republic’s Supreme Leader Ayatollah Ali Khamenei was reportedly awakened in the middle of the night by IRGC Generals in order to be notified, after which he called an emergency meeting of the Supreme National Security Council. That’s when, NYT says, he “issued an order to strike Israel in retaliation, according to the three Iranian officials.”

  Has Mossad been able to breach the top echelons of the IRGC? It appears so…

  If true, this means that the Revolutionary Guards’ top intelligence unit actively provided information to Mossad:

  “It was detonated remotely by Mossad operatives who were on Iranian soil after receiving intelligence that Haniyeh was indeed in the room.”https://t.co/Irt8yLkRnX

  — Levent Kemal (@leventkemaI) August 1, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  It’s anyone’s guess when or how this ‘retaliation’ will come. The April 13th drone and missile attack against Israel was highly telegraphed and limited, by all accounts. Likely Tehran will mount a more severe and less predictable attack this time, which could come at any moment, and probably in nighttime hours for a greater element of surprise.

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 19:05

• Why U.S. Arms Control Efforts Are Failing
  Why U.S. Arms Control Efforts Are Failing

  Authored by Matthew Mai via RealClearWire,

  Prospects for arms control among the world’s nuclear-armed great powers are growing worse by the day. Last week, China announced that it was halting nuclear talks with the United States over the latter’s arms sales to Taiwan. The discussions were unlikely to lead to any substantive results, but it is another sign that U.S. efforts to “compartmentalize” nuclear issues by de-linking it from the geopolitical rivalry driving U.S.-China competition are failing. The same dynamic is at play in U.S.-Russia relations. After renewing the New START treaty in February 2021, Russia suspended its participation last year, citing U.S. support for Ukraine and its aim of inflicting a “strategic defeat of Russia.”

  

  U.S. arms control policy is not making headway for several reasons. All three countries are executing generational nuclear modernization programs to update their Cold War-era arsenals. China is also disinclined to negotiate limits to its nuclear arsenal before it reaches parity with the United States. But more important is the fundamental difference between the United States, and China and Russia in how they approach arms control policy.

  The United States is attempting to separate nuclear issues from other disputes, the logic being that its great power adversaries still have an overriding interest in upholding strategic stability even when relations are poor. Conversely, U.S. adversaries view nuclear weapons as competitive tools that are integral to geopolitical competition. China and Russia will not make concessions on arms control if U.S. policies and behavior that encroach upon their core interests are not addressed.

  The current trajectory of great power relations is already leading to increased tensions in the nuclear domain. China and Russia both have reasons to use nuclear weapons to attain a risk-taking advantage when faced with a conventionally superior foe. In East Asia, there is a high possibility China would resort to nuclear escalation if a conflict over Taiwan involving the United States broke out. Russia has successfully used its “nuclear shield” to ward off NATO intervention in Ukraine by issuing credible threats to escalate the conflict. In both cases, nuclear escalation risks are tied to geopolitical developments that implicate core Chinese and Russian interests.

  The irony is that China and Russia are employing the same linkage strategy that the Nixon administration successfully used to negotiate the landmark SALT I agreement and ABM Treaty, wind down the Vietnam War, and initiate the Middle East peace process. As Helmut Sonnenfeldt, a senior staff member of the National Security Council, later said of linkage: “Its purpose was to establish a trend toward more normal and restrained political competition. These interconnections [between various political issues] were not capricious or artificial. They were part of the realities of international life from which the Soviet Union no more than the United States could escape.”

  Today, U.S. policymakers have good reasons to seek limits on China and Russia’s nuclear arsenals. Arms control can help stabilize great power relations while avoiding the costs of an unlimited nuclear buildup, an important consideration in a tripolar nuclear system. Less discussed but still significant is how arms control can allow the United States to develop qualitative advantages over its competitors even as it accepts quantitative limits on the size of its arsenal. As Cold War historian John D. Maurer has explained, the Intermediate-Range Nuclear Forces Treaty limited U.S. and Soviet deployments of land-based missiles but left the United States free to pursue advances in air and sea-launched weapons where it had a military-technological advantage over the Soviet Union.

  As during the Cold War, arms control policy cannot be separated from the geopolitical tensions shaping U.S.-China and U.S.-Russia relations today. Discussions with China are unlikely to go anywhere for the foreseeable future as Beijing continues to expand its arsenal in a bid to reach parity (or something close to it) with the United States. Yet, if U.S. and Chinese officials find themselves sitting at the negotiating table again, U.S. policymakers should link progress on arms control with Chinese restraint toward Taiwan. Of course, this will also require U.S. reassurances that it does not support Taiwanese independence and, in the words of the 1972 Shanghai Communique, “reaffirms its interest in a peaceful settlement of the Taiwan question by the Chinese themselves” through cross-strait dialogue.

  There is greater potential for talks with Russia. Both sides have comparable nuclear arsenals and there is a long history of arms control cooperation with existing mechanisms for verification and compliance. However, as Russian officials have repeatedly stated in recent years, nuclear negotiations must take place alongside a more comprehensive dialogue about the Euro-Atlantic security architecture. This could involve a “grand bargain” where NATO membership for Ukraine is taken off the table in exchange for a cessation of military hostilities. Limits on U.S. forward missile deployments and NATO’s military presence in Eastern Europe could also be considered to incentivize Russian restraint.

  U.S. policy cannot disconnect nuclear issues from the geopolitics that influence international security trends. Those aiming to reduce the risks of nuclear escalation in Europe and East Asia should embrace the strategy of linkage that helped moderate great power competition during the Cold War and avoid catastrophe.

  Matthew C. Mai is a contributing fellow at Defense Priorities.

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 18:45

• Colorado HOA Calls The Police On Children's Lemonade Stand
  Colorado HOA Calls The Police On Children’s Lemonade Stand

  While the southern border remains wide open and crime sweeps through U.S. cities, one Colorado HOA is doing their part to protect the homeland: shutting down a lemonade stand set up by a group of local children. 

  Police in Summit County were called for reports of “children running an illegal lemonade stand on county right of way”, according to Yahoo News.

  The report says that when police arrived, they “found that the children were not blocking the roadway but did ask them to move back from the road a few feet for their safety.”

  Believing the situation was then resolved, the officers proceeded to address other parking issues nearby. However, they had to return when the original complainants began shouting at the children, accusing them of being on private property. 

  

  As tensions escalated, the officers found out that the children actually lived within the HOA and were entitled to operate their stand on the communal property. This allowed the kids to continue their lemonade business.

  A similar incident occurred in 2018, Yahoo News reported, when three boys ran a stand and planned to donate the proceeds to their church.

  Police said at the time: “We don’t go out of our way to enforce matters of this nature and in this instance, our actions were complaint-driven. When officers receive a complaint, we have an obligation to act.”

  The boys’ mother said at the time: “I was very surprised and shocked that all this was necessary for a child’s lemonade stand.”

  And the next year, Governor Jared Polis took action, signing a law that allowed children to run occasional lemonade stands. 

  Polis wrote on Twitter: “Thrilled to sign the bipartisan Lemonade Stand Bill today that reduces regulations and cuts red tape, making it easier for young entrepreneurs to start their own businesses!”

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 18:25

• Israeli Strike Kills Al Jazeera Journalists Near Slain Hamas Leader's Home In Gaza
  Israeli Strike Kills Al Jazeera Journalists Near Slain Hamas Leader’s Home In Gaza

  Via Middle East Eye

  An Israeli air strike near Ismail Haniyeh’s home in Gaza killed two Al Jazeera journalists who were reporting on the Hamas leader’s assassination in Iran.

  Ismail al-Ghoul, a journalist for Al Jazeera Arabic, and cameraman Rami al-Refee were killed in the strike near the Aidia area west of Gaza City, the Qatar-based broadcaster reported.

  

  “It is with a heavy heart that we mourn the loss of our colleague journalist, Ismail Al-Ghoul, who was killed in an Israeli air strike while courageously covering the events in northern Gaza,” Al Jazeera Managing Editor Mohamed Moawad wrote on X, formerly known as Twitter.

  “Without Ismail, the world would not have seen the devastating images of these massacres,” he wrote, adding that he “relentlessly covered the events and delivered the reality of Gaza to the world through Al Jazeera”.

  “His voice has now been silenced, and there is no longer a need to call out to the world. Ismail fulfilled his mission to his people and his homeland. Shame on those who have failed the civilians, journalists and humanity.”

  According to the network, Ghoul and Refee were wearing blue press vests when they were killed and there were identifying signs on their car when they were attacked.

  There was no immediate comment from Israel, which has previously denied targeting journalists in its 10-month war on Gaza, which has reportedly killed at least 39,445 people, the vast majority of whom were children and women – according to Gaza health sources.

  According to Al Jazeera Arabic, the journalists had last contacted their news desk 15 minutes before the strike. During the call, they had reported a strike on a house near to where they were reporting and were told to leave immediately. They did, and were traveling to Al-Ahli Arab Hospital when they were killed.

  Haniyeh was killed in an Israeli strike in Tehran on Wednesday, just hours after he attended the swearing-in ceremony for Iran’s new president, Masoud Pezeshkian.

  This was the second high-profile Israeli assassination within hours, following a strike in Beirut that reportedly killed senior Hezbollah commander Fuad Shukr, heightening fears that the region is sliding towards a full-blown war.

  Al Jazeera Arabic just did something I’ve never seen a news channel do.

  Their journalists are live from the studio holding right now a silent protest over their murdered colleagues in Gaza. With them on air is Gaza correspondents. @AnasAlSharif0 telling about Ismail AlGhoul pic.twitter.com/LeijGBegGz

  — Dima Sarsour (@SarsourDima) August 1, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  In a statement the Committee to Protect Journalists (CPJ) said it was “dismayed” by the news of Ghoul and Refee’s killings. “Journalists are civilians and should never be targeted,” CPJ CEO Jodie Ginsberg said in a statement. “Israel must explain why two more Al Jazeera journalists have been killed in what appears to be a direct strike.”

  According to Palestinian government officials, Israel has killed more than 160 journalists in Gaza since the beginning of the war in October 2023.

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 18:05

• Debate Erupts About Banning G-String Bikinis From Australian Waterparks
  Debate Erupts About Banning G-String Bikinis From Australian Waterparks

  In what can only be described as a pronounced step away from unifying an already divided world, thousands of people in Australia are calling for a ban on G-string bikinis in waterparks around the nation.

  The clothing is being called “offensive” and “too revealing”, according to News.com.au.

  Some people dislike the look so much they have called on local authorities to ban it. And the argument has spawned a Facebook group in Australia called “Should G-string bikinis be banned in water parks?”, the report says. 

  The group was accompanied by the following photo of the woman in the pink bikini:

  

  News.com.au reports that the poll asked Australians to vote on a G-string ban by giving a thumbs up for “yes” or a laughing face emoji for “no.” Over 7000 people voted, with the majority opposing the ban.

  “What kids have see at the beach and theme parks, at such young ages, these days is ridiculous,” one user wrote.

  Another added: “I’m female and I find it uncomfortable to see to be honest” while a man chimed in stating “It’s extremely inappropriate around little children.”

  “Isn’t it supposed to be nice, to leave something to the imagination? Those bikinis expose way too much of a sexual nature, and are too revealing,” another poll participant commented, the report says. 

  But it wasn’t all anti G-string sentiment, with some clearer minds popping up in the polling. One woman stated: “We are Australia. Wear what you want. Other countries in the world have very strict laws which govern what people (inclusively females) can wear. We are better than that.”

  “If your partner is ogling at the bum – that’s a problem with your partner, not the bum,” another said. 

  Finally, one user summed it up: “Couldn’t care less, we should all just wear whatever we want, and remember how lucky we are to live in a free country.”

  Let freedom ring.

  

   

   

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 17:45

• Obama's Fourth Term: Bidenomics & Neofascism On Steroids
  Obama’s Fourth Term: Bidenomics & Neofascism On Steroids

  Authored by James Rickards via DailyReckoning.com,

  Americans have just passed through the most eventful and tumultuous four weeks in memory.

  The only comparisons are 9/11, the fall of the Berlin Wall in 1989, the Watergate/Vietnam days of the 1970s, the riots and assassinations in the 1960s and the Cuban Missile Crisis.

  First, we had Joe Biden’s face-plant debate performance on June 27 when he looked like a corpse and spoke in a demented way.

  Then came the attempted assassination of Donald Trump on July 13 in Butler, Pennsylvania (which killed one and wounded two others).

  This was followed by the Republican National Convention and nomination of J.D. Vance on July 15, the decision of Joe Biden to withdraw from the presidential race on July 21 and finally the coronation of Queen Kamala Harris in the following days (more on Harris below).

  Any one of these stories would be huge news in any election cycle, but to have five such events in less than four weeks is a lot to process, let alone fully comprehend.

  Far More Questions Than Answers

  We know some of what happened, but much is being covered up by the government. Was Biden set up to fail at the debate as a prelude to Kamala? Was the Secret Service passively involved in the assassination by letting it happen? Did the shooter truly act alone, or did he receive assistance? Was Joe Biden threatened with a coup d’etat in the form of leaks about his health and removal from office under the 25th amendment if he didn’t step aside?

  At this point, we do not have answers to these and many other questions. Still, the questions themselves are important. They’re one way to keep the record open. We should not rest until we have answers.

  Questions are a tool to keep pressure on public officials and not allow them to sweep this all under the rug. The Democrats running the White House and the FBI are screeching about protecting “democracy” and offering “transparency,” yet they are the greatest threats to both.

  Let’s keep the questions alive and not allow the official cover-up to prevail. Perhaps if Trump wins the election, we’ll get to the bottom of some of this in due course.

  Let’s move on to Kamala Harris…

  Queen Kamala

  The canonization of Kamala Harris by mainstream media and the collateral gaslighting of the American people have begun in earnest.

  She was a failed border czar, but now the media pretend that never happened and she was just some kind of goodwill ambassador to Guatemala. Whatever. We don’t need the media to tell us who Kamala is and what she would do.

  We know already.

  She’s an empty pantsuit with a low IQ and a weird ability to give long explanations that make absolutely no sense, punctuated by cackles.

  Can you imagine what serious foreign leaders like Vladimir Putin and Xi Jinping must think when they hear her speak? They probably can’t believe that such a person could possibly become leader of the most powerful nation in the world.

  Harris is already pandering to the pro-Palestinian, anti-Israeli base of the Democratic Party.

  Kamala Shuns Netanyahu

  Benjamin Netanyahu, the prime minister of Israel, gave an address to a joint meeting of Congress on July 24. His purpose was to explain why Israel went to war with Hamas, how Israel is conducting that war and Israel’s plans for an eventual end to the conflict.

  One would think those facts and forecasts would be well-known to members of Congress, but that gives them too much credit. Members of Congress get their information through a haze of biased and misleading media (like the rest of us) and have to work hard to develop reliable sources and objective assessments to understand what’s going on.

  Many people don’t want to hear the facts, but here they are: The war began in response to the greatest one-day massacre of Jews since the Holocaust. It will continue until the last Hamas terrorist is dead or enough have been killed to render Hamas impotent as a fighting and terrorist force.

  That may take a few more months. Once that mission is completed, Israel will establish some type of interim government in Gaza with only limited autonomy for the people there in order to prevent the reemergence of a new Hamas.

  It’s All About Wokeism

  Israel needs continued support from the U.S., in particular weapons systems including air defense and ammunition and intelligence sharing, in order to defeat Hamas. Addressing Congress, Netanyahu offered a blunt assessment of pro-Hamas demonstrators in the United States, especially on campuses and the streets of major cities.

  He made it clear that these protesters are not humanitarians, but are simply supporters of terrorism, rape and murder. There’s room for disagreement, but it was refreshing to hear a political leader speak in such candid and honest terms.

  Americans are used to the platitudes and cliches of U.S. politicians and rarely get to hear such a clear summary of the situation.

  By the way, it might be a stretch to call the forum a “joint” meeting of Congress. Many Democrats boycotted the session, including VP Kamala Harris, who was to have a prominent role as president of the Senate.

  Her cowardice and that of her colleagues reveal most Democrats for who they really are — supporters of terror and haters of Israel. They see everything through the prism of wokeism, which holds that there’s always an oppressed group and an oppressor who’s stomping on them.

  In their view, Israel is the oppressor and Palestinians are the oppressed. It doesn’t matter what atrocities Hamas or other terrorist organizations commit because the greater injustice is Israeli “oppression,” which is much more imagined than real.

  Obama’s Fourth Term

  Anyway, here’s what you do need to know as investors: A Harris victory means more of the same. It’s been argued, correctly, that Biden’s presidency has really been Obama’s third term. Key Obama personnel have been behind the scenes, calling the shots the entire time.

  

  Kamala’s an Obama puppet, and even though Biden and Harris can’t stand each other, they both carried the Obama baton. What that means is more government dysfunction. It means more of the Green New Scam, including attacks on big oil and gas and a hold on new leases for drilling on federal lands.

  It means a wider war in Ukraine with a risk of escalation to a nuclear war. It means higher taxes and more regulation. It also means slower economic growth, not by design, but as a result of excessive government debt relative to GDP.

  Furthermore, it means expanded weaponization of the Department of Justice, FBI and Department of Homeland Security. You’ll have continued open borders resulting in lower wages for all Americans and widespread diseases like whooping cough and tuberculosis from the unvaccinated aliens.

  More government censorship will be the norm. This list goes on, but no guesswork is required. This will be Bidenomics and neofascism on steroids.

  If Harris wins, investment winners would be Big Tech, Big Pharma, China and the Green New Scammers. Investment losers would be oil and natural gas, defense and mining.

  If Trump wins, it would be the opposite. Guess which I’m hoping for.

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 17:25

• Apple Pumps And Dumps As iPad Sales Help Topline Beat, But China Revenues Tumble
  Apple Pumps And Dumps As iPad Sales Help Topline Beat, But China Revenues Tumble

  With most of the megatechs having already released earnings – with most disappointing and seeing their shares slide – all eyes were on the last Mag7 to report during the heart of earnings season (there is still Nvidia, but due to a calendar quirk that’s not for a month) which is also the company which recently regained (from Microsoft) the title of the world’s most valuable company: Apple.

  Having failed to enjoy the same AI-driven euphoria as some of its gigacap peers, Apple stock had languished for months and was in fact relegated by Goldman a few months ago to the Meh 3 (AAPL, GOOGL, TSLA) and away from the Fab 4 (META, NVDA, MSFT, AMZN). But then after the company’s developer day, an initial meh reaction ended up being a major tailwind which pushed the company’s stock price to new all time high (according to many analysts, undeservedly so, since its only claim to fame is an upgrade version of Siri on deck, meant to push an iphone replacement cycle), which is why many were wondering if today’s earnings would validate and justify much of the recent euphoria.

  With that in mind, here is what AAPL just reported for the third fiscal quarter ended June 30:

  • EPS $1.40 vs. $1.26, up 11% y/y, beating estimates of $1.35
  • Revenue $85.78 billion, +4.9% y/y, beating estimates of $84.46 billion (Bloomberg Consensus)
    • Products revenue $61.56 billion, +1.6% y/y, beating estimates of $60.63 billion
      • IPhone revenue $39.30 billion, -0.9% y/y, beating estimates of $38.95 billion
      • Mac revenue $7.01 billion, +2.5% y/y, beating estimates of $6.98 billion
      • IPad revenue $7.16 billion, +24% y/y, beating estimates of $6.63 billion
      • Wearables, home and accessories $8.10 billion, -2.3% y/y, beating estimates of $7.79 billion
    • Service revenue $24.21 billion, +14% y/y, beating estimates of $23.96 billion

  The one – very big – fly in the ointment was the usual suspect: China, where revenues unexpectedly tumbled 6.5% yoY:

  • Greater China rev. $14.73 billion, -6.5% y/y, missing estimates of $15.26 billion

  Going down the line:

  • Cost of sales $46.10 billion, +1.6% y/y, higher than estimates of $45.43 billion
  • Total operating expenses $14.33 billion, +6.8% y/y, below the estimate $14.39 billion
  • Gross margin $39.68 billion, +9% y/y, beating the estimate $39.06 billion
  • Cash and cash equivalents $25.57 billion, below estimates of $28.98 billion

  And so on:

  

  Looking at a breakdown of sales by product category we find that, as expected, iphone sales dropped in a quarter which most knew would be uneventful for the iphone maker, yet at $39.3bn (and down from $39.7bn YoY) they still beat expectations of $39.0billion. The rest of the product suite was solid with Macs surprisingly beating estimates while both iPads and wearables coming stronger than expected. Worth noting that the iPad is a big leap in response to the new iPad Pro and iPad Air. Apple says, as it usually does, that half of iPad buyers in the quarter were new to the product.  In any case the trend is clear: while sales may not be plunging, they have certainly topped out and the only ting that is still rising is Services.

  

  For those asking, there wasn’t a single mention of the Vision Pro in Apple’s earnings release. Let’s not forget: this $3,500 headset is Apple’s first major new product in nearly a decade, and it has been an epic, overpriced if pretty cool, dud. Additionally, there’s not a ton left in the cupboard in terms of innovation with the company canceling its self-driving car in February. Of course, there is SiriGPT, although we can assure Tim Cook that nobody will upgrade their iPhone just to talk to a woke, censored chatbot.

  What is remarkable about the chart above is that revenue from Apple’s product suite is flat – at best – over the past decade. The only growth is in the company’s services division, which in Q3 beat again, rising to $24.2 billion, up 14% from $21.2 billion, and beating estimates of $24.0 billion.

  

  Looking at a geographic breakdown we find that while sales improved across almost every region, with the notable exception of China, where sales dropped by 6.5% YoY to $14.7BN, sharply below the estimate of $15.3BN.

  

  Still, the long run chart shows that revenues across most regions are flat at best, even ignoring the ongoing China weakness which will only get worse if Trump becomes president.

  

  As Bloomberg notes, “it was a good beat on 3Q iPhone revenues but overall sales for the Greater China region missed estimates by a few hundred million dollars. A lot of folks will try do the math here but ultimately we need to hear from Cook and Maestri on how they feel iPhone did in that market. Other factors at play?”

  Commenting on the quarter, Tim Cook said that “during the quarter, we were excited to announce incredible updates to our software platforms at our Worldwide Developers Conference, including Apple Intelligence, a breakthrough personal intelligence system that puts powerful, private generative AI models at the core of iPhone, iPad, and Mac. We very much look forward to sharing these tools with our users, and we continue to invest significantly in the innovations that will enrich our customers’ lives, while leading with the values that drive our work.”

  CFO Luca Maestri also chimed in:

  Statement from Luca Maestri:

  “During the quarter, our record business performance generated EPS growth of 11 percent and nearly $29 billion in operating cash flow, allowing us to return over $32 billion to shareholders. We are also very pleased that our installed base of active devices reached a new all-time high in all geographic segments, thanks to very high levels of customer satisfaction and loyalty.”

  While Apple doesn’t give guidance in its earnings announcements anymore, but we should expect some sort of directional color from the CFO on the earnings call itself.

  Commenting on the quarter, Bloomberg’s Mark Gurman had a scathing, and accurate, assessment:

  My big picture takeaway is that, financially, everything is *fine* at Apple. But this is a company that has dramatically lost its pace of innovation and has probably missed on its latest major new product, while canceling future sources of growth like in-house screen technology and cars. I am seeing nothing in the Apple product roadmap in the next 2-3 years that is a game-changer. Anything new and meaningful is not coming until around 2027 in my view.

  If then… The stock, which dumped for much of the session, initially spiked on the company’s top and bottom line beat, but has since retraced all gains and was trading at session lows as attention turns to the surprising China weakness.

  

   

  The earnings call is starting as we hit save, but the following exchang was notable: a member of the media asked the $6.4 trillion question, whether Apple Intelligence push investors to buy new generation iPhones?

  The answer with CFO Luca Maestri on the call with Bloomberg: “We are very excited with the kinds of features we are offering users: They are very personal, relevant and people will really enjoy them. Apple Intelligence provides yet another reason to upgrade.”

  Yeah, good luck with that.

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 17:16

• Viral Video Reveals 14% Of Illegal Immigrants Admitting They're Registered To Vote
  Viral Video Reveals 14% Of Illegal Immigrants Admitting They’re Registered To Vote

  Undercover footage reported by the Heritage Foundation’s Oversight Project from Muckracker.com reveals that 14% of illegal immigrants in a single apartment complex in Georgia admitted to being registered to vote. The video, taken by journalist Carlos Arellano, has over 21 million views as of this writing.

  🚨NON-CITIZENS REGISTERED IN GA🚨

  Footage obtained by @realmuckraker shows numerous non-citizens admitting to being registered voters.

  A staggering 14% of the non-citizens spoken to admitted to being registered to voters. pic.twitter.com/0p38irDBZH

  — Oversight Project (@OversightPR) July 31, 2024

  If that same 14% is applied state-wide, that suggests that 47,000 of Georgia’s estimated 339,000 non-citizens are registered to vote in a state that Joe Biden ‘won’ by less than 12,000 votes in 2020.

  The Heritage Foundation were unable to find these individuals on GA voter rolls, making it “unclear exactly what information these individuals gave when registering to vote.”

  One thing is for certain: Systems are being taken advantage of, and the outcome of the 2024 election will be difficult to determine given the near impossibility of auditing in a short period of time.

  — Oversight Project (@OversightPR) July 31, 2024

  It’s been going on for quite some time and not just Georgia. NGO’s have been giving debit cards, phones and registering illegals to vote. They move on to the next state and do it again. Everyone needs to report it to their respective AG’s office and keep record of all…

  — Karen Warren (@KarenWa41674844) August 1, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Extremely disturbing! https://t.co/uEJ9O7h6qy

  — Elon Musk (@elonmusk) August 1, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  •In person voting only
  •ID needed to vote
  •Registration card needed to vote

  There is a reason democrats do not want these rules to be mandatory.

  — Cory M. Crossman 🇺🇸 (@CoryMCrossman) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Extremely disturbing indeed!

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 17:05

Digest powered by RSS Digest

• Visualizing The Global Demand For Oil (2022-2045F)
  Visualizing The Global Demand For Oil (2022-2045F)

  Economists have been attempting to forecast the point of peak oil—the year when oil demand reaches its maximum level—since the 1970s. Despite increasing warnings regarding climate change, global demand has continued to rise over the last few years and could continue.

  In this graphic, Visual Capitalist partnered with Range ETFs to explore the global oil demand and determine which region will demand the most in 2045.   

  

  Projecting Global Oil Demand

  As per OPEC, Oil demand could be as much as 17% higher by 2045 than it was in 2022. These projections are in millions of oil barrels per day and broken down by oil product.

  

  Oil’s importance in the global economy and its role as a fuel in many nations and industries worldwide contribute to the strength in demand. Additionally, the demand for jet fuel could grow by as much as 60% between 2022 and 2045, as currently, there is no carbon-neutral alternative to kerosene.  

  Who Will Be Using This Oil?

  The forecasts also describe how much of this demand could flow to each region by 2045. Here is how it breaks down: 

  

  Despite significant investments in clean energy, large economies like those in North America, China, and India are forecast to have the most demand in 2045. This would be driven by each region’s need to use oil in transportation, industrial processes, and energy generation.

  The Future of Oil

  Oil’s continued importance as a fuel will likely keep demand growing over the next two decades.

  Investors can take advantage of the growing potential oil demand by gaining exposure to various companies at the forefront of the offshore oil industry through the Range Global Offshore Oil Services Index ETF (OFOS). 

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 02:45

• The Polish-Hungarian Dispute Is Getting Nastier After Sikorski Lied About Szijjarto
  The Polish-Hungarian Dispute Is Getting Nastier After Sikorski Lied About Szijjarto

  Authored by Andrew Korybko via substack,

  Polish-Hungarian relations are in crisis over their polar opposite approaches towards Ukraine, which already just ruined their 700-year-old brotherhood at the state-to-state level and continues getting worse. Tensions had been building since the start of Russia’s special operation, but they finally exploded after Hungarian Prime Minister Viktor Orban criticized Poland on Saturday for hypocritically attacking his country over its Russian oil imports and radically reshaping the European balance of power.

  

  This was followed by Polish Deputy Foreign Minister Teofil Bartoszewski suggesting on Sunday that Hungary should withdraw from the EU and NATO in order to form “a union with Putin”. Hungarian Foreign Minister Peter Szijjarto responded to that by doubling down on Orban’s claims that Poland is hypocritical and provocative while also conveying to Warsaw that Budapest’s patience is wearing thin. Readers can learn more about their dispute from this analysis here that was published on Monday.

  It turns out that the Warsaw-based Visegrad Insight published an interview with Polish Foreign Minister Radek Sikorski later that same day in which this top diplomat continued his deputy’s attacks against Hungary. He practically mocked Orban for not having any support for his peace mission and then scandalously claimed that Szijjarto initially supported his proposal to hold the next EU Foreign Affairs Council in Ukraine as a compromise between Budapest and Brussels before eventually vetoing it.

  Sikorski’s other attacks against Hungary inclined throwing shade on its East-West balancing act and implying that newfound cooperation with the Chinese police imperils national sovereignty. Szijjarto was once again pressed to respond to these Polish provocations, which he did in two Facebook posts here and here. He accused Sikorski of lying, clarified that Orban’s peace mission was a national initiative unrepresentative of the EU, and expressed hope that Poland will one day return to Central Europe.

  The last part showed that he’s nobly taking the high road by refusing to stoop to Sikorski’s level with lies and smears, which would have amounted to dirtying himself by wrestling with a pig while his Polish counterpart squeals with delight. Poland wants to provoke Hungary into behaving undiplomatically since that could then be spun to discredit the conservative-nationalist opposition that looks to it for guidance on non-Ukrainian-related issues like illegal immigration and still treasures their brotherhood.

  Apart from not wanting to deal a deathblow to this relationship at the people-to-people level among those in Poland who still appreciate it, Hungary also doesn’t want to discredit itself in the eyes of its non-Western partners like Russia and China by acting like a typical European country does nowadays. Those two and others respect that Hungary conducts itself differently than its peers, which is why they’d be hugely disappointed if it was successfully provoked by Poland into behaving just like the rest of them.

  Hungarian diplomacy is sophisticated enough to never sully the state like that, which is why it’s expected that its representatives will continue taking the high road no matter what Poland says or does, even if Sikorski and others get a lot nastier. This’ll likely take the form of them continuing to explain how far astray Poland has gotten from its post-Old Cold War mission of turning their Visegrad Group with Czechia and Slovakia into a third center of influence in Europe alongside the Franco-German axis and Russia.

  Hungary wants to remind Poland that the greater geopolitical good is served by returning to this mission instead of continuing to contribute to continental instability by serving as the Anglo-American Axis’ wedge between the aforementioned traditional power centers. Polish policy won’t change as a result, but Polish patriots will know that Hungary has Poland’s best interests in mind no matter what the ruling liberal-globalist coalition claims, thus keeping their brotherhood alive at the people-to-people level.  

  Tyler Durden
  Thu, 08/01/2024 – 02:00

• Kari Lake Wins GOP Senate Primary In Arizona, Setting Up Showdown With Rep. Ruben Gallego
  Kari Lake Wins GOP Senate Primary In Arizona, Setting Up Showdown With Rep. Ruben Gallego

  Authored by Nathan Worcester and Arjun Singh via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

  

  PHEONIX—Kari Lake has won Arizona’s Republican Senate primary, defeating Pinal County Sheriff Mark Lamb and Elizabeth Reye.

  “If you think this is a battle between Democrats and Republicans, you’re still sleeping,” Lake said in her victory speech, calling on Trump Republicans, traditional Republicans, “disaffected Democrats,” and others to come together.

  Lake, a former Phoenix-area television news anchor and Republicans’ 2022 gubernatorial nominee, was favored to win the primary with a significant lead in most polls.

  Her victory sets up a general election contest with Rep. Ruben Gallego (D-Ariz.), who ran unopposed in the Democratic Senate primary.

  During her victory speech, the Iowa-born Lake brandished what she described as an opposition research file on Gallego, calling him extreme and highlighting his Chicago origins.

  Gallego’s victory was called shortly after the polls closed at 7:00 p.m. local time. The Associated Press called Lake’s victory in the primary at 8:44 p.m. local time.

  “It’s official – my opponent is Kari Lake,” Gallego wrote on X shortly after Lake’s victory was projected. “Arizona, the choice is clear: Kari wants to ban abortion. I will always protect abortion rights.”

  As of 9 p.m. local time, Lake had won 53.3 percent of the vote, according to the Associated Press, and carried all but two counties in the state. Lamb had 40.7 percent as of that same time, while Reye had 6.1 percent.

  Lake and Gallego are seeking to replace Sen. Kyrsten Sinema (I-Ariz.), who is not seeking reelection. Sinema was elected as a Democrat in 2018 but left the party after the 2022 midterm elections.

  Matthew Martinez, who leads the legal ballot-chasing effort for conservative advocacy group Turning Point Action, lauded Lake’s win in a speech at her victory party.

  “This is a good victory… but we have to win our general,” Martinez said on stage.

  Senators from Arizona, a battleground state, have often received a spotlight in national politics. The late Sen. John McCain (R-Ariz.) ran for president in 2000, where he was Texas Gov. George W. Bush’s primary opponent, and in 2008, when he won the nomination but was defeated in the general election by Sen. Barack Obama (D-Ill.).

  McCain later attracted national prominence for his criticism of candidate Donald Trump in 2016 and, later, during his presidency. McCain succeeded the late Sen. Barry Goldwater (R-Ariz.), who was the Republican nominee in the 1964 presidential election against President Lyndon Johnson. Goldwater later played a key role in defense policy and is often regarded as a pivotal figure in the conservative movement.

  Arizona’s other senator, Sen. Mark Kelly (D-Ariz.), is named as a possible running mate for Vice President Kamala Harris, the likely Democratic presidential nominee.

  Most polls show Gallego with a lead over Lake. He has also significantly outraised Lake in terms of campaign contributions. Lake’s candidacy has attracted controversy for her legal challenges to the 2022 gubernatorial election, where she claims she won the race against Gov. Katie Hobbs. She has been endorsed by Trump as well as the National Republican Senatorial Committee, the party’s Senate campaign arm.

  Earlier on July 30, Gallego and his wife visited the South Phoenix Missionary Baptist Church to drop off their ballots, which were mailed to them ahead of time. In a subsequent press conference, Gallego criticized Lake’s unwillingness to commit to a general election debate hosted by the Arizona Clean Debates Commission.

  “I don’t understand why Kari Lake is afraid of an even, grounded debate,” Gallego said.

  Lake said she didn’t want to work with the debate commission, citing her treatment during the 2022 midterms.

  “We’ve seen how they treated people the last election cycle back in 2022, where people who decided not to do the debate, namely Hobbs, ended up getting her own half-an-hour. That was my problem,” Lake told reporters on July 30.

  She indicated that her campaign would consult with Gallego about a possible debate in another forum.

  The Associated Press contributed to this report. 

  Tyler Durden
  Wed, 07/31/2024 – 23:20

• China Leads The World In Critical Minerals Production
  China Leads The World In Critical Minerals Production

  Demand for critical minerals such as copper, cobalt, lithium and nickel is soaring. These raw materials are used in a range of new technologies, from electric cars to wind turbines, which are becoming ever more important as the world moves towards a green transition. Experts forecast that this trend is set to accelerate, with global production of cobalt, graphite and lithium set to increase nearly six-fold between now and 2050 (World Bank).

  As Statista’s Anna Fleck shows in the chart below, data recently published by the United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD) shows that China accounts for around two-thirds of the world’s processing/refining capacity for critical minerals.

  

  You will find more infographics at Statista

  While the extraction of these materials takes place all around the globe, China currently accounts for more than half of the world’s refining of aluminum, lithium and cobalt, around 90 percent of that of rare earth metals and manganese and 100 percent of that of natural graphite. In addition, more than a third of the world’s copper and nickel processing is carried out in China.

  While China is in the lead for critical minerals production, the nation is losing its dominance. For example, the United States and Australia have increased their production of rare earths from 2010 onwards and most recently, Myanmar and Thailand have started to mine far more than before.

  Tyler Durden
  Wed, 07/31/2024 – 22:55

• Did Jeffrey Epstein & William Barr Attend Interlochen In 1967?
  Did Jeffrey Epstein & William Barr Attend Interlochen In 1967?

  Authored by Nick Bryant via nickbryantnyc.com,

  Interlochen is a prestigious fine arts preparatory school in northern Michigan, and Jeffrey Epstein attended Interlochen “camp” in 1967 as a teenager. But the school disavows that two-time Attorney General William Barr also attended the camp in 1967, despite pictorial evidence that appears to tell a different story. 

  

  At the top of the page, the picture shows teenage Epstein standing in front of his respective lodge at Interlochen in 1967 and a boy who bears an uncanny resemblance to a miniature William Barr kneeling before his respective lodge. In fact, he could be a doppelganger for William Barr if he isn’t William Barr.

  

  Interlochen cannot possibly deny that Epstein attended the camp, because he became a major booster for the school, donating $500,000 that financed construction of the Jeffrey Epstein Scholarship Lodge on the school’s campus. He also held soirees for Interlochen alumni at his New York townhouse, and, of course, he preyed on Interlochen minors. “Jane,” an Interlochen camp alumni, was one of four women who testified at Ghislaine Maxwell’s trial. She testified that she met Maxwell and Epstein at Interlochen’s summer camp in the summer of 1994, when she was 13, and they groomed her for sexual abuse that lasted more than five years. 

  On July 6, 2019, Epstein was arrested at the Teterboro Airport in New Jersey. Two days later Barr seemingly recused himself from all things Epstein. “I’m recused from that matter because one of the law firms that represented Epstein long ago was a firm I subsequently joined for a period of time,” Barr told reporters. Barr was referring to his tenure at Kirkland and Ellis whose Jay Leftkowitz colluded with Assistant US Attorney Ann Marie Villlafana to work out Epstein’s corrupt, “sweetheart” deal in 2007, which landed Epstein in a county jail for 13 months, even though the Justice Department was aware of more than 30 underage victims of Epstein. 

  Barr had additional reasons to recuse himself from all things Epstein in addition to the conflict of interest engendered by his employment at Kirkland and Ellis. Alex Acosta, who oversaw Epstein’s sweetheart deal when he was the US attorney for Southern Florida, served in Donald Trump’s cabinet as Secretary of Labor alongside Barr. Moreover, Barr’s father, Donald, was the headmaster Dalton School, one of the most prestigious preparatory schools in the United States, when he hired an extremely unqualified, college dropout, Jeffrey Epstein, to teach math and physics at the school—seven years after the above picture was taken. (Interestingly, Donald Barr would resign from Dalton the same year he hired Epstein.) So, Barr had three solid reasons to recuse himself from all things Epstein. 

  But the day following Barr’s recusal, Tuesday July 9th, 2019, a Justice Department official announced that Barr consulted with career “ethics officials” at the Justice Department, and came to the conclusion that he didn’t have to recuse himself from Epstein’s 2019 prosecution in Manhattan. However, Barr said he would recuse himself from an internal investigation that delved into Epstein’s sweetheart deal in 2008 in which Epstein was sentenced to 18 months in jail and served 13 months, even though the Justice Department had an extensive list of Epstein’s underage victims. Unbelievably, the Department of Justice ultimately ruled that Epstein’s sweetheart deal, which covered up his crimes against numerous underage victims, was “poor judgement.” 

  Throughout the 1980s, Barr bounced between government service and a prestigious Washington law firm. In the wake of the 1988 election, Bush the Elder installed Barr as first assistant attorney general. In 1990, Barr became the deputy attorney general, which is the second most powerful position in the Justice Department. 

  Barr’s boss at the Justice Department was Attorney General Richard Thornburgh, and the Department of Justice under Thorburgh played an integral role in covering up the interstate pedophile network run by Lawrence King of Omaha and Craig Spence of Washington, DC, which is discussed in The Franklin Scandal: A Story of Powerbrokers, Child Abuse, and Betrayal. Thornburgh was also a close friend of pedophilic pimp Craig Spence. 

  The “Franklin” child trafficking network was massive, and it required three hijacked grand juries to cover-up: a state grand jury in Nebraska, a federal grand jury in Nebraska, and a federal grand jury in Washington, DC. Thornburgh and Barr were at the helm of the Justice Department when their minions in Nebraska and Washington, DC perpetrated the egregious cover-ups. Thornburgh relinquished his position as attorney general in 1991 to run for the US Senate, and Barr became the attorney general. Barr then put the finishing touches on covering up the Franklin child trafficking network.

  In fact, William Barr specializes in cover-ups. Under his second watch as attorney general, the Epstein child trafficking network was covered up. Despite the Epstein network’s myriad of acknowledged procurers and pimps, Ghislaine Maxwell was the only person to take the fall. And the Justice Department under Merrick Garland went on to facilitate the cover-up.

  So … back to the aforementioned pictures. Barr had three conflicts of interest in the Epstein case that he sidestepped to deftly cover-up Epstein’s child trafficking network. If Epstein and Barr had a friendship or, in the very least, were acquittances dating back to 1967, then he surely would’ve had to recuse himself from all things Epstein. The pictures show that Barr has a doppelganger or Interlochen is lying. 

  You, the reader, decide.

  (The images above were gleaned from the 1967 Interlochen Art Camp directory, and Epstein is on page 63 and the purported picture of Barr is on page 68.) 

  Tyler Durden
  Wed, 07/31/2024 – 22:30

• Who Funds The US Presidential Campaigns?
  Who Funds The US Presidential Campaigns?

  Campaign financing, whether for supporting or opposing a candidate running for public office, can be costly, even more so when the stakes are who will become the next President of the United States. Data from the Federal Election Commission (FEC) collected and analyzed by the nonpartisan research group OpenSecrets shows that for this election cycle, President Joe Biden, potential Democratic nominee Kamala Harris and former President Donald Trump have collected roughly $781 million from a variety of partisan interest groups up until June 30, 2024. Not included: the reported $100 million in funds the Harris campaign raised in just over a day after Biden dropped out of the race.

  While there are bipartisan groups that support more than just one candidate, the chart below, vis Statista’s Florian Zandt, shows only contributions made by organizations or individuals directly supporting either Harris’s or Trump’s election bid. At first glance, it is already apparent that the Trump campaign relies on the funds of so-called super PACs. The prefix super stems from the fact that donations to these committees are not as tightly regulated and can exceed the donor limit of $5,000 per year.

  While, in theory, super PACs are independent and their expenditures “not made in cooperation, consultation or concert with, or at the request or suggestion of, any candidate, or his or her authorized committees or agents, or a political party committee or its agents”, the reality is often different. For example, Make America Great Again Inc spent almost $100 million of its roughly $200 million raised in support of Donald Trump and opposition of his competitors in the Republican primary and incumbent President Joe Biden. The largest donor with $75 million is Thomas Mellon, heir to one of the richest families in the U.S.

  The Biden-Harris campaign, on the other hand, saw the most money raised outside of the official campaign committee come from so-called carey committees. These committees are a mixture of a super PAC and a regular PAC. They hold two accounts, one for unlimited donations and spending and another that adheres to the strict aforementioned caps. Around $148 million out of the $152 million coming from carey committees was raised by Future Forward USA and The Lincoln Project. The former received donations by, for example, a variety of unions and Silicon Valley venture capitalist company Greylock Partners. It has also been accused of receiving large amounts of secret donations towards the end of the 2020 presidential election. The considerably smaller Lincoln Project’s donors include donors like the University of California, Bank of America, Google parent company Alphabet and AT&T. The largest donors, however, are the designer outlet mall company McArthurGlen and Silicon Valley’s Sequoia Capital, the latter of which has also given money to the Trump campaign.

  

  You will find more infographics at Statista

  Ever since President Biden announced he would stop campaigning for reelection and endorsed Vice President Kamala Harris as the new Democratic candidate, Republicans have questioned whether Harris could utilize the hundreds of millions of U.S. dollars from the war chest of the Biden reelection campaign. According to many experts, among them the director of the progressive nonprofit Brennan Center for Justice’s Elections & Government Program Daniel I. Weiner and Nicholas Stephanopoulos, Kirkland & Ellis Professor of Law at Harvard, Harris is cleared to use the funds since she ran on a combined ticket with Joe Biden.

  However, a current President stepping down from his reelection bid and passing the torch to his Vice President has no precedent in U.S. history, so it’s more a question of established practice than a clear legal ruling. According to Stephanopoulos, the FEC is still dealing with official complaints connected to the 2016 election, so there is virtually no chance that any decision barring Harris from utilizing the Biden campaign funds will be made before the election in November.

  Tyler Durden
  Wed, 07/31/2024 – 22:05

• Doug Casey On 'Your Enemy, The Deep State'
  Doug Casey On ‘Your Enemy, The Deep State’

  Authored by Doug Casey via InternationalMan.com,

  A lot of people would like political solutions to their problems, i.e., getting the government to make other people do what they want. People with any moral sense, however, recognize that can only create more problems.

  Clever players, therefore, use the government as a tool but do so from behind a curtain. They know that it’s more effective, and a lot safer, to pull the puppet’s strings from offstage. Sometimes, they step into the limelight, depending on the circumstances and the depth of their personal narcissism. But they’re all about two things: Power and money. Call them the Deep State.

  Once a country develops an entrenched Deep State, only a revolution or a dictatorship can turn things around. And probably only in a small country.

  

  The American Deep State is a powerful informal network which controls most institutions. You won’t read about it in the news because it controls the news. Politicians won’t talk about it or even admit that it exists. That would be like a mobster discussing murder and robbery on the 6 o’clock news. You could say the Deep State is hidden, but it’s hidden in plain sight.

  The Deep State is involved in almost every negative thing that’s happening right now. It’s essential to know what it’s all about.

  The State

  The Deep State uses and hides behind the State itself.

  Even though the essence of the State is coercion, people have been taught to love and respect it. Most people think of the State in the quaint light of a grade school civics book. They think it has something to do with “We the People” electing a Jimmy Stewart character to represent them. That ideal has always been a pernicious fiction because it idealizes, sanitizes, and legitimizes an intrinsically evil and destructive institution, which is based on force. As Mao once said, political power comes out of the barrel of a gun.

  The Deep State

  The Deep State itself is as old as history. But the term “Deep State” originated in Turkey, which is appropriate since it’s the heir to the totally corrupt Byzantine and Ottoman empires. And in the best Byzantine manner, our Deep State has insinuated itself throughout the fabric of what once was America. Its tendrils reach from Washington down to every part of civil society. Like a metastasized cancer, it can no longer be easily eradicated.

  In many ways, Washington models itself after another city with a Deep State, ancient Rome. Here’s how a Victorian-era freethinker, Winwood Reade, accurately described it:

  “Rome lived upon its principal till ruin stared it in the face. Industry is the only true source of wealth, and there was no industry in Rome. By day the Ostia road was crowded with carts and muleteers, carrying to the great city the silks and spices of the East, the marble of Asia Minor, the timber of the Atlas, the grain of Africa and Egypt; and the carts brought out nothing but loads of dung. That was their return cargo.”

  The Deep State controls the political and economic essence of the US. This is much more than observing that there’s no real difference between the left and right wings of the Demopublican Party. Anyone with any sense (that is, everybody except the average voter) knows that although the Republicans say they believe in economic freedom (but don’t), they definitely don’t believe in social freedom. And the Democrats say they believe in social freedom (but don’t), but they definitely don’t believe in economic freedom.

  Who Is the Deep State?

  The American Deep State is a real but informal structure that has arisen to not just profit from but control the State.

  The Deep State has a life of its own, like the government itself. Within the government, it’s composed of top-echelon employees of a dozen Praetorian agencies, like the FBI, CIA, and NSA…top generals, admirals, and other military operatives…long-term congressmen and senators…and directors of important regulatory agencies.

  But the Deep State is much broader than just the government. It includes the heads of major corporations, all of whom are heavily involved in selling to the State and enabling it. That absolutely includes Silicon Valley, although those guys at least used to have a sense of humor, evidenced by their defunct “Don’t Be Evil” motto.

  It also includes the top people in the Fed, and the heads of the major banks, brokers, and insurers. Add the presidents and many professors at top universities, which act as Deep State recruiting centers… top media figures, of course… and many regulars at things like the WEC, Bohemian Grove, and the Council on Foreign Relations. They epitomize the status quo, held together by power, money, and propaganda.

  Altogether, I’ll guess these people number a couple thousand. You might analogize the structure of the Deep State to a huge pack of dogs. The people I’ve just described are the Top Dogs.

  But there are hundreds of thousands more who aren’t at the nexus but who directly depend on them, have considerable clout, and support the Deep State because it supports them. This includes many of the wealthy, especially those who got that way thanks to their State connections… the 1.5 million people who have top secret clearances (that’s a shocking but accurate number), plus top players in organized crime, especially the illegal drug business, little of which would exist without the State. Plus mid-level types in the police and military, corporations, and non-governmental organizations.

  These are what you might call the Running Dogs.

  Beyond that are the scores and scores of millions who depend on things remaining the way they are, like the 50%-plus of Americans who are net recipients of benefits from the State—the 70 million on Social Security, the 90 million on Medicaid, the 50 million on food stamps, the many millions on hundreds of other programs, the 23 million government employees and most of their families. In fact, let’s include the many millions of average Joes and Janes who are just getting by.

  You might call this level of people, the vast majority of the population, Whipped Dogs. They both love and fear their master; they’ll do as they’re told and roll over on their backs and wet themselves if confronted by a Top Dog or Running Dog who feels they’re out of line. These three types of dogs make up the vast majority of the US population. I trust you aren’t among them. I consider myself a Lone Wolf in this context and hope you are, too. Unfortunately, however, dogs are enemies of wolves and tend to hunt them down.

  The Deep State is destructive, but it’s great for the people in it. And, like any living organism, its prime directive is: Survive! It survives by indoctrinating the fiction that it’s both good and necessary. However, it’s a parasite that promotes the ridiculous notion that everyone can live at the expense of society.

  Is it a conspiracy headed by a man stroking a white cat? I think not. It’s hard enough to get a bunch of friends to agree on what movie to see, much less a bunch of power-hungry miscreants bent on running everyone’s lives. But, on the other hand, the Top Dogs all know each other, went to the same schools, belong to the same clubs, socialize, and, most importantly, have common interests, values, and philosophies.

  The American Deep State rotates around the Washington Beltway. It imports America’s wealth as tax revenue. A lot of that wealth is consumed there by useless mouths. And then, it exports things that reinforce the Deep State, including wars, fiat currency, and destructive policies. This is unsustainable simply because nothing of value can come out of a city full of parasites.

  A SOLUTION?

  Many Americans undoubtedly believe Donald Trump is a solution to what ails the US. They think he’s a maverick who will smash the Deep State. That’s understandable since he’s a cultural conservative. He wants the country to resemble the happy days of yesteryear, when Mom, apple pie, and Chevrolets were more important than Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion. He’s a nationalist, a traditionalist, and business-oriented. That’s all very well. But irrelevant to the Deep State.

  The problem is that Trump will almost necessarily surround himself with Deep State players; they’re really all there is in and around the Washington Beltway, Wall Street, Academia, or the media. He’s not about to abolish government agencies (although he might prune a few) and fire scores of thousands of government employees. His lack of a philosophical core will guarantee that instead of trying to abolish the State (in the manner of Millei or Ron Paul), he’ll just use it in ways he thinks are righteous. The proof of that is the trillions of new government spending and deficits he approved of when he was in power. He’ll spend trillions more if he’s re-elected. And all of it will feed the Deep State.

  On the bright side, if Trump is elected, his rhetoric will be less objectionable than Kamala’s. There will probably be less overtly disastrous legislation enacted, and some regulations will likely be cut back.

  On the not-so-bright side, I’m afraid the Democrats could win come November. They have control of the apparatus of the State, and they absolutely don’t want to give it up. The Deep State will be just fine if Trump wins, of course. But nobody wants to take a chance; there might be some broken rice bowls. He might turn into a loose cannon. So the Deep State, the Establishment, will be even fatter and happier if the Dems take control.

  That’s what they’ll work for. And that’s the way to bet.

  *  *  *

  It’s clear there are some ominous social, political, cultural, and economic trends playing out right now. Many of which seem to point to an unfortunate decline of the West. That’s precisely why legendary speculator Doug Casey and his team just released this free report, which shows you exactly what’s happening and what you can do about it. Click here to download it now.

  Tyler Durden
  Wed, 07/31/2024 – 21:40

• New Jersey AR-15 Ban Ruled Unconstitutional, But Large Capacity Magazines Still Outlawed
  New Jersey AR-15 Ban Ruled Unconstitutional, But Large Capacity Magazines Still Outlawed

  New Jersey AR-15 fans were handed a big victory on Tuesday, after US District Judge Peter G. Sheridan issued an order declaring that the Colt AR-15 rifle is not an “assault firearm” as defined in the New Jersey Code of Criminal Justice Section 2C:39-1, and that doing so is incompatible with recent precedent set by the US Supreme Court.

  

  “The AR-15 Provision of the Assault Firearms Law is unconstitutional under Bruen and Heller as to the Colt AR-15 for use of self-defense within the home,” Sheridan wrote in an accompanying memorandum citing the two cases decided in 2022 and 2008 respectively.

  Under the Heller decision, the right of Americans to own and keep firearms in their homes for lawful self-defense is covered under the 2nd Amendment, while Buren established a history-and-tradition-based test for owning guns.

  According to Sheridan, New Jersey’s AR-15 prohibition therefore cannot stand, as it’s inconsistent with America’s historical tradition of gun regulation by banning an entire class of commonly used firearms that are used for home defense.

  “In this court’s understanding of Supreme Court precedent, a categorical ban on a class of weapons commonly used for self-defense is unlawful,” he wrote.

  That said, Sheridan declined to extend his determination to roughly 60 other guns defined under New Jersey law as “assault firearms,” as the court had only been fully briefed on the AR-15 and none of the other firearms on the restricted list.

  “Given the variety of firearms regulated in the Assault Firearms Law and the nuances that each individual firearm presents, the Court’s analysis of the Assault Firearms Law is limited to the firearm with which the Court has been provided the most information: the AR-15,” he wrote.

  Sheridan also upheld the state’s ban on large-capacity magazines (LCMs) which can hold more than 10 rounds of ammunition. The only way residents can possess them is if they’ve registered an “assault firearm” in line with state law, and use said LCM in connection with sanctioned competitive shooting matches.

  As the Epoch Times notes further, Sheridan argued that the LCM ban is different than the categorical ban on AR-15s because the law doesn’t restrict the number of magazines a person can own, just their capacity. He also reasoned that the “unprecedented rapidity and damage of mass shootings support a nuanced reading” of the historical analogs under the Supreme Court’s decision in Bruen.

  He argued that large-capacity detachable magazines can be traced directly to military heritage and brought up the historical analogy of restrictions on Bowie knives.

  “Like these restrictions, the LCM Amendment is precisely that—a restriction responding to safety concerns present in our time,” he wrote, arguing that the burden on New Jersey residents’ right to self-defense is comparable to that imposed by historical laws restricting the way that Bowie knives could be carried and used.

  “As such, these historical analogues provide the basis for the following conclusion: that the State may regulate the permissible capacity of the large capacity magazines.”

  The judge ruled that the LCM ban is constitutional. He issued a 30-day stay on his decision, meaning the AR-15 ban remains temporarily in effect.

  Several of the plaintiffs in the consolidated case have already filed an appeal.

  New Jersey residents Mark Cheeseman and Timothy Connelly (dubbed the Cheeseman plaintiffs in the case) and gun rights advocacy group Firearms Policy Coalition (FPC) filed a notice of appeal on July 30.

  FPC said in a statement that the appeal targets “legal deficiencies” in the judge’s opinion and that the motion seeks the “full relief” that was originally requested from the district court, which included a request to overturn the “assault firearm” restriction as it applied to the list of 60-plus guns and ones that are “substantially similar.”

  “Bans on so-called ‘assault weapons’ are immoral and unconstitutional. FPC will continue to fight forward until all of these bans are eliminated throughout the United States,” FPC President Brandon Combs said in a July 30 statement.

  New Jersey Attorney General Matthew Platkin, one of the defendants in the case, said in a statement posted on social media that he plans to appeal the portion of the ruling that declares the AR-15 ban unconstitutional while praising the other aspects of the ruling.

  “I am disappointed that the district court has held that individuals have a constitutional right to possess the Colt AR-15,” he said, calling such firearms an “instrument designed for warfare.”

  “All New Jerseyans should know that the overwhelming majority of our law remains intact today.”

  Platkin noted that the court upheld the LCM ban and didn’t allow individuals to possess any other guns classified as “assault firearms.”

  He said he remains committed to defending the entirety of New Jersey’s firearm law and looks forward to pressing the state’s arguments on appeal.

  Restrictions on magazine capacity ranging from 10 to 20 rounds of ammunition are in effect in 14 states and the District of Columbia, according to the U.S. Concealed Carry Association (USCCA).

  Bans of so-called assault weapons have been adopted in nearly a dozen states, according to the USCCA.

  Tyler Durden
  Wed, 07/31/2024 – 21:15

• Report Finds US Military Lacks Ability To Defeat China, Suggests Cold War Style Defense Spending
  Report Finds US Military Lacks Ability To Defeat China, Suggests Cold War Style Defense Spending

  Authored by Andrew Thornebrooke via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

  A new congressional report suggests that the U.S. military lacks the required capabilities to preserve the nation’s strategic interests and could lose a potential war against China.

  

  The report, published on July 30 by the Commission on the National Defense Strategy, found that “the U.S. military lacks both the capabilities and the capacity required to be confident it can deter and prevail in combat.”

  “The Commission finds that the U.S. defense industrial base (DIB) is unable to meet the equipment, technology, and munitions needs of the United States and its allies and partners,” the report reads.

  Eric Edelman, who serves as vice chair for the commission, told the Senate Armed Services Committee on Tuesday that China’s communist regime was outpacing the United States in military development.

  He said that fact could increase the likelihood of a conflict between the two powers and the likelihood of the United States losing.

  “There is potential for a near-term war and a potential that we might lose such a conflict,” Mr. Edelman said.

  “We found that China is in many ways outpacing the U.S.,” he said. “While we still have the strongest military in the world with the farthest global reach, when we get to 1,000 miles of China’s shore, we start to lose our military dominance and could find ourselves on the losing end of a conflict.”

  To that end, Mr. Edelman underscored that the growing strategic partnerships between China, Iran, North Korea, and Russia were a “major strategic shift” that U.S. defense planners failed to fully account for.

  He said that with those four authoritarian regimes working together against the United States in an unprecedented way, the United States could face a global conflict that would stretch all of its national resources thin.

  “It makes each of those countries potentially stronger militarily, economically, and diplomatically, and potentially can weaken the tools we have at our disposal to deal with them,” Mr. Edelman said.

  “And it makes it more likely that a future conflict, for instance in the Indo-Pacific, would expand across other theaters, and that we would find ourselves in a global war that is on the scale of the Second World War.”

  Therefore, the Commission’s report calls on Congress and the various government departments to “rewrite laws and regulations to remove unnecessary barriers to adopting innovation, budgeting, and procurement” in pursuit of increased deterrence.

  Likewise, the report recommends that the national strategy be radically transformed by moving away from the “bipolar” Cold War strategic model to a “multi-theater model” that accounts for the fact that the United States could face armed conflicts against multiple nation states across the globe simultaneously.

  Time is not on the United States’ side, the report says, and China is likely to increase its hostile behavior in the coming years in an effort to “normalize unlawful behavior” as it pursues “establishing advantageous conditions for future coercion or conflict.”

  The report does not equivocate on the issue. If changes are not made to the national strategic posture, the armed wing of China’s communist rulership, the People’s Liberation Army (PLA), will likely surpass the strength of the U.S. military.

  “If these trends continue, the PLA will be a peer, if not superior, military competitor of the United States across domains, a situation the United States has not faced since the height of the Cold War,” the report reads.

  Commission Chair Jane Harman told the committee the United States should synthesize all instruments of its power, including private industries, to propel military innovation and the adoption of new technologies.

  In order to achieve this, the report calls for increasing taxes to expand U.S. defense spending to Cold War levels, which it suggests fell between 4.9 and 16.9 percent of GDP.

  Assuming the United States maintains its 2023 GDP of about $27 trillion, that would mean an annual defense budget of at least $1.3 trillion to as much as $4.5 trillion, though the report says that advances in commercial technologies would reduce the cost burden compared to the Cold War era.

  “We found that the joint force is at the breaking point of maintaining readiness today. Adding more burden without adding resources to rebuild readiness will cause it to break,” Ms. Harman said.

  “We recommend fundamental change in the way the Pentagon and other government agencies do business, the way they incorporate private sector technology, and a full embrace of our partners and allies. Shorthand for this is we recommend using all elements of national power.”

  Tyler Durden
  Wed, 07/31/2024 – 20:50

• Eight Other Times Israel Likely Behind Covert Assassinations In Iran
  Eight Other Times Israel Likely Behind Covert Assassinations In Iran

  Mainstream media headlines both in US and European media often portray as an ‘aggressor’ and ‘terrorist state’ while simultaneously presenting Israel as purely the victim each instance there is escalation.

  But arguably Iran has been somewhat restrained in responding militarily to Israel after having endured covert assassinations of some of its top scientists and military officials stretching back over a decade. This has been a war waged between the shadows: Iran supports several proxies throughout the Middle East, including Hamas and Hezbollah, while Israel has sent intelligence assets and hit squads to strike Iranian officials swiftly and suddenly.

  

  There have also been a series of Israeli sabotage attack targeting Iranian nuclear sites and infrastructure over the past years. Below is a list of assassinations of prominent Iranians which have been linked to Israeli intelligence (and it is believed some covert operations may have been carried out with the help of US intelligence).

  * * *

  Middle East Eye takes a look at the assassinations in Iran that were attributed to Israel. 

  Masoud Alimohammadi

  In January 2010, Masoud Alimohammadi, a professor specialising in particle physics at the University of Tehran, was killed by a remote-controlled bomb that had been attached to a motorcycle near his home.

  He was a supporter of the Iranian opposition movement, which led some to accuse Tehran authorities of carrying out the assassination. 

  However, Tehran’s chief prosecutor blamed the CIA and Mossad, pointing out that Alimohammadi was a nuclear scientist, and the US and its allies were attempting to curb Iran’s nuclear programme. 

  The US State Department described the accusations as “absurd”. 

  Iranian authorities arrested several suspects in his killing, accusing them of working for the Israeli intelligence service.

  Majid Shahriari

  Ten months after the killing of Alimohammadi, another nuclear scientist, Majid Shahriari, was killed in similar circumstances. 

  Shahriari was reportedly a member of the nuclear engineering department of Shahid Beheshti University in Tehran. 

  A motorcyclist pulled up to Shahriari’s car and attached a bomb, killing him in the explosion. His wife and driver were wounded but survived. 

  Then-president Mahmoud Ahmadinejad said the attack was “undoubtedly the hand of the Zionist regime” and its western allies. 

  Shahriari was a colleague of Alimohammadi, Al Jazeera reported at the time. 

  Darioush Rezaeinejad 

  In July 2011, the next scientist to be assassinated in Iran was Darioush Rezaeinejad.

  Two men riding motorcycles fatally shot Rezaeinejad and wounded his wife. An unconfirmed report in an Israeli intelligence publication said that Rezaeinejad had been working on a nuclear detonator.

  Iranian authorities rejected the claims, stating he was merely an academic. 

  An Israeli intelligence source told German publication Der Spiegel that Mossad was behind the attack. Israeli officials did not comment.

  Hassan Tehrani Moghaddam

  Hassan Tehrani Moghaddam was among 17 members of Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) killed during a blast in Tehran in November 2011. 

  Moghaddam had been described as the “architect” of Iran’s missile programme, and was crucial in developing artillery and missile units. Ayatollah Ali Khamanei was among those to attend his funeral. 

  Iran officially described the event as an “accident” during the routine transfer of munitions. 

  A source with close links to Iranian authorities told The Guardian the operation had been carried out by Mossad. Time magazine also cited a western intelligence source as stating that Mossad was responsible. 

  

  Tehran dismissed such reports, with the armed forces chief of staff stating that “the recent incident and blast is not related to Israel or America”. Israel neither confirmed or denied its involvement.

  Mostafa Ahmadi-Roshan

  In January 2012, Mostafa Ahmadi Roshan became the latest Iranian scientist to be killed.

  A motorcyclist was once again used in the killing, riding up to Roshan’s car and attaching a magnetic bomb that killed the scientist and his driver. 

  Roshan was a professor at a technical university in Tehran and a department supervisor at the Natanz uranium enrichment plant.

  Then-vice president Mohammad Reza Rahimi blamed the attack on Israeli agents. 

  Abdullah Ahmed Abdullah

  The New York Times reported in November 2020 that deputy al-Qaeda leader Abdullah Ahmed Abdullah had been assassinated by Israeli agents in Tehran three months earlier. 

  Abdullah, also known as Abu Muhammad al-Masri, was allegedly killed by two Israeli operatives on motorcycles, at the request of the United States. 

  Miriam, the widow of Osama bin Laden’s son Hamza and Abdullah’s daughter, was also killed, according to US intelligence sources who spoke to the New York Times.

  Abdullah had been indicted in the United States for the 1998 bombings of its embassies in Tanzania and Kenya. 

  Iran, Israel and the US did not publicly acknowledge the killing. 

  Mohsen Fakhrizadeh

  Top Iranian nuclear scientist Mohsen Fakhrizadeh was gunned down in Tehran in November 2020. 

  Fakhrizadeh was renowned as the architect of Iran’s military nuclear programme.

  He became the face of Iran’s nuclear ambitions when named in the International Atomic Energy Agency’s 2015 “final assessment” of open questions about Iran’s nuclear programme and whether it was aimed at developing a nuclear bomb.

  

  According to the New York Times, a Mossad team killed Fakhrizadeh with a computerised machine gun that required no on-site operatives.

  The device weighed around a tonne and was smuggled into Iran in smaller parts and later reassembled.

  Hassan Sayyad Khodaei

  In May 2022, gunmen on motorcycles opened fire on a vehicle in Tehran, killing senior Republican Guard officer Hassan Sayyad Khodaei.

  Khodaei was killed by five gunshots, according to Iranian state media. 

  He was a member of the Quds Force, which was responsible for the Republican Guard’s foreign operations. Khodaei reportedly served in Syria. 

  Tehran blamed Israel for the killing and vowed revenge.

  Citing intelligence officials briefed on the matter, the New York Times reported that Israel had informed American officials that it was behind the killing.

  Tyler Durden
  Wed, 07/31/2024 – 20:25

• 5 Reasons Why You Should Be Prepping Like Crazy Right Now
  5 Reasons Why You Should Be Prepping Like Crazy Right Now

  Authored by Michael Snyder via The Economic Collapse blog,

  A lot of people seem to think that the summer of 2024 is a time to party, but the truth is that this is a time when they should be feverishly preparing for the extremely chaotic times that are ahead of us.  I just don’t know what it is going to take for people to wake up and realize how late it is.  Donald Trump got shot and that shook people up for a few days, but that didn’t last for long.  Then there was a soft coup in the Democratic Party, and that got people fired up for a little bit, but that quickly faded.  Of course there is a small minority that is awake and that understands that we are living in truly historic times, but the vast majority of the population appears to be clueless. 

  

  The following are 5 reasons why you should be prepping like crazy right now…

  #1 As I have been warning for a long time, the results of the election in November will unleash a flood of negative emotion.  Whichever side loses is going to have a massive temper tantrum, and there is a very high risk that we could see widespread violence.  In fact, one recent survey actually discovered that 41 percent of Americans believe that it is likely that there will be a “civil war” within the next five years…

  The possibility that America could face another civil war soon is not too far-fetched for a lot of voters.

  The latest Rasmussen Reports national telephone and online survey finds that 41% of Likely U.S. Voters believe the United States is likely to experience a second civil war sometime in the next five years, including 16% who consider such a scenario Very Likely. Forty-nine percent (49%) don’t think another civil war is likely in the next five years, including 20% who say it’s Not At All Likely. Another 10% are not sure.

  #2 Armed conflicts are raging all over the globe.  The war in Ukraine continues to intensify, China has been threatening Taiwan, and the war in the Middle East could potentially escalate to an apocalyptic level by the end of this calendar year.  Meanwhile, riots, revolutions and civil unrest are erupting everywhere you look.  For example, it appears that Venezuela is right on the verge of erupting in flames…

  Venezuela has been engulfed by violent riots as opposition candidate Edmundo Gonzalez Urrutia announced he has proof he won Sunday’s disputed election hours after President Nicolas Maduro claimed he’d secured a third term in power.

  Thousands of enraged protesters flooded the streets of the capital and several other cities, chanting ‘Freedom, freedom!’ and ‘This government is going to fall!’ as they set fire to tyres and rubbish and organised barricades to block police vehicles.

  Security forces fired tear gas and rubber bullets into the crowds but were forced to recoil from Molotov cocktails and rocks hurled by the oncoming demonstrators, many of whom carried Venezuelan flags.

  #3 The world is facing a long-term food crisis that isn’t going to go away.  Global supplies of food are getting tighter and tighter, and the UN is reporting that hundreds of millions of people did not have enough food to eat last year…

  Around 733 million people faced hunger in 2023, equivalent to one in eleven people globally and one in five in Africa, according to the latest State of Food Security and Nutrition in the World (SOFI) report published today by five United Nations specialized agencies.

  #4 Many health experts are warning that it is just a matter of time before the next great global pandemic hits us.  A lot of people are keeping a very close eye on the bird flu, but I am also very concerned about the frightening outbreaks of Mpox that we have been witnessing in Africa.  According to the BBC, the Central African Republic is “the latest country in the region to declare an outbreak of the mpox virus”…

  The Central African Republic has become the latest country in the region to declare an outbreak of the mpox virus.

  Infections have spread to the capital, Bangui, after being restricted to rural areas, health minister Pierre Somse said.

  He also told a local radio station that some families were hiding infected relatives due to stigma, thus increasing the risk to others.

  #5 I am entirely convinced that historic natural disasters will continue to be a major theme during the second half of this year and beyond.  Even here in the United States, there has been quite a bit of highly unusual shaking lately.  If you can believe it, one county in Texas has actually declared a state of emergency because it has been hit by more than 100 significant earthquakes within the past week…

  So many earthquakes have struck the west Texas county of Scurry in the past week – more than 100 at last count – local officials have declared a state of emergency.

  Scurry County Judge Dan Hicks wrote in his Friday declaration of disaster that since the first earthquake, registering magnitude 4.9, was felt the night of July 22, “damage has been found throughout Scurry County in businesses and residences.”

  The county’s buildings can handle a few quakes here and there, but the cumulative effects of so many small ones, punctuated by larger shaking, have become cause for concern.

  Right now, we are only experiencing the very early stages of “the perfect storm” that is now upon us.

  During the months and years that are ahead, things are going to get so much worse.

  I highly recommend stockpiling food and supplies, because it won’t be too long before our world goes absolutely nuts.

  Stocking up doesn’t have to be complicated.  At this point, so many people are buying emergency food that even Costco is stocking it on their shelves…

  It’s the end of the world as we know it, and I feed fine — because Costco has an emergency dinner kit, dubbed “the apocalypse bucket” online, that lasts 25 years.

  The Readywise Emergency Food Bucket, which boasts 150 freeze-dried and dehydrated meal servings, has caused a stir on social media. With an online price tag of $79.99, the bucket boasts that it’s more than just food in its product description — it says it provides “readiness in the face of uncertainty.”

  The bucket features 80 entrees and sides, 30 breakfast servings and 40 drink servings that just need water to prepare, for a total of 25,280 calories. The meal options range from teriyaki rice, tomato basil soup and pasta Alfredo to cheesy macaroni and apple cinnamon cereal.

  The good news is that there are now millions of preppers in this country that are preparing for the apocalyptic times that are rapidly approaching.

  The bad news is that the total population of the United States is 333 million.

  When things finally hit the fan, most people will be completely and utterly unprepared, and that truly will be a nightmare scenario.

  *  *  *

  Michael’s new book entitled “Chaos” is available in paperback and for the Kindle on Amazon.com, and you can subscribe to his Substack newsletter at michaeltsnyder.substack.com.

  Tyler Durden
  Wed, 07/31/2024 – 20:00

• Cars, Cows, & Condos: Just How Much Do Olympic Athletes Make For Winning Medals?
  Cars, Cows, & Condos: Just How Much Do Olympic Athletes Make For Winning Medals?

  With the Paris 2024 Olympics well into its first week, medalists – in addition to their medals and all the free condoms they can manage to use – are handed an official Olympics mascot and a “mystery” box containing the official event poster.

  But wait, there’s more!

  

  While the IOC doesn’t hand out prize money for winning medals, several countries hand out all sorts of bonuses, CNBC reports. Here’s a table showing who gets what, from where.

  Measured in US Dollars, gold medalists from Hong Kong, for example, receive $768,000 per medal – followed by Singapore at $745,000 and Indonesia at $300,000. Hong Kong’s massive payout is a 20% jump from the Tokyo Summer Olympics.

  US gold medalists receive just $38,000 per medal in comparison.

  

  There are already several competitors from Hong Kong who have won big payouts.

  This year, the city is slated for hefty pay outs due to an early crop of medals in swimming and fencing. Vivian Kong won Hong Kong’s first medal at the Paris Games, topping the podium in the women’s epee individual event. Fellow fencer Cheung Ka-long also won gold in the men’s individual foil event, while swimmer Siobhan Bernadette Haughey bagged a bronze medal in the women’s 200-meter freestyle.

  Singapore gives Olympic medalists 1 million Singapore dollars ($745,300) for gold, SG$500,000 for silver and SG$250,000 for bronze. The city-state has only dispensed the top cash bonus to one athlete: Joseph Schooling. The now retired swimmer defeated the United States’ Michael Phelps in the 100-meter butterfly at the Rio Olympics in 2016 to win gold. -CNBC

  Cars, Cows and Apartments

  In addition to, or instead of, cash, sever countries are giving athletes unconventional prizes, such as apartments or cars from both government and private companies. Kazakhstan, for example, is giving $250,000 per gold medal, $150,000 for silver, and $75,000 for bronze – as well as apartments.

  While Malaysia is offering $215,000 for a gold medal ($150k for silver, and $75k for bronze), some private companies are offering luxury-serviced apartments or additional cash. Plus, anyone who gets a podium finish will also receive a “foreign-made car,” according to local media reports citing the country’s Youth and Sports Minister, Hannah Yeoh.

  South Korean gold medalists receive pensions in addition to the prize money – and can choose either a lifelong monthly pension of a million won (US$762), or a lump sum of 67.2 million won (US$49,000). Silver medalists can receive 35 million won, and a bronze medalist will get 25 million won. Athletes may also receive free drinks and transportation (oh boy!). 

  Hong Kong‘s public transit operator MTR Corporation is giving free lifetime tickets to the city’s medalists.

  Besides 200,000 Polish zloty ($50,374) from the Polish Olympic Committee, Klaudia Zwolińska is also reportedly poised to receive a painting, a holiday voucher, a scholarship and a diamond for claiming silver in the women’s canoe slalom K1 competition.

  Olympians have often been gifted quirky tokens of appreciation.

  A local chain pledged that athletes who represented Malaysia at the Tokyo Games would get free food and teh tarik for life, according to local media. Teh tarik is a hot milk tea beverage that is popular throughout Southeast Asia. -CNBC

  And while Jpaanese table tennis player Kasumi Ishikawa was gifted 100 bags of rice after winning silver at Tokyo, Indonesian badminton gold medalists Apriyani Rahayu and Greysia Polii reporetedly received five cows, a meatball restaurant and a new house.

  Unfortunately for athletes from Great Britain, Norway and several other countries, they get nothing aside from their medals and bragging rights.

  Tyler Durden
  Wed, 07/31/2024 – 19:40

• Green Day Frontman Slammed For Holding Up 'Trump Head' At Concert
  Green Day Frontman Slammed For Holding Up ‘Trump Head’ At Concert

  Authored by Steve Watson via Modernity.news,

  During a performance in Washington DC on Sunday, Billie Joe Armstrong, frontman for the band Green Day, was pictured holding aloft a representation of Donald Trump’s head, prompting swift backlash.

  

  The ‘head’ was a plastic Trump mask with ‘idiot’ written on it.

  The image was posted to a fan account on X:

  I’m not a part of the maga agenda #greenday pic.twitter.com/B8JP8bBl62

  — Green Day Inc. (@GreenDayInc) July 30, 2024

  pic.twitter.com/j42sRSrpKl

  — Green Day Inc. (@GreenDayInc) July 30, 2024

  pic.twitter.com/2SgRNyKA1h

  — Green Day Inc. (@GreenDayInc) July 30, 2024

  Considering not even three weeks have passed since an attempt was made to shoot Trump dead, the reaction has been one of disgust.

  Green Day had a concert here in DC last night.

  They decided it’d be a good idea to hold up a severed Trump head.

  Just TWO WEEKS after he was sh*t in the head.

  These people are SICK. pic.twitter.com/Fn7eP4RTFQ

  — Nick Sortor (@nicksortor) July 30, 2024

  Yes, liberals want to kill their political opponents, as we have recently seen.

  — It’s Chinatown, Jake (@DetectiveJake1) July 31, 2024

  Inciting violence.

  — Disenfranchised (@BostonSweetSox) July 31, 2024

  im a green day fan im going to see them next week in concert. separate art from the artist thats how it should be 100% of the time. i definitely don’t agree with this i think it’s sick

  — Giancarlo Bintarelli 🇮🇹🇮🇹 (@gcbintarelli) July 30, 2024

  As we have previously noted, Green Day have been ‘raging for the machine’ for some time now.

  Armstrong, now aged 51 but still sporting bleached hair as if he is a teenager, often changes the words of the song ‘American Idiot’ from “I’m not a part of the redneck agenda,” to “I’m not a part of the MAGA agenda.”

  Many have pointed out that the original lyrics of American Idiot were embraced by Americans at the time who stood in opposition to the warmongering neocon administration led by George W. Bush and Dick Cheney. Ironic then that Trump is the only President of the modern era not to have sent Americans to war.

  Armstrong clearly didn’t pay any attention to the reaction Jack Black and his Tenacious D band mate Kyle Gass received after declaring a desire that the shooter had not missed Trump just days afterwards.

  The band were forced to cancel their entire tour and leave Australia in the wake of the comments.

  *  *  *

  Your support is crucial in helping us defeat mass censorship. Please consider donating via Locals or check out our unique merch. Follow us on X @ModernityNews.

  Tyler Durden
  Wed, 07/31/2024 – 19:20

• Russia Holds 3rd Phase Of Tactical Nuclear Drills Same Day Ukraine Receives First F-16s
  Russia Holds 3rd Phase Of Tactical Nuclear Drills Same Day Ukraine Receives First F-16s

  Russia’s Ministry of Defense on Wednesday announced it has initiated its third and ‘final’ phase of drills to practice the deployment of tactical nuclear weapons. The exercises are being done in conjunction with Belarus, which has since last year played host to Russian tactical nukes, to the alarm and dismay of NATO countries.

  The first stage of nuclear drills occurred in May, and the second with ally Belarus in June, but the timing of this third iteration corresponds with Ukraine on Wednesday finally receiving its first batch of US-made F-16 fighter jets from European allies.

  

  Bloomberg is the first outlet to report the arrival of the F-16s, though Kiev officials didn’t immediately confirm the report. The past days saw several major outlets confirm an initial round of jets were ‘weeks’ away from arriving.

  “The first delivery of F-16 fighter jets from NATO allies has arrived in Ukraine, in a long-awaited move that may boost the war-torn nation’s ability to repel Russian attacks,” Bloomberg writes.

  “The deadline for the transfer of the US-made warplanes was the end of this month and it has been respected, according to people familiar with the matter, who spoke under condition of anonymity.” However, officials have said only a “small” number of jets arrived in this first transfer.

  In total Ukraine is expecting at least 79 F-16s to be sent after a more than year long Ukrainian pilot training program. The jets are being transferred from the Netherlands, Belgium, Denmark, and Norway. Ukraine still plans to house many of the jets at allied bases outside the war-ravaged country, to prevent them from being immediately attacked by Russian forces.

  This week has seen another important development and confirmation – the US plans to provide and equip the F-16s with advanced weaponry and modern missiles.

  Per reporting in the The Wall Street Journal, this will include air-to-ground AGM-88 HARM missiles, bomb sights, diameter bombs, AMRAAM advanced air-to-air missiles, and AIM-9X short-range air-to-air missiles.

  Footage of Moscow’s third phase of tactical nuclear drills held on Wednesday in cooperation with Belarusian armed forces…

  🚨 Russia’s military has announced the start of the “third stage” in wider non-strategic nuclear weapon exercises that began in the spring.

  Read more: https://t.co/38J4pBUEt5 pic.twitter.com/86Y5RVfW8u

  — The Moscow Times (@MoscowTimes) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  A US official told WSJ: “We are confident that we will be able to supply all of those, at least the critical volumes that they need.”

  Russia, including President Putin himself, has long noted that NATO F-16s are capable of carry tactical nuclear weapons. Russia previously said it will have no choice but to assume each F-16 could be armed with nukes. Putin has warned of “serious consequences” after the Kremlin previously said that NATO bases from which these jets are deployed could come under attack. 

  Tyler Durden
  Wed, 07/31/2024 – 19:00

• Project 2025: The Good, The Bad, & The Frustrating
  Project 2025: The Good, The Bad, & The Frustrating

  Authored by Connor O’Keefe via The Mises Institute,

  Anyone following the 2024 presidential election has undoubtedly heard about the political establishment’s latest villain, Project 2025. This policy agenda — technically named the 2025 Presidential Transition Project — was produced by a group of conservative policy analysts, most of whom are associated with the Heritage Foundation.

  The project centers around a 900-page book meant to provide the next Republican administration to win the White House with a plan and guide for implementing conservative policies at the helm of a federal government staffed with people who almost universally oppose those policies.

  In recent months, Project 2025 has exploded to the forefront of political discourse. Democrats like Kamala Harris are presenting the agenda as an evil scheme concocted by Donald Trump and his allies that is guaranteed to come to fruition, in full, if she loses this election.

  

  Donald Trump has disavowed Project 2025 and made a point to dismiss it as an irrelevant plan that’s unrelated to him and his campaign.

  The rift even reportedly caused project head Paul Dans to resign and Trump’s team to celebrate the “demise of Project 2025.” Yet the Democrats and much of the media are still conflating the Heritage-led project with Donald Trump in an effort to terrify Americans into voting blue.

  For their part, those involved in Project 2025 are leaning into the hysteria, with Heritage president Kevin Roberts, for example, implying on a podcast that the effort represents a second American revolution that “will remain bloodless if the left allows it to be.”

  Despite how prevalent Project 2025 has become in our political discourse, it’s remarkably hard to get trustworthy information about it. Almost all the rhetoric surrounding it either hysterically claims it will impose some kind of fascistic, theocratic quasi-slave state on the American people for a couple years before we’re all killed by climate change, or it’s a bold, tactful playbook that will solve just about all of America’s problems if implemented.

  In truth, Project 2025 does not warrant much hype or dread.

  The predominant 900-page book does contain several fantastic passages and sections.

  But most policy prescriptions presented in the massive volume fall far short of what’s required to address the many problems facing the American people.

  By far the best sections come mainly at the beginning where the authors lay out how the federal government actually works. The numerous White House offices are broken down in great detail, with an emphasis put on explaining which roles can and cannot be appointed by the president, along with how people in the various positions could derail the sitting administration’s policy ambitions. Similar analysis can be found in the later chapters on various executive agencies.

  This effort is clearly a reaction to Trump’s first term when a series of ill-advised appointments and a general lack of institutional understanding doomed most of the Trump team’s objectives from the start. The people behind this project are not only serious about avoiding the same mistakes in a second term but in actively maneuvering around and eliminating the entrenched bureaucratic resistance.

  With its nonspecific language, the opening chapters of Project 2025’s book provide an excellent guide for any presidential team that voters send to the White House on a platform to which the permanent, unelected bureaucracy stands in near-total opposition. This is required knowledge for anyone who is serious about rolling back federal power, and it alone makes Project 2025 a valuable resource in the struggle against the political establishment.

  That said, things start to go downhill as soon as the authors turn to the specific policies they want the next Republican administration to implement. To be clear, there are some very good policies laid out. For example, the authors call for winding down Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, abolishing the federal sugar program, and eliminating the Department of Education. There is also a fairly decent chapter on the Federal Reserve, which Jonathan Newman reviewed last week.

  But most of what the authors call for is frustratingly moderate. In almost every single case, the highly publicized plans to cut federal agencies like the Department of Homeland Security are, in fact, calls to keep everything those agencies do in place but to move the offices in question to other federal agencies. In other words, the authors of Project 2025 are mostly planning to reorganize, not cut, the federal government.

  There is lip service paid to actual rollbacks of federal power. But typically, the authors quickly dismiss such ambitions as impossible and instead spend most of their time theorizing about how conservatives could steer the federal Leviathan to push their preferred social and cultural values if they took full control of the executive agencies. The authors never explain why rollbacks — which they claim to prefer — would remain impossible if their assumption of a total conservative takeover came true.

  Foreign policy-wise, Project 2025 is much closer to Bush-era neoconservativism than the populist, “America First” brand its advocates and opponents attach to it. Various authors accuse the federal government of being weak on China, Iran, Venezuela, North Korea and Russia. A Project 2025 foreign policy can be boiled down to spending more money to act even more aggressively in the Pacific, Middle East, South America and Eastern Europe under the ahistorical assumption that it will get each of these “hostile foreign regimes” to calm down.

  So overall, the policy vision of Project 2025 is much more familiar and moderate than the rhetoric surrounding it would have you expect.

  In theory, it might make sense to pair sweeping institutional changes that create opportunities to later roll back the administrative state with moderate policies that wouldn’t generate a complete freak-out from the progressive left and political establishment. But, as we see today, in reality, the freak-out happens nonetheless.

  And so, if the left and the political establishment are going to call you crazy radicals anyway, why not push for the kinds of sweeping changes that are actually needed to address the many problems we face? For some of the authors behind Project 2025, it could very well be because they do not actually want to cut government spending or roll back Washington’s power.

  But for those who understand that significantly slashing the bloated, corrupt, often malicious federal government is the only way out of many of our national predicaments, Project 2025 remains, in its current form, woefully inadequate.

  Tyler Durden
  Wed, 07/31/2024 – 18:40

• China Now "Placates" US & NATO With New Drone Export Controls Targeting Putin's War Efforts
  China Now “Placates” US & NATO With New Drone Export Controls Targeting Putin’s War Efforts

  One week after Ukrainian Foreign Minister Dmytro Kuleba met with his Chinese counterpart Wang Yi in China to improve dialogue between the two countries, Beijing announced broader export restrictions on drones and drone parts with potential military applications on Wednesday. In recent months, US and NATO officials have accused China of supporting Russia’s war machine by supplying Moscow with advanced drone technology for the modern battlefield in Ukraine. 

  The South China Morning Post reported that civilian over-the-counter drones, which can be reconfigured for the modern battlefield or used by terrorists, will now face export restrictions. 

  In a statement, the Ministry of Commerce explained that the decision was primarily based on preventing the use of drones in “the proliferation of weapons of mass destruction.” It noted that laser targeting sensors, infrared imaging equipment, high-precision inertial measurement sensors, and other critical sensors that can easily be mounted on the drone’s payload section will be placed on the export control list. 

  

  “The Chinese government firmly supports Chinese companies conducting international trade and cooperation of drones in the civilian area [and] oppose civilian drones to be used for non-peaceful means,” the ministry continued. 

  But in what appears to be a jab at mounting US tech sanctions by Washington, DC elites, the ministry also said, “We oppose the imposition of illegal sanctions on Chinese companies and individuals by certain countries using the excuse of [proliferation of weapon-capable] drones.”

  SCMP said the new directive issued today will go into effect on September 1. 

  In recent months, unnamed senior US officials have been quoted by MSM, explaining how Russia has purchased drones and drone parts from Chinese companies that are being used on first and second lines in Ukraine.

  “Our view is that one of the most game-changing moves available to us at this time to support Ukraine is to persuade the PRC (China) to stop helping Russia reconstitute its military-industrial base. Russia would struggle to sustain its war effort without PRC input,” the official told Reuters in mid- April. 

  Goldman Sachs’ John Flood told clients this AM that China’s new directive is a sign that it’s “looking to placate the US and NATO by clamping down on its support for Putin’s war.” 

  Meanwhile, Putin will just go to Iran for drones…

  Tyler Durden
  Wed, 07/31/2024 – 18:20

• L.A. Officials Reject Newsom Order To Clear Out Homeless Encampments
  L.A. Officials Reject Newsom Order To Clear Out Homeless Encampments

  Via Headline USA,

  Los Angeles officials are pushing back on California Gov. Gavin Newsom’s order this month to start clearing homeless encampments, arguing the effort to clean up the city’s streets won’t work.

  

  “I do not believe that it is ultimately a solution to homelessness,” said Democrat Mayor Karen Bass, according to the Denver Gazette.

  “How are they supposed to pay for their ticket, and what happens when they don’t pay?” she continued. “Does it go into a warrant and give us an excuse to incarcerate somebody?” 

  Los Angeles County Supervisors Chair Lindsey Horvath agreed with Bass, calling the order to clear out homeless camps “unconscionable.” The solution to homelessness is not “arrest,” she insisted. “It is not pushing people from community to community.”

  Horvath also accused Newsom of setting a troubling precedent.

  “The criminalization of homelessness and poverty is dangerous,” she said. “It does not work, and it will not stand in Los Angeles County.”

  Newsom issued the executive order last month after the U.S. Supreme Court released a decision giving local officials more power to remove those illegally living on the streets and camping out in public parks.

  Local governments are not legally obligated to follow Newsom’s order, but failure to do so could result in critical funds potentially being withheld.

  “This executive order directs state agencies to move urgently to address dangerous encampments while supporting and assisting the individuals living in them—and provides guidance for cities and counties to do the same,” Newson said in a statement. “There are simply no more excuses. It’s time for everyone to do their part.”

  Horvath warned Los Angeles officials would not tolerate a funding cut from Newsom’s government.

  “I don’t think that threatening funding at a time where we’re trying to get more people served and more people housed is a place that anybody wants to be in,” she said.

  California has the largest homeless population in the country, with more than 180,000 people in the state estimated to be living on the streets.

  Tyler Durden
  Wed, 07/31/2024 – 18:00

• Kamala's "Indian-Caucasian-Jamaican" Birth Certificate Resurfaces As Trump Triggers Race Debate
  Kamala’s “Indian-Caucasian-Jamaican” Birth Certificate Resurfaces As Trump Triggers Race Debate

  Update (1745ET): As expected, the left is now in histrionics after Donald Trump suggested that Kamala Devi Harris might not be black, after he was asked a loaded question by an ABC News journalist Rachel Scott in front of the National Association of Black Journalists.

  To recap, Scott asked Trump if he thinks Harris is ‘only on the ticket because she is a black woman?’ to which Trump replied, accurately, that Harris has identified as an indian-American – which she openly campaigned on.

  “I didn’t know she was Black until a number of years ago, when she happened to turn Black.”

  — Donald Trump, when asked at the NABJ convention whether he thinks Kamala Harris is on the Democratic ticket only because she is a Black woman. pic.twitter.com/EP27jmE6rw

  — The Recount (@therecount) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Not only did people start posting receipts…

  Kamala Harris brags about becoming the ‘First Indian Senator in American History’

  So… pic.twitter.com/1ayqSriFTb

  — Benny Johnson (@bennyjohnson) July 31, 2024

  WATCH: In 2019, Kamala Harris identifies as Indian pic.twitter.com/0NKRkcY8yB

  — Breaking911 (@Breaking911) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  So when Kamala hits Indian TV, she’s Indian.

  When she rolls up in Atlanta, she’s Black.

  They call this code-switching & it’s damn offensive! pic.twitter.com/GmpeES849m

  — Joey Mannarino (@JoeyMannarinoUS) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  …her birth certificate showing her parents being “Indian-Caucasian” and “Jamaican” has begun to circulate.

  Kamala Harris wants you to believe she is an African American woman…

  If so, then why does her birth certificate not list her as such?

  Her birth certificate identifies her mother as a CAUCASIAN BORN IN INDIA and her father as Jamaican.

  Share to make this go viral! pic.twitter.com/5hKHsfj0p9

  — Carter Hughes (@itscarterhughes) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  We assume the next chapter will be a vigorous debate over the blackness of Jamaicans, when the entire point is that Harris chose to campaign on being an Indian.

  And of course…

  Let the scrubbing commence. https://t.co/HzC3XSGFOO

  — Western Lensman (@WesternLensman) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Meanwhile:

  The Trump campaign is projecting this on the screen above the stage at his rally in Harrisburg PA: pic.twitter.com/ZsGHAZaruk

  — Olivia Nuzzi (@Olivianuzzi) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  *  *  *

  Clips are going viral after Donald Trump sat down for an appearance before the National Association of Black Journalists – where he fielded extremely hostile questions from ABC News’ Rachel Scott, and got a rise out of the audience with several answers.

  

  “I want to start by addressing the elephant in the room, sir. A lot of people did not think it was appropriate for you to be here today,” said Scott, who then launched into an attack:

  “You attack Black journalists calling them ‘a loser,’ saying the questions that they asked our quote, ‘stupid and racist.’ You’ve had dinner with a white supremacist at Mar a Lago resort. So my question, sir, now that you were asking black supporters to vote for you, why should black voters trust you, after you have used language like that?” Scott continued.

  To which Trump replied: “Well, first of all, I don’t think I’ve ever been asked the question, in such a horrible manner, first question. You don’t even say hello, how are you?”

  “And I think it’s disgraceful that I came here in good spirit. I love the Black population of this country. I’ve done so much for the black population of this country, including employment including opportunity zones with Senator Tim Scott of South Carolina, which is one of the greatest programs ever for black workers and black entrepreneurs,” Trump continued, calling ABC News “a fake news network” – to which the audience could be heard cheering.

  “I have been the best president for the Black population since Abraham Lincoln,” Trump continued to applause.

  WATCH: President Trump FORCEFULLY answers hostile question about “the elephant in the room” at National Association of Black Journalists Convention in Chicago pic.twitter.com/kA7avWGoBZ

  — RSBN 🇺🇸 (@RSBNetwork) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Trump then slammed Kamala Harris for allowing illegal immigrants to flood the country with illegal immigrants.

  WATCH: President Trump hits Kamala Harris for record as “border czar” at National Association of Black Journalists Convention in Chicago pic.twitter.com/pggeLGMpU9

  — RSBN 🇺🇸 (@RSBNetwork) July 31, 2024

  When asked “Do you believe Vice President Kamala Harris is only on the ticket because she is a black woman,” Trump replied that Harris identified as an indian American until several years ago, adding “I’m not sure if she’s indian or black.”

  “I didn’t know she was Black until a number of years ago, when she happened to turn Black.”

  — Donald Trump, when asked at the NABJ convention whether he thinks Kamala Harris is on the Democratic ticket only because she is a Black woman. pic.twitter.com/EP27jmE6rw

  — The Recount (@therecount) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Oh.

  Kamala Harris brags about becoming the ‘First Indian Senator in American History’

  So… pic.twitter.com/1ayqSriFTb

  — Benny Johnson (@bennyjohnson) July 31, 2024

  WATCH: In 2019, Kamala Harris identifies as Indian pic.twitter.com/0NKRkcY8yB

  — Breaking911 (@Breaking911) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  So when Kamala hits Indian TV, she’s Indian.

  When she rolls up in Atlanta, she’s Black.

  They call this code-switching & it’s damn offensive! pic.twitter.com/GmpeES849m

  — Joey Mannarino (@JoeyMannarinoUS) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jsTrump then discussed political lawfare against him – once again slamming ABC for a lack of coverage. When Scott then said she wanted to move on because she had ‘limited time,’ Trump said “you’re the one who held me up for 35 minutes.”

  “Excuse me, you’re the one who held me up for 35 minutes.”

  🎤 drop pic.twitter.com/XbJUucVkKD

  — Gunther Eagleman™ (@GuntherEagleman) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  When asked about running mate JD Vance’s comments about ‘childless cat ladies,’ Trump suggested that Vance is a big fan of families. 

  WATCH: President Trump refuses to take the bait, defends running mate JD Vance at National Association of Black Journalists Convention in Chicago pic.twitter.com/QtWtECSBu2

  — RSBN 🇺🇸 (@RSBNetwork) July 31, 2024

  Trump also addressed pardoning the January 6th defendants.

  ABC News’ @rachelvscott: “My question is on those [Jan. 6th] rioters who assaulted officers. Would you pardon those people?”

  Trump: “Oh, absolutely, I would. If they’re innocent, I would pardon them.”

  Scott: “They’ve been convicted.” pic.twitter.com/xfNFZtdmAZ

  — The Recount (@therecount) July 31, 2024

  We can’t help but wonder how Kamala Harris would do in a similarly contentious interview.

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Tyler Durden
  Wed, 07/31/2024 – 17:48

• US Will 'Certainly' Defend Israel If Attacked By Iran In Wake Of Haniyeh Killing
  US Will ‘Certainly’ Defend Israel If Attacked By Iran In Wake Of Haniyeh Killing

  Update(1855ET): More dangerous escalation coming from the Pentagon, at least in terms of declared ‘commitments’… how many wars or proxy conflicts does Washington want to be in at once? 

  Israel has the US right where it wants them. They attack an enemy and the morons in DC assure them we will bear the brunt of the revenge. Talk about incentive for ISR to wage war on literally everyone around them. What self-respecting country would put itself in this position? https://t.co/caHDgpmQeE

  — Daniel McAdams (@DanielLMcAdams) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  US Defense Secretary Lloyd Austin stated Wednesday, just hours after Hamas leader Ismail Haniyeh’s death, “If Israel is attacked, we certainly will help defend Israel.“

  He issued the words aboard the USNS Millinocket during a visit to the Philippines. “You saw us do that in April; you can expect to see us do that again,” he said, in reference to the prior Iranian ballistic missile and drone attack in retaliation for the previous Israeli attack on Tehran’s embassy in Damascus.

  * * *

  Update(1550ET): Multiple Iranian officials have told the New York Times in a breaking story that Iran’s supreme leader, Ayatollah Ali Khamenei, has ordered retaliation against Israel for the brazen assassination by missile strike of Hamas leader Ismail Haniyeh which took place on Iranian soil in the early morning hours.

  Officials referenced the “humiliating security failure” and that Iran must once against show “strength against the risk of escalation” in exacting revenge on Israel.

  Khamenei has, according to the report, “issued an order for Iran to strike Israel directly, in retaliation for the killing in Tehran of Hamas’s leader” – three Iranian sources who were briefed on the matter said.

  Iran has raised the red flag of revenge over the dome of the Jamkaran Mosque following the Israeli assassination of Hamas leader Ismail Haniyeh.

  Iran’s Supreme Leader has said, ‘It is our duty to take revenge.’

  The United States government claims it was not aware of or involved… pic.twitter.com/yJcTPDC7Ko

  — Shadow of Ezra (@ShadowofEzra) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Russia is one among several nations urging calm and raising the alarm over a major regional conflagration:

  Russia warned Wednesday that the assassination in Iran of visiting Hamas leader Ismail Haniyeh threatened a full “global conflict” — as the terror group called it “a grave escalation” and Iran’s Supreme Leader Ali Khamenei threatened “harsh punishment” for Israel.

  “We resolutely condemn the attack that led to Mr. Haniyeh’s death,” Kremlin spokesperson Dmitry Peskov said soon after Haniyeh was killed in an airstrike while in Tehran for the inauguration of Iran’s new president.

  “We believe that such action is aimed against attempts to establish peace in the region, and could significantly destabilize the already tense situation,” he said.

  * * *

  Iran’s Foreign Ministry has issued a fiery statement saying that Washington must also bear responsibility for the Israeli attack which killed Hamas leader Ismail Haniyeh in Tehran in the overnight and early morning hours of Wednesday.

  “This terrorist act is not only a flagrant violation of the principles and rules of international law and the United Nations Charter, but also a serious threat to regional and international peace and security,” the Iranian Foreign Ministry statement began.

  “The Islamic Republic of Iran emphasizes the responsibility of the US government as a supporter and accomplice of the Zionist regime in the continuation of the occupation and genocide of the Palestinians, in committing this heinous act of terrorism,” it added.

  

  The vague language of general ‘support’ to Israel leaves open the question of whether Tehran believes the US had an actual direct operational role in Haniyeh’s killing.

  However, Iran’s ambassador to the United Nations issued a more specific denunciation in tandem: “This act could not have occurred without the authorization and intelligence support of the U.S.,” it said in a letter submitted to the UN. According to fresh details of the strike:

  HAMAS SENIOR OFFICIAL AL-HAYYA SAYS A MISSILE HIT HAMAS LEADER ROOM AND ‘STRUCK HIM DIRECTLY‘

  Hours before the accusation, US Secretary of State Anthony Blinken definitively stated Washington had no involvement in the attack. 

  “This is something we were not aware of or involved in. It’s very hard to speculate,” Blinken told a regional outlet while on an official trip to Singapore. He had been asked about what he thinks will happen next in the region.

  Iran will more than likely retaliate in a big way, possibly with another wave of drones and missiles on Israel, but this time less telegraphed (compared to the initial April 13 attack, largely intercepted by Israel’s anti-air defenses)…

  This reference to Iran’s territorial integrity is the clearest sign yet that Iran is viewing its response in the same light as its response to Israel’s bombing of its consulate in Damascus in April.

  In other words, it’s going to be a big response. It has to be a big response. https://t.co/UIQX4LxSxR

  — Sam (@sonofnariman) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  The aforementioned UN letter has also called for the UN Security Council to hold an emergency meeting over the Hamas chief’s killing. But likely the US and its allies will see this as a legitimate killing of a designated terrorist responsible for the atrocities against Israel on Oct.7.

  Meanwhile as Israel appears to be on an ‘assassination spree’, the body of Hezbollah’s military commander Fuad Shukr (and close advisor to Nasrallah) has been pulled from the rubble in Beirut.

  Regional sources say the death toll from the Tuesday strike on a southern neighborhood of the Lebanese capital has risen to five with at least 70 injured. Among the casualties were women and children.

  Tyler Durden
  Wed, 07/31/2024 – 17:45

Digest powered by RSS Digest

• Blinken, Foreign Ministers "Seriously Concerned" About Indo-Pacific Security
  Blinken, Foreign Ministers “Seriously Concerned” About Indo-Pacific Security

  Authored by Frank Fang via The Epoch Times,

  U.S. Secretary of State Antony Blinken and top diplomats from Australia, India, and Japan said they are “seriously concerned” about the situation in the South and East China seas and are working on ways to maintain maritime safety and security in the region.

  

  Mr. Blinken, Japanese Foreign Minister Yoko Kamikawa, Australian Foreign Minister Penny Wong, and Indian External Affairs Minister Subrahmanyam Jaishankar were in Tokyo on July 29 for a ministerial meeting of the Quad (Quadrilateral Security Dialogue) partners.

  In a joint statement following their meeting, the four diplomats expressed their concerns about recent Chinese maritime activities, without directly mentioning China.

  “We are seriously concerned about the situation in the East and South China seas and reiterate our strong opposition to any unilateral actions that seek to change the status quo by force or coercion,” the foreign ministers stated.

  “We continue to express our serious concern about the militarization of disputed features, and coercive and intimidating maneuvers in the South China Sea.

  “We also express our serious concern about the dangerous use of coast guard and maritime militia vessels, the increasing use of various kinds of dangerous maneuvers, and efforts to disrupt other countries’ offshore resource exploitation activities.”

  In recent months, China’s coast guard and other forces have clashed with Philippine ships seeking to bring supplies to its military personnel stationed at the Second Thomas Shoal. There appears to be an easing of tensions after the Armed Forces of the Philippines successfully transported supplies to the shoal without any incident on July 27, after the two sides reached a provisional agreement on July 21.

  The Quad partners said they are working on multiple initiatives to maintain “the free and open maritime order,” including assisting partners to enhance maritime domain awareness through satellite data, training, and capacity building. They also announced a plan to launch “a Quad maritime legal dialogue” to support their efforts to “uphold the rules-based maritime order in the Indo-Pacific.”

  Additionally, the Quad partners said they intend to “geographically expand” the Indo-Pacific Partnership for Maritime Domain Awareness to the Indian Ocean region. The initiative was launched in 2022 to better track illegal fishing and “dark shipping” in the Indo-Pacific.

  “All countries have a role in contributing to regional peace, stability, and prosperity, while seeking a region in which no country dominates and no country is dominated, competition is managed responsibly, and each country is free from coercion in all its forms and can exercise its agency to determine its own future,” the partners stated.

  ‘Free and Open Indo-Pacific’

  The four Quad partners held a joint news conference following their meeting, and they spoke of their shared vision of a “free and open Indo-Pacific.”

  “We are charting a course for a more secure and open Indo-Pacific and Indian Ocean region by bolstering maritime security,” Mr. Blinken told reporters after the meeting.

  “In practical terms what does this mean? It means strengthening the capacity of partners across the region to know what’s happening in their own waters.”

  The United States will continue to ensure freedom of navigation, overflight, and the unimpeded flow of lawful maritime commerce, he said.

  Mr. Jaishankar said the Quad partners are working together “for a free and open Indo-Pacific, for a rules-based order, and for global good.”

  Asked about the Quad’s concerns about the South and East China seas at a regular briefing on July 29, Chinese foreign ministry spokesperson Lin Jian accused the group of “artificially creating tension” and “inciting confrontation” in the region, according to China’s state-run media.

  Mr. Blinken and U.S. Secretary of Defense Lloyd Austin also met with Japanese Prime Minister Kishida Fumio in Tokyo on July 29. According to a readout of the meeting from the Pentagon, the three officials discussed opportunities to continue expanding trilateral cooperation with South Korea.

  On July 28, Mr. Austin, South Korean Defense Minister Shin Won-sik, and Japanese Defense Minister Minoru Kihara signed a memorandum institutionalizing trilateral security cooperation, including information sharing and trilateral exercises, according to a Pentagon statement. Their shared aim is to bring stability to the Korean Peninsula and the Indo-Pacific region.

  Also on July 28, Mr. Blinken, Mr. Austin, Ms. Kamikawa, and Mr. Kihara held a “2+2” security meeting, where they agreed that China’s foreign policy “seeks to reshape the international order” and that threats from China are “the greatest strategic challenge,” according to a statement. They agreed to further bolster bilateral military cooperation by upgrading the command and control of the U.S. forces in Japan.

  The four U.S. and Japanese officials also emphasized the importance of peace across the Taiwan Strait as “an indispensable element of security and prosperity in the international community.”

  Taiwan, which is under the threat of China’s military, welcomed the support voiced by the Japanese and U.S. officials.

  “As a responsible member of the Indo-Pacific, Taiwan will work steadfastly to deepen cooperation with the United States, Japan, and other like-minded nations to jointly safeguard the shared values of freedom, democracy, and the rule of law,” Taiwan’s foreign ministry said in a statement on July 28.

  Tyler Durden
  Wed, 07/31/2024 – 02:00

• Are The Olympics A Trial-Run For A 1984-Style Digital-State?
  Are The Olympics A Trial-Run For A 1984-Style Digital-State?

  Authored by Aaron Hertzberg via The Brownstone Institute,

  First-person report of QR Codes, Digital IDs, and police militarization of Paris

  This is a guest post from a friend who is on the ground in Paris reporting what the situation is like.

  The best way to begin might be to say that there are three distinct categories of Olympic games sites that the City of Paris wants to make ultra-safe for visitors and athletes, each with its own unique security challenges. 

  

  First, there are the many official, already-existing sporting venues (stadiums, arenas, tennis courts, aquatic centers, etc.) located throughout Paris and France. These require the least amount of novel security measures, whether in the form of protective perimeters or the (unusual) methods used to maintain them. 

  Included among these is the historic Grand Palais, an architectural jewel from 1900 located at the foot of the Champs-Elysées. A monumentally massive building with a marvelously versatile interior space, it regularly plays host to museum exhibitions of all types, in addition to galas, elaborate fashion shows, concerts, conventions, and even an ice-skating rink. Turning it into an Olympic sporting event site wouldn’t have been very difficult. 

  Second, and complementing these dedicated sporting facilities, are several famous outdoor public monuments and historic landmarks that have been transformed into temporary games sites. 

  These comprise, most notably, the Trocadero and the area next to the Eiffel Tower, the Château de Versailles, the Place de la Concorde, the Alexandre III Bridge, and the expansive lawns in front of the Hôtel des Invalides. 

  Massive amounts of bleachers and facilities for ticketed spectators have been brought in and creatively set up to adapt to the often unusual contours and spatial constraints of these areas. Seeing the obelisk at la Place de la Concorde hidden behind a patchwork of crisscrossing bars and stands was strange indeed. From the outside, the expansive fenced-in area, with giant stands rising out from the emptied-out streets, looks like a curious sort of fairground. 

  Third, and arguably most importantly, there is the Seine River itself, which will be the location of the opening ceremony as well as several aquatic competitions. 

  From a security standpoint, the first category of venues is the most straightforward because entrances and exits are already part of the structures. All that is necessary to guarantee spectator and athlete safety is to set up slightly expanded perimeters around the buildings and flood the access points with staff and security guards so that no one – or anything – dangerous gets through. 

  Think of the Barclays Center on game night. Plenty of space to accommodate the crowds at the entrance waiting to go through security, with minimal disruptions to the immediate surroundings. 

  The second category of event sites, as mentioned above, significantly modify public spaces outdoors; they pose greater security and logistical challenges, as the physical enclosures separating “outside from inside” – separating the ticketed spectators from the unticketed – have to be brought in on trucks and set up. 

  These barriers are made up of hundreds of miles of what are essentially chain link fence units (about 10 feet long and 7 feet high) set into concrete slabs that can be moved around and connected as needed. 

  They wrap around the temporary outdoor sporting event sites in odd, unsightly ways and, notwithstanding the considerable effort to line them up neatly, look to many like human kennels. (Upset Parisians are referring to them as cages.) 

  The last site/category of Olympic events, and the location of the opening ceremony, the Seine River, is the most problematic in terms of security perimeters. 

  In fact, in order to meet the endless safety, commercial, and sanitary needs associated with the many uses to which the river is being put, an unprecedented thing has taken place: for 8 days leading up to the opening ceremony (tomorrow), the Seine and its immediate surroundings have undergone a form of privatization that has kept almost the entirety of the Parisian population off its riverbanks and away from its nearest surrounding streets and bridges. 

  Implementing this shutting down of the river has involved widespread use of the aforementioned chainlink-type moveable fences – thousands of them – along with a novel but not entirely unfamiliar technological device: the QR-coded pass. 

  To help explain what this is looking like on the ground, I’ll attempt to draw a hypothetical analogy with NYC. 

  It’s a highly flawed comparison due to the very different layout and features of the two cities, with the proportions off, but it’s the best I could come up with under pressure to illustrate the point. 

  Imagine that 42nd Street in NYC was the Seine River, and that all of the Avenues slicing through it were Paris’ many bridges connecting the North and South sides of the city. 

  Now picture the sidewalks of 42nd Street as Paris’ Right and Left banks, or riversides, and all the buildings on the North and South sides of 42nd Street, extending down its entire length, like the rows of charming old Parisian apartment buildings you see overlooking the Seine in postcards. 

  Okay, now think of what life would be like in Manhattan if, for 8 days, all of 42nd Street (street, sidewalks, avenues, entire blocks of buildings) was completely off limits to all motorized traffic and most foot and cycle traffic, with only two avenues – one on the East Side (say, 2nd Avenue), and one on the West Side (say, 8th Avenue) – left open to handle all of midtown Manhattan’s North-to-South movements: foot, bicycle, and motorized traffic. 

  On top of these restrictions on 42nd Street, imagine the entire area encompassing 41st and 43rd Streets – cross streets and all – every inch, being cut off to all motorized traffic for 8 days, except for emergency and police vehicles. Buses would be rerouted out of the area. 

  Random pedestrians and cyclists approaching from uptown or downtown could move freely within this outlying area immediately to the north and south of 42nd Street, but they could still not access 42nd Street itself, and as they entered into the outlying pedestrian areas through police checkpoints, they would be subject to random bag searches by a police presence resembling that of an occupying army. 

  Subway service would continue to run uninterrupted through the zone, but would not make any stops on 41st, 42nd and 43rd Streets. All major subway hubs in the area would be completely closed for those 8 days, including MetroNorth and LIRR trains running into and out of Grand Central. 

  Drivers wishing to travel from, say, the Upper East Side to Kip’s Bay might find it faster and easier at rush hour to take the Queensborough Bridge to the Queens Midtown Tunnel, swinging back again into Manhattan, rather than sitting in the bottleneck forming for blocks and blocks along the approach to the 2nd Avenue 42nd Street southbound crossing. 

  Imagine in addition that more than half of the width of 42nd Street sidewalks was completely taken up with metal stands and bleachers in preparation for an opening ceremony parade of slow-moving trucks that would traverse 42nd Street from east to west all the way across. 

  (In Paris, the opening ceremony will feature decked-out boats gliding down the river representing the participating nations, so in addition to the river banks, most of the bridges in the center of Paris are also filled with empty steep metal bleachers. 

  My fanciful comparison with NYC, unfortunately, doesn’t allow the avenues to behave like bridges, but if you can picture the Park Avenue Viaduct over 42nd Street filled with empty seats and benches stacked high and looking down over the street, you can get a sense of how this vitally important public space has been turned into one vast seating area, sitting idle for 8 days.)

  Controlled access to the thousands of residences, businesses, and shops on 42nd Street via the many otherwise closed-off avenues would begin as far away as 41st and 43rd Streets (and sometimes one or two streets farther removed) behind hundreds of feet of the aforementioned chainlink barriers and through select access points guarded by police units 24/7. 

  Entry would be granted only to authorized individuals in possession of a special QR-coded “Games Pass.” 

  The “authorized” individuals allowed to enter this area, on foot or on bicycle only, would be: local residents, owners, or employees of shops and businesses on 42nd Street, and/or tourists and others with valid reasons for needing to be there. 

  The latter reasons would include and be essentially limited to medical appointments, lunch/dinner reservations in restaurants, and the need for guests staying at hotels or Airbnbs within this “secure” perimeter to return to their accommodations. 

  The QR-coded “Games Pass” itself would be issued to applicants only after the successful submission of detailed personal information and supporting documents to the NYPD well in advance of the shutdown period. 

  The NYPD would record all the personal information about who lived and worked within this soon-to-be shut-down perimeter, presumably verify the accuracy of the information provided, and then give, or withhold giving, the green light for issuance of the “Games Pass.”

  For reasons unknown, many employees of small businesses would never get their QR-coded “Games Pass” after correctly providing all necessary personal information to the authorities. 

  (In Paris, this inexplicable failure to issue “Games Passes” to employees whose workplaces were inside the locked-down areas, whether due to human or machine error, initially created much tension between cops and workers at numerous access points, as the latter tried by many means (getting their bosses on the phone, showing proof of employment, providing friendly assurances, etc., often in vain, to justify their right and need to enter the area.)

  On the afternoon of the opening ceremony, the bleachers lining the sidewalks of 42nd Street, along with the rows of stands looking down from the Park Avenue Viaduct, would slowly fill up with the more than 300,000 ticketed spectators allowed to watch the Olympic Parade. 

  No one else in NYC – unless they happened to be lucky enough to live in a building on 42nd Street with a window facing the street – would be allowed to get close enough to the event to see it with their own two eyes. 

  It’s hard to capture the universal exasperation caused by this 8-day near-total shutdown of the Seine River, its upper and lower riverbanks, the buildings all around it, and most of its bridges. 

  The rerouting of motorized traffic and resulting colossal bottlenecks around this central part of the city have been an absolute nightmare to taxis and commuters at rush hour – even after the significant reduction in the number of vehicles on the roads following the seasonal exodus of Parisians fleeing the city for summer homes and foreign vacation destinations.

  But it’s the restrictions on pedestrian and cyclist movements around the water and riverside areas that have enraged Parisians the most. 

  Hemmed in and funneled through long narrow spaces between sidewalks and empty roads, local residents and visitors to Paris alike are bristling at the intrusive, intimidating metal fences, which are more in line with the types of structures you would see at a detention center or migrant camp than at an international sporting event. 

  It’s hard to overstate how violently these unsightly barriers clash with the otherwise beautiful surroundings they are keeping people out of. 

  All of these restrictions have, not surprisingly, led to a serious dropoff in tourist activities in the area. Restaurants within the cordoned-off “security perimeters” are making 30%-70% less than this time last year. This is the case even in the buffer zones leading up to the river where motorized traffic is prohibited but foot and bicycle access is allowed without restrictions. Terraces and restaurant interiors are empty here too. 

  (Fortunately, the many other stadium/arena/transformed venues around Paris that will be hosting events in the days following the opening ceremony will not cause similar disruptions to neighboring businesses, interrupting traffic flows in the immediate area only for a few hours preceding and following the events. 

  In such spots, the QR-Coded Games Pass will play a less important role, and won’t be needed by local residents or shopkeepers because no shops or businesses open to the public will be located on the same site as the sporting venue. Only visitors/spectators to these sites will have to worry about QR codes and QR-coded tickets.)

  But to return to the river opening ceremony “security” preparations, in order to monitor the hundreds of access points along the North and South banks of the Seine (as well as to monitor the many other Olympic Games venues around the city), 45,000 police and gendarmes have been mobilized, with thousands pouring into Paris from all over France. 

  I spoke with about a dozen such officers stationed at checkpoints all along the river, and I asked them how things were going. Most – in carefully chosen words and professional tones — said it was a shitshow. 

  Interestingly, all the police I happened upon were from other parts of France and most were not at all familiar with Paris and its streets and bridges. So when asked by annoyed locals or confused/lost tourists about how to navigate around the off-limit zones, such officers were often of little to no help. 

  On the two occasions I witnessed local Parisians ask how to get around a closed-off area, the out-of-town police shrugged and apologetically explained how they weren’t from Paris and didn’t know.

  Standing for hours on end at the hundreds of cordoned-off access points, they would repeat calmly and patiently that they were stationed there solely to check passes and make sure unauthorized persons did not get beyond them. It was unreasonable to expect anything more of them, they seemed to be saying. 

  This led me to ask how the actual process of checking the “Games Pass” – their primary responsibility – was unfolding. 

  It turns out that the way things were supposed to happen was that a person in possession of a “Games Pass” seeking access to the restricted area also needed to show police a separate ID, and sometimes further proof of what they claimed to be doing in the area (if they didn’t live or work there), at which the police could cross-check the name with the information called up by the QR-code scanner. 

  But it seems there are not (or at least weren’t as of Monday) enough scanners to go around, and, making matters worse, the scanner screens can’t be read properly on sunny days due to the glare. 

  So in such situations – which also include instances of people not receiving their “Games Pass,” or having lost their paper copy – the police have to “use their best judgment,” and let people through on the basis of simple ID checks and the believability of the person’s story for needing to be in the off-limits area. 

  The police officers I spoke with said a small number of people, like myself, objected to the use of QR-coded passes on principle, saying that it reminded them of the health and vaccine pass nightmares and that hosting an international event was no justification for denying freedom of movement in this way. 

  When I asked what they themselves thought of the kennel-like security restrictions, and if they agreed with any of the freedom of movement concerns raised by angry residents, most seemed to miss the point entirely. They would invariably utter something about the size and scope of the event requiring the extraordinary security measures, that terrorists would be plotting, etc. Almost like a pre-recorded message (though eloquently conveyed). 

  But one cop I spoke to at length raised another issue I hadn’t thought of keeping the entire city away from the Seine for 8 days and nights was also aimed at preventing the newly cleaned river from filling up with human garbage again. 

  The banks of the river in the warm summer months are thronged with revelers all through the evenings, and this leads to tons of junk and pollution ending up in the water. 

  It turns out that 1.4 billion euros went into a massive 6-year river cleanup project, beginning in 2018, to make the Seine safe enough to swim in for the handful of aquatic events set to take place in it this summer. 

  E coli and other bacteria seem to have disappeared (or at least no longer pose a threat to human health) and the number of fish species has made a huge comeback, jumping from 3 to 30 in the last few years due to the significant increase in oxygen in the water. 

  Understandably, the Olympic Games organizers and the City of Paris didn’t want flotsam in the form of empty wine bottles to be seen bobbing up and down between the parade boats on the opening night, so they decided not to take any chances and simply banned everyone from getting within spitting distance of the water. 

  This got me thinking. 

  This whole 8-day Seine shutdown – which in some ways amounts to privatizing the river, making access available to only a fraction of the tax-paying population – could not have been imaginable without the availability of digital passes such as this QR-coded “Games Pass,” which can store and instantly call up huge amounts of pre-vetted personal data. 

  Though there aren’t enough of the scanners to go around, there are enough to just about make it all work. 

  Without such on-the-spot digital data-storage technology, the thousands of local residents and other “authorized” persons needing to access the areas around the river on a daily basis would have to carry around with them at all times: IDs, proof of residence, and proof of employment papers. And they would need to show them all every day to every cop they came across at the checkpoints.

  Police stationed at these checkpoints, in turn, would have to spend endless time cross-checking all these documents, and querying every non-resident about their purpose for being in the area – a mini-interrogation each time a local resident or worker sought to cross an access point. 

  It’s hard to imagine the proposal to shut down the Seine River for over a week being taken seriously even in an informal spitballing session of city counselors (let alone in a national-level ministerial meeting) if it involved local residents living by the river having to produce reams of documentation every time they came back from work or the supermarket. 

  One would hope that such an imaginary discussion, after eliciting groans at the idea of such intrusive on-the-spot background and ID checking by police, would have quickly led to other considerations being raised, such as freedom of movement and the unreasonable obligation to justify one’s presence in public areas.

  So there had to be a way to streamline such an extensively coordinated, large-scale shutdown of a heavily populated urban area requiring such tight control of people and their movements, ideally, without people taking too much notice of the personal intrusions and infringements on certain rights and freedoms. 

  Cue the QR-coded “Games Pass.”

  Had there been no sophisticated QR-coded tools to facilitate such an undertaking, it’s likely the hair-brained and outrageous idea of emptying out and privatizing the center of a major metropolis – with all its attendant civil rights questions – would have been immediately apparent. 

  One wonders if questions over the feasibility and legality/constitutionality of such a proposal were ever brought up in official discussions in 2016. Perhaps, instead, the fascination with the vast organizational and control/surveillance potential of the QR-coded “Games Passes” caused such concerns to be dismissed or downplayed – or eclipsed entirely – once again revealing the dangerous hidden biases of these digital technologies.  

  In my experience, asking proponents of surveillance/control tools like QR-coded “Games Passes” or Health/Vaccine Passports about the totalitarian nature of the use cases that such technologies inevitably give rise to typically elicits ironic eye-rolling and accusations of alarmism, followed by reassurances about the benefits of enhanced security on a limited time scale. 

  In the case of the Paris “Games Pass,” such enthusiasts are also quick to highlight the added bonus of having a cleaned-up river to enjoy going forward. The 100-year ban on swimming on the Seine is set to be lifted after the Summer Games, with the opening up of select swimming areas along the river next summer.

  But those of us who lived for two-plus years under the totalitarian Corona regime, with its QR-coded health and vaccine passes, see this as a clear attempt to continue testing out these technologies in new contexts involving restrictions on basic rights and freedoms, slowly and steadily conditioning public acceptance of their use in preparation for the inevitable rollout of digital IDs in France and the EU (unless the Europeans start organizing to oppose these out-in-the-open Orwellian plans).

  Indeed, it seems the French government misses no opportunity these days to insinuate QR codes into large-scale public celebrations and gatherings where they are not needed. 

  To wit, the annual Bal des Pompiers (Fireman’s Ball) this year (a uniquely French outdoor celebration held inside the courtyards of Fire Stations all over France on the 13th and 14th of July, which is free and open to the public and draws massive crowds of revelers, featuring the presence of French Foreign Legionnaires and other elite military personnel), for the first time ever, prohibited the use of cash and credit cards for purchases of food and drink and instead required partygoers to buy a QR-coded “credit card” at the entrance.

  In order to consume food or alcohol within the firehouse, one had to line up at a special booth and exchange money for a special one-off QR-coded plastic card (the size and shape of a credit card) which then became the only accepted form of currency for purchases during the all-night outdoor celebration. 

  Unlike previous years, where the firemen serving food and alcohol also handled cash and credit cards, this year they were armed with little scanners, with which they beeped and deducted credit from these disposable digital money cards. 

  It introduced a wholly unnecessary, illogical, time-wasting step into the normal “money-food” transaction process on the grounds that it would streamline the handover of food and drink in an extremely busy and crowded space by freeing vendors from the need to handle money. 

  It of course did exactly the opposite, causing people to waste more time standing in the QR-coded card line each time they wanted to buy or top up their card. Worse still, drunk party-goers undoubtedly lost hundreds, if not thousands of euros, from putting more money on their QR-cards than they were able (or remembered) to spend on food and alcohol during the rollicking festivities. 

  To those of us still reeling from the use of the health passes, it was a terrifying, flagrant further example of the incremental social engineering that has been going on in Europe for the last 4 years, with its two-fold aim of phasing out cash while preparing the public for a sudden shift to a digital euro during the next manufactured emergency. 

  I can only hope the uproar caused by the Summer Games’ disruptions to people’s ability to live, work in, and enjoy their city will shine a light on these dangerous technologies of control and surveillance that I believe are irreconcilably incompatible with the values and principles of a free society.

  Tyler Durden
  Tue, 07/30/2024 – 23:45

• School That Gave Child COVID-19 Vaccine Against Parents' Wishes Immune From Lawsuits: Court
  School That Gave Child COVID-19 Vaccine Against Parents’ Wishes Immune From Lawsuits: Court

  Authored by Zachary Stieber via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

  A school that injected a minor with a COVID-19 vaccine despite the boy’s parents telling school officials they did not want him to receive a COVID-19 vaccine is immune under federal law, the Vermont Supreme Court has ruled.

  

  The Federal Public Readiness and Emergency Preparedness Act (PREP Act) protects state and school officials who were named as defendants in a lawsuit brought by the minor’s parents, justices said in a July 26 decision.

  “We conclude that when the federal PREP Act immunizes a defendant, the PREP Act bars all state-law claims against that defendant as a matter of law,” Justice Karen Carroll said.

  The PREP Act, signed in 2005, grants immunity to administrators of covered vaccines except in cases involving willful misconduct. COVID-19 vaccines are covered because of a 2020 declaration, extended multiple times thereafter, by the U.S. health secretary.

  Dario and Shujen Politella sued officials after their son was injected with a Pfizer-BioNTech COVID-19 shot in 2021 at the Academy School in the Windham Southeast School District. Before the school hosted a vaccine clinic, district and state officials confirmed that students needed parental consent to receive a vaccine, and the boy’s parents said they did not consent. Just days before holding the clinic, Mr. Politella emphasized to the school’s assistant principal that the parents did not want the boy to receive a shot.

  The boy was removed from class on the day of the clinic and labeled as another child, who had already been vaccinated. The boy told workers his father said not to give him a vaccine, but they distracted him with a stuffed animal and gave him a shot, according to court documents.

  The Vermont Superior Court dismissed the suit from the parents, finding that they needed to bring litigation in federal court under the PREP Act’s immunity exemption.

  Lawyers for the parents, though, argued that officials did not show that the PREP Act covered their actions and that the case should play out in state court according to state laws. In a brief to Vermont justices, they pointed to other cases in which that has happened.

  Justices said that each defendant, including the school’s nurse, is covered by the PREP Act and that the allegations against them are related to the administration of the vaccine, which makes all defendants immune.

  While there have been rulings in other cases that the PREP Act only preempts claims against covered people for willful misconduct, “none of these cases supports the proposition that plaintiffs can proceed in state court against defendants who are completely immunized from liability under the Act,” Justice Carroll said.

  She wrote later that “other state courts faced with similar facts have concluded that state-law claims against immunized defendants cannot proceed in state court in light of the PREP Act’s immunity and preemption provisions, including claims based on the failure to secure parental consent.”

  Attorneys representing Mr. and Mrs. Politella and the defendants did not respond to requests for comment.

  Tyler Durden
  Tue, 07/30/2024 – 22:55

• Israeli Police Detain Soldiers Suspected Of Raping A Palestinian, Sparking Protests
  Israeli Police Detain Soldiers Suspected Of Raping A Palestinian, Sparking Protests

  Authored by Dave DeCamp via AntiWar.com,

  On Monday, Israeli military police detained Israeli soldiers who were suspected of raping a Palestinian prisoner at the notorious Sde Teiman prison in southern Israel. Israeli media reported that the Palestinian prisoner was transferred from Sde Teiman to a hospital with an injury to his anus that was so severe he could not walk.

  When the Israeli military police went to Sde Teiman to detain soldiers suspected of forcibly sodomizing the Palestinian man, they were met with resistance. A security source told Haaretz that Israeli soldiers at the facility refused to leave and barricaded themselves in. They also reportedly used pepper spray on the military police.

  

  The police ended up detaining nine out of 10 of the Israeli Defense Forces (IDF) soldiers suspected of abusing the Palestinian detainee. The arrest of the suspected rapists sparked protests from far-right Israeli activists.

  Members of the Israeli Knesset joined protesters as they stormed Sde Teiman, including Zvi Sukkot of the Religious Zionism party. At least one member of Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu’s coalition was spotted among the protesters, Heritage Minister Amichai Eliyahu, a member of the Jewish Power party. Later in the day, protesters stormed Beit Lid, the base where the Israeli soldiers are being held.

  Israeli Minister of National Security Itamar Ben Gvir, leader of the Jewish Power party, praised the detained Israeli soldiers, calling them the “best heroes” and denouncing their arrest as “shameful.”

  According to The Telegraph, Ben Gvir said the Israeli security establishment should support the soldiers and “learn from the prison service: light treatment of terrorists is over. Soldiers need to have our full support.” According to CBS News:

  Lawmaker Hanoch Milwidsky was asked as he defended the alleged abuse whether it was legitimate, “to insert a stick into a person’s rectum?”

  “Yes!” he shouted in reply to his fellow parliamentarian. “If he is a Nukhba [Hamas militant], everything is legitimate to do! Everything!”

  Israel’s far-right National Security Minister Itamar Ben Gvir, who’s drawn U.S. reprimands with his provocative actions since the war started, wrote in a post on social media: “Take your hands off the reservists.”

  Israel could be the first country in history to start a civil war over the right of its military to rape prisoners… pic.twitter.com/c8089SPdSR

  — Pelham (@Resist_05) July 30, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Israeli whistleblowers have detailed widespread abuse and torture at the Sde Teiman prison, which holds Palestinians detained from Gaza. The New York Times reported last month that Palestinians who made it out of the facility said they were subject to sexual torture.

  Younis al-Hamlawi, a senior nurse who was detained by Israeli forces in Gaza after he left Al-Shifa Hospital over allegations that he was tied to Hamas, told the Times that Israeli soldiers penetrated his rectum with a metal stick, causing him to bleed and leaving him in “unbearable pain.“

  All of this was sparked due to an internal Israeli military investigation, after pressure from US officials…

  After @CNN & @nytimes investigations & strong US pressure, an #IDF investigation reportedly confirmed allegations:

  – Torture with electricity
  – Amputations
  – Systematic beatings
  – Rape
  – Sensory disorientation, leading to bleeding ears & eyesight loss https://t.co/59bWdQefje

  — Charles Lister (@Charles_Lister) July 29, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  The Times report said a leaked report from the UN “cited a 41-year-old detainee who said that interrogators ‘made me sit on something like a hot metal stick and it felt like fire,’ and also said that another detainee ‘died after they put the electric stick up’ his anus.”

  Tyler Durden
  Tue, 07/30/2024 – 22:30

• Democrats Vs. The Man Who Could Get To The Bottom Of The Trump Shooting
  Democrats Vs. The Man Who Could Get To The Bottom Of The Trump Shooting

  Authored by Julie Kelly via RealClearInvestigations,

  After the evasive House testimony of now-former Secret Service Director Kimberly Cheatle and FBI Director Christopher Wray’s shortlived suggestion that Donald Trump may not have been hit by a bullet, one man alone may help allay Republican fears that the Biden administration will not conduct a forthright investigation into the attempted assassination of Trump last month: Joseph Cuffari.

  

  The Trump-appointed inspector general for the Department of Homeland Security has already opened two investigations into the U.S. Secret Service, which is under the purview of the DHS, related to the agency’s handling of the July 13 shooting.

  But some Republicans are concerned because, they say, Cuffari has been stonewalled by Homeland Security Secretary Alejandro Mayorkas on other internal examinations – including one that might have revealed Secret Service lapses that might have prevented the attempt on Trump’s life. 

  Specifically, congressional sources tell RCI that Cuffari’s report, “USSS Preparation for and Response to the Events of January 6, 2021,” has been on Mayorkas’ desk since at least April.

  The report, according to Politico, will “cast light on a series of embarrassing security lapses for the agency.” And given some comparisons between Jan. 6 and July 13, the report might shed light on systemic issues that impacted both events.

  For example, unanswered questions remain as to why the Secret Service allowed Trump to take the stage at The Ellipse outside the White House around noon on Jan. 6 amid reports of individuals with weapons in the vicinity – a question many Americans have about the July 13 assassination attempt. Law enforcement and spectators noted the presence of a suspicious individual, later identified as the gunman, Thomas Matthew Crooks, at least a half hour before Trump took the stage in Butler, Pennsylvania.

  In addition, no one has explained how the Secret Service failed to notice an alleged pipe bomb found outside the Democrat National Committee DC office on Jan. 6 – while then Vice President-elect Harris was inside the building. Previous reporting by RCI shows multiple law enforcement officers, including one with a bomb-sniffing dog, walking past the bench where the device was found. 

  Rep. Barry Loudermilk, chairman of a House subcommittee tasked with a separate investigation into Jan. 6 as well as the now-defunct J6 committee, recently accused Mayorkas of intentionally holding the release of the report. The Georgia Republican told Mayorkas in a letter that “the failure to provide an in-depth review of the department’s security planning and operational failures related to January 6 not only raises concerns about the department’s botched planning for former president Trump’s rally in Pennsylvania on July 13, 2024, but it is quite possible that such reports could have prevented the security breakdown that resulted in the near assassination of a former president and presidential candidate.”

  Top Democrats have long sought to remove Cuffari – a former investigator for the Air Force and Department of Justice whom Trump appointed in 2019 in 2019 – from office. The coordinated effort began when the IG notified Congress that a trove of Secret Service texts from January 5 and 6, 2021 had been deleted in late January 2021 under the Biden administration. The purge occurred weeks after every federal agency received a directive from Congress to preserve all evidence related to January 6. 

  Cuffari said messages belonging to at least 24 Secret Service officials including then director James Murray and Cheatle, who was an assistant director of the agency on January 6, were gone. So, too, were the texts of then acting Homeland Security Secretary Chad Wolf and acting deputy secretary Ken Cuccinelli, both Trump appointees.

  His office subsequently opened a criminal investigation into the matter.

  “The USSS erased those text messages after OIG [Office of Inspector General] requested records of electronic communications from the USSS, as part of our evaluation of events at the Capitol on January 6,” the inspector general wrote in a July 2022 letter to chairmen of both the Senate and House Homeland Security committees, including Rep. Bennie Thompson, who also chaired the Jan. 6 committee at the same time. 

  Cuffari further flagged the DHS’s lack of cooperation with his inquiry, something he had already pointed out in an earlier report to the committees. “DHS personnel have repeatedly told OIG inspectors that they were not permitted to provide records directly to OIG and that such records had to first undergo review by DHS attorneys,” Cuffari continued in the letter.

  Not true, responded Secret Service spokesman Anthony Guglielmi. He claimed the texts had been deleted when cell phones were reset to factory settings as part of a device replacement program. “The insinuation that the Secret Service maliciously deleted text messages following a request is false.” (Guglielmi’s truthfulness was brought into question recently when he claimed it was “absolutely false” that the Secret Service rejected the Trump campaign’s multiple requests for additional security prior to the Pennsylvania rally. The Washington Post later confirmed that top Secret Service officials “repeatedly denied” requests for more manpower and equipment to protect the former president at large events.)

  And despite initially insisting the texts were not lost, Guglielmi shortly thereafter said the missing Jan. 6-related messages were not recoverable. Cuffari did acquire the cell phones of two dozen Secret Service agents on duty that day, which did not have texts from that day but could have other pertinent information.

  But rather than demand that the DHS use its extensive investigative tools to retrieve the texts, Thompson instead turned his fire on Cuffari. Thompson suggested Cuffari’s alleged delay in notifying the committee about the purged texts represented a cover-up and “cost investigators precious time to capture relevant evidence.” Cuffari had, in fact, notified the Homeland Security committee of both the Senate and House, of which Thompson was chairman, at least twice that DHS officials were not cooperating in his J6 probe.

  “The Department repeatedly suggested that OIG might not have a right of access to the records sought, but during the months-long period in which access was delayed the Department did not cite any legal authority – that would have justified withholding the information,” Cuffari disclosed in a September 2021 report to Congress.

  Despite Cuffari’s warnings related to stonewalling by DHS brass, Thompson accused Cuffari of withholding news of the deleted messages. In a July 2022 letter, just two weeks after Cuffari disclosed the missing texts, Thompson asked him to step aside from the J6 inquiry. Calls for Cuffari’s dismissal have also been driven by the nonprofit “watchdog” group, the Project on Government Oversight. The vice chair of POGO’s board is Debra Katz, a lawyer for Brett Kavanagh’s accuser, Christine Blasey Ford, during his tawdry Supreme Court nomination hearings.   

  Critics say Thompson’s demand for Cuffari’s recusal appeared to contradict his stated mission to find the truth about Jan. 6. For example, former White House aide Cassidy Hutchinson, a star witness for the committee, provided a shocking account about how Trump allegedly assaulted one of the Secret Service agents on his detail that afternoon. Wouldn’t Thompson and the other committee members want records to prove her claims, which are now in dispute by several individuals, including the driver she said Trump tried to attack? Why would Thompson want to get rid of the watchdog attempting to locate messages critical to filling an important missing piece of the Jan. 6 puzzle? 

  In fact, Thompson told Rep. Thomas Massie (R-Ky) in February his committee “could have had a better, more thorough report had we had access to all those records.” Thompson further said that the deletions not only violated the Federal Records Act but may have also amounted to obstruction of justice since he had issued a subpoena, the only one his committee sought from an executive office, seeking the records.

  Talk but No Action

  But neither his committee nor a Democrat-controlled Congress did anything about it. Unlike the committee’s criminal referral to the Department of Justice against Trump for obstructing an official proceeding, Thompson did not pursue criminal charges against any DHS official responsible for erasing the text records.

  But Thompson did continue his attacks on Cuffari aided by his House colleagues and DHS IG employees, who wrote a letter accusing Cuffari of “continued mismanagement.” “IG Cuffari has made it clear that he wishes to remain in his position, even in the face of prolonged, deserved criticism in the media, from Congress, from other oversight entities and from his own staff. A true leader would recognize the effect of his actions on his workforce and understand the right thing to do would be to step aside,” anonymous staffers wrote in a September 2022 letter to Joe Biden asking him to fire Cuffari.

  The Council of the Inspectors General on Integrity and Efficiency, or CIGIE, which oversees federal inspector generals, also went after Cuffari by opening a flood of inquiries into the DHS IG’s office. In response, Cuffari filed a lawsuit seeking relief  from “an unjust, Kafkaesque system produced by an unconstitutionally structured entity and abetted by a complete absence of independent oversight, accountability and lawful due process.”  A federal judge dismissed his effort to stop the investigation, ruling that he had not suffered any harm. 

  CIGIE is mired in its own scandals; in May, several Republican House members sent a letter to a top CIGIE official demanding answers about the “politicization” of the organization. During a House hearing on July 24, committee members accused CIGIE chairman Mark Greenblatt of a lack of transparency and the “subjective” nature of CIGIE’s work.

  House Democrats, including Thompson, continue to seek Cuffari’s resignation more recently for deleting text messages off his government device. Cuffari told Congress he did not consider the texts applicable under the Federal Records Act.

  Intriguingly, as Cuffari begins his probe of the attempt on Trump’s life, his Jan. 6 report may shed light on an alleged threat to Vice President Harris.  

  More than three-and-a-half years later, investigators still have not arrested anyone for planting pipe bombs outside the headquarters of both the Democratic National Committee and the Republican National Committee on the evening of Jan. 5. The FBI’s investigation reportedly remains open but apparently went cold.

  For reasons still unknown, Harris left Capitol Hill around 11:15 a.m. on Jan. 6 following a briefing for the Senate Intelligence Committee. Although an official schedule indicated she planned to go home, she instead arrived at DNC headquarters along with a Secret Service detail at 11:25 a.m.

  Video captured by a security camera outside the building showed a bomb-sniffing dog conducting a vehicle search at 9:44 a.m., roughly two hours before Harris’ arrival. The canine did not detect the explosive device sitting just a few feet away near an outdoor bench.

  Neither did officers from Capitol Police and D.C. Metropolitan Police, who intermittently arrived at the building throughout the morning and into the early afternoon. Harris’ Secret Service detail did not appear to conduct any meaningful search of the premises before or during her visit.

  And when a plainclothes Capitol Police officer discovered the pipe bomb at 1:07 p.m., no officer appeared overly concerned that a device the FBI later said was viable and deadly was within distance of the incoming vice president.

  She was evacuated about 10 minutes later.

  How did the Secret Service miss the device in plain view? Was anyone fired for failing to properly sweep the area and endangering the life of their protectee? Were new protocols put in place to avoid repeating such a frightening scenario in the future?

  Cuffari’s report presumably will finally answer those questions because agency officials have not.

  Not only are the FBI and Secret Service tight-lipped about the incident, but Harris herself has yet to discuss it publicly. 

  Harris has not explained why she, a sitting U.S. senator at the time, left the Capitol 90 minutes before the beginning of the joint session of Congress to certify her groundbreaking election. She appears to have been the only senator not in attendance as the proceedings commenced. Why did she plan to miss such a historic event? How did she feel when she was told of the alleged bomb?

  It would be nearly impossible for the national news media to continue to ignore her ties to the pipe bomb story if Cuffari addressed it in his investigation. 

  “Any delay or obstruction by Mayorkas is unacceptable,” Loudermilk said in an email, “especially now that the DHS IG is investigating the serious USSS security failures at the Trump rally in Butler PA.”

  Tyler Durden
  Tue, 07/30/2024 – 22:05

• FDA Approves New Blood Test For Colon Cancer
  FDA Approves New Blood Test For Colon Cancer

  Authored by Chase Smith via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

  The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has approved a new blood test for colorectal cancer (CRC) screening for adults ages 45 and older who are at average risk for the disease, according to a statement from Guardant Health Inc.

  

  The FDA’s decision follows a strong recommendation for approval from an advisory committee panel in May 2024.

  The approval of Guardant Health’s “Shield” test marks the first time that a blood test has been recognized by the FDA as a primary screening option for CRC, offering a noninvasive alternative to traditional methods such as colonoscopies and stool-based tests, according to the statement.

  Colorectal cancer is the second-leading cause of cancer-related deaths in the United States, with the American Cancer Society estimating more than 150,000 new diagnoses and 53,000 deaths in 2024 alone.

  Early detection is crucial, as the five-year relative survival rate is 91 percent when CRC is identified early, compared with just 14 percent if the cancer has spread to distant parts of the body, according to the company’s statement.

  The screening rate for CRC in the United States stands at about 59 percent, significantly below the National Colorectal Cancer Roundtable’s goal of at least 80 percent. Many people avoid traditional screening methods because of their invasive and unpleasant nature, according to the statement.

  “The persistent gap in colorectal cancer screening rates shows that the existing screening options do not appeal to millions of people,” Dr. Daniel Chung, a gastroenterologist at Massachusetts General Hospital and professor of medicine at Harvard Medical School, said in the statement.

  “The FDA’s approval of the Shield blood test marks a tremendous leap forward, offering a compelling new solution to close this gap. This decision will help make screening tests more broadly accessible and propel blood-based testing and CRC screening into a new era.

  “With increased screening rates and early cancer detection, many more lives can be saved.”

  The Shield blood test has been in development for more than a decade, according to the company.

  A major clinical trial, the ECLIPSE study, demonstrated that the Shield test has an 83 percent sensitivity for detecting CRC and a 90 percent specificity for advanced neoplasia, according to the company. The results are comparable to those of other noninvasive screening methods currently recommended by guidelines, according to the statement.

  “Shield can help improve colorectal cancer screening rates so we can detect more cancers at an early stage, when they are treatable,” Guardant Health Co-CEO AmirAli Talasaz said in the statement.

  The advisory committee panel acknowledged the test’s reliability for detecting stages 2, 3, and 4 CRC and emphasized the benefit of having a blood test that can achieve higher adherence rates among patients who avoid colonoscopies or stool-based tests. However, it stressed that Guardant Health must make sure that consumers are aware that the blood test is not equivalent to a colonoscopy in its ability to detect and remove benign polyps before they can become cancerous.

  The panel highlighted the importance of clear labeling and patient education to mitigate risks associated with the test’s lower sensitivity for detecting pre-cancerous advanced adenomas, according to the minutes from the panel’s meeting.

  The panel noted that patients with pre-cancerous advanced adenomas have a high risk of developing CRC and that Shield’s lower test sensitivity for detecting these adenomas means that there is a risk that patients might receive a negative test result despite having pre-cancerous advanced adenomas, potentially leading to missed opportunities for early intervention.

  The panel said it’s crucial that the test’s limitations were clearly communicated for patients to understand that while the Shield test is an effective tool for CRC screening, it “is not a replacement for diagnostic colonoscopy or for surveillance colonoscopy in high-risk individuals.”

  Guardant Health’s Shield test will be available by prescription and is expected to be covered by Medicare for eligible beneficiaries. Commercial insurance coverage is also anticipated to expand following future guideline inclusions by the American Cancer Society and the U.S. Preventive Services Task Force, according to the statement.

  “The test, which has an accuracy rate for colon cancer detection similar to stool tests used for early detection of cancer, could offer an alternative for patients who may otherwise decline current screening options,” said Dr. William M. Grady, a gastroenterologist at Fred Hutchinson Cancer Center.

  Tyler Durden
  Tue, 07/30/2024 – 21:40

• The Top 3 Proxy Wars To Determine WW3 And Reshape The World Order
  The Top 3 Proxy Wars To Determine WW3 And Reshape The World Order

  Authored by Nick Giambruno via InternationalMan.com,

  Today, I will closely examine the most important proxy wars of World War 3, which I believe will be decisive in determining who wins the overall conflict and gets to shape the new world order.

  Proxy wars are a method by which major powers fight their battles indirectly, using smaller nations or groups as stand-ins rather than confronting each other directly.

  Major powers support, equip, and finance smaller groups or nations in a proxy war to fight against a common adversary. This support can include military training, weapons, funding, and other resources. The critical point is that the major powers do not engage directly in combat.

  There are numerous ongoing proxy wars in World War 3.

  

  However, the ones I believe will prove decisive will be in Taiwan, Ukraine, and the Middle East. The other proxy wars are peripheral in comparison.

  Proxy War #1: Taiwan

  Recently, China performed a two-day military exercise around Taiwan, named Joint Sharp Sword-2024A, as a response to what it calls Taiwan’s separatist acts.

  This drill involved the Chinese air force and navy completely surrounding the island of Taiwan with ships and warplanes. It aimed at testing their combat readiness for a full-scale attack.

  Many believe the drills are practice for an invasion.

  This show of force comes just after Taiwan’s new President, Lai Ching-te, took office. Lai once expressed support for Taiwan’s independence.

  If Taiwan officially declared independence, it would be tantamount to declaring war with China.

  The unofficial status quo maintains an ambiguous stance on Taiwan’s sovereignty; they aren’t declaring independence (yet), nor are they committing to reunifying with China.

  Lai’s presidency is significant in the context of the already strained China-Taiwan relations. A new president with pro-independence sympathies could be the tipping point that causes China to act.

  However, I am skeptical that the US military would directly intervene.

  That’s because China (and Russia) are the only countries with sophisticated enough nuclear arsenals to go toe-to-toe with the US up to the top of the military escalation ladder, a concept that describes how the severity of a military conflict can increase.

  In other words, the US military can’t attack China with impunity because Beijing can match each move up to all-out nuclear war—the very top of the military escalation ladder.

  The operative question is, will the US risk nuclear Armageddon over Taiwan?

  I don’t think it will.

  Considering everything, China seems to have the advantage and will reunify Taiwan in the not-so-distant future.

  I think China—and thus BRICS+—will prevail in this crucial proxy war of World War 3. If that happens, it will likely permanently alter the geopolitical landscape of East Asia.

  Proxy War #2: Ukraine

  Ukraine has been the arena of choice for NATO & Friends to confront Russia for many years.

  To briefly summarize, the US has been spending many billions meddling in Ukraine long before the current conflict broke out in February of 2022.

  It has been estimated that the US spent around $5 billion on “democratization” in Ukraine before 2022. What that means is covert mischief executed through nongovernmental organizations (NGOs), which are simply fronts for the CIA.

  A partial list of the culprits includes USAID, the National Democratic Institute, and the International Republican Institute, as well as nominally nongovernmental organizations like Freedom House, George Soros’ Open Society Foundations, and the National Endowment for Democracy.

  It all culminated in the violent overthrow of Ukraine’s corrupt pro-Russia government in 2014, which a corrupt pro-US government replaced. It sowed the seeds for the current conflict.

  As I write this, in mid-2024, the conflict in Ukraine appears to be reaching a tipping point.

  Ukraine has suffered serious battlefield setbacks as Russia has steadily gained territory. The Russians now have the momentum and initiative.

  US funding is also drying up. American and European voters are increasingly tired of the war as regular people struggle with a sputtering economy and rising inflation.

  In short, there’s not much more that NATO & Friends can do to turn things around for Ukraine.

  They can’t intervene directly; the Russians have been clear they would view that as a declaration of direct and open war, which could lead to nuclear exchanges.

  About all NATO & Friends can do is send more weapons shipments to Kiev.

  However, that is unlikely to deliver victory to Ukraine. At best, it will only prolong the conflict without changing the ultimate outcome.

  Further, it seems Russian patience is wearing thin on this issue.

  In response to NATO & Friends supplying arms to Ukraine, Putin recently announced that Russia will start supplying arms to countries in conflict with the US and other NATO countries.

  Dmitry Medvedev is a former Russian president and prime minister. He is now the deputy chairman of the Security Council and recently said this regarding the new policy:

  “Now, may the United States and its allies experience firsthand the direct use of Russian weapons by third parties.

  These persons or regions have been intentionally left unnamed, but they can include all those who consider Yankeeland & Co. their enemy, regardless of their political outlook and international recognition.

  Their enemy is the US, which means they are friends to us.”

  There is little doubt that the countries and groups to receive Russian arms that Medvedev was referring to would include those in the Middle East, which is the third key proxy war of World War 3. An influx of Russian arms in the Middle East could tip the balance in this crucial region.

  When you consider everything regarding Ukraine, it seems that a negotiated settlement that is mainly favorable to Russia will eventually be reached.

  Absent that, I expect the Russians to continue to make steady gains.

  Either way, I believe the Russians will win through battlefield gains or a favorable negotiated settlement.

  Here’s the bottom line.

  All signs point to an eventual Russian victory in Ukraine and another critical World War 3 proxy war that will end in favor of BRICS+. If that happens, it will likely permanently alter the geopolitical landscape of Europe.

  Proxy War #3: The Middle East

  I think it’s clear the proxy wars in Ukraine and Taiwan are likely to end in favor of BRICS+.

  That’s why I expect NATO & Friends will make their last stand to scuttle the emergence of a multipolar world order and preserve the US-led world order in the Middle East.

  In my next article, I’ll examine the Middle East in-depth and how I think it will play out.

  Here’s the bottom line.

  I think the Middle East will be the decisive battleground that determines who wins WW3 and gets to shape the new world order.

  The stakes could not be higher.

  Countless millions throughout history were wiped out financially—or worse—during the previous world wars because they failed to see the correct Big Picture and take appropriate action.

  Fortunately, WW3 doesn’t have to blindside you, your family, or your portfolio.

  Quite the contrary.

  That’s exactly why I just released an urgent new report with all the details, including what you must do to prepare. Click here to download the PDF now.

  Tyler Durden
  Tue, 07/30/2024 – 21:15

• "Hundreds" Of Cars Stolen And Robbed Each Year From Seattle Airport "Park-N-Fly" Lots
  “Hundreds” Of Cars Stolen And Robbed Each Year From Seattle Airport “Park-N-Fly” Lots

  ‘Hundreds’ of cars are being stolen from Seattle-Tacoma International Airport every year, investigators from KING NBC 5 have found. 

  Car thieves frequently target hotel and motel lots offering “park-n-fly” or “stay-n-fly” packages. Data reviewed by KING NBC 5 shows that some of the most well-known lodging names have the highest crime rates, leaving customers liable.

  According to public records, the airport Marriott tops the list for crimes at hotel and “park-n-fly” lots. Data from the King County Sheriff’s Office shows 94 car thefts and prowls in 2023, including 27 stolen vehicles. In 2022, there were 74 reported incidents, according to KING NBC 5. 

  

  Carol Olson of Snohomish County commented: “Something needs to be done.”

  KING NBC 5 reported that her insurance covered $15,000 in repairs after her truck was stolen and trashed at the Seattle Airport Marriott on South 176th Street in December. She returned from a trip to Disneyland with her grandkids to find her parking spot empty.

  Another woman Piper Logg told hotel security her truck was gone and wasn’t happy with the response: “They all made it sound like this is an everyday, normal thing and that nobody was surprised that it happens all the time. It seems like it’s something that happens all the time and they’re choosing to do nothing.”

  

  Logg said the lot’s cameras weren’t recording, and thieves evaded the pay gates. A SeaTac police officer explained that no charge applies if exiting within 15-20 minutes. Thieves often tailgate behind an accomplice or a paying customer, and one report mentioned a thief ramming the gate to escape.

  “It’s even more disconcerting because Marriott is a well-known company. You actually think it is going to be safer than the smaller hotels,” another woman said. “It just leaves a bad taste in your mouth.”

  Can’t we just go back to the days when things made sense and cars were only being stolen from their owners in designated, marked autonomous zones in the center of the city?

  

  Tyler Durden
  Tue, 07/30/2024 – 20:50

• Trump's VP Pick Is A Climate Skeptic, And The Knives Are Out
  Trump’s VP Pick Is A Climate Skeptic, And The Knives Are Out

  Authored by Tilak Doshi via RealClearEnergy,

  Within a day of ex-President Trump’s announcement of “climate denier” Mr. J. D. Vance as the Republican Vice Presidential nominee, the climate industrial complex and supportive mainstream media had the knives out. A few headlines of the past 24 hours are an indication.

  • The New York Times: “JD Vance Is an Oil Booster and Doubter of Human-Caused Climate Change”

  • The Independent: JD Vance: “Climate activists alarmed by Trump’s ‘dangerous’ pick for vice president”

  • The Guardian: “Climate advocates fear picking JD Vance for VP is ‘a dangerous step backward’”

  The umbrage taken by media commentators is familiar. CNBC laments that “the former venture capitalist though is a known critic of climate change and renewable energy [italics added].” UK’s The Independent newspaper reports that “[c]ampaigners are responding with alarm to the selection of climate denier and Ohio senator JD Vance as Donald Trump’s vice presidential nominee, with activists warning he represents a “dangerous” voice for the US.” Mr. Vance’s “eagerness to please Donald Trump” adds to the image of the vice-presidential nominee as an unprincipled politician seeking office.

  Climate advocacy group Fossil Free Media spokesperson Cassidy DiPaola asserted that “This [VP] choice signals that a potential Trump-Vance administration would likely double down on fossil fuel expansion at a time when we desperately need to transition to clean energy.” Communications director Stevie O’Hanlon of Sunrise Movement, a climate activist organization, said that “Like Donald Trump, JD Vance has proven that he will make it a top priority to roll back climate protections while answering to the demands of oil and gas CEOs.”

  Does Mr. Vance have a principled stand and is his stance on climate and energy policy worthy of consideration?

  

  Climate Denialism

  As the highly polarized debate over climate change over the past few decades has amply demonstrated, the discourse often descends into ad hominem attacks and name calling. “Climate denier” is a charge that is often used by proponents of climate alarm to shut down critical debate and to deplatform climate sceptics. Lena Moffitt, executive director of the environmental advocacy group Evergreen Action, said this of Mr. Vance: “Donald Trump has chosen an avowed climate denier as his running mate who has used his time in Congress to vote against the environment and shill for fossil fuel corporations at every opportunity.”

  The “denier” accusation is among the more pernicious if popular epithets used to denigrate sceptics of the so-called “consensus science.” It invokes a comparison to those who engage in Holocaust denial. To be sure, most observers would consider it ludicrous to suggest that questioning the accuracy and predictive power of scientific models is like questioning the historical fact of the genocide of Jews in Europe.

  What Is Mr. Vance’s Position on Climate?

  Putting aside epithets and journalistic hit-pieces, it seems a fair question to ask just what do politicians skeptical of the climate alarmist narrative believe? And what are their policy positions regarding the Paris Agreement’s “net zero by 2050” target. This policy target is an imperative, at least nominally, for most current governments in North America and Western Europe?

  Mr. Vance – lawyer, businessman, former Marine and writer of the bestselling memoir “Hillbilly Elegy”, arisen from the humblest working class background – places himself firmly in the populist right movement. It now looks very likely that Mr. Trump will be the next US president. The assassination attempt Saturday, his miraculous split-second turn of the head which saved him and the iconic picture of his raised fist with the US flag in the background seconds after being injured make him almost irresistible. Thus Mr. Vance will likely join the Donald Trump next year as his VP in an administration that will seek to rapidly unwind the myriad policy and regulatory constraints that the Biden administration has imposed to shackle the US oil and gas industry at every turn.

  Vance has also criticized the “green energy fantasy” of the Biden administration, pointing out that “solar panels can’t power a modern manufacturing economy” and “that’s why the Chinese are building coal power plants.” He has similarly called out wind power turbines. At the Turning Point Action conference last year, he said “they’re hideously ugly. They kill all the birds. And they’re mostly made in China.” The Biden administration’s all-out support for EVs comes in for the same critique. In a July 2022 radio interview, he said: “The whole EV thing is a scam. If you plug it into your wall, do these people think there are Keebler elves back there making electricity in the wall? It comes, of course, from fossil fuels.”

  Mr. Vance’s climate skepticism goes beyond encouraging US oil and gas dominance in global markets once again – a strong theme of Trump’s first term in office – if the Republicans get elected to office. He has come out fiercely against the ESG (Environmental, Social and Governance) movement. In an interview with Breitbart in 2022, he said “ESG is basically a massive racket to enrich Wall Street and enrich the financial sector of the country, at the expense of the industries that actually employ a lot of Ohio’s workers for middle-class jobs.” The push against ESG occurring through the red states in the U.S. and the increasingly evident lack of success of ESG-focused firms and investment advisors suggests that Mr. Vance has probably got a better finger on the pulse than his critics would care to admit.

  Who’s More Credible?

  As a climate change skeptic, Mr. Vance stands in good company. For instance, the 2022 Nobel Laureate in physics John Clauser exposed in a recent lecture how the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) models and analyses do not meet basic standards of scientific enquiry.  IPCC models have been used as “proof” of scientific consensus by politicians and activists to support claims of a “climate crisis.” Another example would be Richard Lindzen, an American atmospheric physicist and Emeritus Professor of Meteorology at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology who published an assessment of the global warming narrative in 2022. Prof. Lindzen finds climate alarmism “a quasi-religious movement predicated on an absurd ‘scientific’ narrative. The policies invoked on behalf of this movement have led to the US hobbling its energy system.” Whatever one’s views on climate science, it is apparent that Mr. Vance is not a wild-eyed outlier in his skepticism of the claims of climate policy advocates as asserted by his many critics.

  JD Vance’s criticisms of subsidy-supported renewable energy and EV sectors accord with the empirical evidence emerging in the current context of higher inflation, higher interest rates and a deep slump in renewable energy stocks. For instance, an Associated Press report last November described the travails of the Biden administration’s ambitious plans for offshore wind: “The cancellation of two large offshore wind projects in New Jersey is the latest in a series of setbacks for the nascent U.S. offshore wind industry, jeopardizing the Biden administration’s goals of powering 10 million homes from towering ocean-based turbines by 2030 and establishing a carbon-free electric grid five years later.” This news was preceded by earlier reports of developers cancelling three offshore wind power projects in New England. They said their projects were “no longer financially feasible” despite the ample subsidies on offer.

  The news on the EV front, called out as a “scam” by Mr. Vance, is just as dire for green technology enthusiasts. As David Blackmon, a keen observer of the renewable energy space, notes: surveys show that the vast majority of US car buyers will not purchase an EV even at “bargain basement” prices (and despite government subsidies); the overall growth in private EV sales in the US has slowed “to a trickle”, just as is happening in the UK and EU; and the market for used EVs is practically non-existent. “Pure play” EV maker Fisker recently declared bankruptcy while Rivian approaches the same fate. Giant US automakers GM and Ford have turned to gasoline-powered vehicles to sustain their profits as the global EV sales slowdown force them to delay investments and cuts costs in their EV production lines.

  Partisans may criticize the man all they want, but the realities of thermodynamics and economics support JD Vance. He may prove to be the best Vice President in a Republican administration geared to supporting the country’s oil and gas industries and Making America Great Again.

  Tyler Durden
  Tue, 07/30/2024 – 20:25

• "Absolutely Stunning": CRE Analyst Lists Latest Office Tower & Mall Valuation Collapses 
  “Absolutely Stunning”: CRE Analyst Lists Latest Office Tower & Mall Valuation Collapses 

  The commercial real estate downturn is still underway, posing significant risks for investors across financial markets. CRE-linked equities, corporate credit, structured credit, and private markets all feel the impacts of major unwinds as property prices plunge. 

  While headwinds from high interest rates may diminish in the coming quarters, with rate traders pricing in the possibility of the first 25bps cut as early as the mid-September FOMC meeting, the critical question is whether these projected rate cuts will be adequate to cushion the landing. 

  Office tower valuations remain sloped in a downward trend, plummeting in many cases, as vacancy rates soar as remote work trends keep white-collar workers out of the office and at home. These imploding values remain a massive threat to regional banks, with the CRE crisis likely to persist through 2025. 

  X user Triple Net Investor offers a sobering reality of the CRE space. He closely follows the space and noted dozens of recent valuation declines for malls, towers, and multi-family properties. 

  Here are the examples of why the CRE storm is not over:

  One of Maryland’s largest malls, called White Marsh Mall, located in a northeast suburb of Baltimore County, had a stunning valuation plunge… 

  One of the largest malls in Baltimore has plunged a shocking $320M in value since 2013

  A recent appraisal valued the White Marsh Mall at $80M, down from $300M in 2013

  A receiver was appointed to take control of the 1.2M sq ft mall earlier this yr

  This is one of many… pic.twitter.com/ajriEkumPo

  — Triple Net Investor (@TripleNetInvest) July 29, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  “This is a commercial real estate apocalypse,” Triple Net Investor said. 

  Wow, this is absolutely crazy…

  Brookfield owned Gas Company Tower in Downtown LA has plummeted over $400M in value

  The skyscraper was recently valued at $214.5M

  It was appraised at $632M just 3 years ago

  This is a commercial real estate apocalypse

  Source: Commercial… pic.twitter.com/UFZuExcqz7

  — Triple Net Investor (@TripleNetInvest) July 26, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  He said, “This is absolutely insane.” 

  This is absolutely insane…

  A Chinese investor is acquiring a skyscraper in Downtown Los Angeles for $120m…

  Or a stunning ~$170M LESS than the debt owed

  Brookfield recently defaulted on a $319M loan tied to the property – at the time of default ~$290M was outstanding on the… pic.twitter.com/dDxORkTLgi

  — Triple Net Investor (@TripleNetInvest) July 25, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  He pointed out Trump’s “incredibly well-timed deal” to sell the Trump International Hotel in 2022. 

  This is an incredibly well-timed deal pulled off by Donald Trump…

  In 2022 he sold The Trump International Hotel in Washington DC for $375M at the absolute top of the market

  Fast forward and the buyer recently defaulted on a $285M loan tied to the hotel after rebranding it to… pic.twitter.com/f2mIUDn5fR

  — Triple Net Investor (@TripleNetInvest) July 23, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  A multi-family complex in foreclosure in Dallas, Texas. 

  This trend is very concerning…

  518 apartment units faces foreclosure in Dallas, Texas

  – Tides at Whispering Hill: 314 units
  – Tides at Lawler East: 204 units

  The total loan stood at $35M or ~$67K a unit

  First office buildings fell off a cliff…

  Now… pic.twitter.com/f4F8ZvJyod

  — Triple Net Investor (@TripleNetInvest) July 20, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  He said, “Blackstone has filed to foreclose on the 33-story McGraw-Hill skyscraper in the Hell’s Kitchen neighborhood of Manhattan.” 

  This is absolutely nuts…

  Blackstone has filed to foreclose on the 33-story McGraw-Hill skyscraper in the Hell’s Kitchen neighborhood of Manhattan

  The debt was originally financed by Signature Bank

  Things have gone from bad to worse in NYC and it doesn’t look like things are… pic.twitter.com/jZyYFB1f0q

  — Triple Net Investor (@TripleNetInvest) July 19, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  And this. 

  This is absolutely brutal…

  Goldman Sachs and Ballast are set to surrender 82 apartment buildings (~1,200 units) in San Francisco to lender Royal Bank of Canada

  They recently defaulted on loans totaling $687.5M

  The apartments were purchased between 2017 and 2020 for $704M… pic.twitter.com/5o5HTkEqrs

  — Triple Net Investor (@TripleNetInvest) July 18, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  More pain. 

  BREAKING NEWS:

  The owner of San Francisco’s largest apartment community has defauled on ~$1.8B in loans tied to the complex

  The 152 acre, 3,200 unit apartment community known as Parkmerced was just appraised at $1.4B, plummeting $700M from 2019 and $400M less than the total… pic.twitter.com/EzBH2nk1fS

  — Triple Net Investor (@TripleNetInvest) July 16, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  It just gets worse.

  BREAKING NEWS:

  EJM Equities has defaulted on an office complex in a upscale neighborhood in Los Angeles (Playa Vista), owing $271M in unpaid debt

  They defaulted on a $250M loan from Morgan Stanley tied to The Bluffs office complex

  EJM Equities bought The Bluffs from JPMorgan… pic.twitter.com/0YONEQA1au

  — Triple Net Investor (@TripleNetInvest) July 18, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Oops. 

  This is very bad…

  The tallest building in Birmingham Alabama faces foreclosure

  Shipt Tower has been placed in receivership

  Wells Fargo, the previous anchor tenant, relocated in 2019 and overall occupancy has plummeted

  This looks to be just the start of the troubles for… pic.twitter.com/eHAfjttnuj

  — Triple Net Investor (@TripleNetInvest) July 15, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  GnS Economics analysts Mate Suto and Tuomas Malinen recently warned:

  “Basically, almost every bank in the US is holding some type of CRE loan on their balance sheets. Therefore, it is no surprise that this is an area warranting close observation, especially because the risks posed by CRE exposure spread quite unevenly between large and small banks.”

  Fed Powell has a rolling crisis on his hands. And the goal is to save the fireworks for after the election. 

  Tyler Durden
  Tue, 07/30/2024 – 20:00

• Starter Homes Cost At Least $1 Million In 117 California Cities
  Starter Homes Cost At Least $1 Million In 117 California Cities

  Authored by Summer Lane via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

  California is one of the most expensive places to buy a starter home in the country, as 117 cities in the state have so-called starter homes priced at $1 million or more, according to a real estate analysis from Zillow.

  

  New York was second to California, with $1 million starter homes in 31 different cities.

  According to the analysis, such homes are priced among the lowest third of home values in a given region. Nationwide, $1 million starter homes are for sale in 237 cities, up from 84 in 2019.

  Across the United States, the average starter home is $196,611. Over the past five years, those home values have increased by about 54 percent, according to Zillow.

  The company’s data showed that this rapid rise in prices had slightly increased the median age of a first-time home buyer from 34 in 2019 to 35 in 2023.

  The San Francisco metro area had the highest count of $1 million starter homes within its 44 cities, second to the New York City metro—which includes New Jersey and Pennsylvania—with 48 cities.

  In California, the Los Angeles metro follows closely behind San Francisco with 35 cities having such priced starter homes, and 15 in the San Jose area.

  The Southern California city of Irvine—with a population of over 300,000—is the largest city in the nation with $1 million starter homes, according to the analysis.

  According to the National Association of Realtors, first-time homebuyers in America represent 32 percent of the real estate market and their median income is $95,900.

  “Home buyers are battling affordability and availability today. So much so that $1 million is the norm for a starter home in hundreds of cities,” said Zillow senior economist Orphe Divounguy in a July statement.

  But he also said there would be “good news” ahead for first-time buyers.

  “More homes are for sale, price cuts are on the rise, and buyers have a few more days to weigh their options as homes sit on the market,” he said.

  Sophie Li contributed to this report.

  Tyler Durden
  Tue, 07/30/2024 – 19:40

• Texas Crude Oil Pipelines Near Full Capacity, Potential Export Constraints Near 
  Texas Crude Oil Pipelines Near Full Capacity, Potential Export Constraints Near 

  Pipelines transporting crude from America’s top-producing shale basin to major export hubs in Texas are nearing capacity limits. With US crude production hitting record highs, these pipeline constraints could throttle US oil exports at a time when uncertainty looms in the energy and geopolitical spaces.

  Bloomberg cites new data from energy researcher East Daley Analytics, which says major pipelines between the Permian Basin and the Port of Corpus Christi pipeline are currently more than 90% full. That number could easily rise to 94% or 95% by the second half of 2025.

  

  Bloomberg pointed out, “While output is set to keep growing, it will be difficult for that incremental output to reach international buyers without ample pipeline space.” 

  Some of this crude will likely be redirected to the Houston area to ease congestion. Specifically, OneOK’s Longhorn and BridgeTex pipelines could serve as alternative routes for transporting crude to the Gulf Coast. 

  Meanwhile, Enbridge’s Gray Oak pipeline expansion could help alleviate some of the bottlenecks in the Corpus Christi route.  

  “Still, East Daley estimates even the company’s goal of increasing capacity on the line by 120,000 barrels per day won’t bring overall regional utilization below 90%,” Bloomberg said. 

  With the US leading the world in crude oil production…

  

  Export limitations on US energy products will spell disaster for the EU and other major trading partners that heavily rely on the US more than ever.

  Tyler Durden
  Tue, 07/30/2024 – 19:20

• The Fiscal And Monetary Problem Is Not Hopeless
  The Fiscal And Monetary Problem Is Not Hopeless

  Authored by Jeffrey Tucker via The Epoch Times,

  A major factor in public ignorance of economics is the manner in which economic forces transcend politics. These days, if something is going on of some major sort that seems either out of the control of politics or involves both major political parties, it is easily disappeared from public life.

  

  That is the very essence of the inflation problem that has so seriously harmed the American standard of living. In the best estimate, the purchasing power of the dollar has fallen some 20 percent over four years. But depending on what you buy, or decline to buy simply because it is too expensive, the dollar could have lost 30 percent or even 50 percent depending on how one measures these things.

  How and why did this happen? Economists for many hundreds of years have attempted to point to the real source. Nobel Prizes have been given out for sweeping and deeply empirical studies trying to show this. Reduced to its very essence, the problem of inflation traces to the money stock. If it expands more quickly than economic output, the value of all existing units of money will decline.

  This is a law of nature, like gravity. There are complications within the law, of course, such as the precise mechanism by which newly created money lands in people’s bank accounts and is spent. There are other ways the scenario could unfold. Banks could hold the new money and not lend it out (2008 and following) or people could stuff new money in their mattress (1932 and following) thereby reducing money velocity.

  Still, by and large, and over the long term, the price level reflects the money stock. The last four years have provided a near-perfect demonstration of that fact. We can see it by overlaying M2 (the most accurate measure of the stock of money we have) with the price of commodities purchased by producers (which are unchanged in quality and not subjected to crazy adjustment schemes). The result shows the direct relationship: prices respond to the expanded money stock with a time lag.

  

  (Data: Federal Reserve Economic Data (FRED), St. Louis Fed; Chart: Jeffrey A. Tucker)

  To be sure, there are other moving pieces. Deficit spending by Congress is what prompts the Treasury Department to issue the debt that the central bank (Federal Reserve) buys with computer entries (money printing). Without that step, the Fed would likely be called upon to intervene. But when the debt explodes, it cries out for a market of buyers. The Fed is there to pick up the tab. The result is an expansion of the money stock.

  Simple, right? I think so. One might suppose that this would be common knowledge. It is not. This is because we have propagandized for many decades that the central bank is the solution and not the cause of inflation. Yes, it is frustrating. But such is the nature of the world around us. Truth usually takes a back seat to political opportunism and institutional protection.

  Based on what I’m able to discern from existing data, it appears to be that the inflation problem (for now) has largely stopped getting worse at a fast rate. Writing in the summer of 2024, it does appear that annualized inflation is running at a rate consistent with the pre-lockdown past, at or below 2 percent. That does not mean that money is growing more valuable. It means that it is losing value at a rate far more slowly than in the most recent history.

  That said, we all need to disabuse ourselves of the possibility that prices will go back to 2019 levels. The damage is done. The standard of living has been deeply harmed. It is what it is and nothing will change that. To be sure, there are ways to drag the price level back but that would require a dramatic deflation. That would simply never happen, not under present conditions. All we can really do is accept this sad reality and move on with our lives.

  People are only now fully realizing what this inflation, even if it is stopped now, has done to their bank balances. The pain arrives every time you go to the store. If you have to replace some household appliance or a car, there is nothing but shock. Things are simply not adding up. A middle class income is now not enough. It’s a shocking reality and just now fully dawning on people. The media has been trumpeting a mythical recovery that does not exist.

  That’s not to say that there are no answers to improving our future. In some ways, the Trump team is correct to put the focus on one answer: a freed-up energy sector that enables more drilling and refining. There are oceans of wealth under our feet. Its extraction has been seriously throttled by the Biden administration in the name of climate control, if you can believe it. Reversing those policies will indeed drive down the price of oil and gas and make transportation more affordable.

  That will put downward pressure on prices. That would be much welcome. That said, a lower price for oil also reduces profitability and calls forth a reduction in drilling. It’s supply and demand. The only way to overcome this is dramatic deregulation that has some permanence to it, which is to say, a big regime change that becomes the new normal and cannot be reversed in four years by a new administration. That’s not easy.

  The only great challenge is the fiscal problem. The reason the Fed swung into action is entirely traceable to Congress and the wild spending that took place from 2020 and following. The resulting debt has to be dealt with somehow.

  I’m not among those who say that it can never be paid. Even awful fiscal problems are fixable with the right steps. The problem is that the steps absolutely must include dramatic spending cuts, meaning 1 to 2 percent of GDP for starters or about $280–500 billion, which is not even on the table.

  It could happen just like what happened in Argentina. The new president elected only last year slashed the budget and incredibly fixed the fiscal problem almost immediately. If you have high economic growth and a dramatically shrinking federal budget, plus mass deregulation, you inspire investors, lenders, consumers, and everyone. Even seemingly intractable problems can be made to evaporate rather quickly.

  The trouble is that there is very little political will in this country right now to cut the budget. And by cut, again, I don’t mean cuts in the rate of increase, like Washington language always says. I mean real cuts with whole agencies being made to disappear, dozens of them instantly. Doing this is entirely possible with political will. But I’ve yet to see any evidence that such will exists in the United States today.

  Argentina had to reach the point of full collapse before the population was ready to try radical solutions. But those solutions have so far worked. It would be wise and smart to pursue the solution before the emergency hits.

  For now, it seems like the inflation problem is not going to get dramatically worse. The damage is done and you feel it every time you go out shopping. This is our new reality. The money supply is relatively flat to gently rising so we can expect continued low rates of inflation using the existing price structures as the benchmark.

  That said, everyone should be worried about this idea of September rate cuts. Yes, everyone would welcome lower rates on mortgages and credit cards. But with that comes a loosening of money aggregates and a genuine risk of restarting the inflationary fires. The Fed still sits on a massively ballooned balance sheet with a monetary base in the range of $6 trillion. This has some serious inflationary potential.

  Remember what happened in the 1970s. There were fully three waves before the final horror hit in 1979-80. Is this our future? It does not have to be.

  Tyler Durden
  Tue, 07/30/2024 – 19:00

• The Totalitarian Tactic Of The Smear Has No Place In Our National Discourse
  The Totalitarian Tactic Of The Smear Has No Place In Our National Discourse

  Authored by Jeff Minick via The Epoch Times,

  Thomas Jefferson proclaimed “all men are created equal” as a self-evident truth, but was a slaveholder. Ulysses S. Grant led the Northern armies to victory in the Civil War, but was a long-time alcoholic and also far too trusting of others, a fault that damaged his reputation and left him bankrupt at the end of his life. George Patton is recognized as one of our nation’s most brilliant generals, but possessed an explosive temper and a gutter vocabulary to go with it.

  

  All of these figures are flawed heroes, as are all the other great men and women from our past. The reason for this is simple: Heroes spring from the same clay as the rest of us, and to be human is to be flawed.

  Most of us accept small imperfections in others and in ourselves as part and parcel of the human package.

  Marriages and friendships survive, and are often enriched, by turning a blind eye to another’s shortcomings or making it a subject for gentle teasing.

  In the broader arena of public affairs, most of us follow this same route of discernment when supporting certain politicians. They draw us to their cause by their words and deeds, and though we see their weaknesses and defects, we cut them some slack. We deem their deeds greater than their defects. As for those politicians we oppose, our enmity should ideally derive from the programs they have proposed or from their voting records rather than from the half-truths conveyed via the news. Common decency demands we exercise wisdom and prudence in reaching our conclusions.

  Unfortunately, American politics has become a battleground of mudslinging and defamation.

  Both private citizens and those prominent in the public arena, including certain members of the media, tag those they consider their political enemies with derisive nicknames or broad labels, like sexist, fascist, or racist. They slap these often baseless smears onto an enemy hoping they will stick and so silence their opponent and shame their supporters. There’s no middle ground, no nuanced reflections, only the desire to attack and destroy.

  A penchant for vilification has poisoned our politics. Worst, it is corrupting our morals.

  When we call our opponents Nazis or libtards, deplorables or snowflakes, or any of the other often groundless insults making the rounds these days, we objectify those people, stripping them of their humanity. Though we may not realize it, by diminishing them we diminish ourselves.

  Totalitarians use this tactic of the smear all the time to create a scapegoat or to divide a population.

  The Nazis dehumanized Jews by depicting them as vermin. Soviet propaganda labeled middle-class farmers as kulaks, a word meaning “fist,” and depicted them in posters as fat and avaricious enemies of the state. The Chinese communist Cultural Revolution savaged tradition, intellectuals, and the middle class, and led to the death of millions.

  Our country is entering what will certainly become a nastier and even more acrimonious battle of charges and countercharges. Leaders and commentators who practice this totalitarian strategy, who flag entire groups of people by some derogatory name or who defame individuals with lies and absurd labels, deserve neither our respect nor support.

  By no means does this mean that we must yield on our principles or our causes.

  If anything, when this dangerous totalitarian tool of the smear is brought into play, we should stand even more steadfast for our beliefs. We must never surrender to these glib and ugly attacks on our basic principles.

  In the wake of the assassination attempt on former President Donald Trump, some of our leaders have called for lowering the heated rhetoric that has marked our national conversation. We’ll soon see whether they’ll practice what they preach.

  In the meantime, we ourselves, you and I, can refuse to engage in the vicious name-calling and slurs that are tearing apart our country.

  Tyler Durden
  Tue, 07/30/2024 – 18:20

• Thai Customers Angered By BYD Price Cuts Amidst "Chaotic" EV Market Competition
  Thai Customers Angered By BYD Price Cuts Amidst “Chaotic” EV Market Competition

  Price cuts on BYD vehicles in Thailand are “angering” current owners of the vehicles, just days after we noted how Chinese EV manufacturers were disrupting the EV market in the country. 

  BYD slashed prices on its Atto 3 SUV this month, aiming to stay ahead in a crowded market. Discounts of up to 340,000 baht ($9,460) are lowering the resale value for current owners, according to Nikkei Asia. 

  One owner named Darakorn, who bought a BYD in January 2023, said: “I was told the price would go up in two months, after the government subsidy expired. Usually, insurance covers 80% of the new car value, and it depreciates 10% per year, but the discount pushes it even lower.”

  According to Nikkei, with a bank loan and a government subsidy of 100,000 baht, the SUV cost him 1.19 million baht. Now, even the latest Atto models are priced under 1 million baht.

  Darakorn organized BYD owners on Facebook to explore a class-action lawsuit. Complaints have reached the Consumer Protection Board, which is now investigating the discounts offered by BYD and its competitors.

  “If you announced then that the price would drop 340,000 baht a year later, do you think anyone would have bought your cars at all?” he exclaimed.

  

  Recall, days ago we noted that it wasn’t just in Europe and the U.S. where the EV industry is seeing jolting effects of Chinese EVs entering their respective markets.

  The industry in Thailand has accidentally also set off chaos in their home market by offering subsidies to Chinese EV makers, a move that Nikkei Asia reported last week was “wreaking havoc” in Thailand. 

  The unintended consequences of EV subsidies have also affected supply chains, with at least a dozen parts producers shutting down as subsidized Chinese EV makers avoid buying from most of them.

  Since the Thai government introduced the EV subsidy scheme in 2022, 185,029 EVs have been imported. However, new EV registrations stand at 86,043, indicating an oversupply of around 90,000 vehicles.

  EVAT President Krisda Utamote, noting more Chinese EV makers are now investing in Thai production, said: “We are experiencing an EV oversupply as plenty of EVs imported from China over the past two years [remain in dealer] inventories.”

  The EV subsidy program, initiated in 2022 under the ASEAN-China Free Trade Agreement, aimed to make EVs more affordable by offering up to 150,000 baht ($4,130) per vehicle and eliminating tariffs on Chinese imports, provided the manufacturers produce an equivalent number in Thailand. Manufacturing was required to begin this year.

  

  Nikkei Asia reports that BYD, China’s largest EV maker, aggressively cut the price of its Atto model by 37%, while Neta reduced its V-II model price by 9%. When fully operational, Chinese EV makers in Thailand will have the capacity to produce about 750,000 vehicles annually.

  These subsidies have impacted the Thai automotive sector, which employs over 750,000 workers and contributes 11% to the GDP. The automotive sector is the fourth-largest economic contributor, following tourism (18%), retail (16%), and ahead of agriculture (8.6%).

  Sales of fossil fuel vehicles have declined since the subsidies, significantly affecting Japanese automakers who produce 90% of these vehicles in Thailand. Additionally, economic weaknesses have led consumers to cut back on expensive purchases, with vehicle sales in the first five months of the year down 23% from the same period in 2023, the lowest in a decade, according to the article. 

  Recall, we have also extensively covered how the EU is attempting to tariff their way out of oversupply problems and what the Union sees as a price distortions as a result of China’s contributions to the industry. 

  Tyler Durden
  Tue, 07/30/2024 – 18:00

• Minimum-Wage Increase Takes Toll On California's Fast-Food Restaurants, Survey Finds
  Minimum-Wage Increase Takes Toll On California’s Fast-Food Restaurants, Survey Finds

  Authored by Travis Gilmore via The Epoch Times,

  Two-thirds of California fast food restaurant operators who responded to an online survey believe their costs will increase at least $100,000 annually per location, according to a report released July 19 by the Employment Policies Institute—a Washington D.C.-based lobby group.

  

  Approximately 26 percent of respondents said they expect costs to increase by more than $200,000 at each location.

  In June and July, 182 operators were polled on their thoughts about a new minimum wage law requiring quick service restaurants with at least 60 locations nationwide to pay employees a minimum of $20 per hour. The law took effect April 1.

  “Even before the $20 wage went into effect, fast food restaurants made it clear they would not be able to survive,” Rebekah Paxton, research director for the institute, said in a statement emailed to The Epoch Times.

  “Now after just a few months, the policy has been a disaster, killing jobs and shuttering restaurants.”

  The report did not say how many restaurants have closed, but a study published July 10 by restaurant technology firm Snappy found that 897 fast food locations in the state have permanently closed since April 1.

  Ms. Paxton said state officials “should be listening to small business owners and their employees instead of trying to sugarcoat the truth.”

  Pointing to U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics data that shows growing employment in the fast food industry since the new minimum wage law took effect, California Gov. Gavin Newsom’s office rejected the survey results and any claims that the higher wage is jeopardizing the industry.

  Alex Stack, a spokesperson for the governor’s office, called the survey a “bogus online survey conducted by a DC lobbying firm.”

  “Federal government data shows the actual facts here—fast food jobs have increased every month this year, including since California raised the minimum wage for workers,” Mr. Stack told The Epoch Times.

  According to its website, the Employment Policies Institute is a nonprofit think tank that studies the impact of minimum wages and other issues that affect entry-level employment. Its founder, attorney Richard Berman, also owns Berman and Company, a public relations firm based in Arlington, Virginia. Both companies have a history of focusing on leisure, hospitality, and restaurant-related issues.

  The labor statistics data shows five consecutive months of job growth and an increase of nearly 3,000 jobs in the past year, with about 745,600 employed in the sector, in California, in May.

  Mr. Stack said higher wages for employees are proving beneficial for families and the state.

  “Simply put, what’s good for workers is good for California,” he said.

  The institute, however, said the data cited by the governor’s office is inaccurate because it is not seasonally adjusted and highlighted Federal Reserve data that suggests the industry is losing jobs—down about 6,300 since January and approximately 3,000 since the law took effect.

  “Employees are losing their jobs … restaurants are shutting down or moving out of state … [and] customers are eating out less,” Ms. Paxton said. “This isn’t good for workers, … restaurants, or California consumers.”

  When questioned about the impact of the higher costs, 98 percent of operators surveyed said they have already raised menu prices.

  Believing that some consumers are increasingly more price conscious, 92 percent of the restaurant operators surveyed said they expect the higher prices to reduce foot traffic.

  With the goal of reducing costs, 89 percent of survey respondents said they are reducing employee hours. Nearly three-quarters said they are limiting overtime, and 70 percent said they have reduced staff or consolidated positions.

  The number of employees at each location is expected to decrease, according to 75 percent of operators, with 25 percent saying staff levels will “significantly decrease.”

  Some restaurants have closed California locations in the past months, and nearly three-quarters of operators questioned said the likelihood of shutting down their restaurants has increased.

  Regarding future investments, 89 percent of owners said they are not expecting to expand their operations—with 73 percent saying they are “significantly less likely” to develop more locations.

  However, 59 percent said they are now more likely to invest in expansion outside of California.

  Determining the impact of the law, to date, is challenging, given the short time frame since higher wages were implemented.

  But now about three months into the new law, 93 percent of survey respondents said they will be forced to raise menu prices again in the next year, 87 percent will cut hours, and 74 percent will reduce staff.

  Some fast-food chains are charging significantly more for the same meal in California compared to locations in other states. Del Taco’s price for a combo meal with two tacos costs $14.79 in the Golden State, compared with $8.79 in Ohio, according to the company’s website.

  Executives representing some fast food chains anticipated such challenges earlier this year before the law took effect.

  “As we look to 2024 with elevated … prices and muted consumer confidence, we believe that consumers will continue to be more discriminating with their dollars,” Chris Kempczinski, president and CEO of McDonald’s, said in a February earnings call.

  The iconic Big Mac meal is now $13.69 in California, nearly $5 more than in Texas, where the average price is $8.79, according to Grubhub.

  Such price discrepancies are “because of the impact … of what we’re going to have to work through in California… and the significant wage increases,” Ian Borden, executive vice president and chief financial officer at McDonald’s, said in the earnings call. “We certainly know consumers are more wary or weary of pricing, and we’re going to continue to be consumer-led in our pricing decisions as we kind of look forward to 2024 and knowing that the environment will continue to be competitive.”

  The week after the new law became effective, managers at several fast-food restaurants across the state told The Epoch Times that menu prices would increase, and staff hours would be reduced to maintain profitability.

  “We already raised prices, and we’re … reducing hours and the amount of people working,” said Kevin Cortez, general manager of a Wendy’s location in Northern California.

  Some businesses are focusing on improving efficiencies and increasing automation using robots and artificial intelligence to reduce the number of employees needed.

  Others, including some Taco Bell and El Pollo Loco locations in Northern California, have installed kiosks in lobbies to take orders, reducing staff needed, and freeing up employees to work in the kitchen and perform other tasks.

  The 15-question survey was emailed to a list of quick-service operators in California—including some associated with partners of the surveyor–and researchers reported a margin of error of 7 percent.

  Tyler Durden
  Tue, 07/30/2024 – 17:40

• Streaming Wars: Amazon Prime Video Shakes Up Streaming Ad Market, Undercutting Netflix
  Streaming Wars: Amazon Prime Video Shakes Up Streaming Ad Market, Undercutting Netflix

  The introduction of Amazon Prime Video’s ad-supported tier has pressured Netflix’s advertising plans and forced other top players in the streaming space to lower advertising prices amid ongoing ‘streaming wars.’ 

  Financial Times reported that the streaming ad market was upended earlier this year when Amazon announced plans to incorporate ads into movies and TV shows streamed on its Prime Video Service. 

  At the time, Amazon told customers, “This will allow us to continue investing in compelling content and keep increasing that investment over a long period of time, adding, “We aim to have meaningfully fewer ads than linear TV and other streaming TV providers. No action is required from you, and there is no change to the current price of your Prime membership.” 

  Amazon allowed customers to pay an additional $2.99 per month to avoid advertisements. 

  FT noted that Amazon entered a highly competitive market for ad-supported streaming services. Its rivals, including Netflix, Max, Paramount+, and Disney+, have already introduced ad tiers for cash-strapped consumers.   

  FT pointed out that Amazon is currently in the “up front” process, in other words, selling TV advertising time months in advance.

  “Amazon’s Prime Video is undercutting rival Netflix on advertising pricing, as it battles for marketers’ attention in an increasingly crowded field of ad-funded streaming services,” FT said. 

  

  Executives at rival platforms and advertising execs say the spot price for ad space on Amazon is cheaper than Netflix but slightly higher than Disney.

  According to advertising insiders, Amazon’s move into the video ad market has already forced rivals to lower rates.

  One rival executive mentioned Amazon’s “vast supply of inventory” has pressured prices lower. He said, “They knew what they were doing in terms of flipping everybody over into the tier.”

  Amazon converted more than 200 million global subscribers to the ad tier unless they opt out by paying for the premium ad-free service. This means the platform has one of the most massive audiences to attract advertisers. Netflix, on the other hand, has about 40 million on its ad tier.

  “Amazon is, in many ways, building the killer app,” John Terrana, chief media officer at the ad firm VaynerMedia, told The Wall Street Journal last month. It has “premium content, live sports, immense scale,” and advertisers can target ads to their customers and often see if a viewer bought the product on the platform.

  Jonathan Carson, chief executive of industry data provider Antenna, told FT that Amazon’s move earlier this year left it with a “sudden accumulation of an advertising audience, which is pretty powerful.” 

  In June, analysts at JPMorgan told clients that Amazon’s multibillion-dollar advertising business was one of the company’s “fastest-increasing revenue streams and one of its highest-margin businesses.”

  Chief executive Andy Jassy believes Prime Video can be “a large and profitable business on its own.”  

  So, as the streaming wars progress, Amazon’s move to convert its entire Prime Video subscriber base to a new ad-supported version will be enough to increase market share in the ad space, driving down rates, which in return crushes competition. 

  Tyler Durden
  Tue, 07/30/2024 – 17:20

• Hamas Leader Haniyeh Assassinated In Iran By Israeli Strike
  Hamas Leader Haniyeh Assassinated In Iran By Israeli Strike

  Update (2310ET): Iran’s Revolutionary Guards Corps has confirmed the death of Ismail Haniyeh, the top political leader of Hamas, during an inauguration event for Iran’s new president. Haniyeh, who is based in Qatar, and an Iranian security guard were reportedly killed at their place of residence.

  🔴 IRGC: Head of Hamas political bureau Ismail Haniyeh martyred in Tehran.#Hamas #Iran pic.twitter.com/HDQwlh3Xzv

  — Press TV 🔻 (@PressTV) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Israel had vowed to kill Hamas leaders soon after the group’s incursion on Oct. 7.

  The attack follows a strike by Israel on Beirut on Tuesday that targeted senior Hezbollah commander Fuad Shukr. Shukr, reportedly the mastermind behind a recent attack that killed 12 children in the Golan Heights, is believed to have died in the strike. The Lebanese health ministry reported that the strike killed three civilians, including two children, and injured 74 others.

  

  The death of the Hamas leader took place just hours after a significant portion of Israeli airspace was closed for unexplained reasons.

  NOTAMs have been issued in Israel, resulting in the closure of a significant portion of Israeli airspace.

  The NOTAMs were reportedly issued after a situational assessment. pic.twitter.com/FJjk3Xf5aj

  — Global: Military-Info (@Global_Mil_Info) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Israel’s Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu had vowed a stern response to the Golan Heights strike, which Hezbollah denied responsibility for. Lebanon’s current prime minister condemned the airstrike and plans to file a complaint with the U.N. Security Council.In Tehran, during the inauguration of President Masoud Pezeshkian, senior figures from groups within Iran’s “axis of resistance,” including Haniyeh, were present.

  Hamas leader Ismail Haniyeh is killed with one of his bodyguards in Tehran. pic.twitter.com/widFinIbnF

  — ZaidBenjamin زيد بنيامين (@ZaidBenjamin5) July 31, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Shortly after his speech asserting support for Palestinians, news of Haniyeh’s assassination broke. Immediately after the news of Haniyeh’s death broke, multiple reports emerged that Hamas vengeance would be swift. Member of the Hamas Political Bureau, Musa Abu Marzouk said that the assassination of Haniyeh is a cowardly act and will not be in vain.

  The price of oil rose after the report hitting a session high.

  * * *

  Update(1715ET): The Lebanese government has condemned the “blatant act of aggression” following the Israeli airstrikes on southern Beirut. While some reports have claimed US warships are moving closer to Lebanon in the wake of the crisis, the reality is that American warships and military assets were already in the eastern Mediterranean region.

  Lebanon’s National News Agency (NNA) has reported that a female civilian was killed after a building was destroyed in Haret Hreik, in Beirut’s sout. “Sixty-eight civilians were injured, five of whom were critically injured, while the rest suffered moderate to minor injuries. Most of them were treated in emergency departments and were discharged from hospitals,” NNA said. 

  More footage has emerged showing the extent of damage.

  Israel just bombed a residential area near a hospital in Beirut, Lebanon and violated Security Council resolution SCR 1701 with absolutely no consequences. This is a war crime.

  Lebanon has the right to defend itself under international law. pic.twitter.com/JQPJDCXuX9

  — Mohamad Safa (@mhdksafa) July 30, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Currently there are contrasting reports over whether or not Israel took out its target – Fuad Shukr, said to be a commander that oversaw the deadly weekend Hezbollah rocket salvo that left 12 dead in a Golan town.

  Two Israeli officials tell me there are growing indications that Hezbollah top military commander Fuad Shukr has been killed in the airstrike in Beirut https://t.co/2ovjeq20PH

  — Barak Ravid (@BarakRavid) July 30, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  * * *

  Israel’s anticipated big ‘retaliation’ has begun, apparently, after major airstrikes were felt in the Lebanese capital of Beirut. Large smoke clouds were seen above a suburb in southern neighborhoods, sparking momentary panic and a large emergency response amid reported casualties.

  An Israeli military statement quickly owned up to the attack: “The IDF targeted in Beirut the commander responsible for the murder of the children in Majdal Shams and killed many Israeli civilians,” a translated statement said.

  

  The destruction is large in scale, and took place at around 8pm local time in the Haret Hreik neighborhood, still within daylight hours just before nightfall.

  Earlier, a weekend missile attack from Lebanon (widely blamed on Hezbollah) killed 12 young people playing on a soccer field in the occupied Golan town of Majdal Shams.

  Foreign Minister Katz told a state broadcaster over the weekend, “There is no doubt that Hezbollah crossed all red lines.” And soon after that, the country’s war cabinet authorized the military to retaliate.

  Massive Damage to the Building which was Struck just now by an Israeli Airstrike within the Haret Hreik Neighborhood in the Suburbs of Beirut. pic.twitter.com/DOB8dku3HH

  — OSINTdefender (@sentdefender) July 30, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Israeli Defense Minister Yoav Gallant has announced just after the Tuesday Beirut strikes, “Hezbollah crossed the Red Line.”

  Harrowing footage of the strike aftermath points to large-scale casualties given it is a densely-packed civilian area…

  The Israeli regime has bombed the capital of Lebanon leaving Beirut in a state of emergency: if threats mean anything Tel Aviv should brace itself pic.twitter.com/RKC6T0sOfV

  — Sarah Wilkinson (@swilkinsonbc) July 30, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Given already there have long been fears of ‘all-out’ war in Lebanon, oil jumped on news of the attack.

  
  Israel is quickly signaling that this was a ‘limited’ attack and that it doesn’t seek full war in Lebanon. “At the moment, there are no changes in the Home Front Command defensive guidelines,” the IDF said.

  Bloomberg’s live blog has cited Rosalind Mathieson, the outlet’s news director for Europe, the Middle East and Africa, who comments:

  There are signs Israel was aiming for an action that sent a message without triggering a full blown war with Hezbollah in Lebanon. Netanyahu has also been opening the door to fresh talks for a cease-fire with Hamas on Gaza – and that wouldn’t be possible if Israel is engaged in a ground conflict with Hezbollah.

  Several Israeli news outlets reported earlier this week that the government was seeking a “limited but significant” action that sends a strong message to Hezbollah but ensures the situation doesn’t spiral out of control.

  More footage showing the large scale of the aerial bombing…

  BREAKING REPORTS: ISRAEL HAS BOMBED BEIRUT

  Beirut has been Hezbollah’s red line pic.twitter.com/VTSViPCJ3w

  — Afshin Rattansi (@afshinrattansi) July 30, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Many regional analysts believe that a broader war in Lebanon will draw in Iran-backed groups and actors across the region, eventually leading to an open war between Tehran and Tel Aviv. Hezbollah sources are meanwhile denying that Israel killed the senior commander that was targeted on Tuesday.

  TOP HEZBOLLAH COMMANDER TARGETED IN ISRAELI STRIKE ON BEIRUT SUBURBS HAS SURVIVED, TWO SECURITY SOURCES TELL REUTERS

  developing…

  Tyler Durden
  Tue, 07/30/2024 – 17:15

• Meta Agrees To Pay Texas $1.4 Billion Settlement In Biometric Data Lawsuit
  Meta Agrees To Pay Texas $1.4 Billion Settlement In Biometric Data Lawsuit

  Authored by Jana J. Pruet via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

  Meta Platforms has agreed to pay $1.4 billion to settle a lawsuit brought by the state of Texas over its unauthorized capture and use of the personal biometric data of Facebook users, Texas Attorney General Ken Paxton’s office announced Tuesday.

  

  In a 2022 lawsuit, Mr. Paxton accused Facebook’s parent company of using facial recognition technology to collect biometric data of more than 20 million Texans without their permission. The information was captured in photos and videos uploaded to the social media platform, according to the 29-page lawsuit.

  The settlement is the largest obtained in a lawsuit brought by a single state, according to Mr. Paxton’s office.

  “After vigorously pursuing justice for our citizens whose privacy rights were violated by Meta’s use of facial recognition software, I’m proud to announce that we have reached the largest settlement ever obtained from an action brought by a single State,” Mr. Paxton said. “Any abuse of Texans’ sensitive data will be met with the full force of the law.”

  A Meta spokesperson told The Epoch Times that the company was glad to resolve the issue with the state of Texas.

  “We are pleased to resolve this matter and look forward to exploring future opportunities to deepen our business investment in Texas, including potentially developing data centers,” the spokesperson said in an emailed statement.

  The spokesperson noted that the agreement was not an admission of any wrongdoing.

  The Texas lawsuit was the first major case brought and settled under the state’s 2009 Capture or Use of Biometric Identifier Act, making it unlawful to use facial recognition software to capture and store data without lawful consent. The law provides damages of up to $25,000 for each violation.

  According to the court documents, Facebook captured the biometric data through a feature known as “tag suggestions,” which was first rolled out in 2011.

  For nearly a decade, the company claimed the tag suggestions tool was implemented to make tagging photos easier for Facebook users. The feature was discontinued in September 2019.

  “Facebook was disclosing users’ personal information to other entities who further exploited it,” the lawsuit states. “Moreover, Facebook often failed to destroy biometric identifiers within a reasonable time, exposing Texans to ever-increasing risks to their well-being, safety, and security.”

  Meta will pay the state of Texas over five years, with the first installment due within 30 days of the executed date of the agreement.

  Tyler Durden
  Tue, 07/30/2024 – 17:00

Digest powered by RSS Digest

• The UN's Green Agenda Will Spark Famine
  The UN’s Green Agenda Will Spark Famine

  Authored by Thi Thuy Van Dinh via The Brownstone Institute,

  “We The Peoples of the United Nations determined…to promote social progress and better standards of life in larger freedom,”

  – United Nations Charter Preamble (1945)

  This is the second part in a series looking at the plans of the United Nations (UN) and its agencies designing and implementing the agenda of the Summit of the Future in New York on 22-23 September 2024, and its implications for global health, economic development, and human rights. Previously the impact on health policy of the climate agenda was analyzed.

  

  The right to food once drove UN policy towards reducing hunger with a clear focus on low- and middle-income countries. Like the right to health, food has increasingly become a tool of cultural colonialism – the imposition of a narrow ideology of a certain Western mindset over the customs and rights of the ‘peoples’ that the UN represents.

  This article discusses how it happened and the dogmas on which it relies.

  The Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO), the farming equivalent of the World Health Organization (WHO), was founded in 1945 as a specialized United Nations (UN) agency with a mission to “achieve food security for all.” Its motto “Fiat panis” (Let there be bread) reflects that mission. Headquartered in Rome, Italy, it counts 195 Member States, including the European Union. The FAO relies on more than 11,000 staff, with 30% being based in Rome.

  Of its US$3.25 billion biennial 2022-23 budget, 31% comes from assessed contributions paid by Members, with the remainder being voluntary. A large share of voluntary contributions come from Western governments (US, EU, Germany, Norway), development banks (e.g. World Bank Group), and other lesser-known publicly- and privately-funded entities set up for assisting environmental conventions and projects (including the Global Environment Facility, Green Climate Fund and the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation). Thus, like the WHO, most of its work now consists of implementing the dictates of its donors.

  The FAO was instrumental in implementing the 1960s and 1970s Green Revolution, associated with a doubling in world food production that lifted many Asian and Latin American populations out of food insecurity. The use of fertilizers, pesticides, controlled irrigation, and hybridized seeds was considered a major achievement for hunger eradication, despite resulting pollution to soil, air, and water systems and facilitation of the emergence of new resistant strains of pests. The FAO was supported by the Consultative Group on International Agricultural Research (CGIAR) founded in 1971 – a publicly funded group with the mission to conserve and improve seed varieties and their genetic pools. Private philanthropies, including the Rockefeller and Ford Foundations, also played supportive roles.

  Successive World Food Summits held in 1971, 1996, 2002, 2009, and 2021 have punctuated the FAO’s history. At the second summit, world leaders committed themselves to “achieving food security for all and to an ongoing effort to eradicate hunger in all countries” and declared “the right of everyone to adequate food and the fundamental right of everyone to be free from hunger” (Rome Declaration on World Food Security). 

  Promoting the Right to Food 

  The human “right to food” was central to FAO policy. This right has two components: the right to sufficient food for the poorest and most vulnerable, and the right to adequate food for those more fortunate. The first component is to combat hunger and chronic food insecurity, the second provides for balanced and appropriate nutrient intake. 

  The right to food was consecrated as a basic human right under international law by the non-binding 1948 Universal Declaration on Human Rights (UDHR, Article 25) and the binding 1966 International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights (ICESCR, Article 11) with 171 States Parties and 4 Signatories. It is closely related to the right to work and the right to water, also proclaimed in the same texts. Their States Parties are expected to recognize fundamental rights focusing on preserving human dignity, and work toward their progressive achievement for their citizens (Article 21 UDHR, Article 2 ICESCR). 

  Article 25 (UDHR)

  1. Everyone has the right to a standard of living adequate for the health and well-being of himself and of his family, including food, clothing, housing and medical care and necessary social services…

  Article 11 (ICESCR)

  1. The States Parties to the present Covenant recognize the right of everyone to an adequate standard of living for himself and his family, including adequate food, clothing and housing, and to the continuous improvement of living conditions. The States Parties will take appropriate steps to ensure the realization of this right, recognizing to this effect the essential importance of international co-operation based on free consent.

  2. The States Parties to the present Covenant, recognizing the fundamental right of everyone to be free from hunger, shall take, individually and through international co-operation, the measures, including specific programmes, which are needed:

  (a) To improve methods of production, conservation and distribution of food by making full use of technical and scientific knowledge, by disseminating knowledge of the principles of nutrition and by developing or reforming agrarian systems in such a way as to achieve the most efficient development and utilization of natural resources;

  (b) Taking into account the problems of both food-importing and food-exporting countries, to ensure an equitable distribution of world food supplies in relation to need. 

  The FAO assesses the progressive implementation of the right to food through the annual flagship State of Food Security and Nutrition in the World (SOFI) reports, jointly with four other UN entities – the International Fund for Agricultural Development (IFAD), United Nations International Children’s Emergency Fund (UNICEF), World Food Program (WFP), and the WHO. In addition, since 2000, the Office of the High Commissioner for Human Rights (OHCHR) has established a “Special Rapporteur on the Right To Food,” mandated to (i) present an annual report to the Human Rights Council and to the UN General Assembly (UNGA) and (ii) monitor trends related to the right to food in specific countries (Commission on Human Rights Resolution 2000/10 and Resolution A/HCR/RES/6/2).

  Despite an increasing population, remarkable improvement in access to food at the global level continued until 2020. At the 2000 Millennium Development Summit, world leaders had set an ambitious goal to “eradicate extreme poverty and hunger,” among the 8 goals altogether aimed at developing the economy and improving acute health problems affecting low-income countries. 

  Millennium Development Goals (2000) 

  Goal 1: Eradicate extreme poverty and hunger

  Target 1A: Halve, between 1990 and 2015, the proportion of people living on less than $1.25 a day

  Target 1B: Achieve Decent Employment for Women, Men, and Young People

  Target 1C: Halve, between 1990 and 2015, the proportion of people who suffer from hunger

  The UN reported that Target 1A of halving the proportion of people who suffered from extreme hunger, compared to the 1990 statistics, was successfully achieved. Globally, the number of people living in extreme poverty declined by more than half, falling from 1.9 billion in 1990 to 836 million in 2015, with most progress having occurred since 2000.

  On this basis, in 2015, the UN system launched a new set of 18 Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) related to economic growth, social equity and well-being, environmental preservation, and international cooperation, to be achieved by 2030. In particular, Goal 2 on ending hunger in the world (“Zero Hunger”) is coupled with Goal 1 on “ending poverty in all its forms everywhere.”

  These goals appeared highly utopian, not taking into account factors like wars, population growth, and the complexities of human societies and their organizations. However, they reflected the global mindset at the time that the world was progressing toward unprecedented, steady economic growth and agricultural production to improve the living conditions of the poorest.

  Sustainable Development Goals (2015)

  2.1 By 2030, end hunger and ensure access by all people, in particular the poor and people in vulnerable situations, including infants, to safe, nutritious and sufficient food all year round.

  2.2 By 2030, end all forms of malnutrition, including achieving, by 2025, the internationally agreed targets on stunting and wasting in children under 5 years of age, and address the nutritional needs of adolescent girls, pregnant and lactating women and older persons.

  In 2019, FAO reported that 820 million people suffered from hunger (only 16 million less than in 2015) and almost 2 billion experienced moderate or severe food insecurity, and predicted that the SDG2 would not be achievable at current progress. The most affected areas were sub-Saharan Africa, Latin America, and Western Asia.

  Complicit Suppression of the Right to Food through Covid-19 Emergency Measures

  Come March 2020, repeated waves of restrictions and interruption of income (lockdowns) were imposed on “the peoples of the UN” for two years. While UN staff, as part of the laptop class, continued to work from home, hundreds of millions of the poorest and most vulnerable lost their meagre incomes and were pushed to extreme poverty and hunger. The lockdowns were decided by their governments based on poor advice from throughout the UN system. On 26 March, Secretary-General Antonio Guterres set out his 3-step plan: suppressing the virus until a vaccine became available, minimizing social and economic impact, and collaborating to implement the SDGs.

  UNSG’s Remarks at G-20 Virtual Summit on the Covid-19 Pandemic

  We are at war with a virus – and not winning it…

  This war needs a war-time plan to fight it…

  Allow me to highlight three critical areas for concerted G-20 action...

  First, to suppress the transmission of COVID-19 as quickly as possible. 

  That must be our common strategy.  

  It requires a coordinated G-20 response mechanism guided by WHO. 

  All countries must be able to combine systematic testing, tracing, quarantining and treatment with restrictions on movement and contact – aiming to suppress transmission of the virus.  

  And they have to coordinate the exit strategy to keep it suppressed until a vaccine becomes available…

  Second, we must work together to minimize the social and economic impact…

  Third, we must work together now to set the stage for a recovery that builds a more sustainable, inclusive and equitable economy, guided by our shared promise — the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development.

  It was remarkably naive or callous to claim that human, social, and economic impacts caused by the Covid response on hundreds of millions of the poorest and the most vulnerable were minimizable. Naturally, its promoters were not among those who suffered. A decision was made to impoverish populations and drag them down, yet claim publicly that development targets could still be achieved. Lockdowns were contrary to the WHO’s recommendations in 2019 for pandemic influenza (non-pharmaceutical public health measures for mitigating the risk and impact of epidemic and pandemic influenza; 2019).

  Only a few months prior to March 2020, the WHO had stated that in case of a pandemic, measures such as contact tracing, quarantine of exposed individuals, entry and exit screening, and border closures were “not recommended in any circumstances”: 

  However, social distancing measures e.g. contact tracing, isolation, quarantine, school and workplace measures and closures, and avoiding crowding) can be highly disruptive, and the cost of these measures must be weighed against their potential impact…

  Border closures may be considered only by small island nations in severe pandemics and epidemics, but must be weighed against potentially serious economic consequences.

  One can wonder if the UN had ever seriously weighed the social, economic, and human rights costs of the measures pushed by Guterres against expected benefits. Countries were encouraged to institute measures such as workplace and school closures that would entrench future poverty for the next generation.

  As was predictable, the 2020 SOFI report on Food Security and Nutrition estimated at least 10% more hungry people: 

  The COVID-19 pandemic was spreading across the globe, clearly posing a serious threat to food security. Preliminary assessments based on the latest available global economic outlooks suggest that the COVID-19 pandemic may add between 83 and 132 million people to the total number of undernourished in the world…

  These are the individuals, families, and communities with no or little cushion who suddenly lost jobs and incomes, particularly in informal or seasonal economies, because of the panic caused by a virus predominantly threatening elderly people in Western countries. 

  During 2020, the WHO, ILO, and FAO regularly published joint press releases, but they disingenuously attributed the economic devastation to the pandemic, failing to question the response. This narrative was systematically deployed across the UN system, with the rare exception of the ILO, probably the bravest entity of all, which once pointed directly at the lockdown measures as the cause of massive job losses:

  As a result of the economic crisis created by the pandemic, almost 1.6 billion informal economy workers (representing the most vulnerable in the labour market), out of a worldwide total of two billion and a global workforce of 3.3 billion, have suffered massive damage to their capacity to earn a living. This is due to lockdown measures and/or because they work in the hardest-hit sectors.”

  Given the ILO’s estimation, it is reasonable to assume that the number of people pushed into hunger may well be higher than officially estimated. Adding to this is the number of those who also lost access to education, medical care, and improved shelter.

  The strangest thing about this entire episode is the lack of interest of the media, the UN, and major donors. While previous famines had generated wide and specific sympathy and responses, the Covid famine, perhaps because it was essentially directed by Western-based and global institutions and was more diffuse, has been mostly swept under the carpet. This could be a question of financial return on investment. Funding has been massively directed to initiatives to buy, donate, and dump Covid vaccines and supporting institutions driving the “pandemic express.”

  Recommended Approved Food Based on the Climate Agenda

  The FAO and WHO have been collaborating on developing dietary guidelines in order to “improve current dietary practices and prevailing diet-related public health problems.” They once recognized that links between constituents of food, disease, and health were poorly understood, and they agreed to conduct joint research. The cultural element of diets was also highlighted. After all, human societies had been founded on a hunter-gatherer model heavily reliant on wild meat (fat, protein, and vitamins), then introduced dairy and cereals step-by-step according to favorable climates and geography.

  Their partnership led to the joint promotion of “sustainably healthy diets,” which constitutes the consensus of individual approaches of the WHO’s “healthy diet” and the FAO’s “sustainable diets.” As the wording indicates, these guidelines are motivated by sustainability, defined as reducing CO2 emissions resulting from food production. Meat, fat, dairy, and fish are now the declared enemies and should be limited in daily consumption, with protein intake predominantly from plants and nuts, thereby promoting a quite unnatural diet compared to that for which our bodies evolved.

  The WHO claims that its healthy diet “helps to protect against malnutrition in all its forms, as well as noncommunicable diseases (NCDs) including diabetes, heart disease, stroke and cancer.” However, it is then somewhat incongruously promoting carbohydrates over meat-based protein. 

  The following diet was recommended to both adults and young children by the FAO-WHO 2019 “Sustainable Healthy Diets: Guiding Principles” report:

  • Fruit, vegetables, legumes (e.g. lentils and beans), nuts and whole grains (e.g. unprocessed maize, millet, oats, wheat and brown rice);

  • At least 400 g (i.e. five portions) of fruit and vegetables per day, excluding potatoes, sweet potatoes, cassava and other starchy roots.

  • Less than 10% of total energy intake from free sugars.

  • Less than 30% of total energy intake from fats. Unsaturated fats (found in fish, avocado and nuts, and in sunflower, soybean, canola and olive oils) are preferable to saturated fats (found in fatty meat, butter, palm and coconut oil, cream, cheese, ghee and lard) and trans-fats of all kinds, including both industrially-produced trans-fats (found in baked and fried foods, and pre-packaged snacks and foods, such as frozen pizza, pies, cookies, biscuits, wafers, and cooking oils and spreads) and ruminant trans-fats (found in meat and dairy foods from ruminant animals, such as cows, sheep, goats and camels). 

  • Less than 5g of salt (equivalent to about one teaspoon) per day. Salt should be iodized.

  Little evidence on the health impact of the guidelines was presented to back up the report’s allegations of: i) red meats being linked with increased cancer; ii) animal source foods (dairy, eggs, and meat) accounting for 35% of the burden of food-borne disease due to all foods, and iii) the health benefits of the Mediterranean Diet and the New Nordic Diet promoted by the report – both plant-based, with little to moderate amounts of animal-sourced foods. Although these diets are new, the FAO and WHO assert that “adherence to both diets has been associated with lower environmental pressures and impacts in comparison to other healthy diets containing meat.” 

  The sister organizations define sustainable healthy diets as “patterns that promote all dimensions of individuals’ health and wellbeing; have low environmental pressure and impact; are accessible, affordable, safe and equitable; and are culturally acceptable.” The paradoxes of this definition are paramount. 

  Firstly, imposing a diet is forcing cultural acceptance and, when reflecting the ideology of an external group, can reasonably be considered cultural colonialism. Diet is the product of culture based on centuries or even millennia of experience and food availability, production, processing, and preservation. The right to adequate food not only implies the sufficient quantity of food for the individuals and their families but also their quality and appropriateness. Examples are not scarce. The French still enjoy their foie gras despite the importation restriction, ban, and an international campaign against it. They also eat horse meat, which shocks their British neighbors.

  Dog meat, also a victim of negative campaigns, is appreciated across several Asian countries. Invoking moral judgment in these cases may be seen as a neo-colonial behavior, and battery farms of chickens and pigs do not fare better than force-fed geese or alleged cruel treatment to animals considered humans’ best friends in multiple contemporary societies. Western people, rich from fossil fuel use, demand that poorer people change their traditional diets in response is a similar but even more abusive theme. If the cultural aspect of diets is undeniable, then the right to self-determination of peoples, including cultural development, should be respected. 

  Article 1.1 (ICESR) 

  All peoples have the right of self-determination. By virtue of that right they freely determine their political status and freely pursue their economic, social and cultural development.

  Secondly, at the time of their adoption in 1948 and 1966, the treaties’ provisions recognizing the right to food did not link food to its “environmental pressure and impact.” Article 11.2 of the binding ICESR (quoted above) refers to States’ obligation to implement agrarian reforms and technologies for the best use of natural resources (i.e. land, water, fertilizers) for optimal food production. Farming certainly uses land and water and causes some pollution and deforestation. Managing its impacts is complicated and requires local context, and national governments and local communities are better placed to make such decisions with scientifically founded advice and neutral (unpoliticized) support from external agencies, such should be expected from the UN. 

  The managerial job has become increasingly complicated with the UN’s emerging climate agenda. After the first UN Conference on Environment in 1972 in Stockholm, the green agenda slowly grew through and eclipsed the Green Revolution. The first World Climate Conference was held in 1979, leading to the 1992 adoption of the UN Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) (together with the non-binding Declaration on Environment). This Convention stated, without openness for further discussion, that human activities producing greenhouse gases were, unlike similar prior periods, the main cause of climate warming:

  UNFCCC, Preamble

  The Parties to this Convention…

  Concerned that human activities have been substantially increasing the atmospheric concentrations of greenhouse gases, that these increases enhance the natural greenhouse effect, and that this will result on average in an additional warming of the Earth’s surface and atmosphere and may adversely affect natural ecosystems and humankind…

  With the UN’s goal to keep greenhouse gas emissions as low as pre-industrial levels, governments are now bound by obligations to maintain or reduce national emissions. Applied to agriculture in the context of constant population growth, it will inevitably lead to a reduction of food diversity, production, and accessibility, particularly affecting traditional food cultures emphasizing natural meats and dairy. 

  When the Climate Agenda Is More Important Than the Right to Food of “We The Peoples”

  In the draft document of the Pact For the Future (revision 2) to be adopted by world leaders in September in New York, the UN still proclaims its intention to eradicate extreme poverty; however, this goal is conditioned to “mitigating global CO2 emissions in order to keep temperature rise below 1.5 degrees Celsius” (para. 9). The drafters seem not to understand that reducing the use of fossil fuels will undoubtedly reduce food production and prevent billions of people from improving their economic well-being.

  As a result, the planned Actions 3 and 9 in the document appear to strongly push countries toward “sustainable agrifood systems,” and people toward adopting sustainable healthy diets as a component of “sustainable consumption and production patterns.” 

  Pact for The Future (revision 2)

  Action 3. We will end hunger and eliminate food insecurity.

  (c) Promote equitable, resilient and sustainable agrifood systems so that everyone has access to safe, affordable and nutritious food.

  Action 9. We will enhance our ambition to address climate change.

  (c) Promote sustainable consumption and production patterns, including sustainable lifestyles, and circular economy approaches as a pathway to achieving sustainable consumption and production patterns, and zero waste initiatives.

  In the last decades, the right to food was sacrificed twice by the UN itself, first by the green agenda and second by lockdown measures supported by the UN for a virus predominantly affecting the wealthy countries where the climate agenda is based (and, ironically, where people consume the highest rates of energy). It now mostly means the right to certain types of approved foods, in the name of centralized and unquestionable determinations regarding people’s health and the earth’s climate. Veganism and vegetarianism are promoted while wealthy individuals and financial institutions close to the UN buy up farmland. An intent to make meat and dairyless affordable whilst investing in vegan meat and drink may be seen as a conspiracy theory (technically, it is). However such policies would make sense for climate agenda promoters. 

  In this quest, the FAO and WHO omit to highlight the high nutrition of animal fat, meat, and dairy. They also ignore and disrespect the fundamental rights and choices of individuals and communities. They appear on a mission to force people onto pre-approved foods of the UN’s choosing. The history of centralized control and interference in the food supply, as Soviet and Chinese experience taught us, is a very poor one. Fiat fames (let there be hunger) for “We the peoples?”

  Tyler Durden
  Tue, 07/30/2024 – 02:00

• The Mandarinate: The 3rd-Party That Isn't On The US Election Ticket
  The Mandarinate: The 3rd-Party That Isn’t On The US Election Ticket

  Authored by Amir Taheri via The Gatestone Institute,

  Barring another surprise “event,” the coming US presidential showdown is likely to be a duel between former President Donald Trump and Vice-President Kamala Harris.

  

  That duel, if it goes through, will include a number of new features.

  Harris is only the second woman to reach the last round in a US presidential contest. She is also the first “black” woman of Indian and Jamaican background to reach the penultimate rung of the ladder.

  There are novelties on Trump’s side as well.

  He is the second former president after Theodore Roosevelt to seek a return to the White House, in the face of opposition from his party’s traditional elite. But unlike Roosevelt who left the Republican Party to found his foredoomed Progressive Party, Trump did not leave and united it under his flag.

  One of the paradoxes of this election is that Republicans enter the final round unexpectedly united while Democrats, including some on the left, are still yes-butting Harris as their standard-bearer.

  American presidential elections have often been more about personality than policy.

  Of the 46 presidents the US has had, 31 had a military background up to the highest grades. Only Bill Clinton made his refusal to enlist for service during the Vietnam War a badge of honor.

  Barack Obama, who also had no service record, claimed military credit on behalf of his maternal grandfather who had served in the army. Grandpa’s picture is on the cover of Obama’s book, Dreams from My Father.

  This time round, neither of the finalists has a military record, even through grandpas, to boast about.

  What about other ingredients in an American presidential narrative?

  The standard fable presents the aspirant as hailing from a modest, occasionally poor, family living in a log cabin but moving up the social ladder thanks to hard work and personal merit. Bill Clinton made much of the claim that he had been an orphan raised by a selfless and dedicated mother, a theme that helped secure votes from single mothers.

  Such themes don’t work this time.

  Trump may have not lived in the penthouse of Trump Tower from the start, but certainly didn’t grow up in a log cabin either. Harris’s highly-educated parents managed to secure an upper-middle class status thanks to hard work and the luck to live in California, where positive discrimination is almost a creed.

  Thus, one might have assumed that the contest this time would shift attention from personalities to policy differences.

  The opposite has happened.

  The two camps have chosen personal attacks of the kind and at a level seldom seen before. The list of charges made against Trump is too long for this column. He is castigated as guilty of every sin imaginable, including the original one.

  As for Harris, she is caricatured as a Jezebel with a law degree and blamed for all the real or imagined failures of the Obama-Biden’s 12-year joint tenure in the White House.

  Since neither party allowed an open convention, key policy issues were not debated even at the party level.

  What are those issues?

  The first is that the US has been engaged in a cultural civil war for over a decade.

  The traditional vision of the US as a melting pot of cultural, religious and ethnic identities is challenged by what Samuel Huntington’s disciples present as a salad bar in which double-barrel identity is the rule. The clash of civilizations is happening inside the US.

  In it, everyone claims to be, and often genuinely feels to be, a victim.

  “We’ll take our country back” implies that someone has stolen it.

  The slogan “protect our social rights” means someone is trying to deprive Americans of public subsidies, positive discrimination and perks that almost half of the population receive.

  “Black Lives Matter” implies a system of values based on skin color.

  Another key issue is that of the nation’s ethno-demographic persona, which has been reduced to tittle-tattle about how many illegal immigrants to round up and expel rather than how to use managed immigration as a source of strength, as it has been in the US since its inception.

  One of the dangers that democracies face is that of the machinery of government morphing into a political party with its own culture, traditions, methods and, needless to say, interests — above all that of self-perpetuation. Thus, the US has a third, invisible party, besides the Republicans and Democrats.

  The Federal Government employs almost three million people. Of those, between 5,000 and 7,000 change when the White House changes occupants.

  Tenured, at times life-long, jobs help perpetuate a Mandarinate that sees its task as keeping the ship of state on a course it has set.

  That Mandarinate is especially well-entrenched in the State Department, the Pentagon, the Treasury and, more importantly, the judiciary.

  It also has well-established, at times incestuous, relations with lobbyists, single-issue activist groups, universities with their tenured academics, and think tanks with rotating doors to government departments and the media.

  The Mandarinate maintains close ties with those unmovable, effectively tenured members of the Senate and House of Representatives.

  Conspiracy theorists refer to this Mandarinate as “the deep state”.

  However, what we are dealing with isn’t the product of a conspiracy by a cabal in a black chamber. It is the organic product of a system in which democracy is reduced to elections, and elections reduced to a beauty contest, just as a set of rituals is often marketed as a religion.

  Winning an election is an art; governing is quite a different one.

  Another key issue is the redistribution of power at the federal and state levels. In several states, especially in the South, confederal anxieties abide. This is often unjustly seen as “redneck” prejudice or even rank racism. But the fact is that the closer the decision-making process is to those affected, the stronger a democracy is.

  Trump has tried to express that view in his bull-in-the-china-shop style, while advocating the opposite by calling for an increase in presidential power.

  Elitist Democrats on the other hand preach the old federalist gospel of states close to water — especially the two oceans and the Great Lakes.

  This is why Democrats portray the recent decision by the Supreme Court on allowing some states to set their own rules on abortion as an attack on democracy rather than a move towards decentralization that could be extended to other issues.

  Rebalancing power between Washington and the states has been an issue since the end of the Civil War.

  The states of the defeated Confederacy suffered 12 years of military occupation by the Union army, not to mention plundering by “carpetbaggers,” at the end of which they signed a treaty that, while ruling out fissiparous dreams, promised a rebalancing process that never happened.

  While the two candidates fire abuse at one another, the voter isn’t told what they actually mean to do about cracks in the structures of world order, the war in Ukraine, China as a threat or a rival, the exponential rise of anti-Semitic activities and the deepening of incivility in public life.

  On November 5 the Mandarinate or the third party won’t be on any ticket.

  Tyler Durden
  Mon, 07/29/2024 – 23:45

• Defense Secretary Orders Review Of 20 Medals Of Honor Awarded For Wounded Knee
  Defense Secretary Orders Review Of 20 Medals Of Honor Awarded For Wounded Knee

  Authored by Ryan Morgan via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

  Secretary of Defense Lloyd Austin has ordered a review of the Medals of Honor awarded to 20 U.S. Army soldiers for their role in a deadly armed clash at Wounded Knee Creek, South Dakota, on Dec. 29, 1890.

  

  The memorandum Mr. Austin wrote on July 19, which the Department of Defense published last week, directs the Office of the Undersecretary of Defense for Personnel and Readiness to form a special panel to review the Medal of Honor citations and other supporting documentation for the awards. The panel will then decide whether each soldier’s conduct warranted a Medal of Honor, the highest U.S. military decoration for valor.

  Often referred to as the “Battle of Wounded Knee” or the “Wounded Knee Massacre,” the clash came about when members of the U.S. Army’s 7th Cavalry and other units attempted to disarm a group of Lakota tribe members. Accounts differ as to how exactly the shooting began, but the disarmament effort devolved into an exchange of fire in which an estimated 250 Native Americans, including women and children, were killed and about 100 more were wounded.

  Mr. Austin’s memo listed the 20 Medal of Honor recipients from the Wounded Knee battle.

  Of the 20 Medal of Honor recipients, 16 were members of the 7th U.S. Cavalry: Sgt. William Austin, Pvt. Mosheim Feaster, 1st Lt. Earnest Garlington, 1st Lt. John Gresham, Pvt. Matthew Hamilton, Pvt. Marvin Hillock, Pvt. George Hobday, Sgt. Bernhard Jetter, Sgt. George Loyd, Sgt. Albert McMillan, Pvt. Thomas Sullivan, 1st Sgt. Frederick Toy, 1st Sgt. Jacob Trautman, Capt. Charles Varnum, Sgt. James Ward, and Pvt. Hermann Ziegner.

  Three members of the 1st U.S. Artillery also received Medals of Honor: Army Musician John Clancy, Pvt. Joshua Hartzog, and Cpl. Paul Welnert.

  And 2nd Lt. Harry Hawthorne, of the 2nd U.S. Artillery, received a Medal of Honor.

  Native Americans, political leaders, and other activists have, for years, called for the awards to be rescinded. Sen. Elizabeth Warren (D-Mass.) and other Democratic lawmakers repeatedly proposed legislation between 2019 and 2021, and Congress included a provision in the fiscal year 2022 National Defense Authorization Act recommending that the Defense Department review the awards.

  Two of the Medal of Honor awards credit soldiers with rescuing their wounded comrades during the exchange of fire at Wounded Knee Creek. Two citations credit recipients for continuing to fight and demonstrating bravery after being wounded in the engagement. Another citation credits an officer with leading a charge to capture high ground and cover another troop of soldiers who were withdrawing from the engagement. Still another citation appears to credit a soldier with reenlisting after he “killed a hostile Indian at close quarters” during the engagement.

  Four of the Medal of Honor awards focus on soldiers who fought to dislodge groups of Native Americans positioned in one or more ravines near the creek. Another citation credits an artillery soldier with continuing to advance his cannon crew during the engagement after his commanding officer was wounded.

  There are 11 less descriptive citations, simply crediting soldiers with “bravery,” “gallantry,” “gallant conduct,” and “distinguished conduct” during the Wounded Knee engagement, with few additional details.

  The standards for awarding the Medal of Honor have evolved over time. The defense secretary’s memo states that the review will consider whether any of the awards were given in violation of the Medal of Honor standards in place at the time they were awarded. The review will also examine witness accounts and historical documents, looking for a range of disqualifying actions, including “intentionally directing an attack against a non-combatant or an individual who has surrendered in good faith, murder or rape of a prisoner, or engaging in any other act demonstrating immorality.”

  “It’s never too late to do what’s right,” a senior defense official said in a statement from the Department of Defense. “And that’s what is intended by the review that the secretary directed, which is to ensure that we go back and review each of these medals in a rigorous and individualized manner to understand the actions of the individual in the context of the overall engagement.”

  The Associated Press contributed to this article.

  Tyler Durden
  Mon, 07/29/2024 – 22:55

• These Are America's Most-Visited National Parks
  These Are America’s Most-Visited National Parks

  Visitor numbers have been steadily increasing across national parks in the U.S., as more people are opting to trade city skylines for mountain peaks and lush forests.

  In 2023, U.S national parks welcomed 93.4 million visitors and saw a 4% year-over-year increase from 2022.

  According to National Park Service data, national parks made up 28% of all visits out of all nationally-regulated park types, which includes national monuments, memorials, historic sites, and more.

  This map, via Visual Capitalist’s Kayla Zhu, visualizes the top 10 busiest national parks in the United States by number of visits in 2023. Visits includes recreational visits, and excludes non-recreational visits and camping.

  

  The data comes from the National Park Service and is updated as of February 2024.

  Western U.S. Home To Busiest National Parks

  Great Smoky Mountains, which straddles the border between North Carolina and Tennessee, saw almost three times the amount of visits compared to second-place Grand Canyon. It is consistently the most visited national park in the country.

  

  This sprawling park is easily accessible for many Americans, located just a day’s drive away for more than half of the U.S. population.

  In terms of location, Great Smoky Mountains and Acadia are outliers among the top 10. The Western United States is home to a majority of the busiest parks, like Grand Canyon in Arizona, Zion in Utah, Yellowstone in Wyoming, Montana, and Idaho, and Yosemite in California.

  The western half of the country is known for its extensive protected areas, natural landmarks, and outdoor recreation opportunities. California is home to the highest number of national parks, at nine, while other western states like Utah (five parks) and Colorado (four parks) rank among the top five.

  Acadia, the only park located in the Northeastern U.S., is significantly smaller compared to other top national parks, spanning about 49,000 acres, compared to the next smallest park, Zion, which has an area of 147,242 acres.

  Tyler Durden
  Mon, 07/29/2024 – 22:30

• Evening Protests Explode In Venezuela As Opposition Crowds Descend On Caracas, Head To Presidential Palace
  Evening Protests Explode In Venezuela As Opposition Crowds Descend On Caracas, Head To Presidential Palace

  Summary: While things were somewhat calm through much of the daylight hours on the streets of Caracas, tensions are now at boiling point and full-blown confrontations with police as thousands of opposition supporters have been literally walking, some from rural areas, to the Presidential Palace. BBC and CNN are confirming that Maduro’s security services have fired tear gas and rubber bullets against outraged demonstrators who believe Sunday’s election was stolen. Some US members of Congress have added their voice, urging the White House not to recognize the results of a Maduro victory.

  “Thousands of people descended on central Caracas on Monday evening, some walking for miles from slums on the mountains surrounding the city, towards the presidential palace,” writes BBC. A handful of other cities have also witnessed unrest Monday, confirms CNN: “Protests were also reported in other cities, including Maracay, where opposition activist Esthefania Natera told CNN that people were on the streets “to yell and demand to tell the truth because we know the real results.” The coastal state of Falcón saw demonstrators topple a statue of leftist icon and Maduro mentor Hugo Chavez, according to activists posting video on social media.

  Wow. Incredible scenes from Venezuela tonight of people toppling Hugo Chavez statue in Calabozo, Guarico. Protests spreading across towns & cities against Maduro after accusations of fraud elections: https://t.co/L2FFTv5axi

  — Joyce Karam (@Joyce_Karam) July 30, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Like with prior instances of brief unrest in the last couple years, in some areas police and military personnel appear to have retreated or even abandoned their armored vehicles.

  JUST IN: Images emerging from Venezuela seem to point to an imminent civil war..

  Citizens have been captured on Video taking over military vehicles..

  DEVELOPING..pic.twitter.com/cxTNQ08vGy https://t.co/5nXznCaX2c

  — Chuck Callesto (@ChuckCallesto) July 29, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Some US hawks are openly calling for regime change, and have urged the protesters to go all the way to the Presidential Palace to confront socialist strongman Maduro…

  HAPPENING NOW 🚨 Venezuela is in total chaos with THOUSANDS of protestors getting shot at

  Venezuela has FALLEN, say a prayer for them 🙏 pic.twitter.com/CTYss4wSr1

  — Marjorie Taylor Greene Press Release (Parody) (@MTGrepp) July 30, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  There actually appears to be more than one Chavez statue that has been toppled in different locations at this point, a huge and fierce message by protesters aimed at the regime.

  🚨#Venezuela: The statue of Hugo Chávez in Falcón state is being toppled amid growing protests against electoral fraud by Maduro’s tyrannical regime.

  🇻🇪✊️When people stand united, they become an unstoppable force for progress!#FreeVenezuela #OpVenezuela #VenezuelaLibre pic.twitter.com/VboVktr6l7

  — Anonymous TV 🇺🇦 (@YourAnonTV) July 29, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  * * *

  earlier: By most accounts, things are surprisingly quiet on the streets of Caracas, despite the opposition candidate Edmundo González and his backers, specifically the prominent and outspoken Maria Corina Machado, loudly contesting the result. There have been some reports of protesters blocking highways and burning tires, including to the capital’s international airport, however. It’s not just that the opposition says that the election was stolen, but that González actually won by a land-slide: “Venezuela opposition leader Maria Corina Machado said early on Monday that opposition candidate Edmundo Gonzalez won 70% of the vote in a presidential contest over the weekend,” writes Reuters. This came just after the government controlled national electoral council announced a 51% victory for President Nicolas Maduro. This flew in the face of several exit polls. According to more from Bloomberg: “After a lengthy delay following the closing of polls, Venezuela’s electoral center said Maduro won 51.2% of the vote, compared with 44.2% for rival Edmundo González. But opposition leader María Corina Machado, who was barred from running, said her coalition had gained access to 40% of the tabulated votes and had González winning 70% of the vote so far.”

  The international reaction has rolled in since the early morning hours. Predictably, the United States has raised “serious concerns” over the voting process, but overall the Biden White House has issued a fairly tame message. “It is critical that every vote be counted fairly and transparently, that election officials immediately share information with the opposition and independent observes without delay and that the electoral authorities publish the detailed tabulations of votes,” Secretary Blinken said. As for Mexico, it also issued a calm statement, with President Andres Manuel Lopez Obrador saying: “If the electoral authority confirms the current trend, we will recognize the government-elect.”

  But this is contrasted in the reaction of firebrand conservative Argentina President Javier Milei: “Argentina will not recognize another fraud, and hopes that this time the Armed Forces will defend democracy and popular will,” he had said just ahead of the announced election results. Peru too said it will not recognize the results, and even recalled its ambassador from Venezuela for consultations. “I condemn in all extremity the sum of irregularities with the intention of fraud committed by the Venezuelan government. Peru will not accept the violation of the popular will of the Venezuelan people,” Foreign Minister Javier Gonzales-Olaechea posted on X.

  

  Russia and China of course stand out as strong backers of Maduro, with President Putin congratulating him on his win: “Russian-Venezuelan relations have the character of a strategic partnership. I am confident that your activities at the head of state will continue to contribute to their progressive development in all directions.” Putin even said, “Remember that you are always a welcome guest on Russian soil.”

  And China and Cuba: China hailed Maduro’s “successful re-election” said the country should be praised for “smoothly holding its presidential election,” according to Chinese Foreign Ministry spokesman Lin Jian. “China stands ready to enrich our all-weather strategic partnership and better benefit the peoples of both countries,” the statement said. “China and Venezuela are good friends and partners who support each other.” Cuba’s President Miguel Diaz-Canel expressed support for his “brother” Nicolas Maduro… “your victory, which is that of the Bolivarian and Chavista people, has cleanly and unequivocally defeated the pro-imperialist opposition,” he wrote on X. “They also defeated the regional, interventionist and Monroist right. The people spoke and the Revolution won.” All of these countries, including Russia, are military allies with Caracas as well.

  Meanwhile, the last 24 hours of voting in Venezuela has sparked a fierce online debate about who is ultimately to blame for the country’s longtime severe economic woes, which has lately seen waves of mass migration. Socialism or sanctions?… or perhaps decades of both/and… 

  Don’t turn off your critical thinking skills just because you have been told Venezuela is “socialist” your whole life. The Venezuelan opposition have claimed fraud and contested virtually every election that they have lost since Chávez came to power. Yet they can never provide…

  — Anya Parampil (@anyaparampil) July 29, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Some in Congress are already calling for immediate action from the US administration, and urge that Maduro’s third term should not be recognized.

  Some are also calling for some kind of political intervention (or worse) with a declaration only recognizing the opposition (Juan Guaido-style).

  Times like these remind us why socialism can be voted in, but removing it is nearly impossible. I urge the Biden administration and America’s regional partners to act swiftly and not recognize Venezuela’s illegitimate election. pic.twitter.com/J6agRX0E4Z

  — Carolina Amesty (@carolina_amesty) July 29, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  * * *

  Update(02:00ET): The Venezuelan government has announced official election results shortly after midnight: Venezuelan President Nicolas Maduro has won a third term with 51% of the vote, announced the country’s electoral authority, with 80% of ballot boxes counted. But there are widespread reports that several key exit polls pointed to a huge opposition upset victory by Edmundo González.

  The opposition is claiming victory and that the election has been stolen amid reports that Maduro’s security forces have deployed significant numbers of armored vehicles and heavily armed-police to the streets of Caracas ahead of likely unrest.

  The opposition is further calling on the military to turn against Maduro and back the ‘rightful’ victory of Gonzalez.

  Venezuela’s political opposition vehemently rejected the electoral authority’s ruling that Nicolás Maduro was reelected as the nation’s president, calling on the military to intervene https://t.co/mDQI7sWEEb

  — Bloomberg (@business) July 29, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  The Associated Press has detailed in an overnight update:

  Venezuela’s opposition claimed Edmundo González defeated President Nicolás Maduro in Sunday’s presidential election, setting up a showdown with the government, which earlier declared Maduro the winner.

  “The Venezuelans and the entire world know what happened,” González said in his first remarks. Opposition leader María Corina Machado made the announcement standing alongside González, whose margin of victory she said was “overwhelming.” Earlier the opposition said it had obtained voting tallies from about 30% of ballot boxes nationwide, with more expected overnight.

  The National Electoral Council, which is controlled by Maduro loyalists, has yet to provide the tallies from 30,000 polling booths nationwide.

  

  Regardless of what actually happen or what will happen in terms of the possibility of violence, it’s clear that the leftist and socialist Venezuelan government just suffered its most significant electoral test and shock in decades.

  Some regional and external governments have signaled they will not recognize Maduro’s ‘win’…

  BREAKING: Venezuelan National Electoral Council says President Nicolas Maduro has won the election despite exit polls suggesting the opposite.

  The council claimed Maduro won with 51.20% of the vote.

  Argentina president Javier Milei announced that Argentina would not be… pic.twitter.com/ItctgVzvz9

  — Collin Rugg (@CollinRugg) July 29, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  The populace could be gearing up for a fight, but if violence doesn’t spiral within the next 24-48 hours, the situation is likely to remain stable. All eyes will also be on Washington Monday, waiting to see how forcefully the US administration condemns the outcome.

  Meanwhile, an interesting recent admission and revelation…

  Ahead of Venezuela’s election, John Bolton admitted to the Washington Post that he knew that the Trump admin’s crippling sanctions and coup attempt against Venezuela would destroy its economy and force millions to flee:

  “There was no doubt the sanctions, along with the general… pic.twitter.com/woW7cVYlf3

  — Aaron Maté (@aaronjmate) July 29, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  * * *

  President Nicolas Maduro alarmed and riled his enemies as well as Washington and its allies by declaring just ahead of Sunday’s elections: “If you don’t want Venezuela to fall into a bloodbath, into a fratricidal civil war, due to the fascists, let’s ensure the greatest success and greatest victory in the electoral history of our people.”

  Many pundits are taking this as a warning that he’ll refuse to give up power in the unlikely event he loses his bid for six more years in office, which would be his third term. While there are eight names total on the ballot as Venezuelans wait in long lines to vote Sunday, 74-year old opposition candidate and former diplomat Edmundo González Urrutia is considered the only real contender who has a chance of defeating Maduro.

  González is basically the surrogate candidate for María Corina Machado, who has organized the opposition and has become wildly popular, even recently gaining name recognition abroad and in US media.

  

  Maduro and his United Socialist Party of Venezuela (PSUV) have ruled over the central American country since 2013, after he took over following the death of his mentor, far-left icon Hugo Chavez.

  Millions of desperate citizens have already left their country in search of work and opportunities abroad amid a crushed economy and rampant accusations of corruption against Maduro government officials. Millions more may leave if his power is extended for another term.

  Polls have seen massive queues since they opened at 6am, but already there are reports of barriers in pro-opposition areas and stories of black-clad, masked men blocking voting stations, as The New York Times has alleged. “The destiny of Venezuela depends on our victory,” Maduro has proclaimed at campaign rallies, while decrying efforts of a hidden imperialist foreign hand to thwart his aims, as well as longtime US-led sanctions.

  Both the United States and Brazil have issued messages of “we’re watching closely”:

  Asked in a press briefing whether Maduro was likely to rig Sunday’s vote, John Kirby, White House national security spokesperson, said it was difficult to know how the situation would play out but that the U.S. wanted “to make it clear to Mr. Maduro that we’re watching, we’re watching closely.”

  Brazil’s President Luiz Inácio Lula da Silva has also urged Maduro to respect the results, telling international news agencies that he was “scared” by the Venezuelan’s recent remarks, Reuters reported.

  Brazil’s president added that Maduro “needs to learn that when you win, you stay; when you lose, you leave.”

  Very, very long queues to vote in Venezuela’s election today. Here’s a timelapse #VenezuelaVOTA #venezuela pic.twitter.com/l3jMQ4hZJH

  — Catherine Ellis (@Cat_lucy1) July 28, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Some analysts expect some degree of unrest and violence to break out no matter who emerges victorious, with either side set to contest.

  “On the basis of their own exit polls, the opposition will probably declare victory and push for regime change, ushering in a period of heightened political tension and uncertainty ahead of the inauguration,” Andre Masuko, a research analyst with the Economist Intelligence Unit, stated to CNBC.

  President Nicolas Maduro ahead of Sunday’s elections: “If you don’t want Venezuela to fall into a bloodbath, into a fratricidal civil war, due to the fascists, let’s ensure the greatest success & greatest victory in the electoral history of our people.” pic.twitter.com/rao45c0NIC

  — Vera Bergengruen (@VeraMBergen) July 24, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  “However, we do not expect the Maduro regime to be overthrown. His strict control over the country’s institutions, including the security forces, the judiciary and the electoral national council (CNE), will be instrumental in helping him to stay in power,” he underscored.

  One big unpredictable scenario of huge consequence is whether the US would throw its support behind any opposition allegations claims of widespread election abuse and fraud.

  Meanwhile, the usual Neocon suspects in Congress are alleging a ‘stolen’ national election before the ballots are even in…

  If the election in #Venezuela today is legitimate Maduro will lose by 40 points

  But the election commission that counts the votes is controlled by the Maduro regime and they will do everything they can to try and steal it pic.twitter.com/EhxzGZjb1j

  — Marco Rubio (@marcorubio) July 28, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Washington weighing in too forcefully would set the stage for another anti-opposition crackdown by Maduro government security services.

  Tyler Durden
  Mon, 07/29/2024 – 22:30

• San Diego Postpones Discussion On 1,000-Bed Shelter Proposal To September
  San Diego Postpones Discussion On 1,000-Bed Shelter Proposal To September

  Authored by Sophie Li via The Epoch Times,

  Discussion on San Diego’s plan to lease and convert a commercial building into a long-term 1,000-bed homeless shelter and resource center is now postponed until September, the mayor announced July 25.

  

  The San Diego City Council voted 7–2 on July 22 to revisit the topic later, and Mayor Todd Gloria said Thursday that the decision to further delay the discussion was made to allow additional time for project review.

  Concerns that have been raised by the council include property rent, operational cost, and insufficient analysis of the leasing terms.

  According to Mr. Gloria, during the delay, city officials will work with the city attorney’s office regarding such feedback and will also convene a working group to develop a design and preliminary operations plan.

  “As Mayor, I am resolute in further expanding shelter because the status quo on our streets is unacceptable,” Mr. Gloria said in a statement.

  Under a 30-year lease agreement, the city plans to renovate a commercial building in the city’s Middletown area, near the airport, into a homeless shelter campus. The facility will include a commercial kitchen, laundry facilities, dining areas, recreation spaces, and showers.

  In addition to providing shelter, the project will offer job training, meals, housing navigation, and behavioral health support.

  The 65,000-square-foot property, located at Kettner Boulevard and Vine Street, covers 1.8 acres and includes a two-story building with 134 parking spaces.

  The city council’s vote on July 22 instructed city attorneys and staff to prepare an analysis of the lease before its July 30 meeting.

  While some councilors remain open to further discussions on the project, councilors Vivian Moreno and Kent Lee both voted against doing so, citing concerns that the terms presented in the lease are financially irresponsible.

  “The real estate transaction that is at hand is not one that truly does protect the taxpayers,” Mr. Lee said during the meeting.

  “The only responsible thing to do to protect our taxpayers, in not simply just to prolong this discussion, it would be to actually reject these lease terms.”

  Councilors who voted to continue deliberations also expressed concerns about what they said was an insufficient analysis of the lease terms and the project’s costs.

  Last week, the city’s Office of Independent Budget Analyst raised questions about the project’s affordability.

  Over the city’s lease term, the cost is expected to be $72 million.

  Instead, the budget analyst proposed that the city could save $15.7 million by purchasing the property and then renovating it.

  However, according to the mayor, the property is currently not available for sale.

  The analysts’ report highlighted concerns about “significant upfront and ongoing costs,” including rent, lease operations, tenant improvements, and program expenses.

  The mayor’s office estimates that facility maintenance costs will reach $12.5 million over the lease term, with an additional $26.4 million needed annually for operational expenses.

  

  San Diego Mayor Todd Gloria speaks at the press conference at H Barracks on June 6, 2024. (Jane Yang/The Epoch Times)

  The report also detailed a monthly cost of $32,000, covering property taxes, maintenance, utilities, and insurance.

  Analysts also said that these costs exceed the budget currently allocatedfor homeless programs for the 2025 fiscal year.

  Currently, under the lease agreement, the city is responsible for upgrading the structure to meet the shelter’s needs. However, the councilors argued that such upgrades should not be the city’s responsibility as a tenant.

  “I do not believe that we should be using taxpayer money to fix [the property owner’s] roof,” Councilwoman Marni von Wilpert said.

  Some councilors indicated they might support the project if the terms were revised.

  The mayor asked the council for more specific bargaining points the following day.

  “My administration is happy to continue refining the current proposal, but council members must provide specific negotiating points, which I am immediately requesting from them,” Mr. Gloria said in a statement on July 23.

  No specific date has been set for further discussions. The council is in recess in August.

  Tyler Durden
  Mon, 07/29/2024 – 22:05

• Rhinos (& Pangolins) Are The World's Most-Trafficked Animals
  Rhinos (& Pangolins) Are The World’s Most-Trafficked Animals

  Wildlife trafficking is the world’s fourth largest illegal trade when including fisheries and plantlife, after narcotics, human trafficking and counterfeit products, according to the U.S. Homeland Security. 

  According to Germany’s Federal Ministry of Justice and Consumer Protection, wildlife crimes are frequently associated with other types of crimes, such as money-laundering, corruption as well as tax and customs fraud, but these are only rarely pursued when dealing with wildlife offenses.

  The overlapping of wildlife crime with other serious organized crimes makes it a “convergent crime”.

  While shark-finning has gained prominence in the news recently, as Statista’s Anna Fleck shows in the following chart, the animals most affected by illegal wildlife trade in 2015-2021 were rhinos, pangolins and elephants, together accounting for nearly three quarters (73 percent) of all of all seizure records.

  

  You will find more infographics at Statista

  Interpol warns that as the illegal wildlife trafficking sector continues to grow, it is contributing to pushing species towards extinction. This too is highlighted in the World Wildlife Crime Report 2024, which reveals how 73 percent of the trafficked mammals seized between 2015 and 2021 were considered under threat, while the same was true for 62 percent of the seized amphibians and 59 percent of reptiles.

  Tyler Durden
  Mon, 07/29/2024 – 21:40

• Mississippi Law Allowing Ballots To Be Received After Election Day Lawful: Judge
  Mississippi Law Allowing Ballots To Be Received After Election Day Lawful: Judge

  Authored by Zachary Stieber via The Epoch Times,

  A Mississippi law that allows ballots received up to five days after an election to be counted is lawful, a federal judge ruled on July 28.

  

  U.S. District Judge Louis Guirola Jr. pointed, in part, to the Uniformed and Overseas Citizens Absentee Voting Act (UOCAVA), which governs ballots from citizens residing overseas.

  “So if one federal statute implicitly allows post-election receipt of overseas ballots mailed by election day, that statute is presumed not to offend against the election-day statutes, from which one may infer that the similar Mississippi statute on post-election receipt is likewise inoffensive,” the judge wrote in a 24-page ruling.

  The ruling dismissed cases brought against Mississippi officials by the Republican National Committee, the Mississippi Republican Party, and the Libertarian Party of Mississippi.

  The Mississippi law requires officials to count absentee ballots postmarked on or before Election Day, provided that the ballots are received no more than five business days after the election.

  The U.S. Constitution’s elections and electors clause gives Congress the power to set Election Day for determining electors for president and vice president, as well as the date for voters choosing members of Congress. Congress later established a single day for the selection of electors and voting for members of Congress.

  The Mississippi law “contravenes those federal laws” because it “effectively extends Mississippi’s federal election past the Election Day established by Congress,” Republicans said in their complaint.

  They argued that the law was forcing them to spend money to educate voters on the post-Election Day receipt deadline and urged the court to declare the law illegal and block its enforcement.

  Mississippi officials said the law does not directly conflict with federal statutes because those statutes do not address whether ballots must be received on or by Election Day.

  Although Republicans and the Libertarian Party did establish standing, Judge Guirola found that they did not show that the law is illegal or unconstitutional.

  He cited previous rulings from courts, including a 2023 district court ruling that upheld an Illinois law that lets ballots postmarked on or before Election Day be counted if received up to 14 days after Election Day.

  In that ruling, the judge referenced the UOCAVA and noted that the attorney general of the United States “often seeks court-ordered extensions of ballot receipt deadlines to ensure that military voters are not disenfranchised.”

  “These longstanding efforts by Congress and the executive branch to ensure that ballots cast by Americans living overseas are counted, so long as they are cast by Election Day, strongly suggest that statutes like the one at issue here are compatible with the Elections Clause,” Judge Guirola said.

  “In the absence of federal law regulating absentee mail-in ballot procedures, states retain the authority and the constitutional charge to establish their lawful time, place, and manner boundaries.”

  Since the Mississippi law is legal, there are no violations of plaintiffs’ constitutional rights, the judge said.

  Tyler Durden
  Mon, 07/29/2024 – 21:15

• The War On Raw Milk
  The War On Raw Milk

  Does anyone else find it strange that Covid experts, such as epidemiologist Dr. Eric Feigl-Ding, are back in the media, now sounding the alarm about bird flu as the next pandemic? They’re even scaremongering about raw milk, claiming it will contribute to the spread. Sound familiar? Must stop the spread (early Covid).

  In April, we informed readers that corporate media was ramping up a propaganda campaign to spook Americans about the bird flu. We cited Covid experts who warned the bird flu pandemic could be ‘100 times worse than Covid.’ And even noted this: “Gain-of-Function May Explain Bird Flu Jump To Cows And Humans.”

  “This bird flu has arrived in US very fast and furious…definitely don’t drink raw milk… it’s 50% mortality among those who we detect it. If this truly jumps into humans and spreads human to human we’re in deep trouble,” Feigl-Ding recently said. 

  Dr. Eric Feigl Ding: “This bird flu has arrived in US very fast and furious…definitely don’t drink raw milk…it’s 50% mortality among those who we detect it. If this truly jumps into humans and spreads human to human we’re in deep trouble.” pic.twitter.com/HITAzaN5jY

  — Camus (@newstart_2024) July 28, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Rep. Thomas Massie (R-KY) called out Feigl-Ding for fearmongering:

  “Feigl-Ding you’re flat out lying and fear mongering in this video. You just made up the 50% fatality number and didn’t explain it. You dont even know if pasteurization kills the bird flu virus. People are not contracting fatal bird flu from consuming raw milk.”

  .@DrEricDing you’re flat out lying and fear mongering in this video. You just made up the 50% fatality number and didn’t explain it. You dont even know if pasteurization kills the bird flu virus. People are not contracting fatal bird flu from consuming raw milk. https://t.co/b7CzdOI9aF

  — Thomas Massie (@RepThomasMassie) July 28, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  In late 2022, Feigl-Ding bashed Twitter for abandoning its ‘Covid misinformation’ policy. The same non-sense policy that deplatformed users for even suggesting Covid came from a lab.

  Welp—this tweet didn’t age well for COVID misinfo I guess https://t.co/eM8r29hHbN

  — Eric Feigl-Ding (@DrEricDing) November 29, 2022

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  So, given his lack of credibility, Feigl-Ding’s attack on raw milk is highly suspicious. This comes as bird flu spreads, and the government has ramped up oversight on farms, especially mom-and-pop ones.

  The result of this bird flu scare and government action so far to increase ‘surveillance’ across farms, along with Feigl-Ding’s attempts to dissuade people from drinking raw milk, has been disastrous for at least one small-time farmer, Sarah Armstrong, who runs Nourish.

  Armstrong was featured in a recent video uploaded on X that shows how her world was turned upside down when the bird flu spread gained momentum in April. She said the Michigan Department of Agriculture and Rural Development hit her farm with a cease and desist order.

  Listen to Armstrong’s story about government overreach and the attack on small farms: 

  Nourish Co-op was mandated by the Michigan Department of Agriculture and Rural Development to destroy all of their raw dairy products after receiving a cease and desist order from the state. Listen to Ashley Armstrong explain why she believes this is another example of government… pic.twitter.com/EhyayF2fwJ

  — Nicole Shanahan (@NicoleShanahan) July 25, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Here are several predictions about the great reset already underway in the food supply chain. 

  This is why they attack raw milk

  This is why they say cows hurt the environment

  This is why they say seafood is dangerous

  The aim has never been your health

  It’s to demonize these natural foods we’ve relied on for THOUSANDS of years only to force a “better” solution they… pic.twitter.com/UB26llR0QI

  — 𝗥𝗢𝗖𝗞𝗬 (@TheWarKitchen) July 20, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  It’s time for the people to take back local supply chains and support local farmers. Enough with mega-corporations controlling the food supply.

  Tyler Durden
  Mon, 07/29/2024 – 20:50

• The Media Betrays The American Experiment
  The Media Betrays The American Experiment

  Authored by Carson Holloway via AmericanMind.org,

  The stunning events of the last several weeks have highlighted the great weaknesses in the corporate media, an essential part of modern America’s political system. They have, as they constantly remind us, a vital role to play. But they betrayed that role by their open partisanship.

  

  For one brief shining moment, it seemed as if the media would live up to the promise of Adolph Ochs, the founder of the modern New York Times: “to give the news impartially, without fear or favor, regardless of party, sect, or interests involved.” In the month after President Biden’s disastrous debate performance, the media raised and vigorously pressed the questions about his fitness for office that had to be addressed for the good of the country.

  Yet this spasm of critical curiosity about the fitness of our Democratic president turned out to be just an interlude. Everybody can remember that right before the debate the media (including the New York Times, which later called for Biden to leave the race) were saying that Biden was fine and questions about his decline were based on out-of-context video clips, labeled “cheap fakes” by the White House press office. But now that Biden has left the race, the media have reverted to their usual lack of interest in anything that sheds negative light on the national Democratic Party.

  There is certainly no lack of material. In the wake of Biden’s withdrawal from campaigning, it would be no exaggeration to call this an administration mired in scandal. Besides the voter dissatisfaction over the failures of the last three and a half years, three new developments loom like shadows over the Biden-Harris White House.

  Consider the mysterious way in which Biden was forced out of the race. Up to the day he dropped out he and his top aides were insisting that he was all in. Then he suddenly stepped aside without offering any reason, seemingly pushed aside, perhaps by powerful and shadowy figures with no public accountability.

  There is also the scandal of the officials close to Biden—including the Democrats’ new presumptive nominee, Vice President Harris—evidently knowing about his decline and covering it up, or even directly misleading the public about it. Related to this is the Democrats’ rationally indefensible combination of choices: to drop Biden from the ticket amid widespread reports of his failing memory and flagging concentration, but to leave him in the office of the presidency for the next six months despite these signs of mental infirmity.

  Finally, there is the scandalous failure of the Secret Service to provide adequate protection to a former president and the leading presidential candidate in the present election. Had it been successful, the assassination of Donald Trump would have been one of the worst attacks on American democracy in decades. It would have effectively disenfranchised the tens of millions of Americans who hope to vote for Trump. And the government’s as yet unexplained security lapses almost permitted this to happen.

  Each of these scandals reflects very badly on the nation’s present governing party. Each is also a once in a century story. Yet the media seem very uninterested in getting to the bottom of any of them. They would rather fawn over Kamala Harris.

  Taken together, the events of the last several weeks suggest that Biden’s rough coverage in July was not even really an interlude for the media. It was instead more of their standard operating procedure. Their scrutiny of Biden was not a return to professional standards of reporting. It was rather another case of the media making themselves part of a political operation to protect the Democratic Party—in this case by helping to push aside a president that they had concluded was an electoral liability.

  No serious person who has lived through these events can credibly deny the partisanship of the corporate media. This partisanship undermines our democracy. Democracy means self-government. It means that the people get to choose the direction of the country by electing their leaders. The media could play a vital role in this wonderful process (denied to most people throughout history) through impartial and thorough reporting on public issues.

  Thus they would provide the voters with the information they need to choose freely and intelligently. Instead, the media do all they can to prop up the political party with which they sympathize—all the while professing an objectivity that they manifestly do not possess. To this extent their work is an ongoing fraud on the American public.

  This partisanship also hurts the country itself in other ways.

  By shielding the Democrats from criticism, the media permits them to govern incompetently and recklessly with near impunity. The result: foolish policies (inflationary spending, unregulated immigration, and unnecessary foreign wars) that hurt America and Americans.

  Donald Trump, with his characteristic simplicity and harshness, once said that “the fake news is the enemy of the people.”

  No doubt the media resent this judgment, but they are doing everything they can to demonstrate its accuracy.

  Tyler Durden
  Mon, 07/29/2024 – 20:25

• These Are The Fastest Growing Housing Markets In The US
  These Are The Fastest Growing Housing Markets In The US

  This graphic, via Visual Capitalist’s Marcus Lu, shows the top 10 fastest-growing housing markets in the U.S., based on the growth of their housing stock between 2013 and 2022.

  Housing stock refers to the total number of homes (houses and apartments) within an area.

  

  All figures were sourced from a StorageCafe analysis of U.S. Census data.

  Data and Highlights

  The following table lists the data featured in this graphic.

  

   

  Vineyard, Utah takes the top spot with remarkable 7,000% growth in both housing stock and population. A big driver of this growth is the city’s close proximity to Utah’s “Silicon Slopes” region, a growing hub for tech businesses.

  Prominent companies in the region include Adobe, which opened a futuristic 280,000 square feet campus in 2013. Microsoft, Oracle, Google, and Facebook (Meta) also have offices in Utah.

  Meanwhile, Horizon West, Florida has the largest population among this ranking. The area is considered a “master-planned community”, which is a large-scale neighborhood that was planned from the outset to include homes, recreational facilities, schools, and more. The goal is to create a self-sustaining community where residents do not need to leave the area frequently.

  Given Horizon West’s 2022 population of 58,595 people, we can determine that its population 10 years ago was 15,219 (+285% growth).

  If you enjoyed this post, be sure to check out this animated map graphic showing global urbanization from 1950 to 2020.

  Tyler Durden
  Mon, 07/29/2024 – 20:00

• 5,800 IRS Employees And Contractors Owe Nearly $50 Million In Unpaid Taxes: Treasury IG
  5,800 IRS Employees And Contractors Owe Nearly $50 Million In Unpaid Taxes: Treasury IG

  Authored by Mark Tapscott via The Epoch Times,

  At least 5,800 IRS employees and contractors owe almost $50 million in overdue taxes and more than half of them haven’t been required to agree to a payment plan, according to the Department of the Treasury’s Inspector-General for Tax Administration (TIGTA).

  

  In a report made available to The Epoch Times, TIGTA  said auditors found 3,414, or 4 percent, of the 85,359 employees at the IRS have unpaid taxes. Of those with payment plans, $9 million remains unpaid, while $12 million is owed by employees without a payment plan.

  Among IRS contractors, which include many former tax agency employees, 2,573 of 25,732 (10 percent) contractors have unpaid taxes. Of those without a payment plan, $17 million is owed and those with a payment plan have $8 million outstanding.

  The TIGTA also reported that 512 former IRS employees were rehired, either as employees or contractors, despite having “tax compliance issues or conduct and performance problems, including criminal misconduct, sexual misconduct, inability to perform duties, fighting and assault, and unauthorized access to tax return information, have been rehired by the agency and its contractors,” according to Sen. Joni Ernst (R-Iowa), who requested the watchdog’s report.

  Law Requires Tax Cheats Be Fired

  Federal law requires that federal workers found to have unpaid taxes must be removed unless the IRS Commissioner specifically allows them to remain on the government payroll. The present IRS chief, Danny Werfel, has exercised that discretion to retain more than 1,000 such workers since 2021.

  “Between October 1, 2021, and April 1, 2023, the IRS closed 1,175 cases with disciplinary actions, for 1,068 current employees, with confirmed tax noncompliance issues. During that same time period, 70 employees were identified with substantiated willful … violations and 20 were removed as a result,” the TIGTA report explained.

  “Although the law requires an employee who has either willfully not filed or willfully understated their taxes due to be removed, subject only to the IRS Commissioner’s mitigation, this disciplinary action is not always enforced.”

  Ms. Ernst also pointed out in a July 29 letter to Mr. Werfel that a 2023 TIGTA report “found 149,000 federal employees owe an astounding $1.5 billion in unpaid taxes. Tens of thousands are repeat tax cheats, failing to file tax returns year after year, and the number is steadily increasing.”

  The number of federal workers across the government with unpaid taxes rose 32 percent between 2015 and 2021 to 149,000. Congress approved and President Bill Clinton signed into law in 1993 the Federal Employee/Retiree Delinquency Initiative (FERDI) in response to persistent tax delinquencies among government workers.

  The Treasury watchdog also expressed concern in the 2024 report that having thousands of IRS employees and contractors with unpaid taxes represents a privacy security threat to all taxpayers.

  “Given the ever-increasing threat of identity theft and the substantial amount of sensitive information that the IRS holds, hiring employees of high integrity is essential to safeguarding taxpayer information,” the report said.

  “We believe that IRS and contractor employees who are not tax compliant could negatively affect public trust in tax administration and the perception that the IRS is being honest in its dealings with all taxpayers,” the report continued.

  The TIGTA report comes as the federal tax agency is doubling its workforce thanks to an appropriation of more $80 billion. President Joe Biden, who sought the IRS workforce increase, said the additional workers will boost tax compliance, especially by taxpayers earning more than $400,000 annually.

  But Ms Ernst said the new hires are instead targeting middle-income taxpayers, while the tax agency is doing too little to hold its own employees with unpaid taxes accountable.

  “That is why I’m giving my July 2024 Squeal Award to the IRS for auditing honest hardworking Americans while ignoring the overdue and unpaid tax bills of its own tax collectors,” Ernst said in a July 29 statement.

  The Iowa Republican’s Squeal Awards spotlight waste and fraud in the federal bureaucracy.

  Tyler Durden
  Mon, 07/29/2024 – 19:40

• Putin Vows 'Mirror Measures' After US Plans Long-Range Missiles For Germany
  Putin Vows ‘Mirror Measures’ After US Plans Long-Range Missiles For Germany

  Russian President Vladimir Putin on Sunday issued another fresh warning in the wake of the United States weeks ago announcing it intends to deploy long-range missiles in Germany in violation of prior Cold War era missile treaties.

  He has vowed that Russia’s military will in turn place long-range missiles within striking distance of the West. “The flight time to targets on our territory of such missiles, which in the future may be equipped with nuclear warheads, will be about 10 minutes,” Putin warned, announcing his intent to ‘mirror’ any such US actions.

  “We will take mirror measures to deploy, taking into account the actions of the United States, its satellites in Europe and in other regions of the world,” he said, as translated in Reuters.

  

  Putin also of late frequently warned that a Cold War 2.0 showdown is emerging due to the threatening behavior of the West related to the Ukraine conflict: “This situation is reminiscent of the events of the Cold War related to the deployment of American medium–range Pershing missiles in Europe,” he said.

  These comments come at the same time that Russian warships have increased their port visits to Cuba, which has involved groups of Russian military vessels not far off of America’s east coast. 

  Just like in the original Cold War, Cuba could become a base of Russian missiles in the potential highly dangerous return of a Cuban missile crisis scenario. 

  In early July, the Pentagon had unveiled near and long-term plans to station additional missiles in Europe, to include SM-6, Tomahawk cruise missiles and developmental hypersonic weapons placed in Germany starting in 2026.

  As for Germany, which finds itself in the middle of these tit-for-tat threats and warnings, its foreign ministry has said it will not be intimidated by Moscow.

  “This type of missile… had already been developed and deployed long ago” by Russia, foreign ministry spokesman Sebastian Fischer told a press conference. “What we are now planning is a response to deter these weapons from being used against Germany or other targets,” he emphasized.

  The end of Cold War era treaty was negotiated precisely to avoid and reduce weapons build-up in Europe…

  

  In mid-July, Russian Ambassador to the US Anatoly Antonov stated on Telegram that the US moving missiles to Germany “increases the risks of a missile arms race,” given that it could unleash “uncontrolled escalation amid dangerously soaring Russia-NATO tensions.”

  Antonov further warned that this brings European states like Germany in the crosshairs and that Moscow’s patience is limited. The ambassador posed: “Doesn’t Germany understand that the emergence of American missile assets on German soil will lead to these facilities ending up in Russian crosshairs? This is not saber-rattling, it is the simple logic of a normal person.”

  Tyler Durden
  Mon, 07/29/2024 – 19:20

• Nebraska Supreme Court Rules In Favor Of Bill Restricting Abortion, Gender-Altering Procedures
  Nebraska Supreme Court Rules In Favor Of Bill Restricting Abortion, Gender-Altering Procedures

  Authored by Tom Ozimek via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

  The Nebraska Supreme Court has ruled that a law combining abortion restrictions with limits to gender-altering procedures for minors does not violate the state’s constitution, which requires bills to be confined to a single subject.

  

  The state’s high court acknowledged in a split decision on July 26 that abortion and gender-altering care are “distinct types of medical care” but that the law, LB574, does not violate Nebraska’s single-subject rule because both abortion and transgender procedures fall under the subject of medical care.

  The law, which imposes a ban on abortion beyond 12 weeks’ gestation and includes regulation of puberty blockers for minors and a ban on gender-altering surgeries for minors, was challenged by the American Civil Liberties Union (ACLU) representing Planned Parenthood in Nebraska.

  A district judge dismissed the lawsuit last August, and Planned Parenthood appealed, with the key premise being a violation of Article III Section 14 of the Nebraska Constitution, which requires single-subject bills.

  Lawmakers in the Nebraska Legislature had originally proposed separate bills, one banning abortion at about six weeks of pregnancy and another restricting transgender procedures for minors. However, the GOP-dominated Legislature added the abortion ban bill to the existing gender-altering care bill when the abortion ban failed to defeat a filibuster.

  In arguments before the Nebraska Supreme Court in March, an attorney for the state argued that both abortion and gender-altering measures fall under the subject of health care and so the law does not violate the constitutional single-subject restriction.

  By contrast, an attorney for Planned Parenthood argued that the bills deal with distinct subjects in violation of the constitution and that even the Legislature recognized this by introducing the abortion and transgender bills separately.

  The majority on the Nebraska Supreme Court disagreed with the arguments put forward by Planned Parenthood, finding that while abortion and gender-altering care are distinct types of medical care, they “certainly are encompassed within the regulation of permissible medical care.”

  “After our review of the facts of this case and our historical legal precedent wherein we have rarely found violations of Neb. Const. art. III, § 14, we find no merit to Planned Parenthood’s argument that L.B. 574 contains more than one subject in violation” of the state constitution, the high court’s majority opinion states.

  “Unlike our dissenting colleague, and particularly in the absence of a suggestion that the title given by the Legislature was misleading, we decline to reject the elected representatives’ articulation of a subject in the guise of a search for the perfect title.

  “We find Planned Parenthood’s assignments of error to be without merit. We affirm the decision of the district court.”

  Several justices dissented, with one arguing that the Legislature had the duty under the constitutional amendment to “compose legislation, including titling, which stated ‘one subject’; failure to so compose renders the bill unconstitutional. It is not the role of this court to rescue legislative bills.”

  The amended title of the combined LB574 was the Adopt the Let Them Grow Act and the Preborn Child Protection Act, and it provides for discipline under the Uniform Credentialing Act, with part of the dissenting judge’s objection focusing on the complexity of the title.

  Another line of dissent was that the bill contained “unrelated acts, i.e., abortion and gender-affirming care,” and that it included sections that don’t relate to the regulation of medical professionals, in violation of the single-subject constitutional constraint.

  Nebraska Gov. Jim Pillen issued a statement praising the ruling, saying he’s “grateful for the court’s thorough and well-reasoned opinion upholding these important protections for life and children in Nebraska.”

  “There was a dark moment last year when many feared that a victory for unborn babies was impossible and that the pro-life coalition might break apart,” he said. “I was honored to partner with faithful allies and leaders across the state to combine the abortion ban with protections for kids against irreversible sex change surgeries.”

  ACLU of Nebraska issued a statement calling the state Supreme Court’s decision to uphold the lower court ruling “devastating” and vowing to continue fighting for its position on the matter.

  “This is devastating news for impacted Nebraskans, but it won’t be the final word on abortion access or the rights of trans youth and their families in Nebraska. We’ll continue doing all we can to ensure that these decisions rest with Nebraskans, not the government,” it said.

  At least 25 states have adopted laws restricting or banning gender-altering procedures for transgender minors, with most of them facing lawsuits.

  Since the U.S. Supreme Court overturned Roe v. Wade in 2022 and handed the matter of regulating abortion access over to the states to determine, most Republican-controlled states have advanced legislation that restricts abortion or started enforcing existing laws that had been blocked.

  Tyler Durden
  Mon, 07/29/2024 – 19:00

• Elizabeth Warren Says Kamala Harris To Grant Citizenship To Illegal Immigrants
  Elizabeth Warren Says Kamala Harris To Grant Citizenship To Illegal Immigrants

  Sen. Elizabeth Warren (D-MA) says that Kamala Harris ‘will work with Congress’ to provide a ‘pathway to citizenship’ for tens of millions of illegal migrants.

  

  “I believe we need to create a pathway to citizenship,” Warren told CNN‘s Jake Tapper on State of the Union on Sunday. “All of that is part of what we need to do for comprehensive immigration reform. Kamala Harris will work with Congress and get that done.”

  Elizabeth Warren:

  “I believe we need to create a pathway to citizenship [for the 10 million+ illegal aliens let in by the Biden-Harris administration]. Kamala Harris will work with Congress and get that done.” pic.twitter.com/wfO9qzgO7w

  — Mike Lee (@BasedMikeLee) July 29, 2024

  When Tapper pressed her to defend the disastrous Biden-Harris administration border policies, Warren blamed Congress!

  “I don’t need to tell you voters overwhelmingly disapprove of how the Biden-Harris administration has handled the border,” said Tapper. “By giving the nomination to one of the leaders of the border effort, aren’t Democrats doubling down on one of your party’s biggest vulnerabilities?”

  To which Warren replied: “Border crossings now are lower than they were in the last year of the Trump administration. But recognize – and I know that Kamala Harris knows – this is a problem that ultimately has to be solved by Congress.“

  “We need the tools in order to have more resources at the border, to have more resources in the states and cities that are supporting migrants,” she continued.

  During a Saturday campaign rally in Minnesota, Trump running mate Sen. JD Vance (R-PA), Harris is trying to artificially swell Democrat voter rolls.

  “She wants to hand over control of our country to people who shouldn’t be here in the first place. And we cannot let her. And I have a message, a very simple message to the millions of illegal aliens who are in this country and shouldn’t be. If you are here, start packing your bags right now because Donald J. Trump is coming back into office,” he said.

  As I was saying, they’re importing voters https://t.co/zokSXYn78x

  — Elon Musk (@elonmusk) July 29, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Tyler Durden
  Mon, 07/29/2024 – 18:40

• Trump To Sit For Voluntary Interview With FBI On Assassination Investigation
  Trump To Sit For Voluntary Interview With FBI On Assassination Investigation

  Authored by Chase Smith via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

  Former President Donald Trump will sit for a voluntary interview with the FBI regarding the probe into the assassination attempt against him at a campaign rally earlier this month, according to a special agent on July 29.

  “We want to get his perspective on what he observed,” Kevin Rojek, the special agent in charge of the FBI’s Pittsburgh field office, said in a call with reporters on Monday.

  

  While the agency said it has not yet determined the motive of the would-be Trump assassin, his actions showed extensive planning ahead of the July 13 rally, Mr. Rojek told reporters.

  Mr. Rojek said interviews with victims are common practice during investigations.

  Several new details were revealed during the call, including that the 20-year-old suspect Thomas Matthew Crooks had made “significant efforts” to conceal his actions, according to CNN.

  Mr. Robek said that Mr. Crooks had conducted extensive online research, which showed that he had an interest in mass shootings, power plants, improvised explosive devices, and the attempted assassination of Slovakia’s prime minister earlier this year.

  The suspect was a reclusive individual primarily connected to his family, Mr. Rojek said. His parents have cooperated fully with the investigation, maintaining they were unaware of his plans.

  Mr. Rojek revealed in the call that Mr. Crooks used aliases and foreign-based encrypted email accounts to evade detection during the purchase of firearms and chemical precursors for explosive devices, according to CNN.

  The Associated Press contributed to this report.

  Tyler Durden
  Mon, 07/29/2024 – 18:20

• "This Case Is Going To Fail": Lawyer For Andrew Left Says He'd "Never" Accept Plea Deal
  “This Case Is Going To Fail”: Lawyer For Andrew Left Says He’d “Never” Accept Plea Deal

  Short seller Andrew Left surrendered in Los Angeles this afternoon, CNBC reported. 

  James Spertus, the lawyer representing Left who was previously a prosecutor in the L.A. U.S. Attorney’s Office, said Monday prosecutors had ordered Left to turn himself in that day. Initially, the U.S. Attorney’s Office planned to request a $10 million cash deposit for his bail.

  “Then they wanted several million dollars,” Spertus said. “It doesn’t make any sense. This should be Mr. Left released on his own recognizance. There’s no reason for any bond in this case.”

  Spertus argued Left isn’t a flight risk, or a danger to the community – and that there are no victims in the case. “There can’t be” a plea deal, he said, since it would require Left to tell a judge that what he did was unlawful, which he says it wasn’t. 

  “This case is going to fail for six independent reasons,” Spertus said. “You have no duty to the market to disclose your private trading intentions.”

  He said he thinks the DOJ “is trying to deter the activist short sellers, and they want to stop it.”

  

  Spertus told CNBC that, irrespective of Left’s conviction or acquittal, the case will deter short sellers from publicly sharing their research on companies they believe to be overvalued or whose stock prices are based on false information.

  “People will stop sharing their research with the market,” Spertus said. “It’s really bad for the financial markets to have a prosecution like this when the government agrees that the public statements were truthful.”

  As we wrote days ago, Federal prosecutors charged short seller Andrew Left with fraud last Friday, accusing him of making misleading statements about stocks to profit from price moves triggered by his reports, according to an exclusive by the Wall Street Journal. 

  Known for his firm Citron Research, which targets market “lemons,” Left gained fame for betting against Valeant Pharmaceuticals and for betting against GameStop during the meme stock craze, but he has seen less success in recent years.

  The DOJ wrote in a press release out Friday morning:

  According to the indictment, Andrew Left, 54, formerly of Beverly Hills, California, and now a resident of Boca Raton, Florida, was a securities analyst, trader, and frequent guest commentator on cable news channels such as CNBC, Fox Business, and Bloomberg Television. Left conducted business under the name “Citron Research” (Citron), an online moniker he created as a vehicle for publishing investment recommendations. Citron’s online presence included a website and a social media account on X, formerly known as Twitter.

  His media presence amplified his impact, leading followers to mimic his trades, prosecutors said:

  As alleged in the indictment, Left commented on publicly traded companies, asserting that the market incorrectly valued a company’s stock and advocating that the current price was too high or too low. Left’s recommendations often included an explicit or implicit representation about Citron’s trading position—which created the false pretense that Left’s economic incentives aligned with his public recommendation—and a “target price,” which Left represented as his valuation of the company’s stock. Sometimes, the commentary represented Left’s own work. Other times, Left disseminated the commentary of third parties as his own. The commentary routinely included sensationalized headlines and exaggerated language to maximize the reaction it would get from the stock market. As alleged, Left knowingly exploited his ability to move stock prices by targeting stocks popular with retail investors and posting recommendations on social media to manipulate the market and make fast, easy money.

  

  The Wall Street Journal reported that Left faces charges of securities fraud and lying to federal investigators, with accusations of manipulating at least 15 stocks to earn $16 million over five years. Prosecutors claim he exaggerated potential stock price declines, sometimes closing positions after minimal price drops.

  The press release continued: 

  As further alleged in the indictment, in the leadup to publication of Citron’s commentary, Left established long or short positions in the public company on which he was commenting in his trading accounts and prepared to quickly close those positions post-publication and take profits on the short-term price movement caused by his commentary. Left allegedly used his advance knowledge and control over the timing of a market-moving event to build his positions using inexpensive, short-dated options contracts that expired from the same day that he published his commentary to within five days. Left also allegedly submitted limit orders, often prior to publication of his commentary, to close his positions as soon as the company’s shares reached a certain price and at prices vastly different from the target prices that Left recommended to the public. While Left made false representations to the public to bolster his credibility, behind the scenes, Left allegedly took contrary trading positions to reap quick profits off the stocks he either promoted or pilloried through Citron.

  Left’s indictment concludes a three-year investigation into short sellers’ tactics. Prosecutors also allege Left concealed ties to hedge funds that traded on his early research, sharing profits with him. He denied these allegations to investigators in January 2021.

  Tyler Durden
  Mon, 07/29/2024 – 18:00

• NY Church Plans Supreme Court Appeal On Abortion Coverage Ruling
  NY Church Plans Supreme Court Appeal On Abortion Coverage Ruling

  Authored by Matthew Vadum via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

  A Roman Catholic diocese is appealing to the U.S. Supreme Court a New York appeals court ruling that requires religious charities to provide abortion coverage in their employee health insurance packages.

  

  Lori Windham, vice president and senior counsel at the Becket Fund for Religious Liberty, confirmed during an online news conference on July 25 that the Roman Catholic Diocese of Albany, New York, is preparing a petition for certiorari, or review, to be filed in coming weeks with the nation’s highest court. The Becket organization is part of the diocese’s legal team.

  The case is Roman Catholic Diocese of Albany v. Harris. Adrienne A. Harris is Superintendent of the New York Department of Financial Services, the agency that issued the health care insurance regulation that’s in dispute.

  The deadline for filing the petition for certiorari, or review, was originally Aug. 19, but on July 26, U.S. Supreme Court Justice Sonia Sotomayor extended the deadline to Sept. 18.

  The case has been working its way through the judicial system for years.

  In 2017, the New York Department of Financial Services issued a regulation requiring that employers fund abortions through their employee health insurance plans. The regulation exempted religious entities whose “purpose” is to inculcate religious values and who “employ” and “serve” primarily coreligionists. At the same time, the regulation forced religious organizations to cover abortions if they have a broader religious mission, such as serving the poor, or if they hire or serve people regardless of their faith.

  Various Roman Catholic dioceses, along with Anglican nuns and Lutheran and Baptist churches, sued.

  The Appellate Division of the Supreme Court of New York ruled in favor of the state in July 2020.

  But in November 2021, the U.S. Supreme Court summarily vacated that decision.

  The nation’s highest court sent the case back to the Appellate Division of the Supreme Court of New York for further consideration in light of the U.S. Supreme Court’s June 2021 ruling in Fulton v. Philadelphia.

  In the Fulton ruling, the U.S. Supreme Court unanimously ruled that a Roman Catholic charity in Pennsylvania may refuse on First Amendment religious freedom grounds to place children with same-sex couples.

  Writing for the court in that case, Chief Justice John Roberts said that Philadelphia had violated the other side’s First Amendment rights.

  The religious views of the diocese-affiliated Catholic Social Services “inform its work in this system,” Chief Justice Roberts wrote. The charity believes that “marriage is a sacred bond between a man and a woman.”

  “Because the agency understands the certification of prospective foster families to be an endorsement of their relationships, it will not certify unmarried couples—regardless of their sexual orientation—or same-sex married couples.”

  However, when the Appellate Division of the Supreme Court of New York reconsidered the case in June 2022, it ruled in favor of the state, finding that the Fulton ruling didn’t apply to the case and that the abortion insurance mandate did not violate the First Amendment.

  On May 21 of this year, the New York Court of Appeals affirmed the ruling of the Appellate Division.

  “Under Fulton, both the regulation itself and the criteria delineating a ‘religious employer’ for the purposes of the exemption are generally applicable and do not violate the Free Exercise Clause,” the court held.

  Ms. Windham said in recent years the U.S. Supreme Court has ruled in favor of employers “every single time” in three cases when they have objected to having to provide coverage for contraception or abortion medication for their employees.

  Despite that, New York decided to impose an abortion coverage mandate and “go all the way in the face of these three Supreme Court decisions.” First, the state enacted the insurance regulation and then the New York State Legislature decided to codify the regulation in state law, she said.

  The exemption from the mandate is narrow, Ms. Windham said.

  “If you primarily serve people of your own faith, then you can have an exception, but if you open your doors to all … [to] care for anyone regardless of your faith, if you’re out there offering a cup of soup to anyone who’s hungry, regardless of what their faith background is, then you lose your religious freedom protections, you lose your exemption under the statute, and you must also pay for abortions.”

  This means that a “religious test” is being imposed on religious groups that provide social services, she said.

  “All of these different groups are stuck with this abortion mandate, and all of them because of the work they do, and because of the good that they try to do within their communities, are being hit by this,” Ms. Windham said.

  The New York Department of Financial Services didn’t respond by publication time to a request by The Epoch Times for comment.

  Tyler Durden
  Mon, 07/29/2024 – 17:40

• "No Manual Action Taken": Google Responds To Assassination Autocomplete Controversy
  “No Manual Action Taken”: Google Responds To Assassination Autocomplete Controversy

  Update (1035ET):

  Google has responded to the uproar on X regarding potential election interference and information warfare against former President Donald Trump. 

  It appears that big tech and the Democrats might not want the American people to remember the assassination attempt on Trump, as it doesn’t appear on Google’s autocomplete search function, which is designed to help users find information faster and more accurately. 

  “We’ve got protections in place against Autocomplete predictions associated with political violence, which is normally a good thing. That said, we’re working on improvements to ensure our systems are more up to date. Regardless of what Autocomplete shows, you can always search for whatever you want to and we’ll provide access to the info available, including about this horrific incident,” Google wrote on X.

  Some context here: We’ve got protections in place against Autocomplete predictions associated with political violence, which is normally a good thing. That said, we’re working on improvements to ensure our systems are more up to date. Regardless of what Autocomplete shows, you…

  — Google Communications (@Google_Comms) July 28, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  O’rly… Everyone but Trump.

  

  Google also wrote, “That’s right — we have protections in place for topics like political violence, which typically work well. But we’re working on improvements to make our predictions more up to date. Regardless of what Autocomplete shows, people can always search for whatever they want to, and we provide access to the info available, including about this horrific incident.” 

  That’s right — we have protections in place for topics like political violence, which typically work well. But we’re working on improvements to make our predictions more up to date. Regardless of what Autocomplete shows, people can always search for whatever they want to, and we…

  — Google Communications (@Google_Comms) July 28, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  But that’s not the point, Google. The autocomplete algorithm can easily censor suggestions to discourage people from searching for topics that are not government-approved.

  Also, a Google spokesperson told The New York Post that no “manual action was taken on these predictions,” and its algos include “protections” against autocomplete predictions “associated with political violence.”

  Move along. Nothing to see here… 

  Tech, as a whole, is skewed. At least it used to be – we’ll see if/how things change this election cycle. pic.twitter.com/uMLf6jx3eC

  — The Rabbit Hole (@TheRabbitHole84) July 29, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Bingo. 

  The legacy media engages in the mass synchronization of emotion for political purposes.

  They are a de facto arm of the DNC.

  — Elon Musk (@elonmusk) July 29, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  *   *   *

  Information warfare may be underway as Google’s safeguards to ensure accurate and unbiased search results seem skewed. Users on X are reporting that the world’s most popular search engine is not showing autocomplete results for the attempted assassination of Donald Trump. These concerns are unsurprising, given that the big tech firm has been accused of election interference. 

  Google doesn’t want you to know this video exists. pic.twitter.com/5uvWznZiQe

  — Western Lensman (@WesternLensman) July 28, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  “Big Tech is trying to interfere in the election AGAIN to help Kamala Harris. We all know this is intentional election interference from Google. Truly despicable,” Donald Trump Jr. posted on X on Sunday morning. 

  Big Tech is trying to interfere in the election AGAIN to help Kamala Harris. We all know this is intentional election interference from Google. Truly despicable. https://t.co/gWDbFGaHI7

  — Donald Trump Jr. (@DonaldJTrumpJr) July 28, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Fox News sheds more color into Google’s autocomplete elimination of Trump from the list that appears when users type in ‘assassination attempt’:

  Google users searching for the attempted assassination of former President Trump were miffed when the desired results failed to populate on the search engine.

  Instead, the website autocomplete feature omitted the results of the July 13 shooting, drawing criticism from social media users who accused the Big Tech giant of trying to influence the presidential election.

  Screenshots from Google instead showed recommended search results of the failed assassination of Ronald Reagan and the assassination of Archduke Ferdinand, whose death sparked World War I, the shooting of Bob Marley and the failed attempt on former President Ford. -Fox News 

  As X user Autism Capital noted, “They really tried to memory hole the Trump assassination Jesus Christ. Information warfare and the revision of history is real.” 

  They really tried to memory hole the Trump assassination Jesus Christ. Information warfare and the revision of history is real. This isn’t fantasy or a novel. This is actually real. They hate you.

  — Autism Capital 🧩 (@AutismCapital) July 29, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  This is why trust in mega tech companies and MSM are at lows. 

  The censorship industrial complex is evil pic.twitter.com/qJeYP952G6

  — Mollie (@MZHemingway) July 28, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Even Musk was surprised. He asked, “Election interference?” 

  Wow, Google has a search ban on President Donald Trump!

  Election interference? pic.twitter.com/dJzgVAAFZA

  — Elon Musk (@elonmusk) July 29, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  James Lindsay shared an image of Facebook’s Meta AI, which appears to have safeguards in response about Trump’s assassination. 

  Woke AI lies about history. pic.twitter.com/zFOAZgYbLT

  — James Lindsay, anti-Communist (@ConceptualJames) July 28, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  However, X’s Grok bot was one of the few platforms that accurately responded to a search query about Trump’s assassination attempt. 

  It seems Grok is the only AI that actually gives information about the attempted ass*ss*nation of Trump and doesn’t try to memory hole it. pic.twitter.com/9T2XLdA0RU

  — Libs of TikTok (@libsoftiktok) July 28, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Sigh. 

  https://t.co/oJfJl0Wfvb pic.twitter.com/aDvhWpC5Ao

  — James Lindsay, anti-Communist (@ConceptualJames) July 29, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Meanwhile, a Google spokesperson told The New York Post that no “manual action was taken on these predictions,” and its algos include “protections” against autocomplete predictions “associated with political violence.”

  However, not everyone believes Google’s nonsense because the giant tech firm has been accused of election interference before.

  “Why is @Google suppressing the search about the Trump assassination attempt? These are all screenshots from this morning. Has there been a dramatic increase in Truman biographers in the last two weeks?” Senator Roger Marshall (R-KS) wrote on X. 

  He added: “I’ll be making an official inquiry into @google this week – I look forward to their response.”

  Why is @Google suppressing the search about the Trump assassination attempt? These are all screenshots from this morning. Has there been a dramatic increase in Truman biographers in the last two weeks?

  I’ll be making an official inquiry into @google this week – I look forward… pic.twitter.com/GD5SOvvcdX

  — Dr. Roger Marshall (@RogerMarshallMD) July 28, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Missouri Attorney General Andrew Bailey wrote on X, “On it.” 

  On it. https://t.co/edYIfqJv2y

  — Attorney General Andrew Bailey (@AGAndrewBailey) July 28, 2024

  https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  Earlier this year, Media Research Center founder and president Brent Bozell told Fox News, “No organization has more control over information than Google, and they have repeatedly used that power to manipulate the public to vote for the most left-wing candidates in every major election since 2008.” 

  Bozell said, “It’s un-American to attempt to manipulate elections this way. It’s time Congress acts to shut down this massive election interference scheme.” 

  “It’s time Congress acts to shut down this massive election interference scheme,” he continued. 

  Maybe it’s time for the tech billionaires who support Trump to introduce a rival search engine to Google.

  *   *   * 

  “Don’t be evil” is Google’s former motto… 

  

  Sigh. 

  Tyler Durden
  Mon, 07/29/2024 – 17:35